Class
Book ___
GopightN^___
CLOSyRIGHT DEPOSm
Ibeatb's ^Do^ern Xanguaoe Series
A SPANISH GRAMMAR
BY
E. C. HILLS AND J. D. M. FORD
COLORADO COLLEGE HARVARD UNIVERSITY
BOSTON, U.S.A.
D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS
1904
Two Oopies Ref.elv8<i
SEP 3 1904
. Oooyrrffht Entry
CLASS 0- xXc. Na
' COPYB
Copyright, 1904,
By D. C. Heath & Co.
'^
A
N^^
PREFACE
In this grammar the authors have aimed to present to
Enghsh-speaking students the more important facts of pro-
nunciation, inflection, and syntax in a clear and adequate
way. No attempt has been made to separate inflection and
syntax: it is hardly necessary to keep them asunder in an
elementary text-book. An abundance of exercise material
has been given, and the exercises have been made as prac-
tical as possible. The verb list is very full, and has been
provided with ample references, in the hope that it may
encourage drill upon one of the most difficult divisions of
elementary Spanish grammar.
To no slight degree drill work has been made a conscious
feature in the preparation of the composition material. It
will be seen, particularly in the later exercises of the book,
that the sentences of the English part are based on the words
and the turns of phrase occurring in the Spanish part pre-
ceding. On this account the student needs to resort but
rarely to the Vocabulary, when translating from English into
Spanish.
The grammar has been prepared with a view to facilitat-
ing the early reading of easy Spanish texts. Teachers do
not agree as to when reading should begin, and there can be
iv PREFACE
no fixed rule where conditions vary so greatly. But experi-
ence has led us to believe that in most college classes it is
best to begin reading almost immediately, and certainly not
later than the end of the fourth week, and to give to reading
at least one-half of the time thereafter during the school
year. Accordingly, the most essential elements of inflection
and syntax are set forth, in so far as it seemed practicable,
in the first few lessons, the inflection of verbs, for instance,
being taken up with the first lesson, and an explanation
of the use and meaning of each tense being given along
with the inflection.
In classes composed of advanced college students it may
be well to take an entire lesson at a time ; but in many col-
lege classes it will be best to divide each lesson into two
parts, and in high and preparatory school classes it may be
best to divide each lesson into three parts. The divisions
may be made as follows : —
I.
' First part, — inflection and syntax, and Spanish-English
exercises.
Second part, — English-Spanish exercises, and a review
of inflection and syntax.
First part. — inflection and syntax, with much oral
drill based thereon.
II. \ Second part, — Spanish-English exercises, and a review
of inflection and syntax.
Third part, — English-Spanish exercises.
In each lesson-period there should be as much oral drill as
time will permit.
PREFACE V
In some lessons there are rules, usually in small type, that
may well be omitted on going through the grammar the first
time. It has not been indicated definitely which rules should
be thus omitted, as it was thought best to leave it to the good
judgment of the individual teacher. As an illustration, in
Lesson XXIII the following could be omitted : §§ 109, c and
e\ III ; 115 ; and 116.
Teachers will differ as to whether it is best to take or omit
the English-Spanish exercises, on going through the grammar
the first time. Some successful teachers prefer to omit them
at first and to take them up with a review. By following this
method, the student is the sooner prepared for reading, and
he may have an abundance of written work by copying dic-
tated passages taken from the text that is read. After going
through the grammar once, the student may then review it,
taking at a lesson one or more of the English-Spanish
exercises.
We wish to acknowledge our indebtedness to Professor
E. S. Joynes, of South Carolina College, for reading the first
proofs and making many valuable suggestions ; and we can-
not sufficiently express our thanks to Mr. S. W. Clary, whose
kindly and helpful interest in our book has far transcended
mere business considerations.
E. C. H. AND J. D. M. F.
July, 1904.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Pronunciation i
LESSONS
I. Gender of- nouns. Indefinite article. Present indicative
of regular verbs 21
II. Plural of nouns. Definite article. Negation ... 24
III. Feminine and plural of adjectives. Present indicative of
radical-changing verbs of the first and second conju-
gations 28
IV. Present indicative of radical-changing verbs of the third
conjugation, and of tener and haber. Meaning and
use of tener and haber. Participles. Idioms . . 32
V. Personal subject-pronouns, listed. Possessive and de-
monstrative adjectives . ' . . . . . . .36
VI. Present indicative of ser and estar. Meaning of ser and
estar. Idioms 39
VII. Possessive case. Indirect object. Personal d. Inter-
rogative sentences ....... 42
VIII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of regular verbs. Use
of imperfect and preterite indicative .... 46
IX. Neuter article lo. Use of the definite article ... 49
X. Omission of the definite and indefinite articles. Preterite
of radical-changing verbs. Idioms .... 54
XI. Position of descriptive adjectives. Agreement of adjectives 58
XII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of tener ^ haber, ser, and
estar. Pluperfect and preterite perfect. Idioms . 62
XIII. Apocopation of adjectives. Numerals . . . .66
vii
Vlll
CONTENTS
LESSONS
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
XXI.
XXII.
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
XXVI.
XXVII.
XXVIII.
XXIX.
Future and conditional indicative of regular verbs.
Idioms. Present, imperfect, and future indicative to
denote an act or state that continues from one period
into another . . ......
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs. "Than." Tan
. . . conio .........
Adjectives used substantively. Plural number. Future
and conditional indicative of te7ier, haber, ser, and
estar. Future perfect. Future of probability
Imperative mood and present subjunctive. Present sub-
junctive to express command or entreaty
Personal pronouns
Tu and usted. Ello and lo. Imperative and present
subjunctive of tener, haber^ ser^ and estar. Perfect
subjunctive
Subjunctive in dependent clauses. Idioms
Prepositional forms of personal pronouns. Imperfect
subjunctive of regular and radical-changing verbs.
Use of imperfect subjunctive. Sequence of tenses
Personal pronoun-objects. Imperfect subjunctive oj
tener^ haber, ser, and eslar. Pluperfect subjunctive
Conditions " contrary to fact." Idioms
Se and si. Reflexive construction. Hypothetical sub-
junctive. Use of hypothetical subjunctive. Com
moner forms of conditional sentences ...
Possessive adjectives. Infinitive. Present participle
Past participle. Idioms
Possessive pronouns. Regular verbs. Orthographic
changes
Demonstratives. Radical-changing verbs, first class
Relative pronouns. Radical-changing verbs, second and
third classes . . . . .
Relative pronouns. Inceptive and -uir verbs
Interrogative pronouns. Ir and venir. Idioms
69
74
79
84
93
102
109
114
123
128
131
135
139
143
CONTENTS
IX
LESSONS
XXX.
XXXI.
XXXII.
XXXIII.
XXXIV.
Indefinite adjective pronouns. Negation. Querer and
poder. Idioms 147
Numerals. Hacer and decir. Idioms ....
Adverbs. Por and para. Nouns used adjectively.
Preposition a with verbs meaning " to take from,"
"to ask of," etc. Preposition retained before a
substantive clause. Idioms. Dar^ saber, oir, and ver.
Meaning of conocer and saber. Idioms
Conjunctions. Agreement of subject and verb. Word
order. Andar, caber, poner, asir, valer, salir, caer,
traer, and -ducir. Meaning of andar and ir. Idioms
Qualifying suffixes. Idioms ......
155
162
170
176
The Verb 184
Alphabetical List of Verbs 232
Vocabulary 245
Index 287
SPANISH GRAMMAR
PRONUNCIATION
THE ALPHABET
1. The Spanish, alphabet has thirty different signs :
a, b, c, ch, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 11, m, n, n, o, p, q, r, rr, s,
t, u, V, w, X, y, z.
The Castilian pronunciation of these is taken as the norm by
cultured speakers in Spain. It is therefore the pronunciation
adopted here. It is fair to state, however, that certain dialect
peculiarities (especially Andalusian) have passed over to the
former Spanish colonies in America and the Philippines and
now represent the pronunciation of the larger proportion of the
Spanish-speaking peoples. The signs k and w occur mainly
in words from foreign languages, and in them receive their
foreign values.
2. The following table is intended to convey a general idea
of the Spanish sounds. Hardly any of the EngHsh or other
equivalents mentioned are more than approximate ; yet, taken
in connection with the more exact description to be given
later, they should aid the student to acquire a good Spanish
pronunciation.
varies in quality between the a
oi far and that oi fat.
usually like German (bilabial)
w : try to pronounce English
if and z^ in one breath.
like ^, when the Spanish letter-
stands before a, o, u or sl
consonant, or is final.
like /// of t/itn, when the Span-
ish letter stands before e or i.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
ch
d
like ch of church.
usually approximate to the ///
of that.
varies between the vowel sound
in mate and that in met,
usually like English yC
usually like **' hard " g of gate^
gilty etc., when the Spanish
letter stands before a^ o^ u^
or a consonant.
like a strong English h pro-
duced far back in the mouth
(or like German ch of nach),
when the Spanish letter
stands before e or /.
usually silent. Before Me it may
be pronounced like a weak
English h.
varies between the vocalic
sound in 7?ieet and that in mit.
like the variety of Spanish g
occurring before e or /. The
j has this value everywhere.
like English k.
like English / pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
11
m
n
V
w
X
approximate to Hi of mitlion,
like English m.
like English n pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
approximate to ni of onion.
varies between the vocalic sound
in note and that in not.
like English jz>.
found only with a following m :
qu = English h.
like English r carefully uttered.
like English r much prolonged.
usually like English ss.
like English / pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
varies between the vocalic sound
in poo/ and that in pu/l.
the same in sound as Spanish d.
as in foreign languages.
usually like English x ; occa-
sionally like s.
like English y; occasionally
a vowel like Spanish i.
like English th of thin ; cf. Span-
ish c before e or i.
3. Vowels. — The vowel sounds of the speech are denoted
by a, e, i, o, u, and occasionally y (which is a vowel in the
conjunction y, ^ and/ as well as at the end of a word, as in
rey, 'king'). The vowel y has the same sound as Spanish i.
There is in English a tendency to convert all long vowels into
diphthongs ; that is, to add a final glide sound to the original
vowel. This tendency must be avoided in Spanish, where the
individual vowel denotes a simple vocalic sound.
a is approximate to English a in * far,' or to a sound between the a of
* far ' and that of * fat ' : it is never so " broad " as English a (open back
PRONUNCIATION 3
variety of the vowel) in * all ' nor so " flat " as a (close forward variety of
the vowel) in *fat.'
e is usually closed, but is moderately open in most closed syllables, or
when followed by 11 or rr, as in §1, ser, ten, este, ella, perro, etc., and
very open in the diphthong ue (here e approximates the French eu of
seul) .
i in stressed syllables is always closed; in unstressed syllables it approx-
imates English i in * pin/
Open 0 is the only one that is normal in Castilian, but it is not so open
as open Italian o. It is like French o in nord^ and not very different
from English o in * north.' It is more closed after labials (as in amor)
and in open syllables, but is never so closed as in French beau.
Stressed u is almost equal to English oo in *food' (not so rounded as
French otC) ; in a closed syllable it generally approximates to English oo
in *book.' The caution is to be given that Spanish u should never be
pronounced like the diphthongal u of English * tune ' or * cube.'
It would be futile to attempt to give here any more precise definition
of the vowel sounds than has been given. As has been intimated, each
vowel may have an open or a close value, similar to the open and close
qualities of the vowels in French and Italian. But in Spanish these
differences of quality are not of so marked importance as in those other
languages.
Moreover, Spanish vowels are not so " rounded " or " closed " as in
French, but more so than in English.
Quantity, — In Castilian there are no long vowels, properly speaking,
all being short or of medium length. English-speaking students must
avoid prolonging vowels, especially final vowels, as occurs so generally in
English when the vowel is stressed.
Elision, — Elision is common in spoken Spanish, where a vowel is
repeated, as in de k\ (pronounced d'el), la altura (I'altura), de este
(d'este), ya lo oigo (ya I'oigo).
4. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — The vowels may be
divided into two chief classes : the strong, a, e, o ; and the
weak, i (y) and u.
A qombination of two or three adjacent vowels may form a
single syllable in pronunciation ; such a combination constitutes
4 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a diphthong or a triphthong. The individual elements of a
diphthong or a triphthong are all to be pronounced, but more
rapidly than when they stand outside such a combination.
I. Diphthongs, — A Spanish diphthong, properly so called,
consists of a combination into a single syllable of one of the
strong vowels (a, e, o) with one of the weak vowels (i or y, u),
or of one (i) of the weak vowels with the other (u). The
stress, if the syllable be the accented one of the word, will fall
upon the strong vowel, or upon the second of the weak vowels
where the diphthong consists of two of these latter.
The possible combinations, governed by the relative position
of the vowels, are given in the following list. The vowel of the
diphthong that may bear the stress is the one in heavy type.
ai (ay), as in baile, dance (hay, there is,
there are).
au, as in flauta, flute.
ei (ey), as in reina, queen (rey, king).
eu, as in deuda, debt.
oi (Oy), as in oigo, I hear (doy, I give).
Ou, as in bou, fishing-boat (a rare
diphthong).
iu, as in triunfo, triujuph. .
ia, as in fiar, to trust.
ua, as in cuatro, four.
ie, as in sien, temple.
ue, as in fuerte, strong.
io, as in naciones, nations,
uo, as in cuota, quota.
ui, as in huir, to flee.
a. The vowels of these combinations are of approximately equal force
in a diphthong not bearing the accent of the word, as in bailar, * to
dance ' ; flautero, ' flute-player ' ; reinar, * to reign ' ; deudor, * debtor ' ;
oigamos, * let us hear ' ; triunfar, ' to triumph ' ; fiaremos, * we shall
trust,' etc.
b. Two adjacent strong vowels are normally regarded as forming two
distinct syllables, and not a diphthong ; as in faena, 'labor'; caoba, 'ma-
hogany'; loa, ' prologue ' ; reo, 'defendant'; leer, 'to read'; roer, 'to
gnaw,' etc. So also a combination of two weak vowels with the stress on
the first of them (as in fliiido, 'fluid'), or of a strong and a weak vowel
with the stress on the weak vowel (as in traido, * bought ' ; roido, ' gnawed ') ^
forms not a diphthong, but two separate syllables. In these two latter
PRONUNCIATION 5
cases the stress is usually indicated by a written accent. For metrical
purposes even these adjacent vowels may occasionally count as a single
syllable.
2. Triphthongs. — A triphthong consists of a combination
of a stressed strong vowel with two weak vowels, between which
it is always placed. There are but four possible combinations,
all of which end in i (written y in the final position or before
the vowel of another syllable) .
iai, as in fiais, you trust,
iei, as in lieis, may you bind.
uai (uay), as in fraguais, jj/^^/y^r^^ (g^^Y) "woe),
uei (uey), as in continu^is, inay you continue (buey, ox ; bueyes, oxen).
Note. — Spanish words cannot properly begin with a diphthong or a
triphthong. Where the normal development of a Latin word into Spanish
involved the passage of initial stressed ^ to e>, or of initial stressed o to
ue (for Spanish usually broke up the short Latin vowels into these diph-
thongs), the i was changed to y and an h was prefixed to the u : e.g. Latin
errat, Spanish j^rr^ (for ie^'ra), * he errs' (cf. Latin errdre, Spanish
errar^ * to err ') ; Latin ovum, Spanish huevo, * egg.'
5. Consonants.^ — For the sake of convenience the conso-
nants will be considered in several groups, determined, in
the main, by the kind of organs that produce the sounds in
question.
6. Labials and labio-dentals, that is, sounds produced by the
action, upon a current of air, of the lips alone or of the upper
teeth and the lower lip working together :
b, V, p, f, m, w (u in hiatus).
1 The Spanish names of the consonants are these : be, ce, che, de, efe, ge,
hache^jota, ka, ele, elle, erne, ene, ene^pe, cu, ere, erre, ese, te, ve (also called m de
corazun or u consonante), ve doble, equis,ye (also Q.2i}\^dt.y griegd),zeta. To the
consonants and vowels of these names are, of course, to be given their Spanish
value.
6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b and v, denote the same sound. This (a voiced^ bilabial
spirant) is ordinarily one not used in English, but is akin to
the German (bilabial) w. It is most easily pronounced by
seeking to utter the English b without closing the Hps entirely
(as is requisite in the true English /^), and permitting the air
to pass out constantly through a narrow slit between the lips ;
as in beber, ^ to drink ' ; vivir, ' to live.' The sound of the
English V (labio-dental) does not exist in Castilian.
After m or n (whether n be in the same word or at the end of the pre-
ceding word) both the b and the v receive a sound like that of the
English b (a voiced labial stop) ; as in tambien, * as well,' * also ' ; en-
vidia, * envy ' (often spelled einbidia in Old Spanish) ; con valor, * with
courage.' In such cases the n, even though retained in spelling, receives
the value of m. Moreover, the English sound of b is often given to both
b and V when initial and emphatic, as in j basta ! * enough ! ' j villano !
* villain ! ' Before t or s, a b approximates sometimes to p in sound {i.e.
becomes voiceless), as in subterraneo, * subterranean'; abstenerse, *to
abstain,' etc.; and in such cases it is often slighted entirely in popular
speech, as in substancia, obscuro,^ etc.
p. Approximately the EngUsh sound (a voiceless labial
stop) ; as in papel, * paper.'
f. Usually like the English / (a voiceless labio-dental spi-
rant) ; as in favor, * favor.'
Although the fact is denied by some observers, it is a question whether
the f does not occasionally have a voiceless value corresponding to the
voiced one of b and v {i.e. whether it is not a voiceless bilabial spirant).
m resembles the English m (a voiced labial nasal) ; as in
mimar, ^ to fondle.'
1 A voiced consonant is one in the production of which the vocal cords
vibrate, as may be ascertained by touching the throat in front of the larynx
during the utterance of b, d, g in English. There is no such vibration in the
production of the corresponding voiceless stop consonants, /, /, k.
2 The b of obscuro, substancia, etc., is commonly omitted in writing, and is
pronounced only by the pedantic.
PRONUNCIATION 7
w occurs usually in words from foreign languages, and in
them it has the foreign pronunciation : thus it has the English
sound in Wellington and the German sound in Wag7ier, Un-
accented u in hiatus, as in fuerte, ' strong,' or cuando, ' when,'
is, in Castihan pronunciation, only a semi- vowel ; that is, it is
partly a consonant, and as such it approximates in value to the
English w.
W is found in Spanish in a few proper names that are by no means
recent importations, but go back to the period of Visigothic dominion in
Spain ; Wamba, Witiza. In these it receives the usual value of Spanish
b and v : cf. the spellings Vamba and Vitiza sometimes found.
7. Dentals or Hngua-dentals, that is, sounds produced by
the united action of the tongue and the teeth upon a current
of air.
t, d, c (followed by e or i), z, 1, n. Along with these may be
considered 11, ii, and a variety of n occurring before " hard " c,
qu, or "hard" g, etc., although these 1 and n sounds are not
properly dentals.
t. Not unlike English /, except that it, as well as all the
Spanish dentals, is produced farther forward in the mouth than
the English dentals.
In Spanish the point of the tongue often touches the teeth when the t
and other dentals are produced, whereas in English the tongue is allowed
to touch the roof of the mouth somewhat back of the roots of the upper
teeth. There is, therefore, a very appreciable difference between the
sounds of t and n in English ten and those in Spanish ten, * hold.'
d. There is a marked difference between the sound of Eng-
lish d and that of Spanish d, for the latter, without being inter-
dental, somewhat resembles the th of EngUsh then. It may be
compared to an English d prolonged, and uttered with the
tongue touching the upper teeth. Ex., seda, nadie, todo.
8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
The English d (a voiced dental stop) is produced by the escape of air
from the mouth after the passage of the air has first been stopped by con-
tact between the tongue and the roof of the mouth back of the upper teeth.
The common Spanish sound (a voiced dental spirani) is produced during
contact between the tongue and the teeth, and the passage of the air is
not wholly cut off.
At the beginning of a breath-group, or after 1 or n, d has some of the
explosive effect of the English d, as in \ diablo ! * the deuce ! ^ ; espalda,
* shoulder'; andando, * walking.' At the end of a word the Castilian
sound of d resembles that of th in English thin (a voiceless dental spirant,
= 0), as in sed, * thirst'; while in Andalusia and Spanish America it
tends to disappear entirely, as in usted, * you,' which is usually pronounced
ustL Between vowels, d has disappeared largely in the pronunciation of
untrained speakers, and even those who pronounce carefully show a de-
cided tendency to suppress this intervocalic d, saying, for example, a77iao
for amado, * loved.' Moreover, both the written and the spoken language
have already accepted the loss of the intervocalic d of the reflexive imper-
ative second person plural : e.g. amaos, * love one another ' (for amad,
* love,' -f OS, * you,' *each other').
c followed by e or i :1 _, , , / .
hlhese nave a common value (a voice-
z m all positions. ) ^
less dental spirant) in Castilian speech, viz. a lisping sound
approximate to that of th in English thin^ as in cielo, ^ heaven ' ;
cena, * supper * ; zapato, ^ shoe.' Compare the value of final
Spanish d as already described. In Southern Spain and in
Spanish America and the Philippines, both c (e, i) and z are
pronounced like s.
According to some observers, a z followed by a voiced consonant {i.e,
such a consonant as n, 1, g, etc.) may itself become voiced and have
approximately the value of English th in then; as in portazgo, *toll';
hazlo, * do it '; gozne, * hinge.'
1 and n have usually values resembling the English values
(1, a voiced lateral fricative ; n, a voiced dental nasal), but they
are produced farther forward in the mouth than the English
sounds, so that there is a perceptible difference between the
PRONUNCIATION g
sounds of / and n in English /a7tce and those in its Spanish
equivalent lanza, as there is between the n of English ^en and
that of Spanish ten, ^hold.'
Final 1 in Spanish never has the semi-vocalic, " hollow " sound of final
English /. Compare English * dell ' with Spanish del.
When followed by the so-called *' hard " g or k sound, by g (before e
or i), by j, or by aspirated h (in hue-), as in vengo, *I come'; bianco,
* white'; banquero, * banker'; rengifero, * reindeer'; naranja, * orange'; un
hueso, * a bone,' n ceases to be dental, and acquires a value similar to that
of no- in English sin^ (i.e. a velar nasal value).
In some parts of Spain and of Spanish America the velar sound of final
n is common, as in pan (pronounced pang); but this pronunciation
should be avoided.
11 has a sound most nearly represented in English by that
of /// in million {i.e. it is a palatalized form of /, not a doubled
/, in sound).
It should be noted that while the English sound of Hi in ??iillion is that
of / followed by that of y, the Spanish sound is that of 1 infected by y
throughout the duration of its enunciation; i.e. it is 1 no longer dental,
but produced with the tongue in the y position, or, in other words, with
the middle of the tongue touching the hard palate. There is, therefore,
some difference between the pronunciation of Hi in ??zilHon and that of 11
in its Spanish equivalent mill6n. In some parts of Spain and Spanish
America, 11 has become iy in sound, e.g. caballo, * horse,' is pronounced
cabaiyo ; in the vulgar speech of certain regions, this y has disappeared
entirely when immediately following the stressed syllable, e.g. cabai-0 for
caballo, si-a for silla, etc. (but cabai-yito for caballito, si-yita for sillita,
etc.). This omission of y, while very common in some parts of Mexico,
the Argentine Republic, etc., is everywhere considered as vulgar.
n. This (a palatalized form of n) is similarly n produced
with the tongue in the y position. It is only approximately
rendered by the ni of onion or the ny of canyon : this latter
expresses in a measure, but yet not perfectly, the n of the Span-
ish original canon. The mark over the n is termed the tilde
lO SPANISH GRAMMAR
8. Gutturals,! i,e, throat sounds.
[
followed by a, o, or u ;
followed by any consonant except h ;
at the end of a word.
qu always followed by e or i.
k in foreign words.
f followed by a, o, or u :
[ followed by a consonant.
gu when followed by e or i.
The first three of these, ix, c in the positions indicated,
qu, and k, have approximately the sound of English k or
"hard" c (a voiceless guttural or palatal stop); as in carro,
^ cart ' ; conde, ' count ' ; culto, ^ cult ' ; creador, ' creator ' ; frac,
^ frock coat ' ; quedo, ' quiet ' ; quilla, ' keel ' ; kiosko, * kiosk ' ;
kilometro, ^ kilometre.'
The last two in the list, i.e. g before a, o, u, or a consonant,
and gu before e or i, have approximately the sound of the
" hard " English g (a voiced guttural or palatal stop) of got
ox get; as in galante, ^gallant'; golfo, 'gulf ; gutural, 'gut-
tural ' ; gruta, ' grotto ' ; guarda, ' guard ' ; guerrilla, ' guer-
rilla* ; guia, 'guide.'
In such cases as these last two (guerrilla, guia) the u is not itself pro-
nounced, but is merely a sign that the g has the " hard " sound before the
following e or i. Where the gu is followed by another vowel than these,
the g has its " hard " sound, but the u is now pronounced, having to some
degree the value of English w, as in guano, * guano.' Occasionally, even
before e or i, the u has a pronounceable value, but in such cases it must
be written with a diaeresis, as in antiguedad, * antiquity'; lingiiistico,
* linguistic'
1 Conventionally called gutturals, the k {i.e. Spanish qu) and " hard " g
sounds may be more properly termed palatal stops when they are followed by
e or i.
PRONUNCIATION 1 1
In the speech of many, perhaps most, Spaniards and Spanish Americans,
intervocalic " hard " g tends to become slightly spirant (^i,e. a prolonged g :
cf. b and d), except after n, as in hago, ' I make'; hormiga, * ant'; droga,
*drug,' etc. (but not in tengo, *I have,' etc.). In some parts of southern
Spain and Spanish America, g before u + vowel, and gu before i +
vowel, tend to disappear in the vulgar speech, as awa for agua, * water,'
siyendo for siguiendo, ' following,' etc.
9. Sibilants, i,e, hissing sounds. In Castilian s is the only
simple sign denoting a sibilant value, but there are two signs
denoting a compound sound into which an s value enters, viz.
ch and x.
s. The Spanish s commonly has the sharp hissing sound of
EngHsh initial s, as in ' sing/ and of English ss, as in ' hiss ' ;
thus, saco, ^sack'; sal, ^salt'; pasar, 'to pass'; notas, 'notes.'
Caution must be taken not to give to Spanish s between vowels the
sound of English z (a voiced sibilant) or of intervocalic English s as in
*rose.'
With regard to the s before a voiced consonant, usage varies. In some
parts of the Spanish-speaking world it remains unvoiced, in other parts it
becomes voiced, as in desde, 'since'; sesgo, * slope'; mismo, *same,'
* self,' etc.
In Andalusia and parts of Spanish America, s before a consonant, and
final in stressed syllables, becomes in the vulgar speech a soft aspirate,
approximating to, but softer than, German ch in ick. Ex. : las bonitas
muchachas becomes la' bonita' muchachas ; el compas, el compa*; dos
ninos, do' ninos, etc. This pronunciation is rather widespread.
ch, a compound sound (a voiceless dental plus a voiceless
palatal sibilant), not much unlike the ch of ' church.' It is made
up of the sound of the Spanish dental t, followed by a sound
similar to that of English sh ; as in mucho, ^ much.'
X, a compound sound (a voiceless guttural stop plus a
voiceless sibilant s), usually quite Hke the x of English ^six'
or ^ lax.' It consists of a k sound followed by the sibilant s
12 SPANISH GRAMMAR
sound, as in axioma, ^ axiom.' When the x stands before a con-
sonant, the Spanish Academy insists that it be still pronounced
as ks ; but the generality of speakers pronounce it there as s
simply; thus, in extranjero/ stranger ' ; sexto, ' sixth.* In such
cases there is a manifest tendency to write s instead of x, i,e,
estranjero, sesto, etc.
Between vowels x is, according to certain authorities, sometimes pro-
nounced like English gs {i,e» as a voiced guttural stop plus a sibilant), so
that the x of Spanish examen may resemble the x of its English equiva-
lent * examination.'
10. Aspirates, or well-breathed sounds.
j in all positions.
g followed by e or i.
h followed by ue.
j in all positions and g before e or i denote the one sound
(a voiceless guttural or velar spirant) which is most closely
approximated in English by pronouncing the h of ^ hot ' very
far back in the mouth and in a very forcible way ; as in jamas,
^ never ' ; gente, ^ people ' ; girar, ' to turn.' The sound of the
German ch in nach^ dock, etc., affords a still closer parallel to
the Spanish sound.
In the production of this Spanish sound, the velar (or soft) palate
vibrates against the back of the tongue, which is withdrawn as much as
possible into the rear of the mouth. The Castilian sound is a harsh one,
but it is softened in Andalusia and Spanish America to the value of a strong
English h or the German ch of ich,
h followed by the diphthong ue may have a slight aspiration,
equal to that of a weak utterance of EngHsh >^ ; as in huerto,
* garden ' ; hueso, ^ bone.* By many speakers, however, this h
is not pronounced at all, and, in fact, for the generality of
Castilians h never denotes a sound.
PRONUNCIATION 1 3
11. Tongue-trilled Consonants : r and rr. These denote a
sound not very dissimilar to that of the Enghsh r carefully pro-
nounced, and, upon occasion, having a well-prolonged trill.
The sound is produced by making the forward part of the tongue vibrate
against the palate, just back of the upper teeth. The point of contact be-
tween the tongue and the palate is a little farther forward than in English.
Final r in Spanish never has the semivocalic glide sound of final Eng-
lish r. Compare English ther{e) and Spanish ser.
There are two varieties of the sound :
a. A weaker variety, i.e. one not very forcibly trilled, and
yet fully as strong as a carefully pronounced English r. This
is denoted in Spanish by a single r between vowels, as in
pero, ' but,' and by a single r after the consonants b, c, d, f, g,
p, t ; as in bravo, ^ wild ' ; cristiano, ^ Christian ' ; ladron, * rob-
ber'; fresno, ^ash tree'; g^rano, ^ grain'; prado, ^meadow';
trato, ^behavior.' The final r, as in amar, ^ to love,' may be
of this variety^ or it may be a trifle more prolonged in its trill.
In any event it is to be carefully uttered, and not slurred as it
so often is in English ; cf. ^ paper,' ' mother,' etc., in which the
r sound is barely discernible.
b, A reenforced variety, i,e, one with a well-prolonged trill.
It is not a doubled consonant, but rather a prolongation of the
other variety. It is denoted by rr between vowels, as in perro,
^ dog ' ; parra, ' vine ' (cf. pero, ' but,' and para, ' for,' in which
the weaker variety occurs), and by single r at the beginning
of a word, as in roble, ' oak,' or within a word after n or s, as
in enredo, ' entanglement ' ; Israelita, ^ Israelite.' Within a word,
after b or 1 marking the end of a prefix, this same strong r oc-
curs, as in subrayar, ' to underline ' (cf. raya, ' line,' with initial
strong r), and malrotar, ^to squander.' The fact that initial
single r denotes the same reenforced variety as intervocalic rr
is shown by words like rota, ' rout,' and its derivative derrota.
14 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. Spirant y (a voiced palatal spirant or fricative), not
much unlike English y in sound, except that its enunciation
is somewhat stronger, as in ya, ^ already ' ; yo, ^ I ' ; yeso,
' gypsum.' ^
Unaccented i in hiatus is often but a semivowel ; i\e,, it is
partly consonantal and tends to become y. This is especially
so in the case of the diphthong ie : cf. yerra, ' he errs,' for ierra,
and the spelHng yerba, ^ herb,' and hierba, side by side. As
already stated, y is a vowel in the conjunction y, ^ and ' ; it is a
vowel (or at least a semivowel) wherever it occurs in a diph-
thong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ^ hogshead ' ; buey, ^ ox.'
13. Non-phonetic Orthography.
(i) Spanish orthography is not consistently phonetic, though
much more so than English orthography. According to the
rules of the Spanish Academy, only two letters are ever mute,
viz. h and u, as follows :
h is regularly silent, as in hado, ^ fate ' ; hilo, ^ thread ' ; but
before ue it may be shghtly aspirated, as in hueso, ^ bone.* In
the digraph ch it has no individual value.
u is silent, or at least has no individual value, in the combi-
nation qu. It is also not pronounced in the combination gu
followed by e or i; it is there but a sign of ^' hard " g: cf.
sigue, *he follows/ siguio, ^he followed,' with sigo, ^I follow,'
siga,^ let me follow.' If it happen that the u of the combination
gue or gui is actually pronounced, a diaeresis is written over
it ; e.g, argiiir, ^ to argue ' ; averigiie, ' 1 ascertained ' (cf. the
infinitive averiguar, in which the u is of course pronounced).
(2) In addition to h and u, there are several letters that, in certain
combinations, are usually not pronounced in colloquial Spanish, viz. :
i The tongue should not touch the palate, in the production of Spanish y,
in such a way as really to stop the breath. In dialect pronunciation it does so,
and the result is a sound similar to that of English 7.
PRONUNCIATION 1 5
b is mute in obscuro, obsceno, obstdculo^ obstinarse, etc. ; abstracciSuj
abstener, etc. ; substancia, subscribir, etc. That is, b before s is usually
silent; if it is pronounced, it is as p, e.g. absoluto > apsoluto (cf. bt > pt,
as in subterrdneo) , In written Spanish also this b is commonly omitted in
obscuroj substancia, etc.
C, before a consonant, is often mute, as in diccionario, leccidn, afectisimo,
etc. Students are advised to pronounce this c.
d is often silent in the final position, and between vowels when it follows
stressed a, 0, or u (less often after e or i), as in Madrid, amado, 7tada, todo,
toda, d menudo, etc. ; also before s, as in adscribir, adstringir, etc. The
student should pronounce medial d. As to final d, see § 7.
g, before a consonant, is often mute, as in digno, 7?iagndniiJio, etc. The
student had best pronounce this g.
j is mute only in reloj (occasionally written reld'). In the plural, relojes,
j is pronounced.
n is usually mute in the prefix trans- before a consonant, as in tran-
scribir, transmitir, etc.; but it is often pronounced in transatldntico, etc.
p is mute usually in stibscripcion, septi?)io, Septievtbre, psetido, psicologia,
etc. (2.^., before t or s, p is usually silent). In written Spanish also this p
is commonly omitted in septi?no, Septiembre, etc.
t is usually mute in istmo.
(3) Some other non-phonetic peculiarities of Spanish orthography are
as follows :
b = V. See § 6.
n, before p or v, has the sound of m, as in un perro, U7t vaso, etc. ; cf. § 7.
X, before a consonant, is usually pronounced as s, as in extremo, expo-
sicidn, etc. Regularly between vowels, and often before C, X = cs, as in
exito, excelente, etc. (but in exacto, x = s).
Note. — The Spanish Academy has attempted of late years to put back
into Spanish many sounds that had disappeared or changed, as the x of
experiencia in place of s, the b of obscuro, the p of septimo, the d of adscri-
bir, the t of istmo, etc., and the Academy has asked the Spanish people to
use these restored sounds in their speech. To some extent the sounds have
been adopted, and they may be heard on the stage and in the pulpit, but
practically never in colloquial Spanish (except x, which is making headway),
and in some cases their use would be considered ridiculously pedantic.
Similarly, the Academy asks that b and v be pronounced like English or
1 6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
French b and ?7, but no Spaniard can do this unless he knows English
or French. The coming together of b and v into one sound is very old
in Spain, for even in the days of ancient Rome a Latin wit said that for
the Spaniards vivere was the same as bibere.
14. Doubled letters. — The general statement may be made
that the doubling of consonants is not favored in Spanish. LI
and rr do not represent double sounds, and they figure in the
alphabet as distinct signs, for 11 denotes a peculiar quality of
1 (the palatalized 1), and rr denotes a prolongation of the
simple r sound. Two consonants, however, may be written
double, viz. c and n, and in the refined pronunciation of Castile
each of the two c's or two n's is carefully articulated : as in
accidente, ^ accident ' (of which the first c sounds like k^ and
the second like th of thui), and in innoble, ' ignoble.'
No other consonant is doubled in writing or pronunciation in modern
Spanish. To the frequent mm of English (mostly in words of Latin and
Romance origin) there corresponds the Spanish nm; as in inmenso, ^ im-
mense.' Of the vowels only e occurs doubled with any frequency, and
each e is pronounced in a distinct syllable : as in creer, * to believe' ; leer,
* to read.' Some of the double e's of early. Spanish are now reduced to
single e : cf. ser, *to be,' for original seer; ver, * to see,' for original veer.
We occasionally find a and 0 doubled and pronounced accordingly; the
first a or 0 usually belongs to a prefix, as in contraalmirante, *rear
admiral'; cooperar, * to cooperate.'
ACCENTUATION
15. For certain words it is necessary to indicate the place
for the stress of the voice by a written accent put over the vowel
of the syllable bearing it ; for many others this written accent is
not necessary, as, in accordance with rules laid down by the
Spanish Academy, the mere aspect of the word clearly indi-
cates the place of the chief stress* The leading rules are
these :
PRONUNCIATION 1 7
(i) Words ending in a vowel, or in the consonants n or s,
normally stress the second last syllable (the penult), and they
require no written accent, as in :
carta, letter. respiro, / breathe. hablan, they speak.
palabra, mord, sollozo, sob. cartas, letters.
dulce, sweet. tribu, tribe. naciones, nations.
hijo, son.
Words ending in n or s normally receive the same treatment as those
ending in a vowel, because the n or s is often but a sign of pluralization,
or of verbal inflection, and is added to forms that regularly end in a vowel:
cf. carta, * letter,' and cartas, * letters'; ama, 'he loves,' and aman,
*they love.'
(2) Words ending in a consonant except n or s (cf. Rule I)
normally stress the last syllable and need no written accent, as :
verdad, truth. igual, equal.
For accentual purposes, final y (which can never be accented itself)
may be regarded as a consonant : hence, bocoy, 'hogshead'; mf/y, 'very.'
(3) All words stressed on a syllable preceding the second
last, and all not obeying the two rules already given, must have
a written accent over the vowel bearing the stress ; e.g. :
ejercito, army. mama, fuatmna. interes, interest.
higado, liver. rubi, ruby. lapiz, lead pencil.
telegrafo, telegraph. nacion, natioyi. marmol, inarble.
sofa, sofa. amais, you love (cf. amas, thou lovest).
As a result of the addition of the plural sign -es (but not -s), a word
not bearing a written accent in the singular may now have to take one;
as in cr/men, 'crime ' (cf. Rule i), pi. crimenes (cf. Rule 3); or, again,
an accent written in the singular may not need to be written in the plural,
as in naci6n (cf. Rule 3), pi. naciones (cf. Rule i). It is the general
principle that the addition of the plural sign should not affect the place
of the accent. This principle is violated in the case of caracter, * char-
acter' (cf. Rule 3), and regimen, 'regime' (cf. Rule 3), which in the
plural shift their accent one syllable farther on: caracteres (Rule i) and
regimenes (Rule 3).
1 8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
16. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — If the stressed syllable
of the word have a diphthong, this will bear the accent (written
or unwritten) on the strong vowel, if there be one, or on the
second of two weak vowels, as in :
baile, dance. buitre, vulture. argiiis, you argue.
amais, you love. huis, you flee.
xA triphthong will always bear the accent (written or unwritten)
on the strong vowel :
averigudis, you ascertain. fieis, may you trust,
17. Monosyllables normally take no written accent :
huis, you flee, plan, plajt. /
ruin, vile. fieis, may you trust.
Occasionally, however, a written accent is found in monosyllables (or
words usually monosyllabic ; cf. aun), and then its use is ( i ) that of a diacritic,
intended to distinguish the sense or the particular employment of words
written and pronounced identically alike, as in c6niO, ' how,' as distinguished
from como, * as ' ; in mi, * me,' as distinguished from mi, * my * ; in este,
'this one' (a pronoun), as distinguished from este, * this ' (an adjective);
in qui6n, 'who' (an interrogative), as distinguished from quien, 'who'
(a relative), etc.; or (2), merely arbitrary, as u, 'or,' and a, 'at,' and e,
'and' (which do not need the accent to distinguish them from ha, 'he
has,' and he, ' I have.') The analogy of other preterites explains the use
of the accent in certain monosyllabic preterites, such as fui, ' I was,'
fu§, * he was.' When aun, ' still,' * yet,' is emphatic, it may become a
dissyllable, and will then stress its u, which (cf. § 15, Rule 3) must bear a
written accent, aun.
18. Compound words, felt as such, normally stress the proper
syllable of each component part, especially in the case of ad-
verbs in -mente (the Spanish equivalent of English adverbial -ly)
and of compound numerals ; and any accent that had to be
written in one of the parts standing alone will continue to be
written in the compound :
facilmente, easily (cf. facil, easy). decimoseptimo, seventeenth (cf. d6-
dulcemente, sweetly. cimo, tenths and septimo, seventh).
PRONUNCIATION 1 9
The addition of a pronoun-object to a verb form will not lead to the
omission of any written accent that the verb form had when standing alone,
as in amele, *I loved him' (cf. ame, *I loved'), even though without the
writing of the accent its position is clear enough.
On the other hand, a verb form which does not normally need a written
accent will take one if, by the addition of one or more object-pronouns, its
stress is placed more than two syllables from the end of its whole combi-
nation, thus : diciendo, * saying,' but diciendomelo, * saying it to me ' ;
haga, *do' (polite imperative), but hagalo, *do it.'
Note. — The accent of the stressed syllable of a word is as strong as in
English ; but the unstressed vowels must not be slurred in pronunciation,
as they so often are in English.
SYLLABIFICATION
19. A single consonantal character and the digraphs ch, 11,
rr (these three being inseparable combinations) are, in a syl-
labic division, passed over to the following vowel ; so, also, are
most combinations of a consonant with an ensuing 1 or r (ex-
cept rl, si, tl, and sr, which are separable) :
la-bio, lip, cu-brir, to cover. cu.3.-tro, /our.
]B.-C3LfPony. su-frir, to suffer. no-ble, noble.
la-do, side. re-pri-mir, to repress, mo-fle-tu-do, chubby-cheeked^
ne-xo, knot. la-cre, sealing-wax, su-plir, to supply,
mu-cho, much, ma-gro, meagre, te-cla, key.
bu-llir, to boil, ma-dre, mother, si-glo, century,
pa-rra, vine,
Cf. mer-lu-za, cod, es-la-bon, link.
At-lan-ti-co, Atlantic, Is-ra-e-li-ta, Israelite,
20. With the exception of the inseparable combinations
mentioned in the foregoing rule, two consonants between vowels
are so divided that one remains with the preceding, the other
goes to the following vowel :
ap-to, fit. mas-til, mast. in-no-ble, ignoble^ etc.
cor-te, court, ac-ci-den-te, accident.
20 ^ SPANISH GRAMMAR
Where the combination of consonants between vowels is of
more than two, there is a tendency to pass over to the second
vowel only a single consonant or one of the inseparable com-
binations mentioned in § 19 ; e,g. :
par-che, plaster. cons-truc-cion, construction,
pers-pi-ca-cia, perspicacity,
21. Prefixes felt as .such are usually kept intact, contrary to
the rule in § 19 ; e.g, :
des-es-pe-rar, to despair (cf. esperar, to hope).
sub-le-var-se, to rebel (cf. levar, to raise). _
ab-ro-ga-cion, abrogation (cf. rogar, to ask).
PUNCTUATION
22. The only notable points here are the double use of
question marks and exclamation points, which not only end
their clause, but in an inverted form usually precede it (e.g.
<iC6mo esta Vd.? ^ How are you?' iQue hermosa mujer!
^ What a beautiful woman ! ') and the frequency of suspension
points ( . . • ) in narrative or dramatic style.
CAPITALIZATION
23. Capitals are less commonly used in Spanish than in
English. Unless they begin a sentence, a Hne of verse, or a
quotation, proper adjectives and the pronoun yo, ^I,' are not
capitalized. National or other locative adjectives used as nouns
may take a capital when they denote persons (although usage
varies in this respect) : when they denote languages, they
usually take no capital, even though used substantively : los
Franceses {or franceses) toWan frances^ ^Frenchmen speak
French.'
LESSON I
24. Gender of Nouns. — All Spanish nouns are either
masculine or feminine ; thus, grammatically speaking,
drbol, 'tree,' is mascuhne, and casa, * house,' is feminine.
(i) Names of male beings are masculine, and names of
female beings are feminine, as in English.
(2) Names of things are masculine if they end in 0, and
feminine if they end in a. If they end otherwise, it is usually
best to learn the gender of each noun separately.
libro, 7fiasc.y book. pluma, fein.^ pen.
plato, 7nasc.j plate. taza, fem.^ cup.
a. But mano, *hand,' is feminine; and dia, 'day,' mapa, * map,' and
several words of Greek origin ending in -ta and -ma are masculine. ^
25. Many names of living beings have both a masculine and
a feminine form, the latter ending in a.
hijo, son. hija, daughter.
hermano, brother. hermana, sister.
gato, cat (male). gata, cat (female).
monje, monk. monja, nun.
hu^sped, guest (male). huespeda, guest (female).
26. Indefinite Article. — The Spanish indefinite article
is un before a masculine, una before a feminine noun. .
un hombre, a man. una mujer, a woman.
un arbol, a tree. una casa, a house.
'^E.g.: cometa, comet; planeta, planet; poema, poem; programa, pro-
gramme; sistema, system.
21
22
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. In Spanish the indefinite article must be repeated before each noun
to which it refers : una casa y un jardin, ' a house and garden.'
b. Una sometimes loses its a before a noun beginning with stressed a
or ha : un alma, ' a soul.' In Spain the full form is more usual.
27. The Regular Conjugations. — Spanish verbs are
conveniently divided, according to the infinitive endings
-ar, -er, and -ir, into three conjugations :
I II III
hablar^ (to) speak. temer, (to) fear. vivir, (to) live.
Like these are inflected all regular verbswith corre-
sponding infinitive endings.
28. Indicative. Present Tense.
Hablar
Singular
1. hablo, I speak, I do speak, I am speaking.
2. hablas, you speak, do speak, are speaking.
3. habla, he, she, or it speaks, does speak, is speaking.
Plural
1. hablamos, we speak, do speak, are speaking.
2. hablais, you speak, do speak, are speaking.
3. hablan, they speak, do speak, are speaking.
Temer
Singular Plural
1. temo, I fear, do fear, etc, i. tememos
2. temes 2. temeis
3. teme 3. temen
Vivir
Singular Plural
1. vivo, I live, do live, ^/<:. I. vivimos
2. vives 2. vivis
3. vive 3. viven
LESSON I
23
Note that the Spanish verb may be expressed in English in three
different ways ; thus, hablo means * I speak,' * I ,do speak,' or * I am
speaking.' Note also that the subject-pronouns may be omitted in
Spanish though required in English.
Vocabulary
a, to.
amigO, -a, m. and f., friend.
Antonio, w., Anthony.
aprender, (to) learn.
bien, well.'
carta, /, letter.
comprar, (to) buy.
con, with.
en, in.
escribir, (to) write.
Espanol, -ola, m, and f,, Spaniard,
Spanish woman.
espanol, -ola, Spanish.
estudi^r, (to) study.
ingles, -esa, English.
Juan, ;;/., John.
lapiz, w., pencil.
leer, (to) read.
mal, badly.
Maria,/, Mary.
mucho, much, a-great-deaL
muy, very.
papel, m.y paper.
papel secante, w., blotting paper.
para, in-order-to.
pero, but.
pluma,/, pen.
pOCO, little.
Senor, -ora, w. a^idf., Sir, Madam.
si, yes.
sobre, w., envelope.
tambien, also.
tinta,/, ink.
trabajar, (to) work.
Exercise I
A, I. Escribimos mucho. 2. Compro papel y un lapiz.
3. Juan compra tinta y una pluma. 4. Maria compra papel
secante y un sobre. 5. ^j Escribes ^ una carta? 6. Si, senor ;
escribo una carta a un amigo. 7. Maria escribe tambien
una carta k una amiga. 8. Escribo a un Espaiiol. 9. Maria
escribe a una Espafiola. 10. Escribo con una pluma.
II. Maria escribe con un lapiz. 12. jiLeeis mucho?
13. Si, sen ora ; leemos mucho para aprender. 14. ^Aprendeis
mucho? 15. Si, senora ; aprendemos a leer y a escribir.
16. Leem.js y escribimos mucho para aprender a leer y a
escribi^. 17. Juan, (i estudias mucho ? 18. Si, senor; estudio
24 SPANISH GRAMMAR
mucho y aprendo bien. 19. Antonio estudia poco y aprende
mal. 20. Juan trabaja mucho, pero Antonio trabaja muy poco..
21. Hablo ingles y espaiioL^ 22. Aprendemos a leer en
espanol.
B. I. I speak Spanish. ^ 2. Do you speak English? 3. Yes,
sir; I speak English and Spanish. 4. Mary reads and writes in
Enghsh. 5. John and Anthony read and write in Spanish.
6. Are you (//.) writing a letter? 7. Yes, sir; we are writing a
letter to a Spaniard. 8. Are you {sifig?) buying a pen and ink?
9. Yes, madam ; I am buying a pen, ink, and paper. 10. Mary
is buying an envelope and blotting paper. 11. We are writing
a letter to a friend {fern.). 12. Do you (//.) write much?
13. We write very little. 14. John writes with a pencil and
Anthony writes with a pen. 15. We study much in-order-to
learn to^ speak Spanish. 16. Mary studies much and learns well.
17. Anthony studies little and learns badly. 18. We work a great
deal in-order-to learn. 19. We learn much and we work much.
1 Note that an inverted interrogation mark is. required in Spanish at the
beginning of an interrogative sentence or clause. 2 Note that a Spanish
name of a language, like a Spanish proper adjective, is written with a small
initial letter. 3 Use a, see J 120 (i), a.
LESSON II
29. Plural of Nouns. — The plural of nouns is formed
by adding s or es to the singular.
(i) If the noun ends in an unstressed vowel or diphthong,
s is added.
amigo, friend. amigos, friends.
rosa, rose. rosas, roses. \
labio, lip. labios, lips.
especie, species, sg, especies, species,^/.
LESSON II
25
(2) If the noun ends in a consonant or in a stressed vowel
or diphthong, es is added.-^
flor, flower.
mes, month.
rubi, ruby.
baja, pashaw.
rey, king.
flores, flowers.
meses, months.
rubies, rubies.
bajaes, pashaws.
reyes, kings.
Exceptions : —
a. Nouns ending in stressed -e add s to form the plural: pie, 'foot';
pies, *feet.'
b. Nouns ending in unstressed -es or -is have the same form in the plural
as in the singular : lunes, * Monday ' ; lunes, * Mondays ' ; but Ingles, * Eng-
lishman'; Ingleses, * Englishmen ' ; crisis, * crisis'; crisis, * crises.'
Family names, especially those ending in z, generally remain unchanged
in the plural; e.g.^ Gonzalez, los Gonzalez.
c. Some nouns ending in stressed 0 or u take either -s or -es. Papa
and mama add -s. There are a few other exceptions, which are best
learned by observation.
Note. — Final z is changed to c before es : cruz, * cross'; cruces,
* crosses '; VOZ, * voice ' ; voces, * voices.'
30. Definite Article. — In Spanish the definite article
changes its form according to the gender and number
of the noun it modifies.
Singular
Plural
Masaclifte :
el
los
Feminine :
la (el)
las
el padre, the father.
la madre, the mother.
el plato, the plate.
la taza, the cup.
los padres, the fathers.
las madres, the mothers.
los platos, the plates.
las tazas, the cups.
1 In pluralizing, y final may be regarded as a consonant : it is really the last
element of a stressed diphthong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ' hogshead,' and
buey, ' ox.'
26
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. When el is preceded by de, * of,' or by a, * to,' the preposition and
the article are contracted into one word ; de and el become del, and a
and el become al : del padre, ' of the father '; al padre, * to the father.'
b. El is used instead of the form la before a feminine singular noun
beginning with stressed a or ha : el agua, ' water ' ; el hacha, ' the axe.'
Note. — Observe that el is not used before a feminine noun beginning
with a or ha unless the first syllable is stressed, nor is it used before a
feminine adjective : la hacienda, * the estate ' ; la alta casa, ' the high house.'
negative
by
31. Negation. — A sentence is made
placing no, *not,' before the verb.
no hablo, I do not speak, or I am not speaking.
no vendo flores, I do not sell flowers, or I am not selling flowers.
32. The Enghsh auxihary * do,' which is usual in
negative or interrogative constructions, is ordinarily not
translated into Spanish. Compare hablas, ' you speak ' ;
no hablas, ^ you do not speak ' ; ^hablas? ' do you speak 1 '
In past tenses, 'did' is similarly not expressed in Spanish.
Vocabulary
agua, /, water.
aritmetica, /, arithmetic.
beber, (to) drink.
cafe, w., coffee.
comer, (to) eat.
con, with.
desear, (to) desire, wish.
ensenar, (to) teach.
escuela,/, school.
Espana,/, Spain.
frances, -esa, French.
geografia,/, geography.
gramatica, /, grammar.
huevo, w., ^gg.
Inglaterra, /, England.
leche,/, milk.
libro, ;;/., book.
llevar, (to) carry, take./
maestro, w., teacher.
mantequilla,/, butter. _
manzana,/, apple.
ni, nor.
no, no, not.
6, or.
Pablo, m,, Paul.
pan, ;;2., bread.
pizarra,/, slate. y
por, for, through':^
que, what {interrog.).
tambien, also.
te, in., tea.
viajar, (to) travel.
LESSON II 27
Exercise II
A, I. Compramos lapices y plumas. 2. ^lEscribis las
cartas con las plumas 6 con los lapices? 3. Escribimos las
cartas con pluma y tinta. 4. Juan y Maria compran libros
para leer. 5. Leen los libros para aprender a leer. 6. Deseo
aprender a hablar espafiol. 7. Deseamos viajar por Espaiia.
8. Hablamos ingles y aprendemos a leer y a escribir en
ingles. 9. En Espafia hablan espanol : en Inglaterra hablan
ingles.- 10. Deseamos aprender a hablar espanol para viajar
por Espaiia. 11. Llevo a la^ escuela libros, una pizarra^ y
un lapiz. ±2. Leo en los libros. 13. Escribo en la pizarra
con el lapiz. 14. Tambien llevamos a la escuela pan y
mantequilla, huevos, y manzanas. 15. Comemos el pan, la
mantequilla, los huevos, y las manzanas. 16. Bebemos agua
6 leche : no bebemos cafe ni te. 17. ^Que estudiais en la^
escuela? 18. Estudiamos ingles, aritmetica, gramatica, y geo-
grafia. 19. Pablo, ^inoestudias eP espai^ol? 20. Si, senor;
el maestro enseiia eP espaiiol y eP frances. 21. Aprendo eP
espanol, pero no aprendo eP frances. 22. Juan aprende tam-
bien eP frances.
B. I. Do you (^/.) wish to travel in Spain? 2. We wish to
speak Spanish in-order-to travel through Spain. 3. A Spanish
woman is learning to speak English. 4. She is learning to speak
English in-order-to travel through England. 5. Do they speak
English or Spanish in Spain? 6. They speak English in England
and Spanish in Spain. 7. We take bread, butter, and apples to
school.^ 8. We eat the bread, the butter, and the apples, and
drilnk milk. 9. Paul and John take bread and eggs to school.^
ID. They eat the bread and the eggs, and drink water. 11. I
drink milk. 12. We do not drink tea nor coffee. 13. Do
you (//.) not take books to school?^ 14. Yes, sir; we take
books, slates, and pencils. 15. Do you {pL) write letters at
school? 2 16. No, sir; we do not write letters. 17. We read
in the books in order to learn to^ read. 18. We write on the
28 SPANISH GRAMMAR
slates in order to learn to ^ write. 19. What do you {sing.) study
at school?-^ 20. I study Spanish, grammar, arithmetic, and geog-
raphy.
1 Do not translate. 2 Use the definite article. For the article before the
name of a language, cf. ^ 55 (4). ^ Use d.
LESSON III
33. Feminine of Adjectives. — Many Spanish adjec-
tives change their form according as the noun they
modify is mascuUne or feminine, singular or plural.
(i) Adjectives ending in -0 in the masculine singular change
-0 to -a to form the feminine.
un caballo bianco, a white horse. una vaca blanca, a white cow.
(2) But adjectives ending in a consonant or in a vowel other
than -0 have the same form for the masculine and the feminine.
un libro azul, a blue book.
una casa azul, a blue house.
un hombre cortes, a polite man.
una mujer cortes, a polite woman.
un muchacho inteligente, an intelligent boy.
una muchacha inteligente, an intelligent girl.
Exceptions : —
a. Adjectives of nationality ending in a consonant add -a to form the
feminine: ingles, inglesa, * English'; espanol, espanola, ' Spanish.'
b. Adjectives ending in -an, -on, or -or (except comparatives in -or) add
-a to form the feminine : holgazan, holgazana, * lazy '; burl6n, burlona,
* roguish'; traidor, traidora, * treacherous.'
Note that in Spanish a qualifying adjective usually follows its
noun.
LESSON III
29
34. Plural of Adjectives. — The plural of adjectives,
like the plural of nouns, is formed by adding -s or -es to
the singular.
bianco, blancos, blanca, blancas, white. azules, blue.
35. Radical-changing e and o Verbs.^ — Many verbs
of the first and second conjugations, while otherwise
regular, change the radical vowels e and 0 to ie and ue
respectively, whenever the stress falls on the stem.
The following will serve as models of these verbs.
Present Indicative.
Temblar, (to) tremble
Singular
Plural
I. tiemblo
I.
temblamos
2. tiemblas
2.
temblais
3. tiembla
Singular
Perder.
, (to) lose
3.
tiemblan
Plural
1. pierdo
2. pierdes
3. pierde
Singular
Contar,
(to) count
I.
2.
3.
perdemos
perdeis
pierden
Plural
I. cuento
I.
contamos
2. cuentas
2.
contais
3. cuenta
Singular
Volver,
(to) return
3-
cuentan
Plural
I. vuelvo
I.
volvemos
2. vuelves
2.
volv§is
3. vuelve
3.
vuelven
Note that e becomes ie and 0 becomes ue only in the singular and the
third person plural, since the stress falls on the inflectional endings of the
first and second persons plural, and not on the stem.
1 All verbs that make these phonetic changes will be found in the list of
verbs, § 271.
30
SPANISH GRAMMAR
amarillo, -a, yellow.
corregir,! (to) correct.
correr, (to) run.
cuando, when.
Cuba,/, Cuba.
Cubano, -a, m. a^id f., Cuban.
deber, ought (to), should.
demasiado, too, too much.
dif icil, difficult.
discipulo, -a, m. and f., pupil.
ejercicio, w., exercise.
encarnado, -a, (bright) red.
error, w., mistake.
escuchar, (to) listen. [States.
Estados Unidos, 711. pL, United
facil, easy.
frio, m., cold.
grande, large.
hallar, (to) find.
Vocabulary-
Ingles,
esa, 7?i. and f.. Englishman,
Englishwoman.
Juana,/, Jane.
jugar,! (to) play.
leccion, f,, lesson.
Mejicano, -a, m. andf., Mexican.
Mejico, 771., Mexico.
negro, -a, black. ,
Norte-Americano, -a, w. and /,
American, North-American.
palabra,/, word.
pequeno, -a, small.
preferir,! (to) prefer.
querer,2 (to) wish.
rojo, -a, red.
tanto, so much, as much.
tiempo, w., time.
verde, green.
vivir, (to) live.
Exercise III
A, I. Tiemblo de {with) frio. 2. No estudio : pierdo
el^ tiempo. 3. Deseo estudiar : no deseo perder eP tiempo.
4. Cuento los libros, las plumas y los lapices. 5. Vivo en
una casa blanca. 6. Juan y Maria viven en una casa ama-
rilla. 7. Escribes mucho con el lapiz azul. 8. Juan
escribe con tinta negra en papel bianco. 9. Los Espanoles,
los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos hablan espanol. 10. Quiero
aprender eP espanol para viajar por Espana, Mejico, y Cuba.
11. I^os Ingleses y los Norte- Americanos^ hablan ingles.
12. Los Espanoles, los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos aprenden el
1 Radical-changing.
2 Radical-changing in the present tenses, and also otherwise irregular in
some other tenses.
LESSON III 31
ingles para viajar por Inglaterra y por los Estados Unidos.
13. Los Ingleses y los Norte-Americanos viajan mucho, pero
los Espanoles no viajan tanto. 14. Los discipulos de la
escuela no quieren estudiar mucho. 15. Prefieren correr y
jugar. 16. Corren y juegan^ mucho, pero trabajan poco.
17. El discipulo no debe estudiar demasiado. 18. Debe
correr y jugar, pero debe tambien estudiar. 19. El disci-
pulo corre y juega mucho : la discipula corre y juega poco.
20. Cuando no trabajo, juego ; y cuando no juego, trabajo.
21. No quiero estudiar demasiado, ni jugar demasiado.
22. Juana escribe con una pluma pequeiia, y Juan escribe con
una pluma grande. 23. Estudia mucho, pero no aprende
la leccion. 24. Cuando el maestro de espanol habla, escu-
chamos para aprender las palabras. 25. Escribimos los
ejercicios con tinta negra, pero el maestro corrige los errores
con tinta encarnada (roja).
B, I. I am buying a white horse and a black cow. 2. An
intelligent boy learns to count. 3. I study a-great-deal, but
John loses his ^ time. 4. I live in a w^hite house and John lives
in a green house. 5. Are you trembling with the cold ? 6. I
am not trembling with the cold. 7. I buy English books and
Spanish books in-order-to read in English and Spanish. 8. Paul
does not study Spanish ; •'' he studies French.^ 9. The teachers
teach French^ and Spanish.^ 10. I prefer Spanish ^ to French.^
II. Do they speak French or Spanish in Cuba? 12. They speak
Spanish in Cuba and Mexico. 13. The Cubans and the Mexi-
cans do not speak English. 14. They wish to learn EngHsh ^ in
order to travel through the United States. 15. The Americans
wish to learn Spanish^ in order to travel through Cuba and Mexico.
16. The pupils run and play too much, but they do not study too
much. 17. The pupil {fe?n.) should not study too much.
18. We nm and play and study a great deal, but not too much.
19. The Spanish books are yellow, blue, or red. 20. Are you
(sing.) writing the Spanish exercises?^ 21. Yes, sir; and I find
the Spanish exercises very difficult. 22. I find the Spanish
32
SPANISH GRAMMAR
lessons very easy. 23.
writes Spanish "^ well.'^
The. Spanish teacher speaks, reads, and
24. He does not speak, read, and ^ write
English well.
1 Translate ' my.' 2 Do not translate. ^ In Spanish-America the people
of the United States are usually called Norte- Americanos (" North Americans ").
4 In jugar the u becomes ue when stressed. 5 Use the definite article.
^ Say : ' the exercises in Spanish.' "> Translate : ' well the Spanish.' 8 Use
nl (lit. ' nor').
LESSON IV
36. Radical-changing Verbs. — Some verbs of the
third conjugation change the radical e to ie or to i, and
0 to ue, whenever the stress falls on the stem.^ The fol-
lowing will serve as models of these verbs : —
Present Indicative.
Sentir,
(to)
feel
Singular
Plural
1. siento
2. sientes
3. siente
1. sentimos
2. sentis
3. sienten
Pedir, (to) ask for
Singular
Plural
1. pido
2. pides
3- Pide
1. pedimos
2. pedis
3. piden
Singular
Dormir,
(to) sleep
Plural
1. duermo
2. duermes
3. duerme
•
1. dormimos
2. dormis
3. duermen
1 Cf. \\
. 229,
230,
LESSON IV 33
37. The Irregular Verbs Tener and Haber.
Indicative. Present Tense.
Tener, (to) have
Singular
Plural
I. tengo
I. tenemos
2. tienes
2. tenets
3. tiene
3. tienen
Haber,
(to)
have
Singular
Plural
I. he
I. hemos
2. has
2. habeis
3. ha (hay)
3. han
38. Meaning and Use of Tener and Haber.
(i) Tener means ' (to) have ' in the sense of ^ (to) possess * ;
tengo una pluma, ' I have a pen.' It also retains its Latin
sense of ' (to) hold.'
(2) Haber is chiefly used as an auxiliary verb with past
participles in the formation of compound tenses. Thus, the
perfect tense of hablar is :
' I have spoken,' or ' I have been speaking.'
Singular Plural
1. he hablado i. hemos hablado
2. has hablado 2. habeis hablado
3. ha hablado 3. han hablado
a. Hay ^ means * there is,' or * there are'; hay uno, * there is one';
hay dos, ' there are two.' The form hay is used only as an impersonal
, verb; ha, not hay, is used in the formation of compound tenses, as,
ha habido, 'there has been,' and in temporal expressions, as mucho
tiempo ha, ' there is much time,' i.e. Mong ago.'
1 Composed of ha, ' it has,' and y, an old adverb meaning ' there.' Cf.
French il y a.
34
SPANISH GRAMMAR
39. Participles.
hablar : hablando, speaking,
temer : temiendo, fearing,
vivir : viviendo, living,
tener: teniendo, having,
haber : habiendo, having.
hablado, spoken.
temido, feared.
vivido, lived.
tenido, had. ^
habido, had.
40. Idiomatic Expressions.
(i) tengo que, I have to, or I must.
tengo que estudiar mucho, I have to (or * I must ') study a great deal.
he de, I am to, I shall.i
ha de partir manana, he is to leave tomorrow.
(2) tengo calor, I am warm. tengo cuidado, I am careful.
tengo mucho calor, I am very tengo los ojos cansados, my eyes
warm.
tengo frio, I am cold.
tengo hambre, I am hungry.
tengo sed, I am thirsty.
tengo sueiio, I am sleepy.
tengo miedo, I am afraid.
tengo prisa, 1 am in a hurry.
are tired.
tengo rota la pierna derecha, my
right leg is broken.
tengo diez anos, I am ten years
old (lit., ' I have ten years ').
^cuantos anos tienes? how old
are you ?
Note that these expressions refer to the physical or mental condition
of a person or animal, not of inanimate objects; e.g. 'the water is hot,'
el agua esta (from estar, ' to be ') caliente, and not el agua tiene calor.
Vocabulary
empezar,2 (to) begin.
lengua,/, language.
muchos, -as, many.
todavla, still, yet.
vender, (to) sell.
Exercise IV
A. I. Tengo papel bianco y tinta negra. 2. Tenemos
plumas grandes y plumas pequeiias. 3. Tengo una lecci6n
facil, pero tengo un ejercicio dificil. 4. i Habeis comprado
1 Or, ' I hJk to,' not indicating external obligation. 2 Radical-changing.
LESSON IV 35
un libro espanol? 5. Si, senor ;^^^s comprado un libro
espafiol y un libro ingles. 6. T^^o libros espanoles muy
dificiles y libros ingleses muy faciles. 7. ^Hallas la lengua
espanola muy dificil? 8. Para aprender a hablar espanol,
he tenido que estudiar mucho. 9.- Hemos aprendido
muchas palabras espanolas, pero no hablamos bien : hablamos
muy mal. 10. Juan tiene un libro azul, y Maria tiene un
libro amarillo. 11. Hemos comprado muchos libros, y
tenemos libros azules, amarillos, rojos, verdes, y negros ; pero
no tenemos libros blancos. 12. He vendido los libros
ingleses, pero tengo todavia los libros espanoles. 13. (iHas
escrito^ la carta con tinta negra 6 con tinta encarnada (roja)?
14. He escrito la carta con tinta negra : no tengo tinta encar-
nada (roja). 15. Cuando tengo suefio, no puedo^ estudiar
mucho : quiero dormir. 16. Juan duerme mucho, y trabaja
poco. 17. No puedo leer ni escribir cuando tengo los ojos
cansados. 18. Maria ha leido mucho, pero no tiene los
ojos cansados. 19. Antonio tiene diez afios, y no puede
leer bien. 20. Tengo hambre y sed, y quiero comer y
beber. No tengo calor : tengo mucho frio.
^. I. I am cold, hungry, and thirsty. 2. I must eat and drink.
3. When I have eaten, I am sleepy. 4. You are ten years old,
and you cannot speak Spanish. 5. I must learn Spanish ^ in
order to read Spanish books. 6. I have sold the English books,
and I have bought Spanish books. 7. I have white paper and
blue paper. 8. I have bought black ink and red ink. 9. I write
on the white paper and on the blue paper with black ink. 10. The
teacher must correct the mistakes with red ink. 11. We have
found the English exercises very easy. 12. Do you (//.) find
the Spanish lessons'* difficult? 13. When the teacher speaks
Spanish, I listen in order to learn to speak well. 14. Have you
(//.) written a Spanish letter^ to the Spaniard? 15. Yes; and
we have written an English letter to the Englishwoman. 16. John
writes with a large pen, but Mary writes with a small pen. 17.
36 SPANISH GRAMMAR
study, much ; but, when I am sleepy, I cannot study. i8. I do not
eat a great deal ; but, when I am hungry, I wish to eat. 19. When
I am thirsty, I drink water or milk ; I do not drink tea or ^ coffee.
1 Escrito, past part, of escribir. 2 Poder, 'to be able,' 'can,' is irregular
(cf. 5 243) . 3 Use def. art. ^ gay : ' lessons of Spanish.' & Say : ' letter
in Spanish.' 6 Use ni.
LESSON V
41. Personal Subject-Pronouns.
yo, I. nosotros (-as), we.
tii, you. vosotros (-as), you.
ella, she. ) „ ^ x 1
el, he. ; ellos(-as),they.
a. Note that nosotros, vosotros, and ellos have the feminine forms
nosotras, vosotras, and ellas.
b. El and ella also mean ' it ' when referring to things ; thus, speaking
of arbol, ' it ' is el ; and speaking of casa, * it ' is ella.
c. In Spanish, the subject-pronouns may usually be omitted.
42. listed. — In familiar address, ^ you ' is tu (sing.), or
vosotros (pi.) ; but in formal address, ^ you ' is usted (sing.),
or ustedes (pi.), used with the third person singular or plural
of the verb. Thus, in the singular, ^ you have ' is tii tienes, or
usted tiene, and in the plural it is vosotros teneis, or ustedes
tienen. Usted is usually not omitted, although with a series of
verbs of address it occurs only at intervals.
43. Possessive Adjectives.
mi (mis), my. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our.
tu (tus), your. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), youi.
su (sus), his, her, its, your. su (sus), their, your.
a, * Your ' : tu corresponds to tu, vuestro to vosotros (-as), and su to
usted or ustedes.
LESSON V 37
44. Demonstrative Adjectives.
este (-a, -os, -as), this, these (near to or appertaining to the speaker
or writer)^ this ... of mine, etc.
ese (-a, -os, -as), that, those {near to or appertaining to the person
addressed), that . . . of yours, etc.
aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that, those (remote from the person ad-
dressed)., that . . . of his, hers, etc., or that . . . over there.
a. The possessive and demonstrative adjectives are usually repeated
before each noun to which they refer.
mi padre y mi madre, my father and mother.
este hombre y esta mujer, this man and woman.
alto, -a, high.
ancho, -a, wide.
bola,/, marble.
cantar, (to) sing.
dibujo, w., drawing.
edificio, w., building,
flor,/, flower.
hablador, -ora, talkative.
musica,/, music.
Vocabulary
nino, -a, w. and f.^ (small) boy, girl ;
child.
pelota, /, ball.
piano, m.y piano.
tio, -a, m. and f.^ uncle, aunt.
tocar, (to) play (a musical instru-
ment).
tomar, (to) take.
ventana,/, window.
Exercise V
A, I. Yo estudio, pero tii pierdes el tiempo. 2. Usted
ciienta bien, pero yo cuento mal. 3. Juan y Maria hallan la
lecci6n dificil. 4. EUos no estudian mucho. 5. Nosotros
estudiamos mucho y hallamos la lecci6n facil. 6. Esta mu-
chacha grande corre y juega mucho. 7. Ella no desea
estudiar sus Hbros. 8. Pero la nina pequena estudia mucho
y aprende bien. 9. Usted escribe sus cartas con tinta encar-
nada. 10. Maria y yo escribimos nuestras cartas con tinta
negra. 1 1 . Este hombre lee mucho y tiene los ojos cansados.
38 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. Aquella mujer habladora habla mucho. 13. Este hom-
bre inteligente habla poco. 14. Mi padre y mi madre ban
vivido en Espana. 15. Ellos hablan espanol, ingles y
frances. 16. Yo tomo lecciones de dibujo; tu tomas lec-
ciones de musica. 17. 6I toca bien el piano, pero ella
toca mal. 18. Este edificio tiene ventanas altas y anchas.
19. Hay muchas flores en aquellas ventanas. 20. ^iQuieres
tu tambien jugar a la pelota? 21. No; yo prefiero jugar a
las bolas. 22. Mi padre y mis tios ban estudiado en esta
escuela. 23. Esta mujer canta muy bien, pero aquella mujer
canta mal.
B. I. You (/<2;;^.,j-/;^^.^) run and play, but he studies. 2. You
(^form.^ sing.) talk much, but she talks little. 3. You {fam.j pi.)
study much, and we study little. 4. You {form.j pi.) count well,
and they count badly. 5. This large man does not wish to play
with that small boy. 6. This large woman plays with that small
girl. 7. I lose my books, but you {fam., sing.) do not lose your
books. 8. I write with black ink, but you {for77t. sing.) write
with red ink. 9. We speak Spanish well, but you {fa7n.,pl.)
speak badly. 10. We buy Spanish books, but you {for7n.^ pi.)
buy French books. 1 1 . My father and mother are cold and hungry.
12. When my father has eaten, he is sleepy. 13. When I am
thirsty, I drink milk. 14. When you {fa7n.^ sing.) are thirsty,
you drink water. 15. This boy plays much, but that boy plays
little. 16. This book (of mine) is English ; that book (of yours)
is French; and that book (of his) is Spanish. 17. We {7nasc.)
play ball, and you {fe7n. pl.^ fa77i.) play the piano. 18. These
boys prefer to play marbles. 19. He wishes to take drawing
lessons, but she prefers to take music lessons.
1 ' Familiar singular ' refers to the 2d pers. sing., with or without til ; ' familiar
plural' to the 2d pers. pi, with or without vosotros {^-as) ; 'formal singular* to
usted, and ' formal plural ' to ustedes.
LESSON VI 39
LESSON VI
45. The Irregular Verbs Ser and Estar.
(i) Indicative. Present Tense :
Ser, (to) be
Singular
Plural
I. soy
I. somos
2. eres
2. sois
3. es
Singular
Estar, (to)
be
3. son
Plural
1. estoy
2. estas
1. estamos
2. estais
3. esta
3. estan
2) Participles:
ser : siendo,
, being,
sido, been.
estar : estando, being,
estado, been.
46. Meaning of Ser and Estar.
Ser and estar both mean ^ (to) be.' Ser expresses what is
inherent or permanent ; estar, what is accidental or temporary.
Ex. la taza es de oro, the cup is of gold.
la taza esta limpia, the cup is clean,
soy viejo y estoy enfermo, I am old and ill.
es cojo, he is (permanently) lame.
hoy esta cojo, he is lame today,
soy libre, I am free (a free man) .
ahora estoy libre, I am now free (disengaged) .
a. Estar is also used to express position, whether temporary or per-
manent : mi hermano esta en Mejico, * my brother is in Mexico '; Mejico
esta en la America del Norte, * Mexico is in North America.'
b. Ser alone permits of a predicate noutt Wiih. it: su hermano es
soldado, * his brother is a soldier.'
40
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Some adjectives have one meaning when used with ser and another
meaning when used with estar.
ser bueno, (to) be good.
ser malo, (to) be bad.
ser cansado, (to) be tiresome.
47. Idiomatic Expressions.
(i) yo soy,i it is I.
tu eres, it is you.
§1 es, it is he. ")
ella es, it is she. /
usted es, it is you.
(2) es lastima, it is a pity.
es mentira, it is false.
es verdad or es cierto, it is true.
estar bueno, (to) be well.
estar malo, (to) be ill.
estar cansado, (to) be tired.
nosotros (-as) somos, it is we.
vosotros (-as) sois, it is you.
ellos (-as) son, it is they.
ustedes son, it is you.
I no es verdad ? isn't it so ?
esta bien, it is well, all right.
i esta bueno ! good !
Vocabulary
k causa de, on account of.
activo, -a, active.
alegre, merry, joyous.
amable, kind, lovable.
c6mo, how {interrog?),
decidido, -a, decided, determined.
dejar, (to) leave.
d6nde, where {interrog^,
fresco, -a, fresh.
frio, -a, cold.
fuerte, strong.
gracias,///., thanks, thank you.
haragan, -ana, lazy.
hermano, -a, m, andf.^ brother, sister
hijo, -a, m, and f.^ son, daughter.
invalido, -a, disabled.
invierno, m., winter.
joven, young.
Julio, 7n.^ Julius.
1 Or, soy yo,
llamar, (to) call.
llegar, (to) arrive.
otro, -a, other, another.
pais, m,, country.
perezoso, -a, idle.
porque, because.
preguntar, (to) ask.
pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive.
puesto, m,y situation, position.
que, that.
qui§n, who (interrog.),
regalo, m.^ present, gift.
severo, -a, severe.
si, if.
siempre, always.
soldado, m., soldier.
triste, sad.
viento, ;;?., wind.
viudo, -a, m. and f.^ widower, widow.
eres tii, etc.
LESSON VI 41
Exercise VI
A. I. Los maestros de nuestra escuela son muy severos.
2. Los discipulos de la escuela no son malos. 3. El maestro
pregunta si tu estas enfermo. 4. Nosotros estudiamos
mucho, pero vosotras sois muy perezosas. 5. El es viejo,
y esta hoy muy triste. Ella es joven y esta alegre. 6. Este
soldado es viejo y esta invalido. 7. Esta sefiora es viuda
y esta enferma. 8. Este pan no esta fresco : es demasiado
viejo. 9. Estoy decidido a dejar el puesto que tengo.
10. Julio es muy fuerte y activo, y quiere jugar con los otros
ninos. 11. Antonio es haragan, y dice^ siempre que esta
cansado. 12. Esa nina es haragana, habladora, y pre-
guntona. 13. ^C6mo^ esta usted? Estoy muy bien ;
gracias. 14. ^iQuien^ es? Soy yo. ^Quien llama? Es ella.
15. Tengo un regalo para su hijo, senora. Gracias ; es usted ^
muy amable. 16. ^iD6nde ha estado usted, seiior, este in-
vierno? He estado en Madrid. 17. <iC6mo estan ustedes,
senoras? Estamos buenas, senor. 18. Somos americanas, y
en nuestro pais estamos siempre buenas. 19. Pero en Madrid
hemos estado muy malas a causa del viento frio.
B. I. Are you {sing., form.) sad today? 2. Yes, sir; I am
sad because I am old. 3. He is old and (is) ill. 4. She is young
and (is) well. 5. This water is very cold. 6. I am very cold and
very hungry. 7. He is lazy, but he says that he is tired. 8. Are
you {fern, sing., fain.) well today? No, I am ill. 9. How
are your {pi., fain.) friends? They are very well, thank you.
10. Who has arrived ? It ^ is my father. 11. Who is it*? It* is
he. 12. We are English, but we are always ill in England.
13. You {pi., form.) work much and play little, do you not?^
14. Those windows are high and wide. 15. This building is large
and high. 16. I am a pupil {masc.) in ^ this school, and you {sing.,
fain.) are a pupil {fern.) in^ that school. 17. This teacher is
very severe when I am bad. 18. Your {sing., fam.) brother
42 SPANISH GRAMMAR
has a gift for your sister. He is very kind. 19. My friend has
been in Madrid this winter. 20. He has been very ill, but he is
now well.
1 dice, pres. ind. of decir, ' to say.' 2 Note that interrogative adverbs and
interrogative pronouns take the accent mark. ^ in Spanish, the subject often
follows its verb. 4 This ' it ' cannot be translated into Spanish. 5 Say : ' is
it not so? ' 6 Use de.
LESSON VII
48. Possessive Case (Genitive). — Spanish nouns have
only one form for the singular and one for the plural :
they have no ending that corresponds to the English 's.
Possession is denoted by the preposition de, ^ of.'
el libro del hombre, the man's book (lit., ' the book of the man ').
la hermana de Maria, Mary's sister (lit., ' the sister of Mary').
a. The English possessive case is sometimes elliptical for * the house,
church, or shop of ' ; in Spanish the full construction occurs.
estd en casa de mi tio, he is at my uncle's.
voy k la iglesia de San Pablo, I am going to Saint Paul's.
en la tienda de Garcia, at Garcia's.
49. Indirect Object (Dative Case). — The indirect ob-
ject is always expressed by a before the noun, without
regard to its position.
Maria di6 un libro a Pedro, Mary gave Peter a book, or Mary gave
a book to Peter.
a. In Spanish, verbs meaning to take fro77t or ask of are followed by
the dative of the person.
pido un favor a mi madre, I ask a favor of my mother.
compre el caballo a mi primo, I bought the horse of my cousin,
LESSON VII 43
50. Personal d. — In Spanish the preposition a, 'to,'
is often required before the direct object of a verb. It
is so required whenever the object is a proper noun, or
any noun or pronoun^ that denotes a specific person,
higher animal, or personified thing.
Ex. Pablo ama a Sofia, Paul loves Sophia.
he visitado a Paris, I have visited Paris,
llama a su hijo, he is calling his son.
Compare the following :
halle el libro, I found the book,
halle al nino, I found the child,
busco un hombre (not specific) que hable ^ espanol, I am looking for
a man who speaks Spanish.
conozco a un hombre que habla espanol, I know a man who speaks
Spanish.
a. The "personal a" is usually omitted after tener, *to have': tengo
un padre y una madre, ' I have a father and a mother.' Observe also the
following :
querer, to wish. perder, to lose.
querer a, to hke, to love. perder a, to ruin.
b. The " personal a " is sometimes omitted when the verb governs an
indirect object also : llevo el nino a su papa, ' I am taking the child to
his father.' Also before a word beginning w^th the a sound : conozco
aquel hombre, * I know that man.'
c. The preposition a is sometimes placed before the direct object
merely to distinguish the latter from the subject: a la guerra sigue la
paz, * peace follows w^ar.'
51. Interrogative Sentences. — In an interrogative
sentence the subject, if expressed, usually follows the
1 Except the personal pronouns me, te, etc., and the relative que.
2 Present subjunctive.
44
SPANISH GRAMMAR
verb, and if a compound tense is used,, the subject
usually follows the past participle.
Ex. <; habla Juan? does John speak? is John speaking?
I habl6 Pablo ? did Paul speak ?
I ha vendido usted su caballo ? have you sold your horse ?
Vocabulary
barato, -a, cheap.
biblioteca, /, library.
casa,/, house; en casa, at home.
ciudad,/, city.
COCina,/, kitchen.
COmedor, w., dining room.
c6modo, -a, comfortable.
contener,! (to) contain.
cosa, /., thing.
costoso, -a, costly, expensive.
criado, -a, m. and f., servant.
cuadro, w., picture.
demas, others.
estatua,/, statue.
estudio, w., study.
magnifico, -a, magnificent, splendid.
molestia,/, trouble.
muebles, m. pL, furniture, pieces-of-
furniture.
nuevo, -a, new.
pasar, (to) pass.
pedir,2 (to) ask (a favor, etc.).
pensar,2 (to) think, intend.
perd6n, w., pardon.
piso, m., floor, story.
primer (o), -a, first.
rico, -a, rich.
segundo, -a, second.
Sevilla,/, Seville.
sombrero, w., hat.
todo, -a, all.
Exercise VII
A. I. Tienes tu libro? — No; tengo el libro de mi her-
mano. 2. ^D6nde esta tu madre? — Esta en casa de mi tio.
3. <:D6nde compra usted sus sombreros? 4. Compro mis
sombreros en la tienda de Herrera. 5. El vende los som-
breros muy baratos. 6. ^No pod^is hallar a vuestro padre?
7. Si; hemos hallado a nuestro padre, pero no a nuestra
madre. 8. He perdido todos mis libros. 9. Yo he ha-
llado tus libros en la biblioteca. 10. ^Busca usted a sus her-
1 Inflected like tener.
2 Radical-changing.
LESSON VII 45
manos? ii. No; busco una pluma que he perdido.
12. (jEsta Juan en casa? — No, senor; esta en casa de Pablo
Martinez. 13. Pido a usted perdon por la molestia.
14. Tengo en Sevilla un amigo muy rico. 15. Este amigo
tiene una casa magnifica. .16. En su casa hay muchas
cosas costosas. 17. Ha viajado mucho. 18. Siendo
muy inteligente, ha comprado libros, muebles, cuadros y
muchas estatuas. 19. La casa de mi amigo es grande y
c6moda. 20. La biblioteca esta en el segundo piso. 21. El
comedor y la cocina estan en el primer piso. 22. La biblio-
teca contiene muchos hbros en ingles, espafiol y francos.
23. Mi amigo prefiere los libros en espanol a todos los demas
hbros.
B. I. Have you {fam.ysing.) found your books? 2. Yes;
I have found my books, but I can't ^ find my father. 3. Where
do you buy your pens? 4. I buy my pens at Montejo's. 5. I
buy my pens from my uncle John. 6. Where is your brother?
7. He and my sister are at their aunt's. 8. Paul loves his
brother and sister, but he does not love his books. 9. How is
your (^form.^ sing.^ friend, sir? 10. He is very well. He is in
this city, and he is buying many things. 11. Your friend is rich,
is he not? 12. Yes; he has a costly house. 13. Being rich,
he has travelled and has bought many pieces-of-furniture and books.
14. He is an 2 American, and he intends to pass this winter in
America. 15. He has splendid .pictures, it is true; but I prefer
his statues. 16. He has books in many languages. 17. But
he prefers the English and French books to all the others.
18. His library is on the first floor; it is large and comfortable.
19. Have you {fam., sing.) a servant that speaks^ Spanish?
20. No, sir; I have a servant who speaks Enghsh. 21. John
loves his father and his mother ; but he does not love his studies.
22. Where is your {form., pi.) brother? He is at our uncle's.
1 no puedo. 2 Omit. 3 \j^q hable (pres. subj.).
46
SPANISH GRAMMAR
52. Indicative.
Hablar :
LESSON VIII
Imperfect and Preterite.
IMPERFECT TENSE
Singular
Plural
I.
hablaba, I was speaking or used to speak.
I.
hablabamos
2.
hablabas
2.
hablabais
3.
hablaba
PRETERITE TENSE
3.
hablaban
Singular
Plural
I.
hable, I spoke or did speak.
I.
hablamos
2.
hablaste
2.
hablasteis
3-
habl6
3-
hablaron
Temer :
IMPERFECT TENSE
Singular
Plural
I.
temia, I was fearing or used to fear.
I.
temiamos
2.
temias
2.
temiais
3-
temia
PRETERITE TENSE
3-
temian
Singular
Plural
I.
temi, I feared or did fear.
I.
temimos
2.
temiste
2.
temisteis
3.
temi6
3.
temieron
Vivir :
IMPERFECT TENSE
Singular
Plural
I.
vivia, I was living or used to Hve.
I.
viviamos
2.
vivias
2.
viviais
3-
vivia
PRETERITE TENSE
3.
Vivian
Singular
Plural
I.
Vivi, I lived or did live.
I.
vivimos
2.
viviste
2.
viviste is
3.
vivi6
3.
vivieron
Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the imper-
fect tense; and that, in both tenses, the stress never
falls
on the stem.
LESSON VIII 47
53. Use of the Imperfect and Preterite Indicative. —
The imperfect indicative is used (i) to tell what was
happening when something else intervened, or (2) to
represent a state or action as protracted or habitual.
The preterite is used to tell what happened on one or
more occasions in the past without involving duration
or extension of time.
llovia, y los caminos estaban malos, it was raining, and the roads
were bad.
el aSo pasado fumaba mucho, last year I used to smoke a great deal.
no fume ayer, I did not smoke yesterday.
vendi mi casa y compre otra, I sold my house and bought another.
yo escribia cuando Juan entr6, I was writing when John entered.
mi padre tenia dos hermosos perros, pero los vendi6, my father had
two handsome dogs, but he sold them.
a. Sometimes * I spoke,' * I did speak,' or ' I would speak,' mean * I
used to speak.' They are then to be expressed in Spanish by the imper-
fect : hablaba espanol todos los dias cuando estaba en Cuba, ' I spoke
(* did speak,' * would speak,' or ' used to speak ') Spanish every day when
I was in Cuba.'
b. In Spanish the perfect indicative is sometimes used instead of the
preterite to express an act that occurred recently: ayer he matado un
lobo, * I killed a wolf yesterday'; ha partido anteayer, ' he left day before
yesterday'; he creido que usted era f ranees, *I thought that you were
French.' This construction is not so common in Spanish America as it is
in Spain.
Vocabulary
aleman, -ana, German.
avariento, -a, m. and f.^ miser.
ayudar, (to) help.
bicicleta, /, bicycle.
calle,/, street.
cinco, five.
como, as.
comiin, common; por lo comun,
commonly, usually,
cortar, (to) cut.
cuarto, w., room.
dia, V?., day; todos los dias, every
day.
dinero, m,^ money.
48 SPANISH GRAMMAR
encontrar,! (to) meet.
favor, w., favor.
idioma, w., language.
Iadr6n, -ona, m. andf,, thief.
lavar, (to) wash.
lena, /, wood.
partir, (to) depart ; trans. ^ to split.
planchar, (to) iron.
1 Radical-changing
primo, -a, /;/. and f.^ cousin.
profesor, -ora, m, and f.^ professor.
prometer, (to) promise.
remendar,! (to) mend, repair.
ropa,/, clothes.
tren, ;;/., train.
varies, -as, several, various.
Exercise VIII
A, I. Juan escribia cuando yo entre en el cuarto.
2. Ahora no fa mo, pero he fiimado mucho. 3. Cuando
vivia en Cuba, fumaba demasiado. 4. Vend! mi bicicleta y
compre otra al senor Martinez. 5. Ella leia un libro
cuando llegue.^ 6. Por lo comun comia mucho, pero ayer
no comi6 nada.^ 7. Mi padre llam6 al criado un ladr6n.
8. Buscabamos un hombre que hablase ^ espanol. 9. Halla-
mos a un hombre que hablaba aleman. 10. Buscamos un
criado. 11. Ayer buscamos a un criado por toda la ciudad.^
12. Los ladrones mataron varios hombres, ^ino es verdad?
13. Si, senor; mataron a dos hombres que iban^ a tomar el
tren. 14. El profesor de idiomas ha llegado ayer.
15. El hablo ayer con mi padre. 16. El profesor y yo
hablabamos espanol todo el tiempo. 17. Estudiabamos las
lecciones cuando tu llegaste. 18. Por lo comian, el avariento
contaba todos los dias su dinero ; pero ayer no lo ^ cont6.
19. Como pasabamos por la calle de Peregrinos, encontramos
a nuestro tio. 20. Todos trabajaban : el padre cortaba y
partia lena. 21. La madre remendaba la ropa. 22. Las
hijas lavaban y planchaban.
B, I. I was not working when you (^forni.j sing.) entered.
2. When I lived in Mexico, I smoked every day. 3. I did not
smoke yesterday. 4. I sold my French books, and bought Spanish
LESSON IX 49
books at Garcia's. 5. I bought the book from a Spaniard.
6. When she entered (into) the room, I was writing a letter.
7. Did you (^for^n., pi.) find your father? 8. Yes, we found
our father and mother at our cousin^s. 9. I was looking for a
friend who promised to help me. 10. He was looking all over
town for the child. 11. He found many children ; but he did not
find the child that he was looking for. 12. My father used to call
me at six o'clock in the morning."^ 13. But yesterday he called
me at five o'clock. 14. I was reading a Spanish book when my
cousin arrived. 15. I spoke Spanish when I lived in Mexico, and
I spoke English when I lived in England. 16. I used to smoke
a great deal ; but I do not smoke now. 17. Did you (^fam.^ pi.)
not have ^ expensive pieces-of-furniture ? 18. Yes; but we sold
them^ to our rich friend. 19. Have you sold your house also?
20. No, sir ; we have sold the furniture, but not the house. 21 . Did
you (/br;//., sing.) buy your new hat at Garcia's? 22. No; I
bought the hat of a friend. 23. John used to ask many favors of
his teacher. 24. But today the teacher has asked a favor of John.
1 Pret. oi llegar (see \ 214 (2)). 2 ■ anything.' 3 « spoke,' imp. subj. of
hablar. ^ ' all over town.' ^ ' were going,' imp. ind. of ir. 6 • jt.'
" a las seis de la man ana. ^ teniais. 9 los vendinios.
LESSON IX
54. Neuter Article io. — In addition to the forms of
the definite article already given, there is another form,
lo, which is required before the masculine form of an
adjective, when the adjective is used substantively as
the name of a color or as an abstract noun. This is
generally called the neuter article, since it cannot be
used with a masculine or a feminine noun.
se ruboriz6 hasta lo bianco de los ojos, he colored to the white of his
eyes.
lo infinito y lo eterno, the infinite and the eternal.
50 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Note also the following idiomatic expressions :
conocemos lo buenas que son ellas, we know how good they are.
sabemos ^ lo mucho que nos quiere, we know how much he loves us.
55. Use of the Definite Article. — The definite article
is used oftener in Spanish than in Enghsh. It is re-
quired in the following cases :
(i) Before an abstract noun, or one used in a general sense
to denote all of the thing or class it names.
la ambici6n es peligrosa, ambition el hierro es util, iron is useful,
is dangerous. ama las flores, he loves flowers.
But, if ' some ' or ' any ' is expressed or understood before the
English noun, the article is omitted in Spanish.
no tiene ambici6n, he hasn't any ambition.
compra hierro, he is buying (some) iron.
compra flores, he is buying flowers.
(2) Before a title, or a proper noun modified by a descrip-
tive adjective.
el senor Morales, Mr. Morales. la pequena Maria, little Mary.
el general Martinez, General Martinez, el Asia rusa, Russian Asia.
But in direct address the article is omitted, and seiior, seiiora,
or senorita is usually prefixed to a title.
buenos dias, senor general Martinez, good day, General Martinez.
a. The article is never used before Don or Dona^: Don Antonio
habla, ' Anthony is speaking.'
1 Conocer means 'to know' in the sense of 'to be acquainted with/ *to
realize ' ; saber is ' to know * in the sense of ' to be aware of,' ' to have learned
by study.'
2 Don and Dona are used only before the Christian or given name (nombre
de bautismo) , as Dona Maria, 'Miss [or Mrs.) Mary.* One also meets with
Senora Dona Maria, Senora Dona Maria Martinez, etc.
LESSON IX 51
b. The article is required before a noun used in apposition with a
personal pronoun (expressed or understood) : nosotros los americanos
creemos, or los americanos creemos, * we Americans believe.'
(3) Before a word or expression of time that is modified.
Ileg6 el martes de la semana pasada, he arrived (on) Tuesday of last
week.
la semana pr6xima, next week.
(4) Before an adjective of nationahty used to denote a language.
el ingles no es dificil, English is not difficult.
I ensena usted el espanol ? do you teach Spanish ?
But after hablar, *to speak' (sometimes after aprender), the
article is usually omitted except before castellano.^ After en,
* in/ the article is usually omitted.
hablamos f ranees, we speak French ; en aleman, in German ;
^^^^ I hablas el castellano ? do you speak Spanish ?
(5) Usually before the unmodified names of countries and
continents, except when the name is used with en, a, de, para,
etc., to form an adjectival or adverbial phrase.
la Inglaterra, England ; la Francia, France, etc. ;
but,
vivo en Espana, I live in Spain ; voy a Italia, I am going to Italy.
a. The article is always required before the names of some countries
and cities.
el Brasil, Brazil. la China, China.
el Canada, Canada. la Florida, Florida.
el Ecuador, Ecuador. la Gran Bretana, Great Britain.
el Jap6n, Japan. la Habana, Havana.
el Paraguay, Paraguay. la Suiza, Switzerland, etc.
el Peru, Peru.
1 Several languages are spoken in Spain : Castilian (el castellano), Catalan
(el Catalan), Galician (el gallego), etc.; but Castilian is the official language
of Spain, and is therefore often called Spanish (el espanol) , although in most
Spanish-speaking countries the name Castilian (el castellano) is considered
more correct.
52
SPANISH GRAMMAR
(6) Usually before a noun denoting a bodily characteristic,
when the object of tener, ' to have.'
tiene el pelo negro, he has black hair.
tengo los pies frios, my feet are cold.
(7) The masculine article sometimes modifies an infinitive
or a subject clause.
el comer demasiado es malo, it is bad to eat too much.
no puede ser mera casualidad el que sean todas bonitas, it cannot be
mere chance that they are all pretty.
(8) The definite article is sometimes used instead of a pos-
sessive (see § 119), as in
he perdido el sombrero, I have lost my hat.
Vocabulary
agradable, pleasing, agreeable.
agradar, (to) please.
alguno, -a, some.
bello, -a, beautiful.
brazo, ;;?., arm.
creer, (to) believe.
dedo, w., finger.
deleitar, (to) delight.
desgracia, /, misfortune.
familia,/, family.
felicidad, /, happiness.
feo, -a, ugly.
fuego, 7n., fire.
guantes, m. pL, gloves.
guerra,/, war.
izquierdo, -a, left.
juez, m., judge.
lirio, m., lily.
lunes, w., Monday.
mano,/, hand.
manana, tomorrow.
mundo, w., world; todo el mundo,
everybody.
odiar, (to) hate.
oro, m,, gold.
paz,/, peace.
pobre, poor.
presente, present.
probar,! (to) prove, test,
salud,/, health.
saludable, healthful.
sano, -a, healthy.
uno, -a, one.
una,/, finger-nail.
vano, -a, vain.
vecino, -a, m. and f., neighbor,
visitar, (to) visit.
ya, already.
1 Radical-changing verb.
LESSON IX 53
Exercise IX
A, I. El senor Martinez ensenaba el castellano y el francos.
2. Hablaba el castellano, pero no hablaba frances. 3. El
castellano es facil, pero el aleman es dificil. 4. Puedo es-
cribir cartas en espanol (castellano), pero no en aleman.
5. He vivido en Inglaterra y en Francia, pero no he vivido en
el Canada. 6. Visits a Cuba, pero no a la Habana.
7. Los Cubanos y los Mejicanos hablan el castellano.
8. Los Norte-Americanos y los Ingleses hablan ingles.
9. El frances es el idioma de Francia. 10. Cuando uno
sabe ya algunas lenguas, no es dificil aprender el castellano.
11. Amo la paz, y odio la guerra. Dejame^ en paz.
12. El fuego prueba el oro ; la desgracia prueba al hombre
y a los amigos. 13. La paz y la salud, y no el dinero, con-
stituyen^ la felicidad de la familia. 14. Tengo las manos y
los pies frios. 15. El pobre muchacho se ha caido," y tiene
roto el brazo izquierdo. 16. El discipulo tiene que escribir
dos ejercicios en frances para mafiana, y ya tiene los ojos can-
sados. 17. El senor Siguerroa ha perdido el sombrero.
18. En lo pasado estudiaba poco : en lo presente estudio
mucho. 19. Lo bueno agrada : lo bello deleita. 20. Pre-
fiero lo bueno a lo malo, lo bello a lo feo. 21. Odiaban lo
malo, y amaban lo bueno. 22. Todo el mundo deja lo util,
y busca lo vano.
B. I. Have you lived in Cuba? 2. Yes ; I have lived in
Cuba, but not in Havana. 3. In England and in Canada they
speak English. 4. In Mexico and in Peru they speak Spanish.
5. Spanish is an easy language, but German is difficult. 6. Mr.
Herrera and his daughter Jane speak English and Spanish.
7. When I Uved at Mr. Herrera's, I spoke Spanish every day.
8. Mr. Herrera departed for* Spain last Tuesday. 9. His son
and daughter are in France. 10. Mr. Herrera does not speak
French. 11. Women love flowers. This little girl sells flowers.
54 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. He prefers what is beautiful and agreeable^ to what is good and
useful. 13. The North Americans desired ^ peace, and not war.
14. They desired to live in peace with their neighbors. 15. The
judge feared wickedness"^ and loved goodness. 16. Lilies are
beautiful flowers. 17. Little Paul is the son of Mrs. Morales.
18. He arrived last Tuesday, and leaves next Monday. 19. He
has found his hat; but he has not found his gloves. 20. My
finger is broken, ^ and I have lost the finger-nail. 21. Do you
{fa/n., sijtg.) not drink tea or^ coffee ? 22. No; I drink water.
1 'leave me.' 2 Pres. Ind. of constituir, *to constitute.' 3 «has fallen.
^ pa7'a. 5 Say : 'the beautiful and the agreeable.' 6 Use Imp. Ind.
''Say: 'The wicked (= bad) and the good.' 8 gay : 'I have the finger
broken.' 9 ni.
LESSON X
56. Omission of the Definite Article. — The definite
article is omitted in Spanish, although required in
English.
(i) Usually before a noun in apposition.
Washington, capital de los Estados Unidos, Washington, the capital
of the United States.
(2) Before a numeral modifying a title.
Carlos quinto, Charles the Fifth.
Luis diez y seis, Louis the Sixteenth.
57. Omission of the Indefinite Article. — The indefi-
nite article is used less often in Spanish than in Eng-
lish : it is regularly omitted before an unmodified noun
in the predicate used like an adjective to denote nation-
ality, occupation, rank, etc.
es americano, he is an American, es sastre, he is a tailor,
es general, he is a general.
LESSON X
55
It is also usually omitted,
a. Before a noun in apposition : Sevilla, ciudad en Andalucia, ' Se-
ville, a city in Andalusia.'
b. Before otro, 'another' ; cierto, 'a certain'; ciento, *a hundred';
mil, * a thousand '; after tal, ' such a,' etc.
c. Note also such expressions as the following : dos pesos la botella,
*two dollars a bottle '; tres veces al dia, 'three times a day'; mil pesos
por ano, ' a thousand dollars a (d?r per) year.'
58. Radical-changing Verbs. — The radical-changing
e and o verbs of the third conjugation change the
radical vowels e and o to i and u respectively in the
third person singular and plural of the preterite.
PRETERITE
Singular
Sentir
Plural
I.
senti
I.
sentimos
2.
sentiste
2.
sentisteis
3-
sinti6
Singular
Pedir
3-
sintieron
Plural
I.
2.
3-
pedi
pediste
pidi6
Singular
Dormir
I.
2.
3-
pedimos
pedisteis
pidieron
Plural
I.
dormi
I.
dormimos
2.
dormiste
•^
2.
dormisteis
3-
durmi6
3-
durmieron
It should be noted that the radical-changing e and 0 verbs of the first
and second conjugations are regular in the preterite.
59. Idiomatic Expressions.
buenos dias, good morning, or good day.
. buenas tardes, good afternoon, oi- good evening (until dark).
buenas noches, good evening (after dark), or good night.
56
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hasta manana, farewell until tomorrow.
hasta luego, farewell for a while.
adi6s, good-by.
Vocabulary
abrigo, m,^ wrap, overcoat.
anoche, last night.
bobo, -a, m. and f.^ fool.
cerveza,/, beer.
cielo, m., sky, heaven.
coger, (to) catch.
comerciante, w., merchant.
enfermedad, /, illness.
esperar, (to) hope.
espOSO, -a, m. and f., husband, wife.
ganar dinero, (to) make money.
gastar, (to) spend.
grave, serious.
guardar cama, (to) stay in bed.
intenci6n, /., intention.
1 Inflected like tener. 2 Radical-changing verb.
mandar, (to) send.
mantener, 1 (to) support.
medicamento, m,, drug, medicine,
medico, m., physician.
mentir, 2 (to) lie.
miedo, ;//., fear.
pagar, (to) pay.
resfriado, m., cold.
salir,^ (to) go out.
saludable, healthful.
sanar, Tto) cure.
sano, -a, healthy.
soldado, in., soldier.
tres, three.
vino, m., wine.
3 Irregular."
Exercise X
A, I. He vivido en Toledo, ciudad de Espaiia. 2. Pero
no he vivido en Madrid, capital del pais. 3. Compr6 el
vino al seiior Martinez. 4. Pague tres pesos la botella por
el vino. 5. El es francos, pero vive en los Estados Unidos.
6. El sefior Gonzalez es sastre, y su hermano es comerciante.
7. Don Juan Siguerroa habla bien ingles y francos. 8. Juana
pidi6 un favor a su madre. 9. Anoche dormi en el cuarto
de mi hermano. 10. <iEs hombre 6 mujer? — Es hombre,
y es un hombre inteligente. 11. ^Es bobo? — Si, senor ; es
un bobo.^ 12. ^Erespobre? — Si, sefior; soy una pobre.
13. El hombre debe beber agua, leche, cafe 6 te, y no vino
ni cerveza. 14. El niiio debe beber agua 6 leche. 15. Me
LESSON X 57
puse^ el abrigo, el sombrero y los guantes, y sail a la calle.
.t6. Buenos dias, senor General; ^icomo esta usted hoy?
17. Buenos dias, Don Luis, (Jes usted? Estoy bueno. 18. Y
la senora L6pez esta buena tambien, ^ no es verdad ? 19. No ;
esta enferma : la semana pasada cogio un resfriado, y ahora
tiene que guardar cama. 20. Es lastima. Yo tenia siempre
la intenci6n de visitar a la buena senora. 21. Oh, no hay
miedo. La enfermedad no es grave. 22. Con los medica-
mentos esperamos sanar a la enferma. 23. El hermano de la
senora L6pez es medico, y ha mandado buenos medicamentos.
B. I. Did you sleep well last night? No; I slept badly.
2. Did you (form., sing.) ask a favor of little Paul ? 3. No ; I
asked several favors of his father. 4. Last year we lived in To-
ronto, a city in Canada. 5. Our cousin was living in Havana, a
city in Cuba, when he died. 6. My brother is a physician.
7. My father and my uncles are merchants. 8. Did you (form.,
pi.) pay two or three dollars a bottle for the wine ? 9. I bought
the wine of my uncle. 10. I paid three dollars a bottle for the
wine. 1 1 . This gentleman is a Spaniard. He lives in Barcelona,
a city in Spain. 12. That man is a merchant. He makes a
great deal of money, but spends Httle. He is a regular miser.
13. Medicines are good for the sick. 14. We love the blue (color)
of the heavens. 15. Mr. Garcia died last year. His wife is a
poor woman,^ and works hard* to ^ support her family. 16. Last
week my father slept well; but last night he did not sleep much.
17. I believe that water and milk are healthful, and that tea and
coffee are not healthful. I wish to be healthy. 18. Do you
{fonn.^ sing.) believe that Mr. Men^ndez lied? No, sir; he did
not He. 19. Good evening, Mrs. Lopez. How are you (/^r;//.)?
20. Oh, is that you {fa^n.), Mary? I am not very well. I caught
a cold last Tuesday. 21. That's a pity. My brother is also ill.
22. His illness is serious, and he has to stay in bed. 23. He is
a physician, is he not? No; he is a judge. 24. We visited my
mother yesterday. She has been ill, but is now well.
1 Translate ; ' he is a regular fool.' 2 < j put on.' ^ Qmit. 4 mucho^
^ para.
58 SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XI
60. Position of Descriptive Adjectives.^ — In English
a descriptive adjective used with a noun nearly always
precedes it; in Spanish a descriptive adjective com-
monly follows its noun.
un muchacho fuerte, a strong boy. agua fria, cold water.
una muchacha cubana, a Cuban girl. ojos azules, blue eyes.
61. Most Spanish descriptive adjectives, however, may pre-
cede their noun, if the quality named by the adjective is charac-
teristic of the noun, or if the language is poetic or figurative.
la Santa Biblia, the Holy Bible. la blanca nieve, the white snow.
el ronco trueno, the hoarse thunder.
a. Many adjectives may usually be placed either before or after their
noun, although an adjective is more literal and distinctive when it follows :
bueno, 'good'; malo, 'bad'; bonito or lindo, 'pretty'; hermoso, 'beau-
tiful' or ' handsome '; pequeno, ' small'; viejo, ' old,' etc.
una pequena nina or una nina pequena, a little girl.
un hermoso caballo or un caballo hermoso, a handsome horse.
b. The position of the adjective is sometimes determined by euphony,
or the necessity of avoiding ambiguity; and an adjective which ordinarily
follows its noun may stand before a noun modified by an adjective phrase.
cuatro magnificos caballos blancos, four splendid white horses.
los escasos honorarios del gobierno, the inadequate salaries of the gov-
ernment.
un patri6tico libro de lectura cubano, a patriotic Cuban reader.
c. A few adjectives have one meaning before, and another after, their noun.
un grande amigo, a great friend. diferentes personas, different
una manzana grande, a large apple. (= several) persons.
el pobre hombre, the poor man (an vestidos diferentes, different
object of pity), (= dissimilar) costumes,
1 Or " qualifying" adjectives.
LESSON XI 59
un hombre pobre, a poor (poverty- un nuevo libro, another {or a
stricken) man. different) book.
mi cara madre, my dear mother. un libro nuevo, a new book
una silla cara, a dear (expensive) (fresh from the press.)
chairo varios hombres, several men.
cierta epoca, a certain period. papeles varios, miscellaneous pa-
noticia cierta, authentic news. pers; etc.
d. When the adjective precedes, it is usually repeated before each
noun to which it refers.
mi viejo padre y mi vieja madre, my old father and mother.
e. An English noun used as an adjective is usually expressed in
Spanish by a noun preceded by de (or para).
un reloj de oro, a gold watch.
una estatua de marmol, a marble statue.
un vaso para vino, a wineglass (un vaso de vino is a glass of wine) .
62. Agreement of Adjectives.
(i) If an adjective modifies several singular nouns, the plural
form of the adjective is used.
el padre y el hijo son buenos, the father and the son are good.
la madre y la hija son buenas^ the mother and the daughter are good.
(2) If some of the nouns are mascuHne and some are femi-
nine, the adjective is usually in the mascuhne plural.
el padre y la madre son buenos, the father and the mother are good.
la plata y el oro americanos, American silver and gold.
a. If the nouns denote inanimate things, and the noun nearest the
adjective is feminine plural, the adjective takes the feminine plural form.
el escritorio y las sillas estaban rotas, the desk and chairs were broken;
su sombrero y sus botas son viejas, his hat and boots are old;
but,
mi coraz6n y mi alma son suyos, my heart and my soul are his.
b. Sometimes a plural noun is modified by several singular adjectives.
This occurs when each adjective modifies only one of the individuals
6o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
denoted by the noun : las lenguas inglesa y castellana, * the English
and Spanish languages.'
c. An adjective usually agrees in gender and number with the nearest
noun if the nouns are disconnected : muestra un valor, una capacidad
un talento extraordinario, *he displays extraordinary courage, ability,
talent.'
d. When an attributive adjective precedes its noun, it is repeated before
each noun if the nouns denote distinct persons or things ; if the nouns
denote collectively a state or action, a group of persons or things, or desig-
nate the same person or thing, the adjective is not repeated, and agrees
with the nearest noun.
la madre y la hija, the mother and (the) daughter.
el cuchillo y el tenedor, the knife and fork.
una bella casa y un bello jardin, a beautiful house and garden.
su extremado talento y habilidad, his unusual talent and skill.
todos los maestros y discipulos, all the teachers and pupils.
el pie y pierna de los animales se llaman * pata,' the foot and lower
part of the leg of animals are called ' pata.'
e. In Spanish a predicate adjective is often used where an adverb is
used in EngUsh : parti6 alegre, ' he departed joyfully.'
Vocabulary
Alejandro, w., Alexander.
aqui, here.
aunque, although.
billete, m,, ticket; billete directo,
through ticket.
cinco, five.
costar,! (to) cost.
cuchara,/, spoon.
cucharita,/, teaspoon.
cuchillo, w., knife.
despacho, m., office.
estaci6n, /, station.
industrioso, -a, industrious.
1 Radical-changing verb.
2 Irregular verb : cf. ^ 247.
instante, ;«., instant; al instante,
at once.
ir,2 (to) go.
mesa,/, table.
milla,/, mile.
pertenecer,^ (to) belong.
plata,/, silver.
porque, because.
porque, why {interrog?),
primo, -a, m. and f., cousin,
sopa,/, soup.
taza,/, cup.
tenedor, w., fork.
3 Verb with inceptive endings : cf. \ 2.2.0.
LESSON XI 6 1
Exercise XI
A, I. iQu^ compraste? — Compre un reloj de plata.
2. ^ Porque no compraste un reloj de oro? 3. Porque
los reloj es de oro cuestan mucho. 4. Quiero una cucha-
rita : no quiero una cuchara para sopa. 5. Traigame ^ usted
un vaso de agua. 6. ^iNo quiere usted una taza de caf^?
7. Si ; traigame una taza de caf^ con leche. 8. Traigame
tambien un cuchillo de mesa y un tenedor. 9. El viejo
soldado tiene mucha hambre y mucha sed. 10. Leo todos
los dias en la Santa Biblia. 11. La casa blanca pertenece d
Don Alejandro. 12. La blanca nieve es muy linda. 13. El
senor Morales compr6 dos magnificos caballos negros. 14. Sus
nuevos caballos son muy hermosos. 15. Mi vieja tia vivia
en aquella casa verde. 16. Ahora vive en la casa amarilla.
17. La muchacha alemana tiene ojos azules. 18. La mucha-
cha espanola tiene ojos negros. 19. El pobre hombre esta
muy enfermo y tiene que guardar cama. 20. Este mucha-
cho italiano es muy pobre, pero es industrioso y quiere trabajar.
21. Compramos una mesa grande para la cocina. 22. El
senor Martinez es un grande amigo de nuestra familia.
23. Mi primo tiene que ir a Malaga, y teniendo prisa quiere
partir al instante. 24. Hay tres millas de aqui a la estaci6n
donde toma el tren. 25. Aunque tiene hambre, no quiere
comer antes de llegar^ a Malaga. 26. Ayer compr6 un
billete directo en el despacho de billetes.
B. I. Bring me a soup spoon and a table knife. 2. Bring me
also a cup of black coffee and a teaspoon. 3. Tea cups are large,
but coffee cups are small. 4. I sold my silver watch and bought a
gold watch. 5. Bring me a wine glass. I wish a glass of wine.
6. Bring me a coffee cup. I wish a cup of coffee with milk. 7. The
white house is covered with^ the white snow. 8. Bring me the
black ink and the blue paper. 9. Bring me also a small pen and
blotting paper. 10. When I am hungry I eat a large apple and
62
SPANISH GRAMMAR
take a glass of milk. ii. The little Mexican girl has black
eyes. 12. I wish to buy four handsome black horses. 13. Hand-
some black horses are dear. 14. This white house is ugly. The
white snow is beautiful. 15. The other day we bought two
splendid black horses. 16. He is a great man; but he does not
live in a large house. 17. -^-^aLd-^fty-si^rer^wa^teh-attd -bought a ■
goW'^iv'atefe. 18. She got^ a coffee cup and took a cup of coffee.
19. Have your cousins bought through tickets for^ Malaga?
20. Yes ; they were taking the train when we arrived at the station.
21. Being in a hurry, we passed through Peregrinos Street.
22. The station is in that street.
1 ' bring me.' 2 • before arriving.' s ^std cubierta de. ^ fue a buscar
(lit., •' went to look for '). 5
para.
LESSON xn
63. Indicative. Imperfect and Preterite.
Tener :
IMPERFECT TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. tenia, I was having, or used to have.
I.
teniamos
2. tenias
2.
teniais
3. tenia
PRETERITE TENSE
3.
tenian
Singular
Plural
I. tuve, I had, or did have.
I.
tuvimos
2. tuviste
2.
tuvisteis
3. tuvo
3.
tuvieron
Haber :
IMPERFECT TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. habia, I had.
I.
habiamos
2. habias
2.
habiais
3. habk
3-
habian
LESSON
XII
Singular
PRETERITE
TENSE
Plural
I. hube, I had.
I.
hubimos
2. hubiste
2.
hubisteis
3. hubo
3.
hubieron
Ser:
Singular
IMPERFECT
TENSE
Plural
I. era, I was, or
used to be.
I.
eramos
2. eras
2.
erais
3. era
Singular
PRETERITE
TENSE
3.
eran
Plural
I. ful, I was.
I.
fuimos
2. fuiste
2.
fuisteis
3. fue
3.
fueron
Estar :
Singular
IMPERFECT
TENSE
Plural
I. estaba, I was,
or used to be.
I.
estabamos
2. estabas
2.
estabais
3. estaba
Singular
PRETERITE
TENSE
3.
estaban
Plural
I. estuve, I was.
I.
estuvimos
2. estuviste
2.
estuvisteis
3. estuvo
3.
estuvieron
63
64. The Pluperfect and Preterite Perfect.
(i) The pluperfect tense is formed with the imperfect tense
of haber.
Hablar :
PLUPERFECT TENSE
I. habiahablado,|^^^^^P^^'^^'^^
C had been spea
I.
habiamos hablado
2. habias hablado
3. habia habladp
speaking.
2. habiais hablado
3. habian hablado
64
SPANISH GRAMMAR
(2) The Preterite Perfect is formed with the preterite of
haber : hube hablado, ^ I had spoken/ etc. This tense is used
only after expressions meaning ^ as soon as/ * after/ etc. In
colloquial Spanish the preterite usually replaces the preterite
perfect.
luego que hube leido {or luego que lei) la carta, la devolvi, as soon as
I had read the letter, I returned it.
Note also the following idiom :
llegado que hubo a la costa, as soon as he had arrived at the coast ;
terminado que hubo su discurso, as soon as he had finished his speech; etc.
a. Habia also means * there was,' * there were,' or * there used to be ' ;
hubo, * there was ' or * there were ' ; habia (hubo) habido, * there had
been.'
65. Idiomatic Expressions.
(i) hace^ calor, it is warm.
hace mucho calor, it is very
warm.
(2) hay sol (or hace sol), it is
sunny; the sun is shining.
hay luna, the moon is shining.
hace frio, it is cold.
hace fresco, it is cool.
hace viento, it is windy.
hay neblina, it is foggy.
hay polvo, it is dusty.
hay lodo, it is muddy.
Note that these expressions have to do with the state of the weather.
Vocabulary
asesinar, (to) assassinate.
haul, w., trunk.
bien de salud, in good health.
Bruto, m., Brutus.
buz6n, ?;?., letter box.
carb6n, w., coal.
ciego, -a, bhnd.
c6mplice, m. andf.^ accomplice.
descansar, (to) rest.
diez, ten.
echar, (to) throw, put.
falta,/, lack, scarcity.
feliz, happy.
Godo, -a, m, and f., Goth.
hierro, m,^ iron.
huelga,/, strike.
1 hace is Pres. Ind., 3d. sing., of the irregular verb hacer, ' to make ' : of. § 246.
LESSON XII 65
joven, m. and f., young man, young redondo, -a, round.
regalar, (to) present, give.
woman.
junto, -a, together.
luna,/, moon.
llover,^ (to) rain.
maleta, /, travelling-bag.
nevar,^ (to) snow.
ni . . . ni, neither . . . nor.
ocupado, -a, busy.
Romano, -a, m. and f.^ Roman.
salida, /, rising.
salir,2 (to) go out.
sol, w., sun.
sordo, -a, deaf.
tierra,/., earth.
tomo, m.^ volume.
1 Radical-changing verb. 2 irregular verb : cf. § 252.
Exercise XII
A, I. El sol es redondo, y la tierra y la luna son tambi^n
redondas. 2. Este nino es industrioso, pero no es cortes :
aquella nifia es industriosa y cortes. 3. El esta enfermo y
triste : ella no esta ni enferma ni triste. 4. Los jovenes
partieron alegres. Ahora viven felices. 5. Los Godos y los
Romanos vivieron juntos en Espana. 6. Su padre era viejo,
y su madre era ciega y sorda. 7. Ella era siempre buena
con (or, para con) los pobres. 8. Cuando Maria estaba en-
ferma, le ^ regalaban muchas flores. 9. Siempre era usted
mi amiga, Sefiora. 10. ^jQuien lleg6 en el tren? — Era la
senora (la esposa) de Don Alejandro. 11. Julio Cesar fu6
asesinado por Bruto y sus c6mplices. 12. Estuve diez anos
en Madrid, y estaba bien de salud. 13. Eran las cinco de
la manana cuando el tren lleg6. 14. Creo que es rico.
Creia que era rico. 15. Ya habia leido yo la carta, cuando
lleg6 mi hermano. 16. Luego que hubo escrito las cartas,
las^ ech6 al buz6n. 17. Teniamos mucho frio a causa de
la huelga y la falta de carb6n. 18. Hace frio ; el nino tiene
frio ; el agua esta fria. 19. Hace calor ; el nino tiene calor ;
el agua esta caliente. 20. En el invierno, cuando hace
mucho frio, no hay lodo. 21. A la salida del sol hay mucha
neblina.
66 SPANISH GRAMMAR
B, I. The sun is shining and it is warm. 2. The wind is
blowing and it is snowing. 3. Bring me a large glass of water.
I am very thirsty. 4. Bring me also some apples. I am hungry.
5. This man and this woman are tired and wish to rest. 6. Gold
and silver are more costly than^ iron. 7. The trunks and the
travelling-bags were (/////. Iiid.^ broken. 8. We have read the
first and second volumes. * 9. They {fe/n.) lived happily ^ in
Madrid for many years. ^ 10. John and his sister Mary were very ill.
When they were ill, they did not go out on"^ the street. 11. It
was six o'clock in the morning when my father called me. 12. The
mother had been so ^ busy that ^ she had not had time to ^^ mend
the clothes. 13. ,As soon as the father had cut and split the
wood, he brought it ^^ into the house. 14. In Colorado it is warm
in winter when the sun shines. . 15. When the sun is not shining
and the wind is blowing, it is very cold. 16. It is usually warm
when it is raining or when it is foggy. 17. It is so^^ windy and
so ^2 cold this week that everybody is catching cold. 18. When
I am very cold, I do not wish to drink very cold water. 19. My
cousin's wife was very sleepy, and she wished to rest a little in the train.
1 ' her.' 2 « them.' ^ fji^s costosos {c.ostosas?) que. 4 Say: ' the volumes
first and second.' 5 Say : ' happy.' 6 Say : ' many years in Madrid ' (do
not translate ' for '). ^ a. ^ tan. 9 que. 1*^ de or para. ^ la trajo,
12 ta7ito.
LESSON XIII
66. Apocopation of Adjectives. — The following adjec-
tives lose the final 0 of the masculine singular when they
precede their noun :
bueno, good. ninguno, no, none.
malo, bad. primero, first.
uno,i one, an or a. tercero, third.
alguno, some. postrero,^ last.
1 The numeral uno and the indefinite article are the same word.
2 Postrero is little used ; ' last ' is usually ultimo (but ' last month,' for in-
stance, is el mes pasado).
LESSON XTII 67
un buen hombre, a good man. algun dia, some day.
mal cafe, bad coffee. el primer tomo, the first volume.
a. If bueno and malo are separated from their noun, they retain the
final 0 : mi bueno y carinoso padre, * my good and affectionate father.'
67. Grande, used in the sense of ^ grand ' or ^ great/ usually
becomes gran before a singular noun of either gender.
un gran presidente, a great president. una gran cosa, a grand affair.
a. Before a noun beginning with a vowel, or when the adjective is em-
phatic, the full form is sometimes used.
un grande acto de caridad, a grand act of charity.
un grande sacrificio, a great sacrifice.
b. When grande means * large ' or *'big,' it follows its noun.
un muchacho grande, a big boy. una casa grande, a large house.
68. Santo, ' saint,' ' holy,' usually becomes san before the
mascuHne name of a saint. The full form remains before a
name beginning with To- or Do-.
San Pablo, Saint Paul. Santo Tomas, Saint Thomas.
San Pedro, Saint Peter. But the name of the island
Santo Domingo, Saint Dominick. is San Tomas.
Otherwise the full form is used.
Santa Ana, Saint Anne. un hombre santo, a holy man.
69. Ciento, ^one hundred,' becomes cien before the noun
it modifies, even if an adjective intervenes.
cien soldados, one hundred soldiers.
cien hermosos caballos, one hundred handsome horses.
cien mil pesos, one hundred thousand dollars.
But the full form ciento is required in forming numerical expres-
sions above one hundred (except cien mil, cien millones, etc.).
ciento y diez, one hundred and ten.
ciento veinte y cinco, one hundred and twenty-five*
68 SPANISH GRAMMAR
70. Numerals. — Learn the Cardinal Numerals, § i68;
and the Ordinal Numerals from * first ' to * twelfth,'
§ 169.
Exercise XIII
A, I. Las manzanas grandes cuestan diez centavos la
docena. 2. Las pequenas cuestan s61o cinco centavos la
docena. 3. Las buenas naranjas de la Florida cuestan 30
centavos la docena. 4. Yo tengo 10 naranjas y tu tienes
15. ^Cuantas tenemos? 5. 10 y 15 son 25. 6. El afio
tiene 12 meses y 365 dias. 7. El mes tiene desde 28 hasta
31 dias. 8. La semana tiene 7 dias. 9. El dia tiene 24
horas 10. Cada bora tiene 60 minutos. 11. Cada
minuto tiene 60 segundos. 12. ^Cuantos segundos bay en
una bora? 13. i Cuantas boras bay en una semana? 14. Los
meses siguientes tienen 31 dias: enero, marzo, mayo, Julio,
agosto, octubre, y diciembre. 15. Los meses que tienen s61o
30 dias son: abril, junio, se(p)tiembre, y noviembre. 16. El
mes de febrero tiene generalmente solo 28 dias. 17. En el aiio
bisiesto el mes de febrero tiene 29 dias. 18. Los dias de la
semana son : domingo, lunes, martes, miercoles, jueves, viernes
y sabado. 19. El domingo es dia de descanso. 20. Los
demas dias son dias de trabajo. 21. Un nino estudia, y uno
no estudia. 22. Tengo uno 6 dos limones y una 6 dos
naranjas. 23. Un hombre grande no es siempre un gran
hombre.
(In this exercise write out all numerals in full.)
B. I. We do not work Sundays. 1 2. Mondays, Wednesdays,
and Fridays we have lessons in ^ English, Spanish, and mathematics.
3. Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Saturdays we have lessons in Latin^
Greek, and philosophy. 4. The months of ^ Spring are : March,
April, and May. 5 . How many days are there in ^ Spring ? 6. The
months of^ Summer are: June, July, and August. 7. The
months of ^ Autumn (Fall) are : September, October, and November.
8. And the months of^ Winter are: December, January, and Feb-
LESSON XIV 69
ruary. 9. January is the first month of the year. 10. Decem-
ber is the last month. 11. February has only twenty-eight or
twenty-nine days. 12. In^ leap year it has twenty-nine days.
13. Mr. Martinez used to sell oranges at ten cents a dozen.
14. Now he sells oranges at from twenty to thirty cents a dozen.
15. And his oranges are not good. 16. They are not sweet and
they are too small. 17. If John had twelve books and Mary
had thirteen, how many did they have? 18. Twelve and thirteen
are twenty-five. 19. How many days has January? 20. How
many minutes are there in a day? 21. My good grandfather,
my good and kind father, and my dear mother have just arrived.^
22. The enemy lost one ^ hundred horses, one ^ hundred and twenty-
one mules, and one^ hundred thousand rifles. 23. We used-to-
have good neighbors when we were in Mexico. 24. When (= as
soon as) they had sold the books, they bought a copy of the Holy
Bible. 25. The boy's cap and coat were soiled: he had fallen ^
into the mud of the street.
1 los domingos (why Def. Art.?) . '^ de. 3 Use Def. Art. ^ acaban de
llegar. 5 Omit. 6 se habia caido.
LESSON XIV
71. Indicative. Future and Conditional.^
Hablar :
FUTURE TENSE
Singular Plural
1. hablare, I shall speak, or shall be speaking. i. hablaremos
2. hablaras 2. hablar§is
3. hablara 3. hablaran
1 The Spanish indicative future tense is formed by postfixing to the infinitive
the indicative present tense of haber, the conditional by postfixing the imperfect
tense.
hablar (h)e hablar (h)emos hablar (hab)ia hablar (hab)iamos
hablar (h) as hablar (hab)^is hablar (hab)ias hablar (hab)iais
hablar (h) a hablar (h) an hablar (hab)ia hablar (hab)ian
Note the disappearance of hab-.
70
SPANISH GRAMMAR
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. hablaria, I should speak, or should be speaking.
I.
hablariamos
2. hablarias
2.
hablariais
3. hablaria
3.
hablarian
Temer: future tense
Singular
Plural
I. temere, I shall fear, or shall be fearing.
I.
temeremos
2. temeras
2.
temereis
3. temera
3-
temeran
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. temeria, I should fear, or should be fearing.
I.
temeriamos
2. temerias
2.
temeriais
3. temeria
3.
temerian
'^^^^^^ FUTURE TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. vivire, I shall live, or shall be living.
I.
viviremos
2. viviras
2.
vivireis
3. vivira
3-
vivirdn
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Singular
Plural
I. viviria, I should live, or should be living.
I.
viviriamos
2. vivirias
2.
viviriais
3. viviria
3.
vivirian
a. The English auxiliary verb * will ' may denote future tmie, as in * he
will go tomorrow,' or it may express willingness, as in ' I will go if you
wish.' When *will' means * to be willing,' it is generally to be translated
into Spanish by the proper form of querer : i quiere usted venir con
nosotros ? ' will you come with us ? ' comprare la casa si quieres ven-
derla, * I shall buy the house if you will sell it.'
b. The auxiliary verb * should' may be merely conditional, as in *I
should speak if I knew what to say,' or it may mean * ought to,' as in * I
realize that I should ( — ought to) speak, but I do not wish to do so.'
When * should ' means * ought to,' it is usually expressed in Spanish by
the proper form of deber : yo debo (debiera) hablar, ' I should, or ought
to, speak.'
LESSON XIV
71
72. Idiomatic Expressions.
es temprano, it is early.
es tarde, it is late.
dla una,i at one o'clock.
a las dos, at two o'clock.
a las tres y media, at half-past
three.
a las cuatro y cuarto, at a quarter-
past four.
d las cinco menos cuarto, at a
quarter to five.
d las seis y diez (minutos) , at ten
minutes past six.
d las siete de la manana, at seven
o'clock in the morning.
a las dos de la tarde, at two o'clock
in the afternoon.
es la una, it is one o'clock.
son las nueve, it is nine o'clock.
I que hora es ? what time is it ? what
o'clock is it?
en ocho dias, in a week.
hace quince dias, two weeks (a fort-
night)' ago.
el primero de enero, the first of
January.
el dos (tres, cuatro, etc.) de fe-
brero, the second (third, fourth,
etc.) of February.
Note that, except the first, the cardinal numbers are used to denote the
days of the month.
73. In order to denote an act or state that continues from
one period into another, the present, iinperfect, and future
tenses are used in Spanish ; while in English the perfect, plu-
perfect , and future perfect tenses are used. Ex. :
hard 2 un ano que viviremos en
Madrid, we shall have been
living in Madrid for a year.
mucho tiempo ha que vivimos en
Madrid, we have been living
in Madrid for a long time.
hace quince anos que vivimos en
Madrid, we have been living
in Madrid for a year.
hacia seis meses que viviamos en
Madrid, we had been living
in Madrid for six months.
desde entonces viviamos en Madrid,
we had been living in Madrid
since then.
Compare these sentences with the following :
1 After la una and media, hora is understood ; after las dos, las tres, etc.,
horas is understood. Cuarto is a noun.
2 Future indicative of hacer : of. § 246.
72 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hace un mes que partieron, it is hace ocho dias que no he fumado,
a month since they left, or it is a week since I have
they left a month ago. smoked, or I have not smoked
hacia ocho dias que habian par- for a week.
tido, it was a week since they hacla diez anos que no habia fu-
had left. mado, it was ten years since I
hard un ano que partieron, it had smoked, or I had not
will be a year since they left. smoked for ten years.
poco ha que partieron, they left desde entonces no he fumado, I
a little while ago. have not smoked since then.
a. In expressions of time ha (sometimes written ha) is generally
used as an impersonal verb instead of hay; but hace is used much
oftener than ha. As a rule, ha follows and hace precedes the noun (or
adjective) denoting time. Ha is generally used in indefinite expressions
of time, as poco ha, *a short time ago'; while hace is more correct in
definite expressions, as hace ocho dias, * a week ago.'
Exercise XIV
A, I. La reina parti6 antes de ayer. El rey partira pasado
mafiana. 2. Esta noche dor mire aqui, y partire mafiana.
3. Dijo^ que dormiria aqui esta noche y partiria maiiana.
4. Me escriben que volveran pronto. Me escribieron que
volverian pronto. 5. ^Supongo^ que el senor Garcia no
tardara en volver a casa? 6. Poco ha que parti6, y volvera
dentro de media hora. 7. ^iCuanto tiempo hace que usted
vive aqui? — Hace tres meses. 8. i Cuanto tiempo hace que
estudias el espanol? — Hace s61o quince dias. 9. Hace dos
dias que no la veo.^ — Yo la vi* hace dos horas. 10. Mi vida
desde hace algunos dias es una lucha constante. 1 1 . No hemos
recibido cartas desde que estamos en Sevilla. 12. Hacia
ocho dias que mi hermano y yo estabamos en Sevilla cuando
mi padre lleg6. 13. ^ Desde cuando esta su amigo en
Toledo? 14. Desde hace dos aiios, y tiene la intenci6n
de quedar alii. 15. Hace ocho dias que estoy en Malaga.
LESSON XIV 73
— Hace ocho dias que no he estado en Malaga. i6. Desde
entonces no he fumado. — Desde entonces fumo todos los dias.
17. Desde aquella noche no he vuelto^ a su casa. — Desde
aquella noche vuelvo a su casa todos los dias. 18. Mi reloj
esta parado. ^ Que hora es en tu reloj ? 19. Tengo las diez y
veinte ; pero mi reloj no anda bien : adelanta. — Mi reloj atrasa.
20. Crist6bal Col6n descubrio la America el 12 de octubre
de 1492. 21. La carta empieza asi : '^Madrid, 21 de enero
de 1904.'* 22. (iCuando es tu cumpleanos (dia de cum-
pleaiios)? — El 17 de marzo. 23. ^iCuando es el dia de tu
santo^? 24. Mi nombre de bautismo es Silvestre, y resulta
que mis dias son el 31 de diciembre. 25. Los dias de Jacinto
son el 1 1 de setiembre.
B. I. Will you (/am., sing.) sell your horse? 2. I will sell
the horse if you (fam., sing.) will pay five hundred American dollars
for him."^ 3. I shall pay five hundred dollars for the horse
tomorrow.^ 4. I should pay one thousand dollars for that horse
if you asked it.^ 5. What time is it by your (fain., sing.) watch?
It is half-past one. 6. By my watch it is a quarter to two ; but
my watch is fast. 7. The father used-to-call his children at
quarter-past five in the morning. 8. He calls them ^^ now at ten
minutes to six. 9. Will it be long before your (fain.., sing.)
brother returns ^^ to Madrid ? He will return in a week. 10. They
left for i'-^ Paris a month ago, and they have not arrived yet. 1 1 . It
will be a month tomorrow since they left. 12. I wrote to my friend
two days ago. 13. I am fifty-five years old, and I have hved in
this house fifty-one years. 14. Since then I have written daily to
my mother; but I have not written to my father. 15. He had
spoken Spanish for many years ; but he had not learned to ^^ speak
it^^ well. 16. How long had you (forin.., pi.) been in Malaga
when I arrived? Only two weeks. 17. Have you (fani., pi.) not
received a letter from your mother since you have been in Spain?
18. No, sir ; we have written to our mother ^very day since we have
been here ; but we have not received letters from her.^^ 19. My
birthday is the 28th of June, and my saint's day is the first of May,
74 SPANISH GRAMMAR
20. If the owner will sell the horse, I shall buy it.^^ 21. He said
that if the owner would ^^ sell the horse, he should buy it. 22. He
should write his Spanish exercises instead of playing 1^ ball ; but he
prefers to play ball.
1 ' he said.' 2 Pres. Ind., ist pers. sing., of suponer, ' to suppose.' 3 Pres.
Ind. of ver, ' to see.'. 4 Pret. of ver. 5 Past Part, of vo/ver, ' to return.' 6 in
Spain and Spanish America, the day of the saint after whom one is named is
celebrated much oftener than one's birthday. ' My saint's day ' is el dla de ini
santo, or mis dias. '^ por el. ^ Place mahana first in the sentence. ^ si
lo pidiera. "^^ los (placed before the verb). n Say : ' will your brother be
slow (/<zr^ar«') in returning? * (Infin.). '^'^ para. '^^ d hablarlo. '^^ ella.
15 lo (placed before the verb). 16 Use queria (Imp. Ind. of querer), l'' Use
Infin,
rich, richer, richest.
LESSON XV
74. Comparison. — Spanish adjectives form their com-
parative by prefixing mas, ' more,' to the positive, and
their superlative by prefixing the definite article to the
comparative.
rico, mds rico, el mas rico,
rica, mas rica, la mas rica,
ricos, mas ricos, los mas ricos,
ricas, mas ricas, las mas ricas, .
a. A possessive adjective may be used instead of the article, to form
the superlative : su amigo mas rico, * his richest friend.'
b. The article or the possessive adjective precedes the noun when the
superlative adjective foUov^^s it : la flor mas hermosa, * the most beautiful
flower.'
c. When several comparatives or superlatives modify the same word,
mas (or el mas, la mas, etc.) is placed before the first and omitted before
the others : el arbol mas alto y viejo, ' the tallest and oldest tree.'
d. Correlative * the . . . the,' followed by comparatives, is expressed in
Spanish by cuanto . . . tanto,^ or by mientras ... — : cuanto mas dinero
1 The tanto may sometimes be omitted, as in cuanto mas tiene, mas quiere,
' the more he has, the more he wants.'
LESSON XV 75
gana, tanto mas gasta, ' the more money he earns, the more he spends';
cuanto mas viejo es el vino, tanto mas vale, ' the older the wine is, the
more it is worth'; mientras mas tiene, mas quiere, ' the more he has, the
more he wants.'
e. The EngUsh preposition * in ' after a superlative is usually expressed
in Spanish by de : el rio mas largo del mundo, * the longest river in the
world.'
f. The article is omitted before a superlative adjective in the predicate
when its noun is compared with itself: esta mujer sonrie cuando esta
mas triste, * this woman smiles when she is saddest.'
g. When the noun is in apposition, both the article and the superlative
follow the noun : Nueva York, ciudad la mas opulenta de los Estados
Unidos, ' New York, the wealthiest city in the United States.'
h. When there is no real comparison, * most ' is usually expressed by
muy, or the suffix -isimo : es muy litil, or utilisimo, * it is most useful.'
75. (i) The adjectives bueno and malo are irregularly com-
pared.
bueno, mejor, el mejor, good, better, best.
malo, peor, el peor, bad, worse, worst.
The regular comparative forms mas bueno and mas malo are some-
times used.
(2) Grande and pequeno, while usually compared regularly,
have also the irregular comparative forms mayor and menor.
When appHed to persons, mayor means ' older,' and menor,
' younger.' Mas grande and mas pequeno are preferred for the
literal and physical use.
Juan es mas grande que Pedro, John is taller than Peter.
Juan es mayor que Pedro, John is older than Peter.
(3) Mucho and poco are compared irregularly, and in the
superlative they are used only in the neuter singular and in
the plural.
mucho, mas, lo (los, las) mas, much (many) , more, most,
poco, menos, lo (los, las) menos, little (few), less, least.
'je SPANISH GRAMMAR
las mas noches, or las mas de las noches, most nights.
lo menos que he perdido, the least that I have lost.
en vano buscan los mas el bien que gozan los menos, in vain do the
many seek for the happiness which the few enjoy.
a. * Most,' used with a noun, is usually best expressed by la mayor
parte de : la mayor parte de mis amigos, * most of my friends ' (lit.,
* the greater part of my friends ').
76. Spanish adverbs form both their comparative and
superlative by prefixing mas to the positive. There is
usually no difference in form between the comparative
and the superlative.
despacio, slowly. mas despacio, more {or most) slowly.
a. The neuter article lo is often prefixed to a superlative adverb when
it is followed by a word or clause expressing possibility.
lo mas pronto posible, the soonest possible, or as soon as possible.
lo mas pronto que pudo, as soon as he could.
77. The following adverbs are compared irregularly :
bien, mejor, well, better or best.
mal, peor, badly, worse or worst.
mucho, mas, much (a great deal), more or most,
poco, menos, little, less or least.
a. Mas bien means * rather ' : esta cansado mas bien que enfermo,
* he is tired rather than ill.'
78. Than is usually expressed in Spanish by que.
§1 es mas alto que usted, he is taller than you.
tiene mas libros que dinero, he has more books than money.
a. Before a numeral, * more than ' and * less than,' meaning * a greater
number than ' and * a smaller number than,' are expressed by mas de and
menos de : hay mas de cinco, * there are more than five ' ; tiene menos
de veinte anos, * he is less than twenty years old ' ; but el caballo es mas
fuerte que cinco hombres, * a horse is stronger than five men,' since mas
doea not here mean * a greater number.'
LESSON XV y*J
b. No mas . , . que usually means * only.' Compare :
no gastaron mas de cien pesos, they did not spend more than one hun-
dred dollars.
no gastaron mas que cien pesos, they spent only one hundred dollars.
c. Before a clause, *than' is usually expressed by del (= de + el) que,
and its dedined forms, de la que, de los que, de las que, when the com-
parison is with a noun (expressed or understood) of the main clause; or
by de lo que when the comparison is with a statement or idea.
me ha dado mas dinero del que le preste, he has given me more money
than (that which) I lent him.
tiene mas libros de los que tenia, he has more bo£>ks than (those which)
he had.
es mas rico de lo que crees, he is richer than (what) you believe.
d. But, if the action of one verb is compared wdth that of another,
' than ' before a clause is que : habla mas que trabaja, he talks more
than he works.
79. Tan . . . como = as . . . as, ^r so . . . as.
Tanto (-a) . . . como = as much ... as, or so much ... as.
Tantos (-as) como = as many ... as, or so many ... as.
tan bianco como la nieve, as white as snow.
tanto oro como plata, as much gold as silver.
no tiene tanta plata como oro, he hasn't so much silver as gold.
tantas manzanas como peras, as many apples as pears.
Exercise XV
A. I. Tu eres mayor que el, pero el es el mas alto.
2. Si ; ^1 es mas alto de lo que yo creia. 3. Juan dijo^
que cuanto mas gastaba, tanto mas tenia. 4. La verdad es
que cuanto mas tenia, mas gastaba. 5. Ya ha gastado la
mayor parte de su fortuna. 6. Yo tengo tres hermosos
perros. 7. Don Jorge tenia cinco perros el ano pasado.
8. En este momento Don Jorge tiene mas perros que
yo. 9. Pero tiene menos de los que tenia el ano pasado.
78 SPANISH GRAMMAR
^Cuantos tiene? lo. <jCuantos anos tiene su senor padre?
II. Tiene 75 aiios, — 45 mas que yo. 12. He escrito^ lo
mas de prisa posible. 13. Pero no he tenido tiempo de acabar
la carta. 14. ^Esta usted cansada, sefiora? 15. Estoy
enferma mas bien que cansada. 16. Ella pesa mas que el,
y ^1 pesa mas de cien libras. 17. El caballo es el animal
mas util, y el perro es el animal mas fiel. 18. El oro vale
mas que el hierro, pero el hierro es el mas util. 19. La
muchacha mas linda de la ciudad se cas6 con^ el joven mas
feo. 20. El mayor mal de los males es tratar con animales
(refran espafiol). 2 1 . Costaba mas trabajo de lo que parecia ;
pero de lo peor ha sucedido lo mejor. 22. La vaca da mas
leche de la que daba el ano pasado. 23. Tenemos menos
criados de los que teniamos cuando usted nos visit6.* 24. 6I
no sufre tanto como usted cree : no sufre tanto como ella.
B, I. You (^fam,^ sing.) are the best friend in the world.
2. No, I am not the best friend in the world. 3. I am the
best friend that you have or have had. 4. He has more friends
than L 5. I have more books than he. 6. And my books
are, and have always been, my best friends. 7. This house is
larger than that house, but that house is the higher. 8. He is
older than I, but not so old as my brother. 9. He is richer and
more independent than you (^forin,^ ^^^^g-)^ but he is not so happy.
10. The more he works, the more he has ; and the more he has, the
more he spends. 11. London is the largest and the wealthiest
city in the world, but it is not the most beautiful. 12. She is older
than I, but I am taller than she. 13. He is the most unfortunate
man that I know ^ ; he has lost most of the money that he earned last
month. 14. He is writing more slowly than you {form., sing.),
but he is writing as fast as he can.^ 15. The firm of Gonzales
Brothers has more employes than the firm of Herrera and Com-
pany. 1 6. Gonzales Brothers employ more than two hundred men.
17. Herrera and Company do not employ more than one hundred.
18. But the firm of Gonzales Brothers has less employes this year
than it had last year. 19. He lent me'' fivo, dollars more than I
LESSON XVI 79
asked-for. 20. But he did not lend me so much as 1 wished.
21. I have more than seven cents and less than nine. How many
have I ? 22. It is colder outdoors than I thought.^ 23. But it
is not so cold today as it was yesterday.
1 Pret. of decir. 2 Past part, of escribir, 3 « married.* "* • visited us.'
^ que conozco. ^ puede, ^^ ^^^^ (^before the verb) . ^ creia.
LESSON XVI
80. Adjectives used Substantively. — In English, ad-
jectives are sometimes used substantively; as, 'the old
and the young.' This construction is commoner in
Spanish than in English. If a noun is understood,
the adjective takes the gender and number of the noun
it represents. *One,' or *ones,' after the English adjec-
tive, is usually not to be translated into Spanish.
los ricos y los pobres, the rich prefiero el caballo negro al bianco,
and the poor. I prefer the black horse to the
el viejo, the old man. white one.
a. If the adjective is used substantively as the name of a color or as an
abstract noun, it requires the article lo. See § 54.
81. The Plural Number. — (i) The masculine plural form
of adjectives and pronouns may denote male and female beings
considered collectively.
los viejos, the old men and the old women, or the old man and the
old woman, or simply the old men.
ellos tienen miedo, they are afraid (referring to men and women, or
to a man and a woman, or to men alone) .
The plural of most nouns denoting male beings may be used
in the same way.
80 SPANISH GRAMMAR
los hermanos, the brothers and sisters, or the brother and the sister,
or the brothers.
los padres, the fathers and mothers, or the father and the mother
(= the parents), or the fathers.
(2) In treating collectively of a number of persons or
things, a singular noun is generally used in Spanish to denote
something that belongs to every member of a group if, in the
case of each member, but one object of the kind is concerned.
los ninos se lavaron la cara y las manos, the children washed their
faces and hands.
todos los discipulos levantaron la mano, all the pupils raised their
hands {i.e. each raised one of his two hands) .
(3) Abstract nouns are frequently used in the plural in a
concrete sense.
terneza, tenderness. ternezas, tender words or deeds.
82. Indicative. Future and Conditional.
Tener :
FUTURE TENSE
Singular Plural
1. tendr§, I shall have, or shall be having. i. tendremos
2. tendras 2. tendrils
3. tendrd 3. tendrdn
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Singular Plural
1. tendria, I should have, or should be having. i. tendriamos
2. tendrias 2. tendriais
3. tendria 3. tendrian
Haber :
FUTURE TENSE
Singular Plural
1. habri, I shall have. i. habremos
2. habras 2. habreis
3. habra 3. habran
LESSON XVI
8i
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Singular
1. habria, I should have.
2. habrias
3. habria
Sen
Singular
1. sere, I shall be
2. seras
3. sera
Singular
1. seria, I should be.
2. serias
3. seria
Estar :
Singular
1. estare, I shall be.
2. estaras
3. estara
Singular
1. estaria, I should be.
2. estarias
3. estaria
FUTURE TENSE
CONDITIONAL TENSE
FUTURE TENSE
CONDITIONAL TENSE
Plural
1. habriamos
2. habriais
3. habrian
Plural
1. seremos
2. sereis
3. seran
Plural
1. seriamos
2. serials
3. serian
Plural
1. estaremos
2. estar § is
3. estaran
Plural
1. estariamos
2. estariais
3. estarian
83. Indicative. Future Perfect.
Hablar :
I shall have spoken, 07- I shall have been speaking.
Plural
1. habremos hablado
2. habreis hablado
3. habran hablado
Singular
1. habr§ hablado
2. habrds hablado
3. habrd hablado
a. Habrd also means, * there will be'
have been.'
habra habido, * there will
82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
84. The future may be used instead of the present, and the
conditional instead of the imperfect, to denote probabiUty or
conjecture.
I que hora es ? — seran las once. * what time is it ? it is probably
(about) eleven o'clock.'
I que hora era ? — serian las doce. * what time was it ? it was probably
(about) twelve o'clock.'
a. Similarly the future perfect may be used instead of the perfect:
I quien ha abierto la puerta? — habra sido Jose. * who opened the door ?
it was probably Joseph.'
Exercise XVI
A. I. ^Prefiere usted la casa blanca a la amarilla? 2. Si,
senor; prefiero la blanca a la amarilla. 3. Los ricos viven
bien : los pobres sufren. 4. Un viejo y una vieja han en-
trado aqui, y quieren hablar a usted. 5. ^iCuantos hijos tiene
usted, senora? 6. Tengo tres, dos hijos varones y una hija.
7. ^iCuantos gatitos tiene la gata? 8. Tiene cinco, dos
machos y tres hembras. 9. Alfredo tiene cuatro abuelos, los
dos padres de su papa y los dos padres de su mama. 10. ^ A
qui^n tendr6 por companero? — A mi,^ que sere siempre tu
amigo. II. ^j Quien llama a la puerta? — Probablemente
sera el medico. 12. ^Cuantos anos tiene el nino? — Tendra
unos^ diez anos. 13. ^iCuantos anos tenia el muchacho
cuando muri6? — Tendria unos diez y seis anos. 14. No
dudo que sera rico. 15. i Habra desgracia mayor para un
joven de talento ! 16. (iQue hora era cuando parti6? —
Serian las once de la noche. 17. Serian las cuatro de la tarde
cuando oimos un gran ruido por^ la calle. 18. Serian las diez
de la mafiana cuando lleg6 el general. 19. Parecia un hombre
que tendria unos cincuenta anos. 20. ^Cuanto perdi6? —
Perderia mas de mil pesos. 21. Juan es muy bobo : dice que
cuanto mas estudia, tanto menos sabe, y cuanto menos estudia,
tanto mas sabe. 22. ^A qu6 distancia de aqui esta la casa
LESSON XVI 83
de usted ? — A una manzana (cuadra) y media. 23. No es tan
lejos como yo creia. 24. Miguel Cervantes, autor inmortal de
" Don Quijote de la Mancha/' era, es, y sera uno de los au tores
mas celebres de Espafia. 25. Cervantes naci6 a mediados
del siglo diez y seis, y muri6 a principios del siglo diez y siete.
B, I. God loves the old (//.) and the young, the large and the
small, the good and the bad. 2. The red book is prettier than
the black one. 3. The black one is more interesting than the red
one. 4. Alfred lives with his parents, his grandparents, and his
brothers-and-sisters. 5. He has three grandparents, the father-
and-mother of his father and his mother's mother. 6. He has
four brothers-and-sisters, two brothers and two sisters. 7. Now
that I am a man, I have more friends and more enemies than I had
when I was a boy. 8. I haven't so much money nor so many
friends as you (^forni,^ sing,') ; but I have more books than you
have. 9. Asia is the largest continent, and Australia is the largest
island, in the world. 10. North America is twice as large as*
Europe. 11. He has more influence than he had five years ago.
12. You (^fam., sing.) were, are, and always will be^ my best
friend. 13. What o'clock is it ? I t-is-probably-about four o'clock.
14. What time was it when you returned home ? ^ It-was-probably-
about ten o'clock at night. 15. How old is he ? I-should-say-
that-he-is-probably-about fifteen years old. 16. How old was he
when he came "^ to this country ? He was-about six years old.
17. This parrot will live perhaps one hundred years ; but we shall
not live so long a time.^ 18. There are one hundred and seVenty-
five pages in this book. 19. I have read as-far-as the eighty-ninth
page.^ 20. The horse is more useful than the dog; but the dog
is the most faithful of all animal s.^^ 21. I do not suffer more
than you (^fam.^ sing.) ; but I suffer more than I used-to-suffer.
22. The Mexican dollar has one hundred cents ; the Spanish peseta
has one hundred centimes. 23. The Mexican dollar is worth two
and a half Spanish pesetas, or the half of an American dollar. ^^
1 ' me.' 2 < some.' 8 * in.' 4 Say : ' is two times {yeces) larger than.'
S Say : ' will be always.' 6 d casa. "^ vino. 8 Say : ' so much time.*
9 Say: ' the page eighty-nine.' l^ Say : ' of all the animals.' ^^ Say ; ' or
half dollar American-"
84
SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XVII
85. Imperative Mood.
Singular
2. habla
Singular
2. teme
Singular
2. vive
Hablar
Temer
Vivir
Plural
2. hablad
Plural
2, temed
Plural
2. vivid
With habla, teme, and vive, tii is understood ; while vosotros (-as)
is understood with hablad, temed, and vivid.
86. The imperative mood is limited to the second person
singular and plural. It is also limited to positive commands or
entreaties. See § Sj, a.
a. The final -d of the plural imperative is lost before the object-pronoun
OS, *you, yourselves' (cf. § 89); preparaos (for preparad-os), * prepare
yourselves.*
87. Subjunctive
Present Tense.
Singular
Hablar
Plural
I. hable
I.
hablemos
2. hables
2.
hableis
3. hable
Singular
Temer
3.
hablen
Plural
I. tema
I.
temamos
2. temas
2.
temais
3. tema
Singular
Vivir
3.
teman
Plural
I. viva
I.
vivamos
2. vivas
2.
vivdis
3. viva
3-
vivan
LESSON XVII
85
The present subjunctive is often used in Spanish to
express command or entreaty.
hable el, let him speak. hablemos, let us speak.
hable ella, let her speak. que Juan hable, let John speak.
Note that the present subjunctive in these expressions is usually to be
translated into English by * let ' and the infinitive ; but when used with
usted (or ustedes), it is translated by the imperative.
hable usted, speak. abra usted la puerta, open the door.
a. In the second person, singular and plural, the present subjunctive is
used to express a negative command or entreaty, while in a positive com-
mand or entreaty the imperative is used; thus:
habla, or hablad, speak. no hables, or no hableis, do not speak.
b. The final -s of the first person plural of the present subjunctive is
omitted before the object-pronoun nos, * us,' ' ourselves ' : sentemonos (for
sentemos-nos), Met us seat ourselves.'
88. Radical-changing Verbs.
Imperative :
FIRST AND
SECOND CONJUGATIONS
Temblar
Singular
Plural
2. tiembla
Perder
2k temblad
Singular
Plural
2. pierde
Contar
2. perded
Singular
Plural
2. cuenta
Volver
2. contad
Singular
Plural
2. vuelve
2. volved
86
SPANISH GRAMMAR
THIRD
CONJUGATION
Sentir
Singular
Plural
2. siente
Pedir
2. sentid
Singular
Plural
2. pide
Dormir
2. pedid
Singula.^
Plural
2. duerme
2. dormid
Present Subjunctive:
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS
Singular
1. tiemble
2. tiembles
3. tiemble
Singular
1. pierda
2. pierdas
3. pierda
Singular
1. cuente
2. cuentes
3. cuente
Singular
1. vuelva '
2. vuelvas
3. vuelva
Temblar
Perder
Contar
Volver
Plural
1. temblemos
2. tembl6is
3. tiemblen
Plural
1. perdamos
2. perdais
3. pierdan
Plural
1. contemos
2. conteis
3. cuenten
Plural
1. volvamos
2. volvdis
3. vuelvan
LESSON XVII
THIRD
CONJUGATION
Singular
Sentir
Plural
1. sienta
2. 'sientas
3. sienta
Singular
Pedir
I.
2.
3.
sintamos
sintais
sientan
Plural
1. pida
2. pidas
3. pida
Singular-
Dormir
I.
2.
3-
pidamos
pidais
pidan
Plural
1. duerma
2. duermas
3. duerma
I.
2.
3.
durmamo
durmais
duerman
87
Note that the radical-changing verbs of the third conjugation change
e to /, and 0 to ti^ in the first and second persons plural of the present
subjunctive, even though the syllables in question are not accented.
Exercise XVII
A, I. Evita la mala compafiia, y busca la buena. 2. Nino;
no hables tan alto : habla bajo. 3. Silvestre ; cierra la ven-
tana. La luz del sol me ciega. 4. Enciende la vela, que ^
ya es tarde : no enciendas la lampara. 5. Apaga la vela, pero
no apagues la lampara. 6. Tomemos el tranvia (el carro el^c-
trico). No puedo andar mas. 7. Dios quiera que tus
anos sean^ colmados de toda prosperidad. 8. No tema
usted nada : aqui esta usted en seguridad. 9. No mientas,
nino. Siempre es laverdad mejor que la mentira. 10. Suba
usted a la biblioteca. Alii hallara una carta para usted.
II. No dejes de estudiar la lecci6n para mafiana, porque es
bastante dificil. 12. El orador dijo : temed a los traidores
88 SPANISH GRAMMAR
de la patria, pero no temais a los enemigos. 13. Ni-
nes, bebed agua pura : no bebais cafe, te, vino, ni cerveza.
14. Leamos la carta. Tengo ganas de saber lo que dice.^
15. Sentemonos aqui, y hablemos. Yo no entiendo de suavi-
dades y hablo con mucha franqueza. 16. Madrid es una
hermosa ciudad : tiene muchos edificios magnificos y calles y
paseos espl^ndidos. 17. En la parte antigua las calles son
estrechas y tortuosas; pero en la parte nueva son anchas y
derechas. 18. La peseta espanola tiene cuatro reales 6 cien
c^ntimos. 19. El peso mejicano tiene cien centavos.
20. Una peseta espanola tiene el valor de veinte centavos
americanos. 21. Un peso mejicano tiene el valor de
cincuenta centavos americanos.* 22. En Espafia, toman
generalmente el cafe 6 el chocolate a las ocho de la ma-
nana. 23. Almuerzan a las once 6 a las doce, y comen
a las seis de la tarde. 24. Cenan despues del teatro 6 de
la 6pera.
B. I. Let us avoid the bad (neut. sing.) and seek the good.
2. Children, wash ^ your ears, eyes, and noses, and clean your finger-
nails. 3. Work {fa7n., pL), but do not work too long ; sleep, but
do not sleep more than nine hours. 4. Eat {fa7n., pi.) enough, but
do not eat too much ; eat healthful foods, but do not eat sweets and ^
pastry. 5. Drink (fam., pi.) water and milk, but do not drink
coffee, tea, wine, beer, or^ brandy. 6. Read {fam., sing.) this
letter, if you wish; but do not read the other. 7. Write {fam.,
sing.) to your friends, but do not write to your enemies. 8. Run
{fam., sing.) and play, but do not run and^ play when you should
be-studying. 9. Buy {form., sing.) the white horse, but do not
buy the black one. 10. Sell {for7n., pi.) the large house, but do
not sell the small one. 11. Let us light the lamp, and put out
the candle. 12. Let us shut the door, and open the window.
13. Let"^ John shut the door, and open the window. 14. May"^
the boys avoid bad company, and seek good company.^ 15. Let
us write to our uncles-and-aunts, but let us not write to our cousins.
16. Write {fam., pi.) to your brothers-and-sisters, but do not write
LESSON XVIII
89
to your uncles-and-aunts or^ your cousins. 17. Write (^fam.^
sing.) short letters; do not write long letters. 18. Write {forjn.^
sing.) Spanish letters; do not write English letters.
1 'for.' 2 ' rnay be.'
approximate. 5 lavaos.
seek the good,'
3 ' what it says.'
6 Say: 'nor.'
4 This is, of course, only
'^ Use que. 8 gay : ' and
LESSON XVIII
89. Personal Pronouns. — The Spanish personal pro-
nouns used as the subject or object of verbs are^:
I.
2.
C m
If-
Subject
yo, I.
tii, you, thou.
el, he, it.
ena, she, it.
Singular
Direct Object
me, me.
te, you, thee.
le or lo, him, it.
la, her, it.
Plural
Indirect Object
me, to me.
te, to you, to thee.
le, to him, to her, to it.
(la), (to her).
I.
2.
Subject Direct Object
nosotros (-as), we. nos, us.
vosotros (-as), you, ye. os, you.
in. ellos, ) los,
/. ellas, I ^^^>'- las,
::f
them.
Indirect Object
nos, to us.
OS, to you.
les, to them,
(las), (to them,/.).
a. In English a subject-pronoun is rarely omitted ; in Spanish it
is regularly omitted unless required for emphasis or clearness : hablo,
' I am speaking^ ; yo hablo, ^/am speaking.' The pronoun is some-
times required when the form of the verb would not make it clear
what pronoun is understood ; thus, yo (§1, ella) hablaba, 'I (he, she)
was speaking.'
1 Usted and ustedes, the neuter pronouns ello and lo, and the reflexive
pronouns se and si, will be treated separately in subsequent paragraphs.
go SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. In English an object-pronoun regularly follows the verb ; in
Spanish it usually precedes.
nos aman, they love us.
ella me teme, she fears me.
Antonio te da un libro, Anthony gives you a book.
If the sentence is negative, no immediately precedes the object-
pronoun : ella no me teme, ' she does not fear me. '
c. But sometimes the object-pronoun follows the verb, and is
attached to it so that the verb and pronoun form one word. This
occurs when the pronoun is the object of an infinitive, a present
participle, or a positive imperative (including the positive subjunc-
tive used with imperative force) .
temerle, (to) fear him ; Uamandome, calling me ;
c6mpralo, buy it ; sent^monos, let us sit down ;
but
no lo compres, do not buy it ; no nos sentemos, let us not sit down.
d. When a present participle or an infinitive is used with an auxiliary
verb, the object-pronoun may usually either precede the auxiliary or follow
its main verb.
me esta aguardando or esta aguardandome, * he is waiting for me.'
la quiero ver or quiero verla, * I wish to see her.'
e. If the sentence (or clause) begins with the verb, the object-pronoun
may follow ; but this rarely occurs if the verb is future, conditional, or the
second person of the preterite.
dmame, he loves me ; am6me, he loved me ;
amdbame, he used to love me ;
etc. (but rarely amarame, amariame, amdsteme, etc.).
f. In English one may say, * give me the book,' or * give the book to
me ' ; both expressions are to be translated into Spanish by dame el libro,
if the * me ' is not emphatic : cf. § 103, a,
g. It should be noted that the English pronouns * him,' *her,' and
* them ' may be used as either direct or indirect object ; and that, if used
LESSON XVIII 91
as direct object, they should be expressed in Spanish by one set of pro-
nouns, while if used as indirect, they should be expressed by another set.
la teme, he fears her,
le da un libro, he gives her a book.
los ama, he loves them.
les da el libro, he gives them the book.
The masculine singular le, however, is used as either direct or indirect object.
h. In order to avoid ambiguity by indicating gender, the feminine direct
object-pronoun (accusative) is sometimes used instead of the indirect
object-pronoun (dative) : el la (or las) qued6 fiel hasta la muerte, * he
remained faithful to her {or them, fem^ till death.'
i. The masculine singular pronoun of the third person has two forms,
le and lo. It is usually considered best to use le when referring to a
person, and lo when referring to a thing ; but some speakers and writers
use only le, while others prefer lo.
Exercise XVIII
A, I. Ella me teme, pero no me ama. 2. Yo la amo yla
temo tambi(§n. 3. Yo los buscaba, y ellos me buscaban.
4. Yo no los halle, y ellos no me hallaron. 5. Tu las
aborrecias, y ellas te aborrecian. 6. Juan las apreciaba, y ellas
le (^r lo) apreciaban. 7. i Quiere usted vender su bicicleta?
8. Si, senor ; quiero venderla. 1^0 quiere usted comprarla?
9. No, sefior; yo no la quiero comprar. 10. V^ndala a su
primo Don Jos^ : no la venda al sefior Morales. 11. Lla-
male. No ; espera un momento : no le (or lo) llames ahora.
12. La encontr^ en la calle de Preciados, y le di^ la carta.
13. Le {or lo) halle en su casa, y le devolvi el libro. 14. Los
vi^ esta manana, y les dije^ que usted estaba en la ciudad.
15. Las buscaba por todas partes para decirles que usted estaba
aqui. 16. Pero no las hall^, y por consiguiente no les dije
nada.* 17. ^Nos aguarda Juan? — Si; os aguarda hace
dos horas. 18. Quiere pagaros lo que^ os debe. 19. ^Te
pag6 la cuenta? — No la pag6, y creo que no quiere pagarla.
92 SPANISH GRAMMAR
20. <J Me biisca el sefior Santilla ? — Si ; te busca para pedirte un
favor. Evitale. 21. ^ Ha escrito usted el ejercicio? 22. No
lo (o7' le) he escrito todavia. Lo {or le) escribir^ esta tarde.
23. ^Cuando escribiras la carta a tu mama? 24. La escribir^
manana por la manana. 25. ^i D6nde ha comprado usted estas
naranjas? 26. Las compre esta manana en la tienda de Garcia.
B. I.I wish to see him and to speak to him. 2. You {fa7n.^
sing.) wish to see her and speak to her, do you not ? 3. We
wish to see them {inasc.) and speak to them as soon as possible.
4. Do you (^forni,^ pi.) not wish to see them (^fe^n.) and speak to
them today ? 5. We have already seen them {fern.) and have
spoken to them. 6. Did you (^fam.^ sing.) see ^ the girl? I saw'^
her. 7. Did you see the boy? I saw him. 8. Did you (/i2;;;^.,
sing.) see the boys ? I saw them. 9. Did you see the girls ? I
saw them. 10. Did you (^fam.^ pi.) find the book? We found
it. II. Did you find the pen? We found it. 12. Did you
{fam., pi.) find the pens? We found them. 13. Did you find
the books ? We found them. 14. Did you {form.y sing.) sell
the house? I did not sell it, and I do not wish to sell it. 15. Did
you (^form.^ pi.) buy the carriage ? We did not buy it, but we wish
to buy it. 16. If you (^fam.., sing.) wish to buy the hat, buy it;
if you do not wish to buy it, do not buy it. 17. If you (^farn.j
pi.) wish to sell the bicycle, sell it ; if you do not wish to sell it, do
not sell it. 18. If you {form.^ sing.) prefer to sell the horses, sell
them ; if you do not prefer to sell them, do not sell them. 19. If
you {form.^ pi.) prefer to buy the cows, buy them; if you do not
prefer to buy them, do not buy them. 20. Did you {fam., sing.)
speak to John? I did not speak to him, and I do not wish to speak
to him. 21. Did you {fam.^ pi.) speak to Mary? We did not
speak to Mary, but we wish to speak to her. 22. If you {form.^
sing.) wish to lend the boys ten dollars, lend them ten dollars ; do
not lend them more. 23. If you {form., pi.) prefer to lend the
girls the pens, lend them the pens. 24. If you do not prefer to
lend them the pens, do not lend them the pens.
1 ' I gave/ Pret. of dar. 2 « i saw,' Pret. of ver, ^ ' I said/ Pret. of decir.
4 ' anything.' ^ < what.' 6 visU. "^ vi.
LESSON XIX 93
LESSON XIX
90. Tu and usted, — English ^you' may be expressed in
Spanish by tii, //., vosotros (-as), or by usted, //., ustedes.
Usted (//., ustedes) is a contraction of vuestra merced, 'your
grace'; it is treated as a noun and requires the verb, object-
pronouns, and possessives in the third person singular or plural.
Thus, addressing a woman one would say :
I como estd usted ? how are you? (lit., ' how is your grace? ^).
yo la vi esta manaha, I saw you this morning (lit., 'I saw her/
referring to the noun element in usted).
vi tambi^n a su hermana, I saw your sister also (lit., * I saw her
sister').
It will be observed that usted has all the attributes of a noun
except gender : it assumes the gender of the person addressed.
Usted and ustedes may be abbreviated in writing to V. and VV.,
or to Vd. and Vds.
When ' you ' stands for the name of a near relative, an intimate friend,
a small child, an animal, or an inanimate object, it is usually to be trans-
lated by tu. The word tii corresponds also to English * thou,' used in
poetic and sacred language. The plural of tii is vosotros (-as). In all
other cases 'you' should be expressed by usted (//., ustedes). Thus it
would be rude to address a stranger or mere acquaintance as tii ; while, on
the other hand, to address an intimate friend as usted would indicate scorn
or anger. 1
a, Vosotros, instead of ustedes, is sometimes used by orators in ad-
dressing an audience.
1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world vosotros and the corre-
sponding form of the verb are no longer used in colloquial language. Thus, a
Cuban or Mexican father would address one child as tu, but two or more as
ustedes.
94 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. Nos and vos may occur, instead of yo and tii, in royal proclamations
and official documents : nos el rey mandamos . . ., ' I, the king, com-
mand.' Vos instead of usted occurs commonly in the older Spanish
works.
91. Tlllo and io. — There is no pronoun in Spanish exactly
corresponding to English ^it.' All Spanish nouns are either
masculine or feminine ; hence, if 4t * represents a noun, it is
expressed in Spanish by a masculine or feminine pronoun, ac-
cording to the gender of the noun represented. Thus, speak-
ing of el libro, ' it ' would be el, lo, or le ; while speaking of
la pluma, ^ it ' would be ella, la, or le, according as ' it ' is sub-
ject, direct object, or indirect object.
If *it' does not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sen-
tence, or idea, it may be expressed by ello (subject-pronoun or
object of a preposition) or lo (object-pronoun), as in convengo
en ello, * I agree to it,' no lo creo, ' I do not believe it.*
But *it,' when the subject of a verb, is usually not expressed
in Spanish at all. Thus, speaking of la casa, one would say,
es muy alta, ' it is very high ' ; or speaking of something that
happened, one would say, no es importante, ^it is not im-
portant.' If ^ it ' represents nothing definite, but is merely
expletive, it can not be expressed in Spanish : Uueve, ' it is
raining ' ; nieva, ^ it is snowing.'
a. As a subject-pronoun the neuter ello occurs commonly only in the
expression ello es que (cf. the French c'est que) — * the fact is that.'
b. Lo is often used in the predicate to refer to a preceding noun or
adjective : ^ es el huerfano ? — Si, lo es, * Is he an orphan ? Yes; he is
(one) '; sus ojos parecen negros sin serlo, *his eyes appear black with-
out being so.*
But if the preceding noun refers to a definite person, the personal
pronoun agrees in gender and number with the noun : ^ eres tu la hija
del senor Garcia ? — ^\, la soy, * Are you the daughter of Mr. Garcia ?
Yes; I am.*
LESSON XIX
92. Imperative : Tener, Saber, Ser, JEstar.
Tener .
95
Singular
Plural
2. ten
Haber
2. tened
Singular
Plural
2. h^l
Ser
2. habedi
Singular
Plural
2. se
Estar
2. sed
Singular
Plural
2. esta
2. estad
93. Subjunctive Present : Tener y Haber , Ser, Estar.
Tener
Singular
Plural
1. tenga
2. tengas
3- tenga
Singular
Haber
I.
2.
3-
tengamos
tengais
tengan
Plural
1. haya
2. hayas
3. haya
Singular
Ser
I.
2.
3.
hayamos
haydis
hayan
Plural
I. sea
I.
seamos
2. seas
2.
sedis
3. sea
Singular
Estar
3.
sean
Plural
I. est6
I.
estemos
2. estes
2.
estlis
3. este
3.
estin
1 Rarely used.
Some regard he as
not a part of haber.
96 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Subjunctive. Perfect Tense.
Hablar
Singular Plural
1. haya hablado i. hayamos hablado
2. hayas hablado 2. hayais hablado
3. haya |iablado 3. hayan hablado
a, Haya, used as an impersonal verb, means * there may be,' * let there
be,' etc.; haya habido, 'there may have been.'
Exercise XIX
A, I. Paguele usted lo que le debe, pero no le pague un
real mas. 2. Amigo mio ^ : prestame diez pesos. 3. Nopuedo
prestarte diez pesos, porque no los tengo. 4. La quiero ver
para hablarle de un asunto importante. 5. ^iTe gustan las
manzanas ? — Si ; me gustan mucho. 6. i Os gustaba el clima
de Madrid? — No nos gustaba : era malisimo. 7. Desperte-
mosla, que ya es tarde. 8. No la despertemos todavia. La
pobre nifia no esta buena. 9. ^Vendiste los cabailos? —
Si; los vendi a mi primo Onofre. 10. ^Vendiste las vacas
tambien? — Si; las vendi. 11. ^Quieres llamar a los ninos?
— Ya los llame hace dos horas. 12. Bueno ; ten la bondad
de llamarlos otra vez. 13. Quitaronme el uniforme de militar.
i Dios tenga piedad de mi !^ 14. Ten los oidos y los ojos
abiertos; pero no tengas miedo de nada.^ 15. Tenga usted
la bondad de cerrar la ventana. Tengo frio. 16. Haya
paces, y dejen ustedes de disputar. 17. Sean francos, y
diganme^ la verdad. 18. Hemos de estudiar desde la linea
diez de la pagina cincuenta hasta la linea veinte y ocho de la
pagina cincuenta y siete. 19. Caballero ; usted habla dema-
siado pronto. No le {or lo) puedo entender. 20. Caba-
lleros ; ustedes hablan demasiado pronto. No los puedo
entender. 21. Buenos dias, Don Jorge. ^ Como esta usted ?
LESSON XIX 97
Yo le {or lo) busque ayer sin poder^ hallarle {or hallarlo).
22. Desee pagarle lo que ^ le debo. 23. Sefiora; perd6neme
usted. Quiero hablarle de un asunto desagradable, pero no
quiero irritarla. 24. Hable usted; caballero. Digame^ lo
que^ quiera decir : no me irritara ello. 25. Senoras;
£ustedes me permiten que las acompane?
B, Write the first four sentences twice, making < you ' masculine
in one set and feminine in the other.
I. Good day! How are you {fain., sing. ^'^. I met you yester-
day, but I did not speak to you. Are you well?''^ 2. Good day!
How are you {form., sing.)}. I met you yesterday, but I did not
speak to you. Are you well?''' 3. Good day! How are you
{fam., pi.)} I met you yesterday, but I did not speak to you.
Are you well? "^ .4. Good day! How are you {form., pi.)} I
met you yesterday, but I did not speak to you. Are you well?''
5. Did you {form., sing.) buy the hat? I bought it. 6. Did you
{form., sing.) sell the chair? I sold it. 7. Do you {fam., sing.)
beHeve it? I believe it. 8. Do you {fain., sing.) agree to ^ it?
9. Is the door higher than I? It is higher than you {fam., sing.),
ID. Is the trunk larger than I? It is larger than you {fam.,
sing.). II. I saw him, and I spoke to him; but I did not
see her, and consequently I did not speak to her. 12. I found
them {masc.)j and I gave them the letter; I did not find them
{fem.), and I did not give them the book. 13. Did you {fam.j
sing.) ask pardon of your uncle? I did not ask pardon of-him,
and I do not intend to ask pardon of-him. 14. Have {form.^
sing.) the kindness to burn the letter. I do not wish to keep it.
15. Do {form.., sing.., jnasc.) not be fooHsh ; tell us the truth. Do
not He to us ever.^ 16. Be {fain., sing.) afraid of traitors; but
do not be afraid of your enemies. 17. He found us, and he gave
the letter to us. 18. Did she meet you {fam.., pi.) and give the book
to you? 19. He met me and asked me for twenty-five pesetas. '^^
20. I did not have them, and, moreover, I did not want to lend him
2ireal. 21. Do you {fam., sing.) like oranges ^i? Yes; but I
like peaches better. ^^ 22. Do you {fam., pi.) like to read Span-
98 SPANISH GRAMMAR
ish books? 23. Yes ; we like to read Spanish and English books
very much.^^ 24. Read {forfn,^ pi.) from page twenty-seven,
line fifteen, to page thirty-three, Hne twenty-two.
1 • my friend.' 2 « on me.' 3 « anything.' 4 « tell me,' Pres. Subj. of
decir, 5 ' being able.' 6 'what.' ^ Use bueno. 8 convienes en.
9 nunca. 10 gay : ' asked of-me (dative) twenty-five pesetas' n Say : ' do
the oranges please {gustar) you ? ' 12 gay : ' but please me more the
peaches.' 13 < very much,' mMchisimo.
LESSON XX
94. Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses. — The general
difference between the Spanish indicative and subjunc-
tive moods is that the indicative states or denies a fact,
while the subjunctive expresses (i) a wish, (2) doubt or
uncertainty, or (3) the cause of emotion.
95. The Spanish subjunctive may be used independently to
express command or entreaty (as explained in Lesson XVII),
but it is used much oftener in dependent clauses. There is no
mood (or but few survivals of one ; cf. * if I were ') in English
corresponding to the Spanish subjunctive. In cases where the,
Spanish language requires the subjunctive in subordinate clauses,
the English has generally the indicative, but sometimes the
infinitive, the present participle, or the compound forms with
* should,* ^may,* or ^ might.'
96. Some of the commoner uses of the dependent
subjunctive are :
(i) After expressions oi willing ox forbidding,
quiero que el escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter.^
prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering.
LESSON XX 99
(2) After expressions of doubting ox fearing,
dudo que seas feliz, I doubt that (whether) you will be happy, or
I doubt your bei7ig happy.
temo que no llegue i tiempo, I fear that he will not arrive in time.^
A negative or an interrogative verb may express doubt : no creo que
seas culpable, *I do not beUeve that you are guilty '; i crees que yo sea
culpable ? * do you beheve that I am guilty ? '
(3) After expressions of joy or sorrow,
siento que usted este enfermo, I am sorry that you are ill.
me alegro de que estudies el inglls, I am glad that you are studying
English.
(4) After expressions of necessity, and after impersonal
expressions not stressing a fact.
es necesario que usted estudie mucho, it is necessary that you should
study a great deal.^
es posible que yo vaya, it is possible that I 7nay go ; c/., es verdad
que fu6, it is true that he went.
(5) After certain conjunctions when the verb denotes future
or indefinite time. The commonest of these conjunctions
are :
para que, in order that. antes que, before.
cuando, when. hasta que, until,
mientras or mientras que, while, as long as. aunque, although, even if.
luego que, as soon as.
para que lo creas, in order that you ??iay believe it.
mientras dure la vida, as long as life lasts.
1 But, yo quiero escribir la carta, ' I wish to write the letter ' ; temo no llegar
a tiempo, ' I fear that I shall not arrive on time,' etc. Here the infinitive is
used because the main and the dependent verbs have the same subject.
2 But, es necesario estudiar mucho, ' it is necessary to study much.*
The infinitive is used here because its subject is not expressed and the obli-
gation is a general one.
LofC.
lOO SPANISH GRAMMAR
no lo vendas antes que yo llegue, do not sell it before I arrive.
no lo acabare aunque trabaje todo el dia, I shall not finish it although
(even if) I work all day.^
(6) After a relative with an indefinite antecedent (subjunc-
tive of characteristic).
busco un hombre que hable espa- no encuentro k nadie que hable
nol, I am looking for a man espanol, I do not find any one
who speaks Spanish. who speaks Spanish.
Note also the following :
^^. The present subjunctive may denote either present or future time.
b. Que is rarely omitted in Spanish : teme que no lleguemos a tiempo,
*he fears (that) we shall not arrive on time.'
But it is sometimes omitted after verbs denoting request, permission, etc.
te suplico tengas la bondad de decirmelo, I beg you to be kind enough
to tell me.
permita le diga que no es verdad, let me tell you that it is not so.
97. Idiomatic Expressions.
por malo que sea, however bad he sea lo que sea, whatever it may
may be. be.
por mas dinero que gane, lo gasta dure que dure, however long it may
todo, whatever money he earns, last; let it last as long as it will.
he spends it all.
Exercise XX
A, I . El esta enamorado : y si lo esta, i que mal Kay en
ello? 2. Ella prefiere vivir sola aunque para ello tenga que
trabajar dia y noche. 3. Este nino es mi hijo, 6 lo mismo
que si lo fuera.^ 4. Siento estar enfermo ; siento que tii
est^s enfermo; tu sientes que yo est^ enfermo. 5. No
quiero escribir la carta : quiero que Pablo la eScriba. Digale
usted que la escriba. 6. El sastre quiere que tu pagues el
1 But the indicative, not the subjunctive, is used if the verb does not denote
future or indefinite time. Compare: ire aunque Uueva, ' I shall go even if it
should rain ' ; ire aunque llueve, ' I shall go even if it is raining (now),'
LESSON XX lOI
vestido mafiana. — Bueno ; lo paga;re manana. 7. Tengo
miedo de morir. Tengo miedo de ^ que ella muera, y ella tiene
miedo de ^ que yo muera. 8. Yo no deseo perder un mo-
mento, y deseo que tu no pierdas tampoco un momento.
9. Yo no puedo consentir en^ que estos j6venes gasten el di-
nero, pierdan el tierapo, y no aprendan nada.^ 10. Cortar6
todos estos arboles para que tengamos lefia para el in-
vierno. 11. Yo no he nacido para amar, ni para que me
amen. 12. ^jPartira usted manana? — Es posible que yo
parta manana? 13. ^Cree usted que sea ella feliz? — Parece
serlo : tal vez lo sera tambien. 14. <i Crees que nuestro padre
llegue hoy? — No; creo que llegara manana. 15. ^iQui^n
habra que resista al invencible poder de Dios? 16. ^ Conoce
usted alguna persona de este pueblo que hable y escriba bien
el castellano ? 1 7- Si, sefior ; conozco a una mujer que habla
y escribe muy bien el castellano. 18. Llamar^ un criado
que lleve esta carta al correo. 19. Segiin dice^ el refran, no
hay mal que dure cien afios. 20. Pedid lo que querais, y
OS lo dare^ si lo tengo. 21. Voy^ esta noche a la 6pera
aunque llueva, pero creo que no llovera. 22. Pero, \ hom-
bre ! Ya llueve. — Bueno ; voy a la 6pera aunque llueve.
B. I. It is lightning (there is lightning), and I fear that it will
rain. I do not think'' so. 2. Is she unhappy? She appears to
be [so], but I can not beheve that she is [so]. 3. Is your (/am.,
sing.) mother very ill ? Yes; she is [so]. 4. I regret that she is
ill, and I hope that she will be well soon. 5. He is sorry (he
regrets) that he is ill, and I also am sorry that he is ill. 6. I wish
to write the letter. I do not wish you (form., sing.) to write it.
7. My father has forbidden my smoking, and I shall not smoke any ^
more. 8. Do you (/am., sing.) believe that they are happy?
9. I beheve that he is happy, but I fear that she is unhappy.
10. I doubt whether s he will arrive on time, but I do not doubt
that he will try^ to do so. 11. Have (form., sing.) the kindness
to wait here until I return. 12. I desire to speak to you, and I
know 10 that you desire to speak to me. 13. As soon as you (/am..
102 SPANISH GRAMMAR
sing.') read this letter, throw it into the fire. 14. As soon as 1
had read the letter, I threw it into the fire. 15. He says ^^ that he
will work even if^^ ^g ^ndiy be tired. 16. He is working now
although he is very tired. 17. I shall give you the money so that
(in order that) you may buy whatever ^^ you wish. 18. It is
necessary to work hard to^^ earn one's ^^ living. 19. It is not
necessary for Mr. Montejo to work hard^^ to earn his^^ living.
20. Who is there that will help me? I know ^^ one person that will
help you {fam., sing.). It is I. 21. Can you {fam.^ sing.) find
a boy to take^^ this letter to the postoffice? 22. I have found a
boy who will take the letter to the postoffice. 23. I beg you
{fonn., sing.) not to be angry with your brother. There is no
cause for^^ it. 24. Do (^fonn., sing.) not worry, Madam. Your
son will accompany you if you will permit him to accompany you.
25. Who has arrived? I do not know^^ who has arrived. You
ought to know [it] : it is your father.
1 • were. ' 2 Do not translate. 3 « anything.' 4 Pres. Ind. of decir,
5 • I shall give it to you.' 6 ' \ am going.' ^ Use creer. 8 Use que,
9 Use the Ind. Mood after ' I do not doubt.' 10 ^e. H dice, 12 aunque,
13 lo que. 14 para. 15 Use the Def. Art. 16 Say : ' that Mr. Montejo
should-work hard.' '^'^ conozco, i^Say: ' that may-take.* '^^ motivo para.
LESSON XXI
98. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns. —
When personal pronouns are governed by a preposition,
the following forms are used :
Singular Plural
\st Pers, mi, me. nosotros (-as), us.
id Per s, ti, you, thee. vosotros (-as), you.
' T X. f Masc, el, him, it. 1 „ ^ x .-.
-xdPers.i ^ „ , • ^ ellos (-as), them.
^ I Fern, ella, her, it. j ^ ^
ello, it {referring to an idea or statement) .
Note that these are the same in form as the subject-pronouns, with the
exception of mi and ti.
LESSON XXI
103
Usted and si, * himself/ 'herself/ etc., are also used with
prepositions.
compre el caballo para ti (para usted), I bought the horse for you.
quiero hablar con el (con ella), I wish to speak with him (with her).
a. When con, * with,' governs mi, ti, or si, the preposition and the
pronoun unite to form one word, and the combination ends with the syllable
-go : conmigo, * with me '; contigo, ' with you '; and consigo, ' with him°
self (herself, etc.).i
99. Subjunctive. Imperfect Tenses,
(i) Regular Verbs.
Hablar :
Temer :
Singular
I. hablase
First Form
I.
Plural
hablasemos
2. hablases
2.
hablaseis
3. hablase
I. hablara^
Second Form
3.
I.
hablasen
hablaramos
2. hablaras
2.
hablarais
3. hablara
3.
hablaran
Singular
I. temiese
First Fo7'm
I.
Plural
temiesemos
2. temieses
2.
temieseis
3. temiese
3.
temiesen
I. temiera
Second Form
I.
temi^ramos
2. temieras
2.
temierais
3. temiera
3-
temieran
1 In early Spanish, 'with me,* 'with thee * 'with himself* (etc.), were migo,,.
tigo, sigo (from Latin, mecum, tecum, secum). Later, con was prefixed, so
that the modern forms conmigo, contigo, consigo, express ' with ' twice.
2 The imperfect subjunctive in -ra is derived from the Latin pluperfect in-
dicative \ama{ve)ra{7}i) > afnara], and it is sometimes still used in Spanish,
with the force of an indicative pluperfect or preterite.
104
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Vivir :
Singular
1. viviese
2. vivieses
3. viviese
1. viviera
2. vivieras
3. viviera
First Form
Second Form
Plural
1. viviesemos
2. vivieseis
3. viviesen
1. vivi^ramos
2. vivierais
3. vivieran
Note that the imperfect subjunctive has two forms, that in -se and that
in -ra. In dependent clauses there is usually little choice between the
two. The form in -se is perhaps used the oftener in Spain, while in some
parts of Spanish America only the form in -ra is in common use.
(2) Radical-changing Verbs.
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir :
Pedir :
Singular
First Form
Plural
I. sintiese
I.
sinti6semos
2. sintieses
2.
sintieseis
3. sintiese
Second Form
3.
sintiesen
I. sintiera
I.
sintieramos
2. sintieras
2.
sintierais
3. sintiera
3-
sintieran
Singular
First Form
Plural
I. pidiese
I.
pidiesemos
2. pidieses
2.
pidieseis
3. pidiese
Second Form
3.
pidiesen
I. pidiera
I.
pidieramos
2. pidieras
2.
pidierais
3. pidiera
3-
pidieran
LESSON XXI
105
Dormir :
Singular
1. durmiese
2. durmieses
3. durmiese
1. durmiera
2. durmieras
3. durmiera
First Form
Second Form
Plural
1. durmiesemos
2. durmieseis
3. durmiesen
1. durmieramos
2. durmierais
3. durmieran
a. The subjunctive imperfect tenses are built up on the same stem as
that of the third person, singular or plural, of the preterite. This is true
of all irregular verbs.
b. The radical-changing e and 0 verbs of the first and second conju-
gations are regular in the imperfect subjunctive.
c. The -ra subjunctive is sometimes called the Conditional Subjunctive.
Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the tvv^o im-
perfect subjunctives.
100. In dependent clauses the imperfect subjunctive
is used instead of the present, when the verb of the
main clause is past. Compare the following sentences :
deseo que el escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter.
desear§ que 61 escriba la carta, I shall wish him to write the letter.
deseaba que el escribiese, or escribiera, la carta, I wished (was wish-
ing) him to write the letter.
desee que el escribiese, or escribiera, la carta, I wished him to write
the letter.
prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering.
prohibir6 que entres, I shall forbid your entering.
prohibia que entrases, or entraras, I forbade (was forbidding) your
entering.
prohibi que entrases, or entraras, I forbade your entering.
temo que usted no llegue k tiempo, I fear that you will not arrive on
time.
I06 SPANISH GRAMMAR
temere que usted no llegue a tiempo, I shall fear that you will not
a7'rive on time.
temia que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I feared (was fear-
ing) that you would not arrive on time.
temi que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I feared that you
would not arrive on time.
101. Sequence of Tenses. — A present or future tense
in the main clause is followed by the present subjunc-
tive, and a past tense by the imperfect. (See the ex-
amples given in the preceding paragraph.)
a. The perfect and the conditional are followed by the present or
imperfect subjunctive according to the meaning of the sentence.
el general ha mandado que los prisioneros sean fusilados, the general
has commanded that the prisoners (should) be shot.
ayer he escrito a Juan que volviese (volviera) a casa, yesterday I
wrote to John to return home.
preferiria que usted la escribiese (escribiera) , I should prefer that you
(should) write it.
podria creer que este enfermo, I could believe that he is ill.
b. After a present or a future tense the imperfect is used to denote a
past action : siento que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I am
sorry that you did not arrive on time.
Exercise XXI
A, I. Nuestra madre compr6 este libro espanol para ti y no
para mi. 2. Quiere trabajar contigo y conmigo, pero no con
^1. 3. Cartero; ^ tiene usted algo para mi? 4. Si, senor;
tengo cartas para usted y periodicos y un paquete grande para
su senor padre. 5. ^iTe permitieron las senoras que las
acompafiases {or acompanaras) ? 6. Si ; me permitieron que
las acompanara {or acompanase). 7. Tengo miedo de morir,
y tengo miedo de^ que mi madre muera. 8. Dijo^ que tenia
miedo de morir, y tenia miedo de que su madre muriera {or
LESSON XXI 107
miiriese). 9. Hoy vendi mi casa de campo, y siento muchi-
simo que tu padre no la comprase (or comprara). 10. Dijo
que sentia mucho que mi padre no la comprara {or comprase).
II. Yo no desearia perder el tiempo, y no desearia que
usted lo perdiera tampoco.^ 12. El maestro de idiomas no
podia consentir en^ que sus discipulos gastasen (or gastaran)
el dinero, y no aprendieran (or aprendiesen) el castellano.
13. Le pregunte si partiria manana, y me respondi6 que
era posible que partiera (or partiese) hoy. 14. Mi hermano
creia que nuestra madre llegaria hoy, pero yo no creia que
ella llegase {or llegara) tan pronto. 15. Yo lo sentia
muchisimo, y le suplique que me perdonara (or perdonase).
16. Dijo que iba^ a la 6pera aunque lloviese (or lloviera), y
fue^ aunque llovia. 17. Tu madre y yo rogabamos a Dios
todos los dias que te conservase (or conservara) la vida y que
protegiese (or protegiera) tu alma. 18. Yo he prohibido que
tu fumes tabaco, £no es verdad? 19. Si, seiior ; usted prohibi6
que yo fumara (or fumase) tabaco, y no fumare mas. 20. Les
aconsej6 que estudiasen (or estudiaran) el castellano; pero
no querian estudiar ningun^ idioma extranjero. 21. Mi tio
me aconsej6 que no llevara (or llevase) todo mi dinero conmigo.
22. Me dijo que no llevaba nunca^ todo su dinero consigo.
23. Copiar^ la carta para que mi padre la lea. 24. Dijo que
copiaria la carta para que su padre la leyese^ (or leyera).
25. Cuando Uegamos al palacio, no habia portero ni criados
que impidiesen (or impidieran) la entrada. 26. Prometi6
pagarme cien pesos cuando tuviese (or tuviera) el dinero.
27. Le escribi que no vendiese (or vendiera) el ganado antes
que yo llegara (or llegase) ; pero lo vendi6 antes que yo llegu6.
B. I. He has presents for you (^fa?n.y sing.) and for her, and
she has presents for him and for me. 2. They (masc) can't ^
live without us (/^;//.), and we can't ^^ live without them. 3. I
am content with you {fam.^ sing,) and with her, but I am not con-
I08 SPANISH GRAMMAR
tent with him. 4. This house is very large, and many people live
in it. 5. This tree is very high, and there are many birds in it.
6. We {fern.) run and play a great deal, but what harm is there in it?
7. My father says ^^ it is a pity that I don't study more. 8. He
says it is a pity that I didn't study more last year. 9. It is true
that I don't study much : I should study more. 10. We were very
sorry, ladies, that you did not permit Mr. Navarro to accompany you.
1 1 . My mother wished to speak to the stranger, but my father did
not wish her to speak to him. 12. Did you {fam., pi.') believe
that Mr. Herrera would leave for ^^ Madrid today? 13. Yes ; we be-
lieved that he would leave today, and he has already left. 14. She
asked me to pardon her, and I promised to pardon her. 15. There-
fore, I shall pardon her. 16. Wasn't it necessary to He? No; it
wasn't necessary for you (^fam.^ sing.) to He. Never ^^ lie. 17. He
asked me to wait here until he returned, and I did wait until he
returned. 1^ 18. He promised me that he would write the exercise for 12
tomorrow even if he found it difficult. 19. And, although he found
it very difficult, he wrote it. 20. My father has forbidden my run-
ning and playing so-much. ^^ 21. He had already forbidden my
smoking tobacco. 22. Your (^fa^ji.^ sing.) mother would prefer that
you return home at once. She wishes to see you. 23. John, I
bought this book that^^ you (^fani.., sing.) might read it, and I wish
you to read it. 24. My mother said that she had bought the book
that I might read it, and she wished me to read it. 25. I shall pay
the bill whenever ^^ the tailor desires me to pay it. 26. He said
that he would pay the bill whenever the tailor desired him to pay it ;
but he hasn't paid it yet.
1 Omit. 2 Pret. of decir. 3 « either.' 4 imp. Ind. of ir. 5 Pret. of
e> (3d pers. sing.). 6 « any.' 7 'ever.' ^ leyese = le-iese {^ 216) . ^ no
pueden. 10 no podemos. H dice. '^'^ para. 13 j^o . . . nunca (placing the
verb between) . 1^ in this and similar sentences use the subjunctive only
when the time is indefinite and future with regard to the main verb. 15 tanto,
'^^ para que. 17 cuando.
LESSON XXII 109
LESSON XXII
102. When a verb has two personal pronoun objects,
the indirect precedes the direct object.
me lo da, he gives it to me. os las da, he gives them to you.
te la da, he gives it to you. damelo, give it to me.
nos los da, he gives them to us. danoslos, give them to us.
a. If both pronoun objects are in the third person, se is used as
indirect object in the place of le or les. Thus, instead of either le lo da,
or les lo da, one says se lo da. This se is derived from an old dative
form of the personal pronoun of the third person,^ and is in no way
related to the reflexive pronoun se.
b. When the direct object is a pronoun of the first or the second per-
son, the indirect object is usually separated from the verb and assumes
the prepositional form after a, * to.'
me presenta a ellos, he presents me to them.
te presenta a mi, he presents you to me.
nos presentan a usted, they present us to you.
pres^ntame a el, present me to him.
103. Each of the indirect object-pronouns le, les, and se
(= le or les) has several meanings : hence, to avoid asmbiguity,
it is often necessary to use two pronouns to express the same
idea, — an indirect object-pronoun and the corresponding
prepositional form with a.
le da el libro d el (d ella, a usted), he gives the book to him (to her,
to you).
les da la casa k ellos (a ellas, k ustedes), he gives the house to them,
masc. (to them,/^;;/. ; to yow, phir.),
se lo da k el (a ella, a usted, a ellos, a ellas, k ustedes), he gives it to
him (to her, to you, to them, masc. ; to them,/^;;/. ; to you, plur.) .
a. This double construction is also used with either direct or indirect
object-pronouns of the first, the second, or the third person, to add einphasis,
1 Written ge in old Spanish.
no
SPANISH GRAMMAR
The pronouns me, te, le, la, lo, nos, os, los, las, les, and se can not be made
emphatic by being stressed: 'give it to w^,' with the stress on * me,' can
not be translated by damelo, with the stress on me, but must be expressed
by damelo a mi, with the stress on mi.
te lo da d ti, he gives it to you. me quiere educar k mi tambiln, he
ddnosla a nosotros, give it to us. wishes to educate me too.
The prepositional pronoun may precede the verb (except an imperative),
and it is then still more emphatic.
k mi me lo da, he gives it to me.
This usage is often extended to nouns : a mi padre no le gusta, * it
doesn't please my father.'
104. Subjunctive Imperfect : Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar.
Tener :
Singular
1. tuviese
2. tuvieses
3. tuviese
1. tuviera
2. tuvieras
3. tuviera
First Form
Second Form
Haber :
Singular
1. hubiese
2. hubieses
3. hubiese
1. hubiera
2. hubieras
3. hubiera
First Form
Second Form
Plural
1. tuviesemos
2. tuvieseis
3. tuviesen
1. tuvieramos
2. tuvierais
3. tuvieran
Plural
1. hubi§semos
2. hubieseis
3. hubiesen
1. hubilramos
2. hubierais
3. hubieran
LESSON XXII
III
Sen
Estar
Singular
First Form
Plural
I. fuese
I. fu§semos
2. fueses
2. fueseis
3. fuese
Second Form
3. fuesen
I. fuera
I. fu6ramos
2. fueras
2. fuerais
3. fuera
3. fueran
r:.
Singular
First Form
Plural
I. estuviese
I. estuviesemos
2. estuvieses
2. estuvieseis
3. estuviese
Second Form
3. estuviesen
I. estuviera
I. estuvi^ramos
2. estuvieras
2. estuvierais
3. estuviera
3. estuvieran
105. Subjunctive. Pluperfect Tense.
Hablar :
Singular
1. hubiese hablado
2. hubiese s hablado
3. hubiese hablado
1. hubiera hablado
2. hubieras hablado
3. hubiera hablado
First Form
Second Form
Plural
1. hubi§semos hablado
2. hubieseis hablado
3. hubiesen hablado
1. hubi^ramos hablado
2. hubierais hablado
3. hubieran hablado
a. Hubiese and hubiera, used impersonally, mean * there might be,' etc.;
hubiese, or hubiera, habido, * there might have been.'
112 SPANISH GRAMMAR
106. A present condition " contrary to fact '' may be
expressed in either one of the following ways :
si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo compraria, ^ if I had moneyj I should
si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo comprara, | buy it.
Note that the imperfect subjunctive in -ra may occur in the result
(apodosis) as well as in the condition (protasis), while the imperfect in
-se occurs only in the condition, and the conditional indicative only in
the result.
a. The condition may, of course, either precede or follow the result :
si tuviese tiempo, iria, * if I had time, I should go,' or iria si tuviese
tiempo, * I should go if I had time.'
b. The conjunction si is sometimes followed by a conditional indica-
tive, and si then means * whether': no supe si vendria, 'I did not know
whether he would come.'
107. Idiomatic Expressions.
I ojala que viva mil anos ! oh, that he may, or I hope he will, live a
thousand years !
i ojala que viviese, or viviera, mil anos ! oh, that he might, or I wish
he would, live a thousand years !
quisiera ^ estudiar el frances, I should like, or I should be glad, to study
French,
quisiera que tu estudiases, or estudiaras, el frances, I should like you
to, or I wish you would, study French.
I quien escribiera ! oh, if I could only write !
Exercise XXII
^. I. fil nos ama a nosotros, y nosotros le amamos a d.
2. Lo {or le) matare, 6 me matara el a mi. 3. Me quieren
educar a mi tambien ; pero yo no quiero que me eduquen.
4. Ahora te toca a ti. — Si ; ahora me toca a mi. 5. Luego
OS tocara a vosotros. — Si ; luego nos tocara a nosotros. 6. No
la entiendo a usted, sefiora. — Caballero, yo no le entiendo a
1 Imperf. Subj. of querer.
LESSON XXII 113
usted tampoco. 7. Se lo he dicho ^ a el y no a ella. No he
querido decirselo a ella. 8. ^Quieres prestarme tu bicicleta?
— Si; te la quiero prestar con mucho gusto. 9. Mi padre
queria que yo se lo prometiese, y se lo prometi. 10. Ella
queria que yo le leyera la carta ; pero yo no queria leersela.
II. ^iPuedo pedirle a usted un favor? — i No, hombre, no!
Siempre me pide usted favores. 12. Tu no eres hijo de mi
hermano. Si lo fueras, no me insultarias como me has insul-
tado. 13. J Cuanto siento que no estuviera usted a mi lado !
14. Hijo mio^; yo quisiera que tu me acompanaras esta
noche. 15. Si lo hubiese hallado, te lo hubiera entregado.
16. Si usted la amara, no la trataria asi. 17. Si usted no
me quisiera^ a mi, no la querria yo a usted. 18. La gra-
matica seria buena, si no hubiese tantas faltas en ella. 19. Yo
se lo habria pedido a usted, si hubiera sabido que usted lo
tenia. 20. Vivo en Espana desde hace diez afios, y no he
aprendido bien el espafiol. 21. Me sorprende que usted
viva en Espana desde hace diez afios, y no haya aprendido el
espafiol. 22. El senor Pelayo dijo que le sorprendia que
yo viviera en Espafia desde hacia diez afios, y no hubiese apren-
dido bien el espafiol.
B, I. Will he give^ the book to you {fa?n.y st7tg.)l Yes; he
will give it to me. 2. Will he give the house to us? No ; he will
not give it to us. 3. Will he give these chairs and tables to you
(/^;//.,//.) ? We believe that he will give them to us. 4. Will
he give his two black horses to you {fa7n., sijig.)"^ Yes; he will
give them to me. 5. Did I present him to you {fain.^ si7ig.)l
Yes ; you {fam., sing.) presented him to me. 6. Did we present
you (^fam., sing.) to her? Yes; you (^fam.., pi.) presented me to
her a short while ago. 7. If you (^fam.^ sing.) are-willing to lend
me your umbrella, lend it to me. 8. If you are not willing to
lend it to me, do not lend it to me. 9. If you (^forr?i.^ si7tg.) are-
willing to lend us two chairs, lend them to us. 10. If you are not
willing to lend them to us, do not lend them to us. 11. If I
114 SPANISH GRAMMAR
am-willing to present you (^farn.^ sing.) to her, I shall present you
to her. 12. Do {fain.^ sing.') not present me to her, if you do
not wish to do so.^ 13. I shall send him Mty pesetas, and I shall
send her one hundred pesetas. 14. Will you {forjn., sing.) not
send me also fifty pesetas ? 15. Yes ; I will send them to you
{form., sing.) if you promise me that you will not spend them the
first day. 16. I do not like^ this weather, but you {fam., sing.)
do like it. 17. We do not like this lamp, but you (fa^n., pi.)
do like it. 18. He doesn't like to live in Madrid, but she does.'
19. You {form., pi.) like to study Spanish, but they do not like
to.^ 20. I love him, but I love her more. She loves me, but she
loves him more. 21. If I had the money, I should buy this dog;
but I haven't the money, and consequently I shan't buy it. 22. I
wish 9 you {form., si?tg.) would lend me your bicycle. I shall be
glad to ^° lend it to you. 23. Will you {fain., pi.) not present us
to the French ladies? We should present you {fam., pi.) to them,
if you spoke French. 24. But you do not speak French, and they
do not speak English. 25. I should like to study Spanish and
French, and I should like you {form., pi.) to study these languages.
We should study them if we had the time.
1 Past Part, of decir. 2 <■ my son.' 3 Querer d means 'to love,* * to be
fond of.' 4 dard. ^ hacerlo. 6 Use gustar. "* Say : ' but she does
like (it).' 8 Omit. 9 quisiera. 10 Say: ' I shall have much pleasure in'
(followed by the Infin.).
LESSON XXIII
108. He and Si. — The reflexive pronouns se and si
are masculine or feminine, singular or plural. Se is
used as the direct or indirect object of a verb ; si as the
object of a preposition. Whenever the subject of a verb
is a noun or a pronoun of the third person, and is repre-
sented as acting, either directly or indirectly, on itself,
se is used as the object-pronoun and si as the preposi-
tional form.
LESSON XXIII
115
el se alaba, he praises himself.
usted se engana, you deceive
yourself.
Antonio se compr6 un sombrero,
Anthony bought himself a hat.
Onofre habla siempre de si, Ono-
fre is always talking about
himself.
sirvase Vd. decirme, please tell
me.
a. Reflexive se, whether direct or indirect object, always precedes
another object-pronoun : se me figura, ' it seems to me.' (Here se is the
direct, me the indirect, object.)
109. In the first and second persons there is no especial form
of reflexive pronoun, but the object- pronouns may become
reflexive. Thus, the indicative present tense of enganarse, ' to
deceive one's self,' is
me engano, I deceive myself.
te enganas, you deceive your-
self.
se engana, he (she) deceives him-
self (herself) .
nos enganamos, we deceive our-
selves.
OS enganais, you deceive your-
selves, [selves.
se enganan, they deceive them-
a. If Enghsh * myself,' 'ourselves,' 'thyself,' etc., are emphatic, they
are to be expressed in Spanish by the reflexive pronoun in the preposi-
tional form, modified by mismo (-a, -os, -as).
me engano k mi mismo, I deceive myself.
usted se engana a si mismo, you deceive yourself,
Onofre habla siempre de si mismo, Onofre is always talking about hi77iself
In these expressions propio may replace mismo.
ella se ama a si propia, she loves herself
b. Many verbs require the reflexive construction in Spanish, but not in
English.
acostarse, (to) go to bed (lit., *to
recline one's self).
levantarse, (to) arise, or to get up
(lit., to raise one's self).
sentarse, (to) sit down, or to be
seated (lit., 'to seat one's self).
hacerse, or ponerse, (to) become.
acordarse (de), (to) remember.
olvidarse, (to) forget.
alegrarse (de), (to) rejoice (at),
or (to) be glad (of).
atreverse (a), (to) dare,
reirse (de), (to) laugh (at), etc,^
etc.
Il6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Some intransitive verbs may be used as reflexives, with change of
meaning.
ir, (to) go. dormirse, (to) fall asleep.
irse, (to) go away. morir, (to) die.
dormir, (to) sleep. morirse, (to) be dying, etc,
d. The reflexive construction is often used in Spanish where the passive
voice is required in English.
se dice, it is said. aqui se habla espanol, Spanish is spoken here.
e. The direct reflexive substitute for the passive is usually to be avoided
if there is a personal subject. Thus, se admira el hombre means '• the
man admires himself,' and not * the man is admired'; but one can say, se
admira al hombre, ' the man is admired,' se la trata con distinci6n, *she
is treated with distinction,' se te llama, ' some one is calling you,' etc.
If a masculine pronoun of the third person is used, it is in the dative,
se les admira, they are admired.
110. In the plural a reflexive verb may become reciprocal;
that is, several persons or things may be represented as acting
on one another. Usually no distinction of form is made in
Spanish between reflexive and reciprocal verbs ; thus, nosotros
nos enganamos may mean ^we deceive ourselves/ or ^we de-
ceive one another.' Often, however, the meaning determines
whether the verb is reflexive or reciprocal, as in la primera vez
que se vieron y se hablaron, ^ the first time they saw each other
and spoke to each other.'
a. A reciprocal verb may be strengthened and made explicit by the use
of el uno al otro (la una a la otra, los unos a los otros, las unas k las
otras, or el uno a la otra, la una al otro, etc.).
OS enganais el uno al otro, you deceive each other,
se aman las unas k las otras, they love one another.
se burlan el uno del otro, they make fun of each other.
The article may be omitted, as in se aborrecen unos k otros, * they hate
one another.'
LESSON XXIII
117
la gata cogi6 un rat6n y se
lo comi6, the cat caught a
mouse and ate it.
111. The following facts should also be noted :
a. The ethical dative, or " dative of interest," is much commoner in
Spanish than in English.
me tomo la libertad, I take the liberty.
me lo temo, I fear so.
no te lo mates, do not kill him.
b. The forms la and las (cosa or a similar word being understood) may
be used with the force of an indefinite pronoun.
el me la habra de pagar, he will pay me for it.
los pretendientes se las prometen siempre f elices, suitors always promise
themselves happiness.
112. Hypothetical Subjunctive. (Also called Fut, Subj.)
(i) Regular Verbs.
Singular
1. hablare
2. hablares
3. hablare
Singular
1. temiere
2. temieres
3. temiere
Singular
1. viviere
2. vivieres
Hablar
Temer
Vivir
Plural
hablaremos
hablareis
hablaren
Plural
temieremos
temiereis
3. temieren
Plural
1. vivieremos
2. viviereis
3. viviere 3. vivieren
(2) Radical-changing Verbs.
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir
Singular
1. sintiere
2. sintieres
3. sintiere
Plural
1. sinti^remos
2. sintiereis
3. sintieren
ii8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Pedir
Singular
1. pidiere
2. pidieres
3. pidiere
Singular
1. durmiere
2. durmieres
3. durmiere
Dormir
Plural
1. pidieremos
2. pidiereis
3. pidieren
Plural
1. durmieremos
2. durmiereis
3. durmieren
a. The hypothetical subjunctive of the radical-changing e and 0 verbs
of the first and second conjugations is regular.
b. It should be noted here that the radical-changing e and 0 verbs of
the first and second conjugations are regular in all tenses except the
present indicative, present subjunctive, and imperative ; while those of the
third conjugation have irregular forms in all tenses except the imperfect,
future, and conditional indicative.
(3) Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar.
Tener
Singular
1. tuviere
2. tuvieres
3. tuviere
Singular
1. hubiere
2. hubieres
3. hubiere
Singular
1. fuere
2. fueres
3. fuere
Haber
Ser
Plural
I.
tuvieremos
2.
tuviereis
3.
tuvieren
Plural
I.
hubieremos
2.
hubiereis
3.
hubieren
Plural
I.
fueremos
2.
fuereis
3.
fueren
LESSON
XXIII
Estar
Singular
Plural
I. estuviere
I.
estuvieremos
2. estuvieres
2.
estuviereis
3. estuviere
3-
estuvieren
119
Note that the hypothetical subjunctive, like the imperfect subjunctive,
is built up on the preterite (3d person) stem.
113. Hypothetical Perfect Subjunctive.
Hablar
Singular
I. hubiere hablado
Plural
1. hubieremos hablado
2. hubiereis hablado
3. hubieren hablado
a, Hubiere is also used as an impersonal verb.
2. hubieres hablado
3. hubiere hablado
114. Use of the Hypothetical Subjunctive.
The hypothetical subjunctive always denotes a condition or
hypothesis. Like the present subjunctive, it denotes either
present or future time. In the spoken Spanish of today the
hypothetical subjunctive is rarely used except in proverbs,
legal expressions, etc. Its place is regularly taken by the
present subjunctive, or by the present indicative if used with
si, ' if.'
si tal pensare (piensa), se en-
gana, if he thinks so, he is
mistaken.
si lo hubiere (ha) dicho, ha men-
tido, if he has said so, he has
lied.
si tuviere (tengo) dinero, lo com-
prare, if I have money, I shall
buy it.
mientras durare (dure) la vida,
trabajare, as long as life lasts, I
shall work.
creelo si quisieres (quieres), be-
lieve it if you wish.
es necesario aceptar lo que nos
dieren (den), it is necessary to
accept what they give us.
I20
SPANISH GRAMMAR
115. In Spanish the commoner forms of conditional sen-
tences are as follows :
1. gasto mucho si gano mucho, I
spend much if I earn much.
2. gastare mucho si gano (ga-
nare) mucho, I shall spend
much if I earn much.
3. gastaba mucho si ganaba
mucho, I spent much if I
earned much.
4. gasti mucho si gane mucho,
I spent much if I did earn
(earned) much.
5. gastaria mucho si ganase
mucho, I should spend much
if I earned much.
6. gastaria mucho si ganara
10.
mucho, I should spend much
if I earned much.
gastara mucho si ganase
mucho, I should spend
much if I earned much.
gastara mucho si ganara
mucho, I should spend
much if I earned much.
he gastado mucho si he ga-
nado mucho, I have spent
much if I have earned
much.
habia gastado mucho si habia
ganado mucho, I had spent
much if I had earned much.
116. When the verb of the conclusion (apodosis) is thrown
into the subjunctive, the present and future indicative become
the present subjunctive ; the imperfect, preterite, and con-
ditional indicative become the imperfect subjunctive ; and the
perfect and pluperfect indicative become the perfect and plu-
perfect subjunctive respectively. Thus (cf. parallel sentences
in preceding paragraph) :
1. teme que yo gaste mucho si
gano mucho, he fears that I
spend much if I earn much.
2. teme que yo gaste mucho si gano
(ganare) mucho, he fears that I
shall spend much if I earn much.
3. teme que yo gastara (gastase)
mucho si ganaba mucho, he
fears that I spent much if I
earned much.
teme que yo gastara (gastase)
mucho si gane mucho, he
fears that I spent much if I
did earn (earned) much.
, 6, 7, 8. teme que yo gastara
(gastase) mucho si ganase
(ganara) mucho, he fears
that I should spend much if
I earned much.
LESSON XXIII 121
9. teme que yo haya gastado 10. teme que yo hubiera (hu-
mucho si he ganado mucho, biese) gastado mucho si
he fears that I have spent habla ganado mucho, he
much if I have earned fears that I had spent much
much. if I had earned much.
Note that the verb of the condition (protasis) is not attracted into the
subjunctive in i, 2, 3, 4, 9, and 10.
Exercise XXIII
A, I. Cuando era nifio me acostaba y me levantaba tem-
prano. 2. Ahora que soy hombre me acuesto y me levanto
tarde. 3. El hombre se acuesta ; la vaca se echa. 4. Aqui
se cambia dinero. 5. No se permite fumar aqui. 6. Una
casa se vende ; la otra se alquila. 7. Se habla mucho de la
guerra. 8. Se dice que ya se han muerto^ muchos soldados.
9. El se queja de ella, y ella se queja de el. 10. Parece que
se odian. 11. El hombre que no se respeta a si mismo no
es digno de ser^ respetado por los otros. 12. Los ninos
pueden reirse y llorar casi al mismo tiempo. 13. El cama-
le6n se puede poner bianco, negro, 6 verde. 14. La ira
puede llamarse la peor de las pasiones. 15. Se sintio algo
cansado y se sent6 al pie de un arbol. 16. Las dos mujeres
se abrazaron y besaron ; pero todo el mundo sabe que no se
amaban. 1 7. El ano pr6ximo pienso marcharme a Espana, y
es probable que me quede alH por algunos afios. 18. \ Como
se parece la nifia a la mujer ! 19. No son parientes ; pero
se parecen mucho una a otra. 20. Este hombre es muy
vanaglorioso : se alaba siempre a si, habla mucho de si y con-
sigo, y no piensa sino en^ si mismo. 21. Si me casase con
usted seria menester que usted me gustara, y la verdad es que
usted no me gusta. 22. ^[Se ha marchado ya tu primo? —
Si, senor; se hallaba sin ocupaci6n. 23. Nosotras nos bur-
lamos de ellos, y ellos se burlan de nosotras. 2^., Se^ te^
122 SPANISH GRAMMAR
llama, nino : vete.^ — No me importa que me 11am en : no
quiero irme. 25. Callate, nino, si no quieres que me enfade.
26. En caso que lo Kallare {or halle^), se lo enviare a usted
por correo. 27. Si el no estuviere (or esta^) en casa, se
lo entregare a su mujer. 28. Te acompanaremos si tu lo
deseares {or deseas^).
B, I. I feeP sad; you (^fam.^ sing.) feel sad; he feels sad; we
feel sad; you {^fa^n., pL) feel sad; they feel sad. 2. I wash my
hands ^ ; you {fain., sing.) wash your hands; she washes her
hands; we wash our hands; you {fam., pi.) wash your hands;
they wash their hands. 3. I speak about myself; you {fain.,
sing.) speak about yourself; you {form., sing.) speak about yourself;
we speak about ourselves; you {fain., pi.) speak about yourselves;
they speak about themselves. 4. It seems ^ to me; it seems to
you {fain., sing.) \ it seems to him; it seems to us; it seems to
you {fam., pi.) ; it seems to them. 5. I go to bed^^; you {fain.,
sing.) go to bed; she goes to bed; we go to bed; you {fain., pi.)
go to bed; they go to bed. 6. I am glad^^ of it; you {fain.,
sing.) are glad of it ; you {form., sing.) are glad of it ; we are glad
of it; you {fam., pi.) are glad of it; they are glad of it. 7. I am
going to sleep ^^; you {fam., sing.) are going to sleep; he is going
to sleep ; we are going to sleep ; you {fam., pi.) are going to sleep ;
they are going to sleep. 8. My name is ^^ Mary ; your {fam., sing.)
name is John ; her name is Frances ; our names are Peter and Paul ;
your {fam., pi.) names are Sophia and Trinity; their names are
Henry and George. 9. I am frightened ^^ ; you {fam., sing.) are
frightened; you {form., sing.) are frightened; we are frightened;
you {fam., pi.) are frightened; you {form., pi.) are frightened.
10. We {masc.) hate each other; you {fam., pi., fem.) hate each
other; they {masc. ^Vi^ fem.) hate each other. 11. We {fem.)
embrace and kiss each other; you {fam., pL, fem.) embrace and
kiss each other; you {form., pi., masc. 2ind fem.) embrace and kiss
each other. 12. We {masc.) remember ^^ one another; you
{fam., pi., fem.) remember one another; they {masc. 2ind fem.)
remember one another. 13. French and Spanish are spoken here,
but English is not spoken. 14. I go to bed at 9 p.m. and I arise
LESSON XXIV 123
at 6 A.M.i^ 15. Please^' {for?H., shig.) sit down if you feel tired.
16. The father and the son look like each other, but the son is the
handsomer. 17. The two children poured warm water into the
wash-basin, and washed their hands and faces with soap. 18. They
then dried their hands and faces ^^ with a towel, and combed and
brushed their hair.
1 Past Part, of morir. 2 ' being.' 3 « of.' 4 < one ' or ' some one.'
5 Imperative, 2d pers. sing., of irse. ^ The more usual Subj. or Ind. form is
given in parenthesis. ' Use sentirse. 8 gay : ' I wash me the hands.'
^ \J)SQ. fig ur arse. '^^ Vi's^^ acostarse. ^'^ Use a /egr arse (de). ^'^ Use dor ?nirse.
13 Use llamarse. ^^ Use asustarse. 15 Use acordarse [de), 16 Usually
'A.M.' is expressed by de la mafiana, and ' P.M.' by de la tarde or de la noche.
1' sirvase usted. 18 Say : ' dried the hands and face and combed them and
brushed them the hair.*
LESSON XXIV
117. Possessive Adjectives.
Singular
\st Pers. mio (-a, -os, -as) or mi (mis), my.
id Pers. tuyo (-a, -os, -as) or tu (tus), your, thy.
3^ Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), his, her, its, your.
Plural
\st Pers. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our.
id Pers. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), your.
-^d Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), their, your.
a. Before nouns, the apocopated forms mi, tu, and su are used; and
after nouns the full forms, mio, tuyo, and suyo. Nuestro and vuestro
are used either before or after nouns.
b. Mio (mi) is the possessive corresponding to yo, tuyo (tu) corre-
sponds to tu, nuestro to nosotros (-as), vuestro to vosotros (-as), and
suyo (su) to el, ella, ellos (-as), usted, and ustedes.
124 SPANISH GRAMMAR
118. Possessive adjectives regularly precede their
noun, and agree in gender and number with the thing
possessed, not with the possessor.
nuestro cabano, our horse. nuestra casa, our house,
nuestros cabaUos, our horses. nuestras casas, our houses.
a. In certain indefinite expressions, and sometimes when emphatic,
the possessive follows its noun.
cierto amigo mio, a certain friend of mine,
algunos discipulos nuestros, some pupils of ours.
los vicios tuyos, your vices.
b. In direct address, mio is generally used with an unmodified noun in
the singular, and either mi or mio with a noun modified by an adjective.
amigo mio, my friend.
mi querido amigo, or querido amigo mio, my dear friend.
119. When the thing possessed forms part of the possessor,
and is the object of a verb, the possessive adjective is generally
replaced by an indirect object-pronoun and the definite article.
me corte el dedo, I cut my finger. se quit6 el sombrero, he took
te salv6 la vida, he saved your life. off his hat.
The same usage obtains with nouns.
(le) salv6 la vida a su amigo, he saved his friend's life.
el viento (le) llev6 el sombrero al cochero, the wind carried away the
driver's hat.
voy a romper (le) la cabeza a ese abogado, I am going to break that
lawyer's head.
<2. When the possessor is the subject of the verb, and no ambiguity is
possible, the pronoun is omitted and the definite article alone is used
instead of a possessive adjective.
perdi el sombrero, I lost my hat.
la nina abri6 los ojos y levant6 la cabeza, the girl opened her eyes and
raised her head.
tengo los pies mojados y frios, my feet are wet and cold.
LESSON XXIV 125
120. Infinitive.
(i) 'To' before an infinitive is either not expressed in
Spanish, or it is expressed by a or de.
quierohablar con usted, I wish to speak with you.
^spero llegar a tiempo, I hope to arrive on time.
aprende a escribir, he is learning to write.
estoy obligado a trabajar mucho, I am obHged to work a great deal.
tratare de hacerlo, I shall try to do so.
tengo vergiienza de pedirlo, I am ashamed to ask it.
a. Most verbs (especially the " modal auxiliaries," deber, querer, etc.)
take no preposition before a following infinitive; a is required after a verb
of beginnings teaching, and learning, and after most verbs of motion,
before a following infinitive ; de is often used to connect a noun or adjec-
tive with a following infinitive, and is found occasionally between verbs
(tratar de ver, alegrarse de ir, etc.) .
b. But * to,' meaning * in order to,' is para : COmo para vivir : no vivo
para comer, * I eat to live : I do not live to eat.'
(2) After a preposition, the English present participle^ is to
be translated usually by the Spanish infinitive.
antes de comer, before eating.
partid sin decir adi6s, he left without saying good-bye.
estoy cansado de leer, I am tired of reading.
(3) Used as a noun, the infinitive usually takes the definite
article.
el comer es indispensable, (to) eat {or eating) is indispensable.
el saber es util, knowledge is useful.
121. Present Participle.^ — The present participle is
invariable ; that is, it may agree, w^ithout changing its
1 No attempt is here made to distinguish between the present participle and
the gerund, either in English or in Spanish.
126 SPANISH GRAMMAR
form, with a masculine or feminine, a singular or plural,
noun.
hablando asi las ninas . . . , the girls speaking thus ... .
gana el pan cosiendo y bordando, she earns her bread (by) sewing
and embroidering.
a. We have seen that hablo means * I speak,' * I do speak ' (^emphatic),
or *I am speaking' (^progressive)-, hablaba means *I was speaking'
(^progressive) or ' I used to speak '; hablare means ' I shall speak ' or * I
shall be speaking' (^progressive), etc. But progressive action may also be
expressed in Spanish by estar and the present participle : estoy hablando,
'I am speaking'; estaba hablando,'! was speaking'; estare hablando,
* I shall be speaking,' etc. The progressive form with estar, however, is
used less often, and is more emphatic, than the English progressive form
with 'be.' It is rarely used with the present participles of ser, estar, ir,
venir, and many other verbs. Instead of estar, the verbs ir, venir, andar,
are sometimes used to form a periphrastic progressive tense ; va oscure-
ciendo, 'it is growing dark.'
122. Past Participle. — Past participles used as adjec-
tives are inflected like adjectives.
mi amada patria, my beloved country.
las cartas estan acabadas, the letters are finished.
When used to form the perfect tenses, past participles
are invariable.
mi madre ha venido, my mother has come.
las manzanas que he comprado son buenas, the apples that I have
bought are good.
a. The following otherwise regular verbs have irregular past parti-
ciples :
abrir, (to) open. abierto, opened.
cubrir, (to) cover. ' cubierto, covered.
escribir, (to) write. escrito, written.
imprimir, (to) print, impreso, printed.
LESSON XXIV 127
123. Idiomatic Expressions.
(i) a fe mia, upon my word.
a pesar nuestro, in spite of us (ourselves).
no es culpa mia, it is not my fault.
(2) al leer la carta, upon reading the letter.
al leer yo la carta, upon my reading the letter.
Exercise XXIV
A, Algunos historiadores han creido hallar el origen de los
Indios americanos en aquellas diez tribus de Israel que fueron
conquistadas por un rey de Asiria, unos setecientos aiios antes
de Cristo. Muchos de los vencidos fueron llevados en cautiverio
y, mezclandose con los conquistadores, perdieron su nacionali-
dad. Pero, segiin dice ^ Esdras, hubo algunos que formaron el
proyecto de abandonar la multitud de los Gentiles e irse a un
lejano pais en donde los hombres nunca habian morado. Al-
gunos opinan que los desgraciados restos de estas tribus lleva-
ron a cabo su designio, pasando a la America, y que fueron los
progenitores de la raza india. La historia s61o dice que avan-
zaron hasta la Media, y fuera de esto no sabemos nada mas de
sus viajes, ni aparece prueba alguna de que se estableciesen
finalmente en la America, excepto una pequena semejanza
entre las costumbres y ceremonias religiosas de los Indios y los
antiguos Israelitas. Ambos tenian sus sacerdotes y profetas,
sus fiestas, festines y sacrificios. Pero ni estos ni otros puntos
de semejanza que se alegan son bastantes para probar la teoria.
B. I . Certain plans of yours are good, but our designs are bet-
ter. 2. In a letter which he has written, John says to me : " My
dear friend : I am proving a resemblance between the Indians and
the ten tribes of Israel." 3. They know that it is not your fault,
but they are tired of carrying out your theories. 4. Before leav-
ing the land of the Gentiles the tribes had lost their nationality.
5. To form a plan is easy; to carry it out is difficult. 6. John
lost his Hfe in America. 7. The wind has carried off the man's
128 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hat. 8. When I had (^preterite) opened my eyes, I spoke to the
Indians. 9. Raising his head, the boy who was weeping said 2;
"I have cut my hand." 10. Our letter is ^ written. We are
sending the letter and a present to our beloved sister. 11. Some
friends of his have printed his book of poems. 12. We were
speaking to a certain pupil of yours. 13. Upon my word, it is
not our fault that the door is^ open. 14. We cannot^ live with-
out eating. 15. Writing is useful, and speaking is not always
indispensable. 16. In spite of ourselves we are obliged to work
a-great-deal. 17. Upon my saying good-by, the girls raised their
heads {sing.). 18. Our hands are cold and our feet are wet.
19. We know that the ten tribes of Israel were conquered by the
king of Assyria, and some believe that-they-can ^ (infin.) find the
origin of the Indian race in these conquered men. But the points
of resemblance that some historians allege are not sufficient to prove
our theory. History only says that the conquerors carried (^pret.)
the tribes into captivity; and that later-on^ the remnants of the
ancient Israelites left the country of the Gentiles to ^ go to a distant
country. Apart from their religious customs and ceremonies, there
appears to be '^ no proof that these unfortunate IsraeHtes were ^ the
progenitors of the American Indians. But Esdras has written a
history which says that the Israelites, advancing as far as Media and
carrying out a certain design of theirs, passed-over to a land where
the Gentiles were not dwelling. He knows nothing more of their
plans nor of their journeys. We think that they established {pret.)
themselves in America.
1 ' says.' '^ dijo. ^ estd. ^ Use. poder. ^ luego. ^ para.
7 Omit. ^ fuesen.
LESSON XXV
124. Possessive Pronouns.
Singular
\st Pers. el mio (la mia, los mios, las mias), mine.
id Pers. el tuyo (la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas), yours, thine.
3^ Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas) , his, hers, its, or yours.
LESSON XXV 129
Plural
1st Pers. el nuestro (la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours.
2d Pers, el vuestro (la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras), yours.
3^ Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), theirs or yours.
Note that the Spanish possessive pronouns usually require the definite
article, while the English do not.
a. Possessive pronouns, like possessive adjectives, agree in gender and
number vv^ith the things possessed.
mi casa es mas grande que la tuya, pero prefiero la tuya a la mia,
my house is larger than yours, but I prefer yours to mine.
b, Los mios often means ' my people ' ; los tuyos, ' your people,' etc.
Lo mio means 'mine,' *vv^hat is mine'; lo tuyo, * yours,' *what is
yours,' etc.
125. Suyo and su have several meanings ; hence, in order to
avoid ambiguity, it is often necessary to use de and the proper
personal pronoun instead of suyo and su.
(i) Instead of tengo su libro one would then say :
tengo el libro de el, I have his book.^
tengo el libro de ella, I have her book.
tengo el libro de usted, I have/^//r book.
tengo el libro de ellos, I have their (jnasc.) book.
tengo el libro de ellas, I have their {fejn.) book.
tengo el libro de ustedes, I have your (^plur.) book.
(2) And instead of tengo el suyo one would say :
tengo el de el, I have his.
tengo el de ella, I have hers.
tengo el de usted, I have yours.
tengo el de ellos, I have theirs (jnasc.^.
tengo el de ellas, I have theirs {feju.).
tengo el de ustedes, I h2i\ tyoiirs {plur.).
1 One may also say tengo su libro de el (ella, ellos, ellas, usted, ustedes).
130 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The same construction is used with the possessive case of nouns.
tengo el libro de Miguel, I have Michael's book.
tengo el de Miguel, I have Michael's.
b. The definite article is usually omitted before a possessive pronoun
(or noun) in predicate.
esta pluma es mia, this pen is mine.
esa pluma es de usted, that pen is yours.
aquella pluma es de Miguel, that pen (over there) is Michael's.
But the article is used to make an emphatic distinction.
esta pluma es la mia (la de usted, la de Miguel), this pen (not the
other) is the one that belongs to me (to you, to Michael^,
126. Regular Verbs : First, Second, and Third Con-
jugations. Study §§ 207-212.
127. Orthographic Changes that occur in the inflection
of both regular and irregular verbs. Study §§ 213-217.
Exercise XXV
A. I. Saque Vd. la pobre mosca del agua en que ha caido.
2. Averiglie ayer la razon de la conducta de ella. 3. Tu
tio y el nuestro son amigos intimos del padre de ellos. 4. Co-^
nozco a su primo de Vd. 5. Pague Vd. las cuentas que nos
trajeron^ el sastre y la lavandera, y cojamos el tranvia para ir
al despacho. 6. Temamos al hombre que no ama a su
patria. 7. Esta casa es mia ; pague seis mil duros por ella.
8. Tu tema, el de Carlos, y el mio no tienen las mismas faltas.
9. Creyendo falsas las noticias de la muerte de ella, mis sobrinas
no me dijeron^ nada del asunto. 10. Si yerro en lo que
digo,^ corrijan Vds. los pormenores de mirelaci6n. 11. Dis-
tingamos lo bianco de lo negro. 12. Las aguas hirvientes
bulleron en torno del nadador, y pronto desapareci6. 13. No
arguyamos en favor de semejante sistema. 14. Rece Vd.
nor el alma del difunto. 15. El capitan se retir6 porque
LESSON XXVI 131
muchos de los suyos habian caido, heridos por las balas de los
enemigos. 16. Continue Vd. su obra segun el plan original,
y nolavarie en nada. 17. Este aceite hueie mal. 18. No
delincamos, quebrando esta ley antigua. 19. Venzan los
soldados a los enemigos de la patria, y sus conciudadanos los
alabaran. 20. Lo mio no es lo tuyo.
B. I. My cousins thought that the news of his death was false. ^
2. The tailor and the laundress brought their bills yesterday;^
let-US-pay them. 3. This letter is ours; that-one is John's.
4. (Let) the soldier conquer the enemy of his country. 5. Let-
us-ascertain now the reason of their behavior. 6. This theme
is mine; let-us-correct the mistakes in it. 7. Your nieces and
his err in what they say.^ 8. Let them not vary their work in
any-way ; Charles is continuing his according-to our original plan.
9. Let them pray for the soul of the soldier who has fallen.
10. The captain praised his-men, because they had {i7nperf.)
conquered the enemy. 11. I distinguish what-is-mine from
what-is-yours. 12. I do not argue in favor of that system, be-
cause I do not know the details of it. 13. John has Peter's hat,
Peter has mine, and I have John's. 14. The soldiers burnished
the metal of their weapons. 15. With my story I drew^ {pret.)
Charles from his melancholy. 16. Let our fellow-citizens know ^
us, and they will say^ that we love our country. 17. These
flowers are ours and not his ; they smell good.^^
1 Pret. oitraer. 2 « told.' ^ < \ say.' 4 gay : ' thought false the news
of his death.' ^ Put the adverb immediately after the verb. 6 dicen.
"* Use sacar, ^ conozcan, 9 dirdn. 10 blen.
LESSON XXVI
128. Demonstrative Adjectives.
este (-a, -os, -as), this.
ese (-a, -os, -as), that.
aquel (aquella, -os, -as)^ that.
132 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a, A demonstrative adjective regularly precedes its noun : esta mujer,
* this woman.'
129. Este denotes what is near the speaker ; ese, what is
near the person addressed ; and aquel, what is remote from
both. In reference to time, este denotes present time ; ese, a
near period ; and aquel, remote time.
esta pluma que yo tengo, this pen aquella pluma que el tiene, that
which I have. pen which he has.
esa pluma que tii tienes, that pen esta semana, this week,
which you have. ese mes, that month.
aquel ano, that (remote) year.
130. Demonstrative Pronouns.
6ste (-a, -OS, -as), this (one). esto, this.
6se (-a, -OS, -as), that (one). eso, that.
aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that aquello, that,
(one).
The mascuHne and feminine forms take the accent ; the
neuter (esto, eso, aquello) do not. The neuter pronouns do
not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sentence, or idea
(compare with alio).
aquella casa es mas alta que §sta, that house is taller than this one.
no me gustan estas manzanas ; prefiero aqu611as, I do not Hke those
apples; I prefer those (over there).
esos son mios, those (near you) are mine.
^crees esto? do you believe this (which I have just told) ?
no comprendo eso, I do not understand that (which you have just
told me) .
aquello parece imposible, that (affair of which we are told) seems
impossible.
a. Este sometimes means * the latter,' and aqu61 * the former.'
b. The English pronoun *that ' (not denoting a specific object) is esto,
when it denotes what has to do with the speaker: ,icrees esto? *do you
LESSON XXVI 133
believe that (which I have just told you) ? ' An unemphatic * that ' is often
not to be expressed in Spanish : sera magnifico, * that will be fine.'
c. In correspondence, en (de, a) esta means ' in (from, to) the writer's
town,' and en (de, a) esa means * in (from, to) the correspondent's town,'
ciudad, ' town,' or plaza, ^ ' market,' being understood : sail ayer de esa y
llegue hoy a esta, * I left your town yesterday, and arrived here to-day.'
131. Before a relative clause, and before a phrase introduced
by de, the definite article is generally used instead of a demon-
strative or personal pronoun.^
el que desea mucho siempre es pobre, he who desires much, is always
poor,
esta muchacha es la que usted buscaba, this girl is the one (that)
you were looking for.
aquellos caballos son los que vimos ayer, those horses are the ones
(thaf) we saw yesterday.
lo que dice es verdad, what {or that which) he says, is true.
el de la barba, the one with the beard.
la pluma de acero y la de oro, the steel pen and the gold one (lit.,
* the pen of steel and that of gold ').
el perro de usted y el de su amigo, your dog and that of your friend
(your dog and your friend's) .
lo de ayer, the affair of yesterday.
a. The demonstrative adjective aquel may replace the article. This
occurs often when the following relative is the object of a preposition.
aquella a quien he escrito la carta, the one to whom I have written the
letter.
aquel de la capa verde, that one with the green cloak,
aquello de ayer, that affair of yesterday.
1 In Mexico, plaza often means ' village,' or ' small town.'
2 When thus used, el is sometimes called a pronoun, but it seems best to
call it an adjective (the article) when it limits the application of an adjective, a
phrase, or a clause, used substantively : as in el bianco, * the white one ' ; el de
la capa- verde, ' the one with the green cloak ' ; el que vino ayer, ' the one that
came yesterday.' Note the same use of the adjective aquel, given below in a,
I
134 SPANISH GRAMMAR
132. Radical-changing Verbs. — First Class. Study
§§ 221-228.
Exercise XXVI
A, I. ^No entiende Vd. lo que prueba este argumento? —
Si, pero no lo creo bastante fuerte. 2. Hay dos manzanas
maduras en este plato : esta es la mia y aquella es la de Juan.
3. Este invierno nieva muchisimo y hiela muy a menudo.
4. Cu^ntenos Vd. lo que aconteci6 ayer tarde. 5. Al pre-
sente llueve en ^sta y a menudo truena ; espero que haga buen
tiempo en esa. 6. El bibliotecario desea que Vds. le devuel-
van el libro que les presto esta manana. 7. Los historia-
dores nos recuerdan los hechos de los que eran personajes
principales en el tiempo pasado. 8. Aunque el soldado se
defiende con atrevimiento heroico, no vencera al enemigo
poderoso que le acomete. 9. Despiertate, Enrique, ya son
las ocho. 10. Como me duelen la cabeza y los dientes, no
pienso salir hoy. 11. <iQue piensan los Franceses y los
Ruses de la nueva coalici6n entre los Ingleses y los Alemanes?
12. Nuestra madre piensa siempre en nosotros cuando estamos
ausentes. 13. No es la vanidad lo que mueve a esta mujer,
sino su terquedad. 14. El duque de Jicara es aquel de quien
hablamos : desciende de un guerrero celebre de la Edad Media.
15. A causa de la fiebre amarilla el ejercito americano pierde
muchos hombres en Cuba. 16. Nuestras hermanas vier-
ten un raudal de lagrimas cuando piensan en su buena tia.
1 7. Esta criada y la de la nariz remangada no son bonitas, pero
son hacendosas. 18. El que no guarda las leyes humanas,
no obedece tampoco las leyes divinas, y pierde la estimaci6n de
sus compatriotas.
B. I. He has a toothache and is shedding a lot of tears.
2. We hope that our friends are thinking of us when we are absent
in the ^ PhiUppines.^ 3. They do not understand what-you-say ^ ;
tell them what happened today. 4. I awake always at six o'clock
LESSON XXVII 135
in^ the morning. 5. What do you think of the coalition between
the French and the Russians ? 6. This historian is one ^ of those
who recall to us the deeds of heroic personages of the Middle Ages.
7. This is the book that I lent to Charles ; the-one-that-you-have is
John's ; and that-one on the table is Mary's. 8. He who attacks
well defends himself well. 9. Vanity and obstinacy move that
woman (of-whom-you-speak), and the one with the snub nose also.
10. The Duke of Tetuan is-descended (^pres. indic.^ from the warrior
of whom the historians have spoken so often. 1 1 . Your maid is
the one of whom we w^ere speaking. 12. The librarian does not
desire me to return^ the book today. 13. It is snowing or rain-
ing all-the-time ^ in this-town ; we hope that the weather is good in
yours. 14. We do not mean to go out when there-is-thunder."^
15. Prove your argument, and we shall believe it strong enough.
16. Those who do not obey the human law^s, do not observe the
divine laws either, and they lose the respect of all their compatriots.
1 Omit. 2 piiipinas. ^ eso. ^ de. 5 Say : " that I return," using
pres. subj. 6 siefnpre, 7 Use troiiar in the pres. indie.
LESSON XXVII
133. Relative Pronouns.
que, who, which, that. quien, who.
el cual and el que, who, which. cuanto, all that.
a. A relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with its antecedent.
b. A relative pronoun is sometimes omitted in English, but never in Span-
ish : * the man I saw ' = ' the man that (whom) I saw,' el hombre que vi.
c. An English relative clause sometimes ends with a preposition; in
Spanish the preposition must precede the pronoun it governs : * the house
that we live in ' = ' the house in which we live,' la casa en que vivimos.
134. Que, Svho, which, that/ is invariable, and as subject
or object of a verb it may refer to persons or things ; it is the
most common of the Spanish relative pronouns.
136 SPANISH GRAMMAR
la muchacha que cose, the girl la facilidad con que escribe, the
that is sewing. ease with which he writes.
el indio que ^ mataron, the Indian la viuda, que amaba tiernamente
whom they killed. a su marido, le olvid6 en breve,
los libros que estan sobre la mesa, * the widow who dearly loved
the books that are on the table. her husband soon forgot him.'
a. After a preposition, que refers to things, and quien (quienes) to
persons.
la casa en que vivo, the house in el hombre a quien escribi, the
which I live. man to whom I wrote.
135. el cual (la cual, los cuales, las cuales, lo cual),
el que (la que, los que, las que, lo que), who, which.
The masculine and feminine forms refer to persons or things ;
the neuter forms refer only to a whole phrase, sentence, or idea.
Instead of que, either el cual (la cual, etc.) or el que (la
que, etc.) is regularly used in cases of ambiguity, emphasis, or
the separation of antecedent and relative.
he escrito a la hija del senor Martinez, la cual esta enferma, * I have
written to Mr. Martinez' daughter, who is ill.'
halle en el bolsillo cincuenta pesos en moneda de oro y plata, los
cuales (los que) di a mi padre, I found in the purse fifty dollars in
gold and silver coin, which I gave to my father.
el profesor me escribe que te comportas bien, lo cual (lo que) me
agrada muchisimo, your master (teacher) writes me that you behave
well, which pleases me greatly.
a. Moreover, el cual or el que is generally used when the relative is
governed by por or sin,'^ or by a preposition of two or more syllables. After
a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to el que.
las razones por las cuales (las que) se decidi6, the reasons on account
of which he decided.
1 Note the omission of a, although que refers to a specific person.
2 In referring to persons, quien may be used with por and sin.
LESSON XXVII 137
la ciudad hacia la cual (la que) marchaba el ejercito, the city toward
which the army was marching.
el edificio en f rente del cual me estaba esperando mi amigo, the building
in front of which my friend was awaiting me.
b. Lo cual or lo que is regularly used as the neuter relative ; que is
rarely neuter : le preste todos mis libros, lo cual (lo que) le di6 mucho
placer, * I lent him all my books, which pleased him greatly.' For the
use of lo que, meaning * that which, what,' see Demonstrative Pronouns,
§ 131.
c. There is usually little choice between el cual and el que, except that
el cual is used the oftener in literary language.
Remark. — It should be noted that el que has two meanings, * who '
(as explained above) or 'he who' (as explained in § 131). In the first
case, the article modifies only the relative pronoun; in the second case it
modifies the entire relative clause.
136. Radical-changing Verbs. — Second and Third
Classes. Study §§ 229-234.
Exercise XXVII
A, I. Prefiero que muramos a que no sacudamos el yugo
del extranjero. 2. El hombre que no se arrepiente de sus
pecados no se convierte jamas en buen cristiano. 3. Son-
riendose, el soldado, sin la ayuda del cual yo no hubiera esca-
pado del peligro, parti6 para la ciudad. 4. Yo no hubiera
creido que consintieran sus hermanas de Vd. en la proposici6n
de quedarse aqui, la cual les hizo^ su tio. 5. En el presente
de indicativo y de subjuntivo, asi como en el singular del
imperativo, ergiiir pertenece a dos conjugaciones : podemos
decir yergo, yerga, yergue 6 irgo, irga, irgue, 6. Sentiria
muchisimo que Vd. no durmiese bien esta noche. 7. Yo no
concibo que Vd. pida tanto dinero por una cosa que no
cuesta mucho. 8. De esta fuente el agua sale hirviendo.
9. Tengo una pluma tintero, sin la cual no podria apuntar las
138 SPANISH GRAMMAR
cosas que advierto. 10. Las hijas de mi tia con las cuales
hablabamos ayer no refieren chismes a sus vecinas. 11. Los
mozos se despidieron de su madre y siguieron a su hermano
mayor a la guerra. 12. El muchacho a quien hemos dado
el premio no miente nunca. 13. Este es un refran espanol :
" Medio mundo se rie del otro medio, y yo solo me rio del
mmido entero." 14. El herido no gimio, lo cual me sor-
prendi6. 15. Los rayos del sol hieren los cristales de la
ventana y aclaran el interior del aposento. 16. Los tertu-
lianos que estaban reunidos junto a la puerta dejaron entrar a
Maria, la hija mayor del conde, a la cual el duque conducia por
la mano. 1 7. Las naranjas de que hablabais no estan madu-
ras, lo que nos obliga a botarlas. 18. Este es el arbol debajo
del cual hemos hallado las monedas. 19. Aunque se vista de
seda la mona, mona se queda. 20. Este muchacho rine
siempre con la hermana de su amiguito Carlos, la cual es una
niiia discola. 21. Si consiguiese hallar un buen libro, lo
leeria hoy.
B. I . The duke does not conceive how ^ Mary should quarrel
{pres. subj.^ with her brother. 2. The guests did not consent
to the proposition of remaining near the window. 3. If the count
succeeds in escaping from the peril, he will laugh at the whole world.
4. This is the tree near which the Christians were assembled.
5. The water is boiling and the sunbeam is striking it. 6. I do
not talk gossip and I smile at the sins of my brother, which sur-
prises my aunt's neighbors, who are always gossiping and lying.
7. Let us take leave of the wounded-man ; he slept well yesterday
and he is not moaning tonight. 8. The soldier repented and
became-converted into a ^ good Christian. 9. Yergiie 2^\^ irgue
belong to the imperative of erguzr, which in the singular of the
subjunctive has irga and yerga, 10. Charles's elder sister, who
is under the tree, dresses well. 11. Let us follow the soldier to
the city toward which the army is marching. 12. The man did
not consent to the proposition which the count made him ; he pre-
ferred to die. 13. Never lie, and always repent of your sins.
LESSON XXVIII 139
14. This is a Spanish proverb : '^Although the monkey dressed in
silk, she remained a^ monkey." 15. The prize which we are
giving to the boy does not cost much. 16. We started for the
city, which obhged them to follow us. 17. The soldiers who
found the books gave them to the men to whom they belonged.
18. We threw away the oranges which were not ripe; the lads
regretted it, although it did not surprise them. 19. If I asked-
for {iniperf. subj,) money, without which I should not be able to
start for the city, you would laugh. 20. This is the fountain under
which the boy found the book and the coins.
1 ' made.' 2 q^^^ 3 Omit.
LESSON XXVIII
137. Quien (quienes), 'who/ in modern Spanish refers only
to persons or personified things.
(i) After a preposition/ quien is used instead of que, in
referring to persons ; as in el amigo de quien hablamos ' the
friend of whom we are speaking/
(2) When the subject or the direct object of a verb, quien
either introduces a clause which is not restrictive of the ante-
cedent, or it includes its antecedent.
vi a tu senor padre, quien me lo cont6 todo, I saw your father, who
told me all.
me lo cont6 todo tu senor padre, a quien vi poco ha, your father,
whom I saw a short while ago, told me all.
quien te adula te agravia, he who flatters you, insults you.
no tengo a quien dirigirme, I have not any one to whom to apply.
Cf. vi al hombre que te lo cont6 todo, ' I saw the man who ' (restric-
tive) ' told you all.'
1 After a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to quien.
I40 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Quien sometimes serves to indicate the number of its antecedent,
or the fact that the antecedent is a person.
me tope con el abuelo de estos ninos, quien los buscaba en todas partes,
I ran across the grandfather of these children, who was looking for
them everywhere.
ayer vi al dueno de la casa, quien esta en esta ciudad, yesterday I saw
the owner of the house, who is in this city.
b. Quien is equivalent to either one of the two el que's (see §§131
and 135).
quien (el que) calla otorga, he who is silent gives consent.
llam§ a un mozo, a quien (al que) entregue la carta, I called a waiter,
to whom I gave the letter.
But in colloquial language, quien is rarely used as the subject or the direct
object of a verb, save in a few proverbial expressions ; in its stead el cual
or el que is used.
c. Correlative quien . . . quien means * one . . . another ' : quien
lloraba, quien gemia, ' one was weeping, another was groaning,' or *some
were weeping and some were groaning.'
138. Cuanto (-a, -os, -as), ^how much/ ^how many/ ^ all
that/ is used as pronoun or adjective.
le ofreci cuanto dinero tenia, ^I offered him all the money that I had.'
cuantos entraron en el buque, perecieron, all that entered the ship
perished.
139. Cuyo (-a, -os, -as), ^ whose,' ^of whom,' ^ of which,'
is a relative possessive adjective. It agrees in gender and
number with the thing possessed, and it may refer to persons
or things.
la seiiora cuyas amigas han llegado, the lady whose friends have
arrived,
un lugar de cuyo nombre no me acuerdo, a place the name of which
I do not remember.
LESSON XXVIII 141
140. The adverb donde, ' where,' is often used as equivalent
to a preposition plus a relative, and sometimes with the prepo-
sition expressed, as in la casa donde (en donde) vivo, ^ the house
in which I live.'
141. Verbs with Inceptive Endings and -uir Verbs. —
Study §§ 220 and 235.
Exercise XXVIII
A. I. Agradezcamos a quien nos favorece. Siempre agra-
decemos a las personas de quienes hemos recibido favores.
2. Mariana visitare la casa donde naci6 el gran poeta. S-i No
quiere Vd. decirme el nombre del caballero cuya tarjeta de
visita la criada acaba de darle? — Si, la tarjeta lleva el nombre
del Senor Suarez, quien (or el que) escribi6 la mas interesante
novela del ano pasado. 4. Estoy pidiendo a mi librero una
novela mas corta que la suya y que no carezca de interns ; no
me importa que no instruya con tal que no me entristezca.
5. Sentiriamos muchisimo que Vd. atribuyera a este autor
defectos que no tiene. 6. No es cosa nueva calumniar las
mejores acciones, atribuyendoles viciosas causas. 7. Los
ciudadanos pidieron que se disminuyesen las contribuciones y
que se distribuyesen mas uniformemente las cargas publicas.
8. A los tiranos no les gusta que nazcan hombres libres en
sus dominios. 9. Hay muchos proverbios espanoles como
^stos : quien a los suyos se parece, honra merece ; nunca bien
sirve quien (or el que) con su dueno arguye ; muchas veces
quien huye del fuego da en las brasas. 10. No nos gusta
que el autor de este Hbro luzca tanto sus conocimientos lingtiis-
ticos. II. El discipulo merece un duro castigo, porque
su mala conducta influye en la de toda la clase. 12. Ano-
checer en un lugar significa llegar 6 estar en un lugar al empe-
zar la noche 6 antes de que anochezca completamente.
142 SPANISH GRAMMAR
13. He hablado con el maestro de estos discipulos, quien
me ha dado cuantos informes deseo acerca de la conducta de
ellos. 14. Escribo al Senador Cisneros, a quien {or al que)
tengo que felicitar por su brillante discurso en pr6 de la re-
forma arancelaria. 15. (iHa estado Vd. en la ciudad de
Waltham, donde se fabrican muy buenos relojes? — Si, como
aficionado a la relojeria, me inter esa (todo) cuanto se relaciona
con esta arte. 16. En este mundo, quien ^ {or el que) juzga
por apariencias, hasta lo bianco le puede parecer negro.
B. I.I like that Spanish proverb : " To him who judges by
appearances even white may seem black." 2. We shall reach the
city of Waltham before night comes on. 3. The senator whom
I congratulated has just made ^ a speech : he asked that the taxes
be diminished. 4. Has the bookseller given you all the informa-
tion that you wish about the novel ? 5 . We do not like to have
authors displaying their faults in their books. 6. The teacher to
whom I spoke will punish the pupil for^ his bad behavior. 7. A
good man does not ascribe vicious causes to good deeds. 8. I do
not think ^ that the conduct of the pupil deserves {pres. subj.) a
severe punishment. 9. Provided a man is born free, it does not
matter that he has faults. 10. There is a Spanish proverb : '^ Out
of the frying pan into the fire." 1 1 . (By) distributing the public
burdens, the senators will show that all relating to the needs of the
citizens interests them. 12. He who is ^ fond of brilliant speeches
often judges by appearances. 13. With their teacher the pupils
have visited a house in which fine watches are made. 14. The
author whose book I have just received argues in favor of tariff
reform, but he does not influence the feelings of the citizens, be-
cause his book is wholly without interest. 15. He who argued
with his master never served him well. 16. I should be sorry
that you should argue with the poet in-order-to ^ show off your
attainments. 17. Mr. Cisneros is the gentleman whom I thank-
for that favor. 18. Ask the bookseller for a book which shall
instruct {pres, subj.) us and shall not sadden us. 19. The maid
has given me the visiting card of Mr. Sudrez ; he is the man
whom watch-making and all related to that art interests very much.
LESSON XXIX 143
20. I ascribe the behavior of the citizens to the taxes which the
tyrant will not diminish. 21. It is no new thing to calumniate
a man and to ascribe faults to him who hasn't anyJ
1 ' if one.' 2 Use hacer. 3 por. 4 Use creer. 5 estd. ^ para. ^ los.
LESSON XXIX
142. Interrogative Pronouns.
que, what. cual, which.
qui^n, who. cuanto (-a), how much.
The interrogatives take the accent in both direct and indirect
questions.
143. Que, ^ what,' may be used as pronoun or adjective. As
a pronoun, it refers to things, and is neuter.
^que es eso? what is that?
^que dijo? what did he say?
^qu6 hora es? what time is it?
^que hombre es este? what man is this?
pregunta que pasajeros han llegado, he asks what passengers have
arrived.
a. In exclamations, qui is * what (a) ' before an attributive, and * how '
before a predicate adjective: |qu6 lindaluna! *what a pretty moon!'
i que palido estas ! ' how pale you are ! ' To add emphasis, tan, * so,' or
mas, * more,' may be placed before the attributive adjective, which then
follows its noun : \ que dia tan hermoso (mas hermoso) ! * what a beau-
tiful day ! '
144. Quien (quienes), 'who/ is used only as a pronoun, and
refers only to persons. Interrogative ' whose ' is usually de
quien.
144 SPANISH GRAMMAR
iquien llama? who is knocking?
pregunta quienes eran las senoras, he asks who the ladies were.
ide quien es aquella hermosa casa? whose is that beautiful house?
^de quien es este caballo? whose horse is this? (lit., ^of whom is
this horse ? ') .
145. Cual (cuales), ^ which/ is chiefly used as a pronoun;
it may refer to persons or things.
I cual de las plumas quiere usted ? ^ a cuales de mis amigos ha visto
which pen (lit., ' which of the usted hoy? which of my friends
pens') do you wish? have you seen to-day?
a. Cual maybe used adjectively, as in <: cual casa prefieres ? ^ which
house do you prefer ? ' but i cual de las casas prefieres ? is the more
common construction.
d. When * what ' stands in the predicate, it is usually to be expressed by
cual: icual es la fecha de la carta? *what is the date of the letter?'
^cual es la ciudad capital de los Estados Unidos ? * what is the capital
city of the United States?' Que is used if a definition is wanted: ^que
es la filosofia griega? *what is Greek philosophy?'
146. The interrogative possessive ciiyo, ^ whose/ is little
used ; it refers only to persons, and is, as a rule, used only
in the predicate. Interrogative ' whose ' is generally de quien.
^cuya (better, de quien) es esta ^cuyo (better, de qui6n) es aquel
casa ? whose house is this ? . caballo ? whose horse is that ?
Remark. — One does not say: icuya casa habita usted? * whose
house do you occupy?' but ^ciiya (de qui§n) es la casa que usted
habita?
147. Cuanto (-a) is * how much ' ; cuantos (-as), ' how
many.* Cuanto (-a, -os, -as) may be used as adjective or
pronoun.
^cuantos hay? how many are there?
icuanto dinero necesita usted? how much money do you need?
^cuantas vacas vendiste? how many cows did you sell?
LESSON XXIX 145
148. Irregular Verbs: Ir, '(to) go/ and Venivy *(to)
come.' Study §§ 247 and 248.
a. ' Go and ' (followed by a verb) is ir a; ' come and ' is venir a.
vaya usted a decirselo, go and tell him. venga a verlo, come and see it.
149. Idiomatic Expressions.
va a Hover, it is going to rain. la nina iba creciendo, the little girl
vamos a ver, let us see. kept growing.
la noche va oscureciendo, the night iba montado en una mula, he was
keeps (is) growing darker. riding a mule.
la semana que viene, next week.
E2:ercise XXIX
A, I. <iQu^ hora es? — Son las once y media. 2. ^Que
es la aritmetica? — Es una de las ciencias exactas. 3. ^jCual
es la mejor aritmetica? — La del Sefior Cisneros. 4. i Cuanto
dinero ha gastado Vd.^ esta manana? — Unos quince duros.
5. Si su primo de Vd. viniera a verme, iria con el a visitar al
sefior catedratico en cuyas clases hemos estudiado. 6. <:De
cual catedratico habla Vd.? — Del Senor Martinez, el que en-
sefia las lenguas orientales en la Universidad Central. 7. La
noche iba oscureciendo como caminabamos montados en nues-
tras mulas, y nos parecia que iba a Hover ; pero pronto el viento
se hizo^ frio y los copos de nieve vinieron volando del cielo.
8. Venga lo que viniere, emprendere esta tarea. 9. Ven-
dremos esta tarde ; aguardenos Vd. 10. <iQue calle es esta?
— La calle de Alcala. 11. ^Cual es el mejor modo de
dirigirme a la Puerta del Sol? — Soy extranjero ; preguntelo
Vd. a ese guardia en la acera. 12. ^iQuien es Vd.? — Soy
un turista norte-americano. 13. £ Cuanto tiempo hace que
esta Vd. en la corte (Madrid)? — Llegue anteayer y quizas
me marche manana. 14. j Que visita mas corta ! — Pienso
volver aqui a mi regreso del Escorial y entonces ver^ lo que
146 SPANISH GRAMMAR
ahora no he visto. 15 • Y (ique le ha gustado mas a Vd. de.
lo que ha visto en Madrid? 16. Vamos a ver ; como artista,
me ha encantado el gran Museo del Prado, que en mi concepto
gana al Louvre, y como arque61ogo, la Armeria Real, cuya
colecci6n de armaduras es la mas completa que he visto.
17. Pues, venga Vd. a ver una corrida de toros ; es la diversion
mas esencialmente espaiiola, y habra una grande corrida la
semana que viene. 18. ^Quien es aquel hombre que va por
la calle montado en una mula ? — Es un campesino. 1 9. \ Qn6
modo tan raro de pasearse ! — No es raro en Espaiia. 20. Sin
duda en su pais todo el mundo monta a caballo. Si Vd. fuera
al campo, veria mas mulas y asnos que caballos. 21. Ire
a visitar algunas aldeas castellanas antes de partir de este pais.
22. ^Cuya (De quien) es aquella casa en la esquina de esta
calle? 23. (jCual casa? ^iQuiere Vd. decir el gran palacio?
Pues, es el palacio del Duque de Villarica. 24. Venga con-
migo, iremos a Uamar a la puerta, y nos dejaran entrar a ver las
hermosas pinturas de Goya que posee el duque. 25. j Cuantas
obras maestras ha pintado ese gran pintor ! — Si, no se puede
decir cuantas. 26. Dondequiera que vaya Vd., vera las obras
de aquel insigne pintor, 6 de otros artistas mas antiguos, como
Velazquez, Murillo y Zurbaran.
B. I. Who teaches Oriental languages in the University ?
2. The professor in whose class your cousin studied ; come with me
and see him. 3. I shall go with you, if it is half-past eleven.
How many classes has the professor? 4. Ask your cousin this
evening ; I am not going to tell you how many. 5. Which tourist
arrived the-day-before-yesterday ? 6. What is a tourist ? 7. The
night will soon be growing dark. 8. What a strange amusement!
Do you mean the bullfight ? We shall go and see it next week.
9. If you should go and visit a Spanish village, you would see peas-
ants going along the streets riding on mules. 10. In^ what way
do they go-about in your country ? 11. They ride on horseback.
12. In Madrid everybody likes to go and visit the Museum of the
LESSON XXX 147
Prado and the Royal Armory. 13. Come what may come {i.e.
Happen what may), the strangers will take-their-way to the Puerta del
Sol. 14. To what street did you go this morning? 15. Let's
see ; I went to the street on whose corner the Duke^s palace is.^
16. To my mind, the Spaniards have great painters. On my return
from the country, I mean to visit the museums and see the paintings
of Veldzquez and Murillo. What beautiful works those illustrious
artists have painted! 17. Yes ; wherever w^e may-go, we shall see
them. 18. Before going to the Prado, I shall come to the Puerta
del Sol. 19. What (Which) is the North American way of going-
about? We ride on horseback. We do not go riding on donkeys
and mules. 20. Who owns more paintings than the archaeologist
whose collection is in that house on the corner? 21. How long
have-you-been-visiting (^pres. indie.) the capital? 22. It is not
going to rain ; the snow will come with the cold winds. 23. The
masterpieces in the Museum of the Prado surpass those of the Louvre.
24. Are you going to knock at the door? What a strange way of
entering a palace ! 25. Perhaps we shall come tomorrow, if you
return ^ here. 26. One cannot say how-much money the strangers
are going to spend. 27. In Spain, everybody likes to see a bull-
fight. 28. What artists are older than Zurbaran? 29. What
exact sciences did you study in the classes of Mr. Cisneros ?
30. How much armor is there in the Royal Armory? 31. Soon
the flakes of snow will come flying down from the sky. 32. If you
went {imperf. subj.) to the Escurial, its collections of beautiful
paintings would delight you.
1 Abbreviation of usted : cf. \ 90. 2 Pret. Indie, of hacer, 3 De,
4 Say : ' is the palace of the Duke.' 5 Radical-changing verb, ist class : vuelve.
LESSON XXX
150. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
Alguien, ^some one/ ^somebody/ ^any one/ ^anybody,'
algo, * something,' * anything,' are pronouns and invariable.
Alguien refers only to persons ; algo is neuter.
148 SPANISH GRAMMAR
alguien toca a la puerta, some one is knocking at the door.
I hallaste algo? did you find something (anything) ?
a. * Not — any one,' * not — anybody,' is no — nadie ; * not — any-
thing ' is no — nada. See "Negation," § 165. Alguien and algo are
never combined with negatives.
151. Alguno (-a, -os, -as), ^some/ ^any/ *a few/ is used as
adjective or pronoun.
algiin 1 dia, some day.
algunos de los amigos'de usted, some of your friends.
tiene algunos libros muy raros, he has a few very rare books.
a. * Not — any ' is usually no — ninguno or no — alguno (after noun).
d. In partitive expressions, unemphatic * some ' and * any,' used as
adjectives, are generally not to be expressed in Spanish.
tengo pan, pero no tengo mante- quiero comprar manzanas y na-
quilla, I have some bread, but ranjas, I wish to buy some ap-
I haven't any butter. pies and oranges.
In answer to a question, * some ' or * any ' is then expressed by a personal
pronoun object, or the noun is repeated.
ino tiene Vd. peras? haven't you any pears? hoy no las tengo, I haven't
any to-day. *•
i tiene Vd. vino? have you any wine? no tengo vino (or vino no tengo),
I haven't any.
^hay uvas? are there any grapes? si, las hay, yes, there are some.
<j hay pan? is there any bread? no lo hay (or no hay pan), there isn't
any.
152. Unos (-as) means ^ some ' :
tengo unos quinientos pesos, I have some five hundred dollars.
Unos sometimes seems to mean little more than ^ a pair of.'
el elefante tiene unas orejas enormes, the elephant has * a pair of ^
enormous ears.
1 See " Apocopation of Adjectives," § 66.
LESSON XXX 149
153. Nadie, 'no one/ ^nobody/ ^not any one/ *not anybody/
nada, 'nothing/ 'not anything/ are pronouns and invariable.
Nadie refers only to persons ; nada is neuter. See " Negation/'
§ 165.
nadie ha venido hoy, no one has come to-day.
nada veo, I do not see anything.
154. Ninguno (-a, -os, -as), ' none/ ' no/ ' not any/ is used
as adjective or pronoun.
ninguna casa, no (not any) house.
ninguno de los ninos, none of the children.
a. English * no/ * not any,' is often expressed by no, ' not,' before the
verb.
no tengo tiempo, I have no (not any) time.
no tiene enemigos, he has no (not any) enemies.
155. Mucho (-a), ' much/ muchos (-as), ' many,' is used as
adjective or pronoun.
mucho tiempo, much (a great deal of) time.
muchos anos, many years.
muchos han partido, many have left.
a, * Very much ' is muchisimo (rather than muy mucho).
156. Poco (-a), 'little' (meaning 'a small quantity'), pocos
(-as), ' few,' is used as adjective or pronoun.
tengo poco dinero, I have little money,
pocos han venido, few have come.
a, Un poco de is * a little ' : tengo un poco de vino, * I have a little
wine ' ; cf. tengo poco vino y mucha leche, ' I have a little {i.e, only
a little) wine and much milk.'
157. Todo (-a, -os, -as), 'all, 'every/ is used as adjective or
pronoun.
I50 SPANISH GRAMMAR
todo aquel dia, all that day. todos los hombres, all the men.^
toda mujer, every woman. todas las noches, every night.
todo el mundo, everybody. todos lo dicen, all say so.
a. * All,' meaning ' the whole,' is todo (-a, -OS, -as) el (la, los, las) : toda
la semana, * all week.'
b. The neuter pronoun todo means * all,' * everything ' : todo es vanidad
en este mundo, * all is vanity in this world.'
158. Mismo (-a, -os, -as), ^same/ Wery/ ^self/ 'himself*
(' herself,' etc.), is used as an adjective.
el mismo dia, the same day.
el exceso mismo de mi felicidad me matara, the very excess of my
happiness will kill me.
k\ mismo me lo dijo, he told me so himself.
creo que es usted la misma virtud, I believe that you are virtue itself.
In the sense of * self,' it often follows the noun or pronoun.
a. El mismo (la misma, los mismos, las mismas, lo mismo), 'the
same,' is used as pronoun.
159. Ambos (-as), los dos (las dos), 'both (of)/ are used as
adjectives or pronouns.
tengo las dos (ambas) manos heladas, both of my hands are frozen,
nos ama a los dos, he loves us both.
160. Cada, ' each/ is used as adjective, and cada uno (-a) or
cada cual, 'each (one),' as pronoun (cada is invariable).
cada vez, each time.
dl un peso a cada uno (cada cual), I gave each one a dollar.
161. Otto (-a, -OS, -as), ' other,' ' another,' is used as adjective
or pronoun ; it does not admit the indefinite article.
1 Todos los hombres is ' all men ' (generally speaking) if the noun denotes
all of its kind.
LESSON XXX 151
el otro dia, the other day. otra semana, another week.
quiero otro caballo, I wish an- no tei^o otros, I have no others
other horse. (I haven't any others).
Note the position of otro in otros muchos, ' many others,' otros ties,
* three others,' etc.
162. Uno (-a) y otro (-a), 'both' (in the sense of 'each'), uno
(-a) li otro. (-a), 'either (one),' ni uno (-a) ni otro (-a), 'neither
(one)/ 'not either (one),' el uno — el otro (la una — la otra),
' each other,' los unos — los otros (las unas — las otras), ' one
another,' are used as adjectives or pronouns.
personas de uno y otro sexo, persons of both sexes.
aceptare uno u otro, I will accept either (one).
no quiero ni uno ni otro, I wish neither (one), or I do not wish
either (one).
se burlan el uno del otro, they make sport of each other.
163. Tal (tales), ' such,' ' such a,' is used as adjective or pro-
noun ; it is never followed by the indefinite article.
tales hombres, such men. tal muchacho, such a boy.
a, Un tal is ' one,' * a certain ' ; el tal is ' the said ' : me lo cont6 un tal
Manzanares, * one (a certain) Manzanares told me '; el tal G6mez era un
picaro, * the said Gomez was a rascal.'
164. Cosa, 'thing,' is used in the formation of many com-
pound indefinite pronouns, which occur frequently in colloquial
language.
alguna cosa, something, anything.
ninguna cosa or cosa alguna, nothing, not anything.
la misma cosa, the same thing.
otra cosa, something else, anything else.
tal cosa, such a thing, etc.^
1 Also in interrogative que cosa, ' what thing.'
152 SPANISH GRAMMAR
165. Negation. — The pronouns nadie, ^no one/ nada,
' nothing/ ninguno, ^ notie/ and the adverbs ni — ni, ' neither —
nor/ nunca and jamas, ' never/ ^ and tampoco, ' not either/
require the verb to be made negative when they follow the
verb. They are negative in themselves if they precede the
verb or if no verb is expressed^^
no temo nada or nada temo, I su hijo no es, ni sera nunca nadie,
fear nothing (I do not fear her son is not nor ever will be
anything) . anything.
no tengo ni pluma ni papel or ni no quiero aquel caballo tampoco
pluma ni papel tengo, I have or tampoco quiero aquel ca-
neither pen nor paper (I ballo, I do not wish that horse
haven't either pen or paper). either.
no le vi nunca or nunca le vi, I c Quien viene? — Nadie. Who is
never saw him. coming ? — No one.
nadie se acordaba de el, ni el se i Que dice Vd.? — Nada. What
acordaba de nadie, no one are you saying ? — - Nothing.
remembered him, nor did he
remember any one.
a. As a rule, negative pronouns and adverbs are used instead of positive
ones if the sentence is in any way negative, or expects a negative answer,
or if the pronoun or adverb follows a comparative.
es imitil decir nada, it is useless to say anything,
sin olvidarte nunca, without ever forgetting you.
I hay nada mas sublime ? is there anything more sublime ?
el viejo parece mas feliz que nunca, the old man seems happier than
ever.
d. In a negative sentence, alguno may be used instead of ninguno, in
which case alguno follows its noun : no tiene enemigo alguno, * he has
no enemy.'
1 ' Never ' is commonly expressed by nunca. Jam^s after a positive verb is
positive : ^ ha visitado Vd. jamas a Mejico ? ' have you ever visited Mexico ? '
2 In colloquial language, the negative (except no) usually follows the verb,
e.^. no tengo nada is more common than nada tengo, ' I have nothing,* or ' I
haven't anything.'
LESSON XXX 153
166. Irregular Verbs.
Querer, ' (to) wish,' and poder, ^ (to) be able (can).'
Study §§ 242 and 243.
167. Idiomatic Expressions.
el nino puede caerse, the child el puede mas que yo, he is stronger
may fall. than I.
no puedo mas, I can't do any more, i quiere usted venir conmigo ? will
I am played out. you come with me ?
no pudo menos de sonreirse, he la quiere mucho, he is very fond
couldn't help smiUng. of her.
puede que, it is possible that. i que quiere decir esto ? what does
this mean ?
Exercise XXX
A. I. Alguien tiene que responder del resultado. 2. Al-
gun dia nos veremos frente a frente j podremos ver quien de
los dos puede mas. 3. £ Tiene Vd. cambio por un peso? —
^Cuanto necesita Vd. pagar? — Una peseta (veinte centavos).
— Aqui tiene Vd. — Muchas gracias. 4. Nadie sabe lo que ha
de suceder mafiana. 5. Ninguno de los cuatro nifios sabe leer
6 escribir. 6. Mas vale poco que nada. 7. El y yo iba-
mos en el mismo tren. 8. Este retrato es el mismo Antonio.
9. Ambos contendientes perecieron. Cada uno pele6 con valor ;
otro caballero quiso intervenir y sali6 herido. 10. Pasemos
a otra cosa. 11. Nadie dudaba del ^xito. 12. ^rPodria
Vd. facilitarme su diccionario ? — Si, pero quisiera que Vd. se
sirviera devolvermelo cuanto antes. 13. La maestra quisiera
a cada nifia, si estudiase sus lecciones. 14. ^i Quiere Vd.
darme un poco de pan y queso? 15. Todos los caminos
llevan a Roma. 16. Hay muchisimos alfileres en esta caja,
pero no los puedo hallar nunca. 17. Ellos mismos no quisie-
ron venir, porque yo no pude convidarlos. Tal cosa jamas se ha
154 SPANISH GRAMMAR
visto. 1 8. Estaba en la sala un tal Herreros. 19. No es
oro todo lo que reluce. 20. Sobre todo, ^1 no quiso hablar
con nadie. 21. No podemos mas : estamos mas fatigados que
nunca. 22. A nadie quiere recibir el hombre malo : ni sus
amigos, ni sus parientes pueden entrar a verle. 23. £ Hay nada
mas interesante que el Don Quijote de Cervantes? 24. No
podemos menos de quejarnos cuando consideramos nuestra
condici6n desgraciada. 25. Juan no sabe lo que quiere
decir esto ; ni su hermano tampoco. 26. i Quien le ha dicho
a Vd. que no queremos a nuestros padres? — Nadie. 27. No
tenemos duda alguna acerca del exito de la empresa. 28. Sin
duda alguna no pudieramos derrotar al enemigo, si no tuviese-
mos un fuerte ejercito. 29. Es posible que haya algo en la
cesta, pero no podemos hallar nada. 30. Alguien llama a la
puerta : sin duda algunos de nuestros amigos quieren entrar.
31. Si quieres ser bien servido, sirvete a ti mismo. 32. Yo
podria hacer ese favor, pero no quisiera molestar a mi amigo.
^^. Puede que llueva mafiana. 34. Ahorraremos nuestro
dinero por lo que pudiere tronar. 35. ^ Quien habla? — Nadie.
B, I.I can see each (every) gentleman in the room ; John can-
not see each (every) one of them. 2. Who doubts the result?
Nobody ; v^^e can all answer for the outcome. 3. We need twenty
cents. That ^ is Httle. Yes ; but a little is better than nothing.
4. Can there be anything more wretched than the condition of the
said Herreros? 5. We are played out: do you know Avhat that
means ? 6. One or another of the armies will be able to rout the
enemy. Of this I have no doubt whatever. 7. Some of our enter-
prises could not have any success. 8. We do not wish to com-
plain because we have no gold ; and everybody knows that all is
not gold that gUstens. 9. It is possible that you may be well
served if you serve yourself. 10. I should not like to do a favor
for Antonio, nor for John, either. 1 1 . This gentleman could fight
well, if he had another opponent. 12. Never have I been able to
find any pins in your box. 13. Both wished to go with us in the
same train ; but we could invite neither. 14. We should like you
LESSON XXXI
155
to-be-kind-enough to pass to something else. 15. The men could
not help saying that they had no cheese and that they desired but
little bread. 16. Is anybody knocking at the door? Yes; some
of our friends wish to come in and see us, but we shall be unable to
receive them. 17. It is possible that nobody may-wish {pres.
stibj.) to do us that favor. 18. Each of the roads leads to Rome.
19. The said Herreros says that he has seen a certain Sanchez and
another man with him. 20. Could you oblige me with twenty
pesetas? — Many thanks. I shall pay you as soon as possible.
21. I should not like to see my enemy face to face; one or other
of us might perish. 22. Save your money against contingencies.-
23. Both of the contestants fight valorously. Which of the two is
the stronger? 24. I cannot say what will happen tomorrow if
you do not study your lessons. 25. They wished to return us our
box, but they could not find it. 26. We might enter into the
room if we wished to speak with somebody. 27. The enemies
were fighting ; our friends sought ^ to interfere, and came-out (of it)
with-a-wound.^
1 eso. *^ Cf. A 34. 3 Use querer. ^ heridos : cf. A 9.
LESSON XXXI
168. Cardinal Numerals.
cero,
0.
nueve,
9.
uno (-a),i
I.
diez,
10.
dos.
2.
once,
II.
tres,
3.
doce,
12.
cuatro,
4.
trece,
13.
cinco,
5.
catorce,
14.
seis,
6.
quince,
15-
siete,
7.
diez y seis,^
16.
ocho.
8.
diez y siete,
17-
1 See ^S 66.
2 These numbers
are alsc
written in one word, as, dieciseis,
veinti
treintaiuno, etc.
156
SPANISH GRAMMAR
diez y ocho,
diez y nueve,
veinte,
veinte y uno,
veinte y dos,
veinte y tres,
veinte y cuatro,
veinte y cinco,
veinte y seis,
veinte y siete,
veinte y ocho,
veinte y nueve,
treinta,
treinta y uno,
cuarenta,
cincuenta,
sesenta,
setenta,
ochenta,
noventa,
1 8.
19.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
40.
50.
60.
70.
80.
90.
ciento,!
100.
ciento y uno,
lOI.
ciento y diez,
no.
doscientos (-as),
200.
trescientos (-as).
300.
cuatrocientos (-as),
400.
quinientos (-as),
500.
seiscientos (-as).
600.
setecientos (-as) ,2
700.
ochocientos (-as).
800.
novecientos (-as), 2
900.
mil.
1,000.
mil y ciento,
1,100.
mil y doscientos (-as
), 1,200.
dos mil.
2,000.
cien 1 mil.
100,000.
doscientos (-as) mil.
200,000.
un mill6n.
1,000,000.
dos millones,
2,000,000.
a. The cardinals are invariable, except uno (-a), -cientos (-as) in
the combinations from doscientos (-as) to novecientos (-as) inclusive,
and quinientos (-as): doscientos hombres, *two hundred men'; dos-
cientas mujeres, 'two hundred women'; doscientas mil personas, *two
hundred thousand persons.'
b. In compound numerals, uno (-a) drops the final vowel before a
masculine or a feminine noun ; treinta y un soldados, ' thirty-one sol-
diers'; cincuenta y un casas, * fifty-one houses.'
c. Mill6n takes un, but ciento and mil do not : cien estudiantes,
' one hundred students ' ; mil pesos, * one thousand dollars ' ; un mill6n
de pesetas, * one million pesetas.'
But ciento un, doscientos un, etc., may occur before mil : ciento un
mil tr^ientos veinte y cinco, 101,325.
d. The conjunction y is used to connect the last of a series of numerals
with the foregoing numeral : mil doscientos ochenta y cinco, 1285.
1 See 5 69.
• 2 In colloquial language one sometimes hears sietecientos and nuevecientos.
LESSON XXXI
157
e. Counting by hundreds is not carried above nine hundred in Spanish ;
beginning with ten hundred mil is used: mil ochocientos noventa y
tres, 1893.
/. As substantives, ciento or centenar, mil or miliar, are used; but
only ciento and miliar are regularly used to express rate : centenares de
caballos, * hundreds, of horses '; dos pesetas el ciento, *two pesetas per
hundred'; miles de aves, * thousands of birds'; a peso el miliar, 'at
one dollar per thousand.' ^
169. Ordinal Numerals.
primero, -a (primo, -a),
1st.
segundo, -a,
2d.
tercero, -a (tercio, -a),
3d.
cuarto, -a,
4th.
quinto, -a,
5th.
sexto, -a or sesto, -a.
6th.
septimo, -a or setimo,^-s
I, 7th.
octavo, -a,
8th.
noveno, -a (nono, -a),
9th.
d§cimo, -a.
loth.
undecimo, -a,
nth.
duodecimo, -a.
1 2th.
dicimo tercio, -a,^
13th.
d^cimo cuarto, -a.
14th.
d^cimo quinto, -a.
15th.
decimo sexto, -a.
1 6th.
d^cimo siptimo, -a.
17th.
decimo octavo, -a,
1 8th.
ddcimo nono, -a,
19th.
vig^simo, -a,
20th.
vigesimo primo, -a,
2 1 St.
vigesimo segundo, -a.
22d.
vigesimo tercio, -a.
23d.
trigesimo, -a,
cuadragesimo, -a,
quincuagesimo, -a,
sexagesimo, -a,
septuag6simo, -a,
octogesiijio, -a,
nonagesimo, -a,
centesimo, -a,
centesimo primo, -a,
centesimo undecimo, -a
ducentesimo, -a,
trecentesimo, -a,
cuadragentesimo, -a,
quingentesimo, -a,
sescentesimo, -a,
septengesimo, -a,
octogentesimo, -a,
nonagent^simo, -a,
mil^simo, -a,
dosmilesimo, -a,
diezmilesimo, -a,
millon6simo, -a,
30th.
40th.
50th.
60th.
70th.
80th.
90th.
1 00th.
loist.
I nth.
200th.
300th.
400 th.
500th.
600th.
700th.
800th.
900th.
1, 000th.
2,000th.
io,oooth.
1, 000,000th. 2
1 In mercantile language uno is usually omitted, as here, before the name of
the coin.
2 These are also written decimotercio, decimocuarto, etc.
3 The use of the ordinals in Spanish is daily becoming less. It is hardly an
exaggeration to say that only trained persons know them from ' twentieth ' on. .
158 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The shorter forms, primo, tercio, and nono are used in compound
ordinal numerals. Sexto and septimo are usually pronounced and often
written sesto and setimo. For the apocopation of primero and tercero
see § 66.
b. The ordinals agree in gender and number with the noun they
modify. A single ordinal may precede or follow its noun; a compound
ordinal regularly follows : el primer dia, * the first day'; el siglo decimo
sexto (or el siglo diez y seis), ' the sixteenth century.'
c. After primero, the cardinals are generally used in Spanish instead
of the ordinals, to specify the number of a volume, book, chapter, lesson,
century, etc. : el tomo veinte, ' the twentieth volume ' {or * volume
twenty ') ; el siglo diez y nueve, ' the nineteenth century.'
d. The ordinals are used up to decimo (or undecimo) to indicate the
order of succession of sovereigns; but from that number on the cardinals
are regularly used : Carlos quinto, * Charles the Fifth ' ; ^ Leon trece,
'LeoXIIL'
e. In dates, the cardinals are used instead of the ordinals, with the ex-
ception of primero : el primero (el dos, el tres, etc.) de junio, ' the first
(the second, the third, etc.) of June.'
170. Fractional Numerals.
un medio, J. un undecimo, onzavo, or once-avo, xt
un tercio, \, un dozavo or doce-avo,
dos tercios, f . un trezavo or trece-avo; tV
un cuarto, J. un catorzavo or catorce-avo, xV
tres cuartos, f. un quinzavo or quince-avo, xV-
un quinto, \, un diez y seisavo (seis-avo), . x^^
un sexto, |. un diez y sietavo (siete-avo), xV-
un septimo, \, un veintavo or veinte-avo, ^.
un octavo, \. un treintavo, ■^.
un noveno, \, un centesimo or centavo, xio«
un decimo, xV ^^ milesimo, xoVo
un millonesimo, to^ooo
a. Fractional numerals may also be expressed by the ordinals with
parte, especially when a partitive expression follows or is understood:
la tercera parte de ellos, ' one-third of them.'
1 Note the omission of the article in Spanish. See \ 56 (2).
LESSON XXXI
159
b. 'Half (*a half,' * one-half,' 'half a '), as a substantive, is expresseH
by la mitad; as an adjective, by medio (-a). In calculations, medio (-a)
is used.
la mitad de mis bienes, ' one half of my goods.'
medio dia, * half a day.'
ima hora y media, * an hour and a half.'
171. Collective Numerals.
un par, a pair.
una decena, ten.
una docena, a dozen.
una quincena, fifteen.
una veintena, twenty, a score.
una sesentena, sixty.
una centena or un centenar, one hundred.
un miliar, one thousand.
a. The ending -ena may make the numeral indefinite : e.g, una veintena,
some twenty, about twenty.
172. Multiplicative Numerals.
simple, single.
doble or duplicado, double.^
triple or triplicado, treble.
cuadruplo or cuadruplicado, quadruple.^
quintuplo or quintuplicado, quintuple.
sextuplo, sextuple.
septuple, septuple.
6ctuplo, octuple.
decuplo, decuple.
centuplo or centuplicado,
centuple.
173. Numeral Phrases.
una vez, once.
dos veces, twice.
tres veces, three times (thrice).
diez veces, ten times.
cien veces, a hundred times.
mil veces, a thousand times.
174. Irregular Verbs.
Hacer, * (to) make,' * (to) do,' and decir, * (to) say,' ' (to) tell.'
Study §§ 246 and 257.
1 Doble, triple, etc., may also be translated 'two-fold,' 'three-fold,' etc.
There are also the forms diiplice and triplice, and cuadruple, quintuple, etc.
l6o SPANISH GRAMMAR
175. Idiomatic Expressions.
hagame usted el favor de cerrar hace de portero, he is acting as
la puerta, please shut the door. porter.
el huracan hizo temblar la casa, hace frio (calor)^it is cold (warm).
the hurricane made the house hace un mes (dos meses), a month
tremble. (two months) ago.
hizo (mand6) hacer un traje, he hago construir una casa, I am
had a suit of clothes made. having a house built.
haz entrar al hombre, have the se hizo amar por todo el mundo,
man come in. he made himself loved by every-
no hagas caso de eso, never mind body.
that. se hace el tonto, he plays the
hare por verle manana, I shall try fool.
to see him tomorrow. se dice que, dicen que, it is said
I te hace falta dinero ? do you that, people say that.
need money ?
Exercise XXXI
A, I. Digame Vd. ^Cuantas son las partes del mundo?
2. Haga el favor de decirme su gracia (nombre). 3. Quisiera
que el me dijera cuales son sus verdaderos prop6sitos.
4. Digale que venga aca inmediatamente. 5. (iQue hace
Vd. alii? — Estoy haciendole un cofre a Don Julian. 6. Hacia
tanto frio que se hel6 el agua en nuestro cuarto. 7. Dicen
que volvera pronto. 8. Se hace el tonto por conveniencia.
9. La torre Eiffel tiene trescientos metros de altura. ^iSabe
Vd. que anchura tiene? 10. Col6n descubri6 la America el
doce de Octubre de mil cuatrocientos noventa y dos. 11. Este
afio es el mil novecientos y cuatro. Por lo tanto, hace cuatro-
cientos y doce aiios de dicho acontecimiento y de dicha fecha.
12. El peso tiene cien centavos, 6 diez reales de plata, 6 cinco
pesetas. 13. ^Cuantos anos tiene Vd. ? — Veinte anos.
14. Hagannos Vds. el favor de repasar dos veces la lecci6n de
los niimeros cardinales y ordinales desde uno hasta sesenta
y cuatro. 15. Un quebrado consta de dos guarismos; el
LESSON XXXI l6l
numerador, que es un numero cardinal, y el denominador, que
puede ser un numero ordinal. i6. El rio tiene una anchura
de quinientos pies, y tiene diez millas de largo. 1 7. Voy a
hacerme hacer un traje. 18. Un medio mas dos quintos son
nueve decimos. 19. El nino tiene tres manzanas y media.
20. El criado estuvo aqui hace una hora y media. 21. Ka-
game Vd. el favor de decirle que haga entrar al hombre.
22. No importa que digamos tres quinzavos (quince-avos) 6 un
quinto. 2^. Algunas veces nos hacia falta dinero. 24. La
sala tiene cincuenta y cinco pies de largo (longitud) y treinta y
seis de ancho (anchura). 25. A Pio Nono sigui6 Le6n Trece.
•26. (iQue hora es? — Son las diez y media. A la una
vendre aqui. 27. El hijo mayor de Felipe Primero era como
emperador Carlos Quinto de Alemania y como rey Carlos
Primero de Espana.
B. I.I should like you to tell {iuiperf. si(bj.) me whether^ you
need (any) money. 2. Julian told us three months ago that he
was having a house built. 3. Never mind what'^ he says: we
shall try to see her tomorrow, if it is not too^ cold. 4. We shall
make ourselves beloved by everybody. 5. What^ is the date? —
It is the fourth of October, nineteen hundred and three. 6. How
old is your father? He is fifty-two years old. 7. There are two
figures in a Spanish fraction : three-sevenths has a numerator, which
is a cardinal, and a denominator, which is an ordinal. Sometimes
the denominator is a cardinal with -avo. 8. Two-thirds and (plus)
one-sixth are five-sixths. 9. Alphonsus the Thirteenth is the
Spanish king. 10. That servant was acting as porter three months
ago. II. The river is five hundred miles long and six hundred
feet w4de. 12. It was so warm that we did not go in. 13. I
should not like him to play {iuiperf, stibj.) the fool. 14. What
time was it? — It was half-past eight. 15. Please give me three
and (a) half apples. 16. He did us the favor of telling us his
name. 17. They would like us to tell them how many the parts of
the world are. 18. The servant is packing your four trunks.
1 62 SPANISH GRAMMAR
19. The numerator of that fraction is the numeral seventeen.
20. It is so cold here, that we shall go into ^ your room ; [it] is not
freezing there.
1 si, 2 lo que, 3 detnasiado. ■* sCudl? 5 Use entrar en.
LESSON XXXII
176. Adverbs.
aqui, aca, here. alii, alia, there (distant from
ahl, there (near the person ad- both the speaker and the per-
dressed). son addressed) .
estoy muy bien aqui, I am very comfortable here.
a dos pasos de aca, two paces (steps) from here.
alia iremos todos, we shall all go there.
a. With verbs of motion, ' here ' is usually aca, and * there ' is alia ;
but aqui and alii are used to denote a definite, specific place : ven aca,
' come here '; ven aqui, ' come right here.'
b. * Here in ' is aqui en, and ' there in ' is ahi en or alia en : alia en
Puerto Rico, * over there in Porto Rico.'
c. English expletive * there ' is not to be expressed in Spanish : hay,
* there is,' ' there are ' ; han salido de este pueblo mas de veinte familias,
' there have left this town more than tw^enty families.'
177. Mucho, ^ much/ ' a great deal * ; muy, ' very.'
trabaja mucho, he works a great deal,
estoy muy cansado, I am very tired.
Before past participles, ^ much,' ' very much,' is muy.
es muy estimado, he is much esteemed.
. te estoy muy agradecido, I am very much obliged to you.
But with the past participle of a perfect tense, ^ much ' is mucho :
ha escrito mucho, ^ he has written much (a great deal).'
a. * Very,' when standing alone, is mucho : I es interesante el libro ?
* is the book interesting ? ' si, muchO, * yes, very.'
LESSON XXXII 163
178. Ya, ' already/ ^ now ' ; with a negative, ' no longer/ ' no
more.'
ya es tarde, it is already late. ya no fuma, he doesn't smoke
ya acabe, I have already fin- any longer (any more).
ished. ya no tengo dinero, I have no
ya entiendo, I understand more money (I haven't any
now. more money).
179. -mente. — In Enghsh many adverbs of manner are
formed by adding the termination -ly to adjectives, as ^quickly'
(from ^ quick '), ' correctly ' (from ' correct '), etc. In Spanish
many adverbs are similarly formed by adding -mente to the
feminine singular of descriptive adjectives, as severamente (from
severe), ' severely,' facilmente (from facil), ' easily,' etc.
a. When several adverbs in -mente modify the same word, -mente is
omitted from all but the last : habla docta, concisa y elegantemente, ' he
speaks learnedly, concisely, and elegantly.'
180. The Prepositions JPor and Par a. — ' For ' is expressed
by por or para. If ' for ' means ' for the sake of,' 'on account
of,' or ' in exchange for,' it is expressed by por ; if it denotes
purpose or destination, it is expressed by para.
daria la vida por el, I would give my life for him.
los sacrificios que hizo por ella, the sacrifices that he made for her.
peleaba por la vida, he was fighting for his life.
le castigue iK)r haberme dicho una mentira, I punished him for hav-
ing told me a lie.
he pagado diez pesos por el perro, I have paid ten dollars for the dog.
este libro es para ti, this book is for you.
parte para Madrid, I am leaving for Madrid.
a. Por also means * through,' ' by,' ^ ^ per.''
1 ' By ' is usually de, after passive verbs and participles that express feeling
or emotion : es amado de todos, ' he is beloved by all.'
164 SPANISH GRAMMAR
por temor, through fear.
entr6 por la ventana, he entered through the window.
este arbol ha sido plantado por mi abuelo, this tree was planted by my
grandfather.
me C0gi6 por la mano, he caught me by the hand.
diez por ciento, ten per cent.
mil pesos por ano, a thousand dollars per year (a year).
b. Before an infinitive, * to,' meaning ' for the sake of,' * in exchange
for,' is por, and meaning ' in order to ' is para.
pugnando por entrar, fighting to enter.
lo hizo para enganarme, he did it to deceive me.
c. Note also the following ways of expressing * for ' in Spanish :
estuve alii un ano, I was there for a year.
hace un ano que estoy aqui, I have been here/?r a year.
voy a Madrid por un ano, I am going to Madrid /7r a year.
tengo que escribir un ejercicio en castellano para manana, I must write
a Spanish exercise for to-morrow.
181. In English nouns are often used adjectively, as in ^ a
wheel chair/ * a saw-mill/ etc. A noun used adjectively in
EngHsh is usually expressed in Spanish by a noun preceded
by de or para.
una estatua de marmol, a marble statue.
una vela de cera, a wax candle.
una maquina de coser, a sewing-machine.
un vaso para vino, a wineglass.
una cuchara para sopa, a soup spoon.
182. With verbs meaning to take (from), to ask (of), etc.,
' of or ' from ' is expressed in Spanish by a.
el capitdn quit6 al soldado el punal, the captain took the dagger from
the soldier.
hemos pedido un favor k tu senor padre, we asked a favor of your
father.
ik qui6n compraste el caballo? of whom did you buy the horse?
LESSON XXXII 165
a. A personal pronoun object is put in the dative case (indirect object).
me han robado mucho dinero, they have stolen a great deal of money
from me.
se lo quite, I took it av^^ay from him.
183. A preposition is usually retained before a substantive
clause in Spanish, but omitted in English.
estoy convencido de mi error, I am convinced of my error.
estoy convencido de que no dijo la verdad, I am convinced that he
did not tell the truth.
me alegro de eso, I am glad of that.
me alegro de que no pueda venir, I am glad that he cannot come.
no me acuerdo de su nombre, I do not remember his name.
me acuerdo de que se llama Pedro, I remember that he is called Peter,
estoy seguro del hecho, I am certain of the fact,
estoy seguro de que no dara nada, I am certain that he will give nothing.
184. Idiomatic Expressions :
ir escalera arriba (abajo), (to) go rio abajo, down-stream,
upstairs (downstairs). dlas antes, days before.
tierra adentro, inland. meses despues, months afterward.
mar afuera, seaward.
dice que si (que no), he says so (not).
creo que si (que no), I believe so (not).
espero que si (que no), I hope so (not).
me parece que si (que no), it seems to me so (it doesn't seem to me so).
acaba de partir, he has just left.
acababa de partir, he had just left.
no volver6 a mentir, I shall not lie again.
poco falt6 para que se cayese (cayera), he almost fell.
hoy mismo, this very day.
ayer mismo, even yesterday.
por la tarde, in the evening.
manana por la manana, tomorrow morning.
l66 SPANISH GRAMMAR
<: vive usted por aqui ? do you live about here ?
voy por pan, I am going after bread.
he enviado por el medico, I have sent for the physician.
te pagare para el 5 de mayo, I shall pay you (by) the 5th of May.
Iey6 la carta para si^ he read the letter to himself.
este nino es pequeno para su edad, this child is small for his age.
no sirve para nada, it is good for nothing.
estudia para medico, he is studying to be a physician.
estoy para partir, I am about to leave.
estoy por partir, I am incUned to leave.
185. Irregular Verbs.
Dar^ (to) give. Oir, (to) hear.
Saber, (to) know. Ver, (to) see.
Study §§ 241, 245, 254, and 258.
186. Saber. ' (To) know/ meaning ' (to) have knowledge of,'
^ (to) be aware of,' is saber (saber does not take a personal
object) ; meaning ' (to) be acquainted with/ it is conocer.
I sabes que es verdad ? do you i conoces a aquel joven ? do you
know that it is true ? know that young man ?
a. Saber also means * (to) know how,' ^ * (to) learn ' (in the sense of
* (to) get knowledge of); saber a means * (to) taste of,' * (to) savor of.'
no sabe nadar, he doesn't know how to swim.
supe que no pudiste venir, I learned that you couldn't come.
sabe a pescado, it tastes of fish.
b. CaUi meaning 'know how,' is saber: * can he read and write?'
isabe leer y escribir?
1 ' To know how ' is saber como, when the main and the dependent verbs
have different subjects, as in no se como viven, ' I do not know how they live.'
And also when the dependent clause is an indirect question, as in no se como
puedo hacerlo, ' I do not know how I can do it.'
LESSON XXXII 167
187. Idiomatic Expressions :
dar voces, (to) call out, (to) shout. no sabe nada, he doesn't know
dar los buenos dias, (to) wish good anything.
day. [marry him. hacer saber, (to) make known.
eila le di6 el si, she agreed to no s6 que contestar, I do not
dar a saber (a conocer), (to) make know what to answer, [clare !
known. joye! jOiga! listen! hear! I de-
lya. diste de comer d los caba- oigo subir^ a alguno, I hear some
llos? have you already fed the one coming up.
horses? oy6 gemir a los pobres cautivos,
dar un paseo, (to) take a walk. she heard the poor captives
di6 en el bianco, he hit the mark. groan.
la ventana da a la calle, the win- me oi Uamar por alguno, I heard
dow faces the street. some one call me; I heard
me doy por vencido, I give it up. myself called by name.
luego daran las doce, it will soon vi caer 1 a mis companeros, I saw
strike twelve. my companions fall.
me di6 la fiebre amarilla, I caught no tengo nada que ver con eso, I
the yellow fever. haven't anything to do with that.
Exercise XXXII
A, I. Venga Vd. aca y si^ntese aqui, y digame lo que estaba
haciendo alii. 2. Vaya Vd. otra vez para alia, y ens^neme lo
que estaba arreglando. 3. ,i D6nde esta mi diccionario? —
Por ahi anda, pero no s^ donde esta. 4. Lo siento mucho ;
estoy muy aburrido de su abandono. 5. Ya lleg6 su amigo,
y esta muy impaciente por verle a Vd. ; viene elegantemente
vestido. 6. Mariana parto para Sevilla por tener que asistir
a las fiestas reales. 7. Emple6 su capital en un negocio al
ocho por ciento. 8. " Las enfermedades entran por toneladas
y salen por onzas." 9. " Come para vivir, pero no vivas para
comer.'* 10. Un puente de acero, una sortija de diamantes,
una silla de montar, una prensa de imprimir, — ^cual vale mas?
II. Dame un lapiz : quiero escribir una carta en castellano y
otra en ingles. 12. ^jSabe Vd. que su amigo va a dar una
1 Note that a dependent infinitive immediately follows oir or ver.
1 68 SPANISH GRAMMAR
recepci6n? 13. Hagame Vd. el favor de darme un poco de
agua templada con agua. 14. No le he visto a Vd. hace un
ano ; asi es que a primera vista no le conoci. 15. Dar de
comer al hambriento es obra de misericordia. 16. La ventana
de mi cuarto da al mar : asi es que hace alii siempre fresco.
1 7- <i Q^^ hora es ? — Acaban de dar las tres en el reloj de la
catedral. 18. Suba Vd. a mi cuarto y bajeme mis gemelos de
6pera, que se los quiero dar a este seiior. 19. Si le escribe Vd.
a su familia, sirvase darle mis recuerdos. 20. Un amigo intimo
me dice : "<jqu^ quieres? " Una persona que no conozco bien
me dice : "^qu^ quiere Vd.?'^ En la fonda el mozo me dice :
"^ique quiere el senor?"
21 Madrid, el 10 de Enero de 1905.
May Seiior mio : ^
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vd. el recibo de su apreciable carta
fechada el 2 del corriente, y en contestaci6n le aviso que no es
posible aceptar la proposici6n que Vd. me hace. 22. Sirvase
Vd. dispensarme el que no haya contestado a vuelta de correo.
Tengo el honor de suscribirme de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M.^
23. Querido Jacinto :
Acabo de recibir tu carta del 25 del ppdo/ en la cual me
pides te envie cincuenta pesos (^50) por carta certificada 6 por
giro postal. 24. Siento decirte que no puedo adelantarte ni
un centavo antes del 2 del proximo mes. Entretanto ten cuidado
con no gastar mas de lo necesario. « rp r 4 .
25. Sr. Dn. Jose Morales.
Muy Seiior mio y amigo :
Por la ultima de Vd. del 1 1 del corriente he sabido la des-
gracia que acaban Vds. de pasar perdiendo su querido padre.
26. Acompano a Vds. en su sentimiento y les brindo mi per-
sona para en lo que ^ les pueda ser util.
Quedo de Vd. afmo.
LESSON XXXII 169
B. I . He made many sacrifices for his friend, and I believe that
he would give his life for him if it were necessar}^ 2. He said that
he paid five hundred dollars for the horse ; but he lied, and I shall
punish him for having told me a lie. 3. The letter is for you, and
the package is for your brother. 4. Tomorrow I leave for the City
of Mexico. I have been here for six months, and I am going to
Mexico for a year. 5. Are you very tired ? — Yes, very ; I am
going into^ the country to rest for a month. 6. I have already
taken ten lessons in Spanish, but I have no more money, and I shall
take no more lessons. 7. Go and get'' a wineglass, and give me
a glass of wine. 8. A soup spoon is larger than a teaspoon, and a
table knife is larger than a penknife. 9. He asked several favors
of me, but I could not, or rather would not, grant them.^ 10. The
thief stole ten dollars from a rich man, and gave them to a poor man
who needed them more. Will he be punished for that ? 11. I
have bought a new bicycle for you, John. I bought it of Mr.
Navarro. 12. He bought a typewriter of Miss Montoya for his
daughter, who will now learn to write on it. I3- I cannot remem-
ber your name, but I remember that I saw you and talked with you
for an hour last summer. 14. Did the porter go up to my room
and bring down my trunk ? — He says so, but I don't beheve it.
15. He almost died, but a skilful physician saved his life. 16. I
have just seen him, and I do not wish to see him again. ^ 17. Come
here, child, and sit down at my side. Do you feel tired after running
and playing so much ? 18. The boy is very large for his age, anS
he has already decided to study to be a lawyer. ^^^ 19. First he
read it to himself, and then he read it aloud. 20. When I was
ill, I sent for Dr. Menendez y Garcia, but he was good for nothing
and did not cure me. 21. I know him well, and I know that he
tells the truth. 22. I saw him go into the house, and I saw him
come out ; but he did not speak to me.
23. Dear Sir:
I have just 11 received your letter dated the 7th inst., in which
you are kind enough ^2 ^q acknowledge the receipt of the draft
for^* three hundred and twenty-four dollars in^^ American gold.
24. I am very sincerely yours. ^^
I/O SPANISH GRAMMAR
25. Dear Friend :
Your very kind ^^ letter of the 3d inst. came ^"^ to hand ^^ the 5th5
and I now have the pleasure of answering ^^ it.
It remains for me ^^ to thank you ^^ for your many acts of kind-
ness 22 toward me and my son.
26. With affectionate regards I am very truly yours.^^
1 Dear Sir. 2 ^, ^. q^ b. S. M. = seguro servidor que besa sus manos.
3 proximo pasado. ^ afectisimo. ^ para en lo que is better than para lo en
que, ' for that in which,' ' for anything in which.' 6 ^\ 7 buscar. 8 Say :
'grant him them.' 9 \5sQvolver, 10 Say: ' for a lawyer.' H Use
acabar de. 12 se sirve. 13 Omit. l* ^^, 15 Se reitera de Vd. con la
mds distinguida consider acion su a/mo S. S. Q. B. S. M. 16 apreciable or
atenta. ^"^ fue. 18 a mis manos. 19 corresponder . 20 restame.
21 darle miles de gracias. 22 < many acts of kindness,' bondades. 23 « very
truly yours,' de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M.
LESSON XXXIII
Conjunctions.
188. y, e (before initial i or hi), ' and.'
padre y madre, father and mother, padre 6 hijo, father and son.
a. y is used before y and the diphthong (li)ie.
tu y yo, you and I. corta y Mere, it cuts and wounds.
189. 6, u (before initial 0 or ho), ^or/
cinco 6 seis, five or six. siete u echo, seven or eight.
a. u may also be used between two vowels, the first of which is 6, as in
leyendo u escribiendo, ' reading or writing,' but 6 is the more usual here.
190. pero, mas, sino (after a negative), 'but.'^
somos los servidores del rey, pero no sus esclavos, we are the king's
servants, but not his slaves.
lo dice, mas no lo creo, he says so, but I do not believe it.
no voy k Paris sino a Madrid, I am not going to Paris, but to Madrid.
1 Colloquially, pero is used much oftener than mas.
LESSON XXXIII 171
a, ' But,' as adverb or preposition, is often expressed by no . . . sino,
and * no . . . but ' by no mas que.
no nos visita sino raramente, he visits us but rarely.
no tengo mas amigo que tu, I have no friend but you.
191. cuando (interrogatively, cuando^), ^when.'
se lo dire cuando venga, I shall tell him when he comes,
^cuando lo hara usted ? when will you do it ? ^
a. Que is used instead of cuando to introduce a clause that limits the
meaning of an adverb or adverb-phrase of time.
en el momento que venga, se lo un dia que estuve en Barcelona,
dare, the moment (that) he one day when I was in Barce-
comes I shall give it to him. lona.
192. donde (interrogatively, donde), ^ where,' is often made
more specific by prefixing a, en, or de.
ik d6nde va usted? where are you going?
la casa (en) donde vive, the house in which he lives.
<:de d6nde viene? where does he come from?
porque, ^because,' porque, ^why '^ (also written per que).
no lo hice porque no queria hacerlo, I did not do it because I did not
want to do it.
I porqu6 no vino usted ayer ? why did you not come yesterday ?
193. Agreement of Subject and Verb. — A verb agrees with
its subject in number and person.
yo soy, I am ; tu eres, you are, etc.
(i) Two or more singular subjects take a verb in the plural : 61 y ella
son, * he and she are.'
1 Strictly speaking, the interrogatives cuando, d6nde, and porque are adverbs
rather than conjunctions.
1/2 SPANISH GRAMMAR
(2) When subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the first
person plural if any of the subjects is of the first person; and it is in the
second person if the subjects are of the second and third persons.
tu y yo somos, you and I are.
§1 y yo somos, he and I are.
tu y el sois, you and he are.
194. Word Order.
(i) In an affirmative sentence, the subject may precede
or it may follow the verb.
el hombre esta enfermo, the man is ill.
ya lleg6 mi amigo, my friend has already arrived.
(2) In an interrogative sentence, the subject regularly fol-
lows the verb.
I lo compr6 Juan ? did John buy it ?
195. When the subject follows the verb :
(i) A noun object usually precedes a noun subject.
I compr6 la casa tu senor padre ? did your father buy the house ?
But if the object is the longer, it follows.
I compr6 tu padre todas estas casas ? did your father buy all these
houses ?
(2) A predicate adjective usually precedes a noun subject.
I es interesante el libro ? is the book interesting ?
(3) A pronoun subject immediately follows the verb and
precedes a noun object or a predicate adjective.
no quiero yo el caballo, I do not want the horse.
I esta usted enfermo ? are you ill ?
196. If an adverb does not come first in the sentence, it
usually follows the verb immediately.
LESSON XXXIII 173
manana hablaremos el gobernador y yo, tomorrow the governor
and I shall have a talk.
aqui se habla ingles, English is spoken here.
dice siempre la verdad, he always tells the truth.
contest6 muy tranquilamente el joven, the young man answered
quite calmly.
197. Irregular Verbs.
andar, (to) go. salir, (to) go out.
caber, (to) be contained in. caer, (to) fall.
poner, (to) put. traer, (to) bring.
asir, (to) grasp. -ducir, (to) lead,
valer, (to) be worth.
Study §§ 240, 244, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 25s, and
256; and review Ser, Haber, Estar, and Tener, §§ 236,
237, 238, and 239.
198. Andar, ^(to) go/ ' (to) walk ' : ^ (to) go ' in a definite
direction, or to a definite place, is ir.
el reloj no anda, the v/atch doesn't go.
voy a la ciudad, I am going to town.
199. Idiomatic Expressions.
se cay(3, he fell down.
lo deje caer, I dropped it.
la levita te cae (sienta) bien, the coat fits you well.
este color cae bien con este otro, this color matches well with this other.
ya caigo en eso, now I understand that.
se pone pAlida, she is growing pale.
el caf6 se pondra frio, the coffee will get cold.
,;has puesto la mesa? have you set the table?
el sol se pone, the sun is setting.
esta gallina no pone huevos, this' hen doesn't lay eggs.
la nina se puso a llorar, the little girl began to cry.
1 74 SPANISl 5 I > 1 : VMMAR
I quien sali6 ? who won ?
salir a luz, (to) be published.
I cudnto vale ? how much is it worth ?
no vale nada, it's good for nothing.
no vale la pena, it isn't worth while.
mas vale tarde que nunca, it is better late than never,
tiene raz6n, he is right.
no tiene raz6n, he is wrong.
tengo ganas de visitar a Cuba, I am anxious to visit Cuba.
I tenga usted cuidado ! look out ! take care !
no tenga usted cuidado, don't worry.
no tiene remedio, there's no help for it.
no tiene nada de particular, there's nothing strange about it.
tenga usted la bondad (de), please.
tengo que hacerlo, I have to do it.
tengo escrita la carta, I have the letter already written.
no lo hay, there isn't any.
hay que tener cuidado, one must take care.
I que he de hacer ? what am I to do ?
ha de ser muy pobre, he must be very poor.
soy de Madrid, I am a native of Madrid.
esta finca es del Senor G., this plantation belongs to Mr. G.
es de notar, it should be noted.
estar en (or de) pie, (to) stand.
estarse parado, (to) stand still.
ir a pie, (to) go afoot, (to) walk.
ir d caballo, (to) ride horseback.
ir en coche, (to) drive (in a carriage).
huele d tabaco, it smells of tobacco.
sabe a ajo, it tastes of garlic.
de dia, by day. de noche, by night.
Exercise XXXIII
A, I . ^ Cuando dijo el senor medico que visitaria al enfermo ?
— Cuando sus clientes le den una hora de libertad. 2. En
las horas que lo trat^, lo conoci a fondo. 3. £D6nde encon-
LESSON XXXIII 175
trarias mas chistes y mas filosofia que en el Quijote ? 4. El
pais de donde vengo esta favorecido por un clima ideal.
5. Era un joven fino ^ inteligente, aunque sus deberes y sus
gustos eran corapletamente opuestos. 6. Las mejores califi-
caciones de un estudiante son " sobresaliente " u "6ptimo."
7. No es Vd. a quien he llamado, sino a su senor padre.
8. No nos saluda sino de cuando en cuando. 9. Sera su
compafiera mas no su esclava. 10. Deseo mucho verla, pero
me es imposible. 11. No serviras a nadie mas que tu Dios y
Senor. 12. ^Porque no me aviso Vd. con anticipaci6n? —
Porque no quise molestar su ocupada atenci6n. 13. El tom6
el mando de las tropas, y di6 las 6rdenes necesarias. 14. Tu,
el, y yo somos de la misma edad, pero yo soy mas alto que
vosotros. 15. No puedo negar que ella y yo nos amamos.
16. Venci6 Napole6n, pero perdi6 sus famosos Guardias
Nobles. 17. ^Ha terminado su carrera el hijo de Vd.? —
Todavia no. — i Estudia ingeniatura 6 medicina ? — Estudia
para medico. 18. Es favorable a nuestra causa la decisi6n
del Juzgado? — Si; es favorable. 19. Caballero, no deseo
yo la amistad de Vd. Su comportamiento es inexplicable.
20. De ese asunto para Vd. tan importante, pronto sabremos
los detalles. 21. Vivia en la margen este del rio ; al otro lado
vivia mi primo Antonio. 22. Viste a la francesa ; camina a
la americana; y vive a la inglesa. 23. ^A c6mo se vende la
tela china? — Barata, caballero, peso al metro (a la vara).
24. ^iCuanto gana Vd. alii? — Quinientos pesos al afio poco
mas 6 menos. 25. Esta sopa sabe a cebolla y limon. El
paiiuelo de Vd. huele a tabaco. 26. A la vista de su hogar
cay6 de rodillas y or6 en silencio.
B. I . He says that he is not going to Seville, but to Malaga ;
but I do not believe it. 2. We have no friend but John, and he
visits us but rarely. 3. One day when I was in Paris I went to
the house in which he lives, but he was not at home. 4. It will
not be long before he returns, and I shall tell him what you say
>
176 SPANISH GRAMMAR
when he comes. 5. You and I Hve happily,^ but you and John do
not agree. 6. Did your brother buy the horse? ^ — No ; my father
bought it ; but he bought it for my brother. 7. Is your brother ill?
— No; he is in better health than he was last year. 8. Shall you
walk^ or ride?^ — I prefer to ride, but my sister prefers to drive. ^
9. I shall leave this city ^ the last of March or the first of April, if
the weather permits."^ 10. After being in Buenos Ayres a few
months, I spoke Spanish well ; or, at least, I thought ^ that I did.^
II. He smells of garlic and tobacco, and I do not like to sit by ^^ his
side. 12. Please change for ^ me ^^ this ten-dollar bill. — I can give
you two five-dollar bills for it. 13. He speaks Spanish almost
every day with a Spanish friend, and in this way he is learning to
speak Spanish well. 14. I went to a neighbor's to borrow a book
which I wished to read. 15. The neighbor was not at home, and
his wife said that she didn't know when he would return. 16. She
said that as soon as he returned, she would send the book to me^
17. Poor Peter! He was blind with rage and trembling with cold,
and he couldn't say a word. 18. In autumn the sun sets earlier
each day. 19. When they gave him the news, he became ^*^ very
sad and began ^^ to weep. 20. Go to Mr. Garcia's and^^ learn i^
the news of the day. 21. The Indian served me as guide in these
forests. 22. His son works as tailor in Valles' workshop. 23. Your
handkerchief smells of oranges. Have you any in your pocket?
24. We should work by day and sleep by night, but I usually work,
by night and sleep by day.
1 Say: 'happy.' 2 pjace the subject after the object. 3 Say: ' go afoot.'
4 Say: 'go on horseback.' ^ Say : 'go in (a) carriage.' 6 Qmit. ^Say:
• permits it.* 8 Use creer, 9 Say : ' I spoke it well.' l^ ^, 11 Dative.
12 XJsQponerse. 13 a, 14 informarse de.
LESSON XXXIV
200. Qualifying Suffixes. — The Spanish diminutive and
augmentative suffixes consist of endings all of which may be
attached to nouns, while most diminutives may be attached to
LESSON XXXIV 177
adjectives and adverbs. They occur commonly in colloquial
language, but rarely in elevated diction. The foreigner should
use them with the utmost caution. It is generally safe to use
-ito, but one not to the manner born would best avoid the other
suffixes until he has become familiar with their use.
a. The qualifying suffixes are attached to the stem of a word after it
has dropped a final unstressed vowel or, often, an unstressed diphthong.
pajaro, pajarillo. amigo, amiguito. rosario, rosarito.
201. Diminutives. — There are three forms of most diminu-
tive suffixes, as follows : (i) -ito, -illo, -uelo, etc. ; (2) -cito, -cillo,
-zuelo, etc. ; and (3) -ecito, -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.
a. The third form (-ecito,^ -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.) is used :
(i) With monosyllables.
flor, flower, florecita, little flower. pez, fish, pececito, little fish.
rey, king. reyezuelo, little king.
(2) With words of more than one syllable, ending in -e.
viaje, journey. viajecito, little trip.
madre, mother. madrecita, dear little mother.
(3) With words ending in -a or -0, that have the radical
diphthong -ie or -ue.^
viento, wind. vientecito, slight breeze.
piedra, stone. piedrecita, httle stone.
pueblo, village. pueblecillo, Kttle village.
(4) With some words ending in unstressed -ia, -io, -ua, -uo.
bestia, beast. bestiecita, little beast.
genio, genius. geniecillo, little genius.
lengua, tongue. lenguecita, little tongue.
arduo, arduous. arduecito, rather arduous.
1 Pie makes piececito, piececillo, etc.
2 In old Spanish the radical diphthongs ie and ue usually reverted to e and 0
when a qualifying suffix was added : as in puerta, ' door,' portezuela, ' carriage
door ' ; but in modern Spanish the diphthongs are usually retained : nieto,
nietecillo ; huevo, huevecillo ; etc.
178 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. The second form (-cito, -cillo, -zuelo, etc.) is used with
words of more than one syllable, ending in -n or -r, especially if
they have the stress on the final syllable.
Iadr6n, thief. ladroncillo, petty thief.
galan, gallant. galancete, ladies' man.
joven, young man. jovencito, youth.
autor, author. autorcillo, young author.
But, arbol, tree. arbolito, little tree.
c. The first form (-ito, -illo, -uelo, etc.) is used in all other
cases.
hermano, brother. hermanito, little brother.
polio, fowl. poUuelo, chick.
d. There are some exceptions to the above rules ; such as
mano, hand. manecita (or manita), little hand.
abuelo, grandfather. abuelito, dear little grandfather.
agrio, sour. agrillo, rather sour.
jardin, garden. jardinito (or jardincito), little garden.
senora, lady. senorita, young lady.
202. The meaning of the various diminutive suffixes is as
follows :
a, -ito (-a), -cito (-a), -ecito (-a), express smallness of size,
quahty, or degree, together with fondness, admiration, and
respect. They may usually be translated 'httle,' ^ dear Httle,* etc.
pobre hijita mia, my poor dear child. madrecita, dear little mother.
gatito, kitten. un poquito, a very little.
toditos los dias, almost every day. cerquita, quite near.
una nina grandecita, a rather large girl.
b, -illo (-a), -cillo (-a), -ecillo (-a), express smallness of size,
quahty, or degree, with indifference, or with depreciation, ridi-
cule, or pity.
ladroncillo, little thief. pobre viejecillo, poor old m^n.
sonrisilla, faint smile. pobrecillo, poor little fellovi^.
LESSON XXXIV 179
c, -uelo (-a), -zuelo (-a), -ezuelo (-a), express smallness,
together with ridicule, disdain, or mockery.
plazuela, little square, autorcillo, poor author, sus ojuelos, his little eyes.
d, -ico (-a), -cico (-a), -ecico (-a),^ have the force of -ito, ex-
^cept that they are generally used somewhat humorously or
sarcastically.
un perrico, a pretty little dog.
e, -ete (-a), -cete (-a), are used in a diminutive and often
depreciative sense.
un pobrete, a poor fellow. un caballerete, a * dandy.'
/. -ejo (-a) usually denotes contempt.
librejo, worthless book, caminejo, wretched road, amarillejo, yellowish.
g. The dialectal forms -in (-ina) and -ino (-a) are sometimes
used in Castilian to express smallness.
nino chiquitin, wee little child. cebollino, young onion.
203. Augmentative Suffixes. — a, -on (-ona) denotes large
size, with or without grotesqueness. Feminine nouns usually
become masculine upon assuming this ending, unless sex is
indicated.
hombr6n, big man. sill6n, easy chair. barb6n, thick beard.
picar6n, great rogue. cuchar6n, ladle.
b, -azo (-a) has a meaning similar to that of -on, but it is
used less often.
bocaza, big mouth. mujeraza, large, coarse woman.
c, -ote (-a) is augmentative or depreciative.
palabrota, harsh word. ricote, rich and pretentious.
1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world, e.g. Cuba, -ico replaces -ito
after a stem ending in -t : as platico for platito, gatico for gatito, etc.
l8o SPANISH GRAMMAR
d, -acho (-a), -ucho (-a), and -ajo (-a) express disdain and
contempt.
vinacho, poor wine. casucha, hut, trapajo, dirty rag.
204. Combinations of diminutive and augmentative endings
occur.
chico,^ chiquito, chiquitin, wee little child.
hombre, hombr6n, hombronazo, big, awkward man.
picaro, picar6n, picaroncillo, small man who is a great rogue.
picaro, picarillo, picarill6n, large man who is a little rogue.
205. The endings -azo and -ada are often used to denote a
blow, thrust, discharge, etc. These endings are neither diminu-
tive nor augmentative, but denote the result of an action.
bastonazo, blow with a walking-stick. fusilazo, rifle-shot.
punalada, stab with a dagger.
206. Idiomatic Expressions.^
a principios de mayo, the first of May.
a mediados de junio, the middle of June.
a fines (liltimos) de julio, the last of July.
ik c6mo estamos hoy? what day of the month is this ?
k los pocos anos de estar en Madrid, after being in Madrid a few years.
al otro lado, on the other side. a lo rnenos, at least.
d la francesa, after the fashion of the French.
poco k poco, little by little. uno a uno, one by one.
I a cuanto se vende ? what is it worth ?
k peso la vara, el metro, a dollar a yard, a metre.
quinientos pesos al ano, five hundred dollars a year.
caer de rodillas, (to) fall on one's knees.
trabajar de sastre, (to) work as tailor.
servir de guia, (to) serve as guide.
1 Note chico, chiquito, chiquitito (chiquitico) .
2 Most of these illustrate the use of prepositions.
LESSON XXXIV l8l
ciegO de c51era, blind with anger.
temblar de frio, (to) tremble with cold.
estoy mejor (peor) de salud, I am in better (worse) health.
huerfano de madre (padre), orphan on the mother's (father's) side.
camino de Cadiz, by way of Cadiz.
un billete de a diez pesos, a ten-dollar bill (bank note).
de esta manera, de este modo, in this way.
desde luego, at once.
pobre de mi, poor me.
la buena de la Justina, good Justine.
estar en casa, (to) be at home, ir a casa, (to) go home.
esta en casa del Senor Montejo, he is at Mr. Montejo's.
va a casa de un vecino, he is going to a neighbor's.
viene de casa de mi tio, he comes from my uncle's.
Exercise XXXIV
A. I. S6lo un pillete hubiera cometido tal maldad. 2. El
bombrecillo se acerc6 a mi y me present6 a su hijita. 3. Al salir
le dijo al portero : " Ahorita estare de vuelta." 4. Ese hom-
br6n es un montanes : esa mujeraza es su hermana. 5. Las
dos grandecitas son sus nietas ; las pequefiitas son sus sobrini-
tas. 6. El politiquejo se enoj6, y volviendose le ech6 dos
6 tres palabrotas. 7. El reyezuelo os6 desafiar al empera-
dor. 8. El soldadote sali6 de la casa, y ciego de c61era
se dirigio hacia la plazuela. 9. i Esta Vd. mejor de salud?
— Si; un tantico. 10. El jovencito que le present^ a Vd.
anoche es huerfano de padre y madre. Trabaja de ingeniero
en el Ferrocarril del Norte. Dicen que tiene un talentazo
descomunal. 11. La ensalada esta cargadita de mostaza
como a Vd. le gusta. 12. Cambieme este doble hidalgo
por dos billetes de a diez pesos, 6 cuatro de a cinco. De
esta manera podr^ pagar mis deudas. 13. "j Pobre de mi ! "
exclam6 el abogadillo, "no fu^ mas que un descuidillo."
1 82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
14. " Caballerito, una limosnita, un centavito, 6 cualquiera
cosita que quieraVd. darme," exclam6el mendigo. 15. Poco
a poco, caballero. Se defender a mis amigos ausentes cuando
se les insulta sin que puedan defenderse. 16. Uno a uno
6 dos a dos marchareis por el puente, pero por ningun con-
cepto en pelot6n. 17. ^Acaba de llegar Vd. de casa de mi
padre? — No; vengo de casa de su hermano. 18. A mi
me gusta andar aprisa. Este tren anda con una velocidad de
cuarenta kilometros por hora; pero en Alemania hay trenes
que andan ciento cincuenta y aun doscientos kil6metros por
hora. 19. P6ngase Vd. este sombrero a ver qu^ tal le esta,
y si le gusta, saiga con ^1 y traigamelo cuando encuentre el
suyo. 20. Su amigo habra tenido que ir a declarar ante
el juez : este esta en el Palacio de Justicia y es un anciano
muy venerable. 21. El emperador Guillermo se cay6 del
caballo y se lastim6 una pierna. 22. Estuve de pie (parado)
toda la funcion, y estoy muy cansado. 23. En esa caja no
caben mas de trescientos volumenes : la caja es demasiado
pequefia. 24. Sefiora, (Jc6mo esta su hijito? — Muy bien,
gracias ; y (:c6mo esta la hijita de Vd. ? 25. A las ninas
grandecitas no les gusta jugar con las chiquillas. 26. El
pobrecito esta enfermo. El medico desea que tome el sol
toditos los dias.
B. I. My little soni has two kittens that he loves dearly.
2. My dear little mother,^ may I go to Henry's to play with him?
3. Little Anna 1 has a little sister ^ that is only two months old.
4. The little thief ^ is a great rogue. ^ 5. I shall return home in a
moment ^ if I can find the book that I am looking for. 6. He has
a large mouth ^ and a thick beard,^ and he says many harsh words.^
7. I was talking with a dear friend ^ of mine when the little man^
came out of his house and approached us. 8. The sun sets at
five and rises at seven o'clock today. 9. He turned pale and
dropped the purse that he had in his hand. 10. This coat fits
you better than that one, but I do not like either one. 11. My
LESSON XXXIV 183
watch doesn't go. — Mine goes, but it is slow. 12. Cecilia, set
the table. It is dinner time, and I am very hungry. 13. Is the
coffee ready? — It is ready, and it will get cold if you do not drink
it soon. 14. The color of the hat does not match that of your
coat. If I were you, I should not buy that hat. 15. He is usu-
ally wrong, but he always believes that ^ he ^ is ^ right. 16. I must
work today, or they will discharge me. — There is nothing strange
about that. 17. It should be noted that he is a native of Spain,
but he does not speak Spanish w^ell. He is a Catalan. 18. When
will your work be published? — Next year. — It is better late than
never. 19. When his son died, we gave him the fatal news little
by little. 20. Do you wish to go afoot? — No; I prefer to go
on horseback, but the ladies need to go in a carriage. 21. Please
tell me what day of the month this is. — It is the fourth of July.
22. He always goes out with his mother or his sister. He loves
his mother and his sister tenderly. 23. He speaks Spanish and
English well, but he does not write these languages correctly.
24. Where are you coming from, and where are you going to?
25. Is your brother's bride pretty? — Yes ; very.
1 Use diminutive. 2 Use augmentative. 3 Omit. 4 Use infinitive.
THE VERB
207. Like its prototype, the Latin verb, the Spanish
verb shows changes of mood, tense, and person, by the
addition to a verb stem of certain inflexional endings :
habl-ar, to speak. habl-o, I speak.
habl-aba, I used to speak, or habl-e, I spoke.
I was speaking. habl-ando, speaking.
It resembles the English verb in forming compound
tenses by adding to an auxiliary verb the past participle,
or the present participle, of a principal verb ; e,g,
he hablado, I have spoken ; estoy hablando, I am speaking.
208. For the sake of convenience we may consider the
Spanish verb under five different headings : (i) the regular
verb, (2) the verb with inceptive endings, (3) the radical-
changing verb, (4) the -uir (-iiir) verb, (5) the irregular verb.
209. There are six principal parts, a knowledge of which
will aid in the formation of the other parts of many verbs :
these are the present infinitive, the past participle, the present
participle (or gerund), the first person singular of the present
indicative, the first person singular of the preterite indicative,
and the third person singular of the preterite indicative.
(i) The present infinitive is the basis of the future and the con-
ditional of the indicative of all verbs. For the future, there are added
to the infinitive of the verb in question the forms, or the ending (as
in the case of the second plural), of the present indicative of the
verb haber, ^ to have.' The initial h of the forms of haber disappears
in the composition. For the conditional, there are added to the
184
THE VERB 185
infinitive of the verb in question the endings of the imperfect indica-
tive of haber. Irregular verbs may show a certain alteration of the
infinitive basis.
(2) The past participle enters into the composition of all perfect
tenses.
(3) The present participle, or gerund, enters into the composi-
tion of the periphrastic progressive tenses.
(4) The first person singular present indicative has, in regular
verbsj the same stem as the rest of the verb, except the future and
the conditional of the indicative. In irregular, inceptive, and -uir
(but not in radical-changing) verbs, it often furnishes the stem for
the whole present subjunctive.
(5) The first, person singular preterite indicative has the same
stem as all the rest of that tense in regular, inceptive, -uir, and irregu-
lar verbs ; and as the second singular and the first and second plural
of this same tense in radical-changing verbs. Its stem is also the
same as that of the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypotheti-
cal (or future) subjunctive of all but radical-changing verbs.
(6) The third person singular preterite indicative has, in radical-
changing verbs, the same stem as the third plural of that tense, and
as the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypothetical subjunctive.
(Apart from regular verbs, the above rules are not complete guides,
and practice must be relied on.)
210. The Regular Verb. — It is the custom to speak of three
regular conjugations in Spanish, classified, according to their
endings, as the -ar, or first ; the -er, or second ; and the -ir,
or third conjugation. In actual practice, however, we find that
there are but two entire conjugations, for in all but four forms
(the present infinitive, the first and second persons plural of the
present indicative, and the second person plural of the impera-
tive) the -ir or third conjugation has the same endings as the -er,
or second. In the four exceptional forms, the third conjugation
has the distinctive vowel i (-ir, -imos, -is, -id), whereas the second
has e (-er, -emos, -eis, -ed). The following are the paradigms ;
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Present
habl ar, to speak.
Present
(Gerund)
habl ando, speaking.
Past
habl ado, spoken.
II
INFINITIVE MOOD
Present
tern er, to fear.
PARTICIPLES
Present
(Gerund)
tern iendo, fearing.
Past
tem i^o, feared.
INDICATIVE MOOD
III
Present
viv ir, to live.
Present
(Gerund)
viv iendo, living.
Past
viv ido, lived.
I speak, do speak, am
I fear, do fear, am
/ live, do live, am
speaking, etc.
fearing, etc.
living, etc.
habl 0
tem 0
viv 0
habl as
tem es
viv es
habl a
tem e
viv e
habl amos
tem emos
viv imos
habl ais
tem eis
viv is
habl an
tem en
viv en
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
/ spoke, was speaking,
I feared, -was fearing.
/ lived, ivas living,
used to speak, etc.
used to fear, etc.
used to live, etc.
habl aba
tem ia
viv la
habl abas
tem ias
viv ias
habl aba
tem ia
viv ia
habl abamos
tem iamos.
viv iamos
habl abais
tem iais
viv iais
habl aban
tem ian
viv ian
THE VERB
i8;
Preterite
Preterite
Preterite
/ spoke, etc.
I feared, etc.
/ lived, etc.
habl e
tern i
viv i
habl aste
tern iste
viv iste
habl 6
tern i6
viv i6
habl amos
tern imos
viv imos
habl asteis
tern isteis
viv isteis
habl aron
tern ieron
viv ieron
Future
Future
Future
/ shall speak, etc.
I shall fear , etc.
I shall live, etc.
hablar e
temer e
vivir e
hablar as
temer as
vivir as
hablar a
temer a
vivir a
hablar emos
temer emos
vivir emos
hablar eis
temer eis
vivir eis
hablar an
temer an
vivir an
Conditional
Conditional
Conditional
/ should speak, etc.
/ should fear, etc.
/ should live, etc.
hablar ia
temer ia
vivir ia
hablar ias
temer ias
vivir ias
hablar ia
temer ia
vivir ia
hablar iamos
temer iamos
vivir iamos
hablar iais
temer iais
vivir iais
hablar ian
temer ian
IMPERATIVE MOOD
vivir ian
speak, etc.
fear, etc.
live, etc.
2^5^. habl a
tem e
viv e
2^/^/. habl ad
tern ed
viv id
1 88
SPANISH GRAMMAR
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
Present
Present
Present
{That I may) speak,
( That I may) fear,
( That I may) live.
{let me) speak, etc.
{let me) fear, etc.
{let me) live, etc.
habl e
tern a
viv a
habl es
tern as
viv as
hable
tern a
viv a
habl emos
tern amos
viv amos
habl eis
tern ais
viv ais
habl en
tern an
viv an
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
First Form
First Form
First Form
(-se Imperfect)
(-se Imperfect)
(-se Imperfect)
{That ox if I might)
{That ox if I might)
{That ox if I might)
speak, etc.
fear, etc.
live, etc.
habl ase
tern iese
viv iese
habl ases
tern ieses
viv ieses
habl ase
tern iese
viv iese
habl asemos
tern iesemos
viv iesemos
habl aseis
tern ieseis
viv ieseis
habl asen
tern iesen
viv iesen
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
Second Form
Second Form
Second Form
(-ra Imperfect)
(-ra Imperfect)
(-ra Imperfect)
/ should speak, {that ox if I should fear, {that or if
/ should live, {that or
I might) speak, etc.
/ might) fear, etc.
if I might) live, etc.
habl ara
tern iera
viv iera
habl aras
tern ieras
viv ieras
habl ara
tern iera
viv iera
habl aramos
tern ieramos
viv ieramos
habl arais
tern ierais
viv ierais
habl aran
tern ieran
viv ieran
THE VERB
189
Hypothetical
Hypothetical
Hypothetical
(or Future) (or Future) (or Future)
/ {may or shall) speak, etc. I {may or shall) fear, etc. I {may or shall) live, etc,
habl are tern iere viv iere
habl ares tern ieres viv ieres
habl are tern iere viv iere
habl aremos tern ieremos viv ieremos
Jiabl areis tern iereis viv iereis
habl aren tem ieren viv ieren
211. Compound Perfect Tenses. — The compound tenses
of. all verbs, regular or not, are formed by adding then-
past participle (invariable) to a part of the auxiliary
haber, *to have ' (see § 237); e.g.
INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE
Present Perfect Present Perfect (Perfect Gerund)
to have spoken having spoken
haber hablado habiendo hablado
INDICATIVE
Present Perfect Preterite Perfect (Past Anterior)
/ have spoken, etc. I had spoke7i, etc,
he hablado hube hablado
has hablado etc,
etc.
Pluperfect Future Perfect
/ had spoken, etc, I shall have spoken, etc,
habia hablado habre hablado
etc. etc.
Conditional Perfect
I should have spoken, etc.
habria hablado
etc.
igo SPANISH GRAMMAR
SUBJUNCTIVE
Present Perfect Pluperfect
Second Form (-ra Pluperfect)
( That I may) have spoken, etc, I should have spoken, etc.
haya hablado hubiera hablado
etc. etc.
Pluperfect Hypothetical (or Future) Perfect
First Form (-se Pluperfect)
( That I might) have spoken, etc. I {may or shall) have spoken, etc,
hubiese hablado hubiere hablado
etc. etc.
212. Periphrastic Progressive Tenses. — These are
formed by adding the present participle to a part of
the auxiHary estar, *to be' (or ir, 'to go,' venir, * to
come,' etc.); e.g.
estoy (voy, etc.^ hablando, I am speaking, etc.
See § 121, a.
213. Orthographic Variations. — It is an inviolable rule
of Spanish conjugation that the consonantal sound occurring at
the end of the infinitive stem {i,e, immediately before the end-
ings -ar, -er, -ir) shall be preserved throughout the verb. When,
therefore, there is a change of the vowel beginning the flectional
ending, the written character denoting the consonantal sound
at the end of the infinitive stem may have to be changed, for
the original character may not denote the original sound before
the new vowel ; thus it is obvious that a first conjugation verb
in -car cannot continue to have c before the preterite ending,
first person singular in -e ; the original k sound of the infinitive
stem can now be indicated only by qu before the -e.
Many of the changes here indicated for regular verbs occur
also in the case of irregular verbs.
THE VERB 191
214. The usual variations in spelling are the following :
(i) Verbs in -c-ar change c to qu before flectional e. The
change can occur only in the present subjunctive and in the first
person singular of the preterite indicative.
Sacar, to take out
Pret. 1st Sing, saque
Pres. Subj. saque saques saque saquemos saqueis saquen
(2) Verbs in -g-ar insert u between the g and flectional e. The
cases of change are the same as for -car verbs.
Pagar, to pay
Pret. 1st Sing, pague Pres. Subj. pague, etc.
(The u has no pronounceable value : it is a mere sign that the g is " hard "
before the following e.)
(3) Verbs in -gu-ar write a diaeresis over the u before flectional e.
This is necessary in order to indicate that the u, which has a pro-
nounceable value before the infinitive ending -ar, continues to have
one before the -e. Without the diaeresis u is silent in the combina-
tion gue.
Apaciguar, to pacify
Pret. 1st Sing, apaciglie Pres. Subj. apacigUe, etc,
(4) Verbs in -z-ar change z to c before flectional e. The cases
concerned are the same as in the three preceding classes, but the
variation in spelling is a purely conventional one (due to the fact
that modern Spanish does not write z before e or i), and no possible
change of sound is involved.
Rezar, to pray
Pret. 1st Sing, rece Pres. Subj, rece, etc,
215. The preceding cases concern only verbs of the first
conjugation. In the ensuing ones we deal with second and
third conjugation verbs.
1 92 SPANISH GRAMMAR
(i) Verbs in -c-er or -c-ir preceded by a consonant change c to z
before flectional o or a. The cases concerned here and in the three
following classes are the first person singular of the present indica-
tive and all of the present subjunctive.
Veneer, to conquer
Pres. Indie. >
Pres, SubJ, venza venzas venza venzamos venzais venzan
Esparcir, to scatter
Pres, Indie, \st Sing, esparzo Pres. Subj. esparza, etc.
a. For verbs in -car and -cir preceded by a vowel, see the Inceptive
Conjugation, § 220.
(2) Verbs in -g-er or -g-ir, whether regular verbs or not, change
g to j before flectional 0 or a.
Coger, to gather, take, etc.
Pres. Indie. ^ ist Sing, cojo Pres. Subj, coja, etc.
Corregir, to correct
Pres. Indie. y 1st Sing, corrijo
Pres. Subj. corrija, etc. (A radical-changing verb.)
(3) Verbs in -qu-ir change qu to c before flectional 0 or a.
Delinquir, to be delinquent
Pres. Indie. ^ \st Sing, delinco Pres. Subj. delinca, etc.
(4) Verbs in -gu-ir omit the u before flectional 0 or a. The u is
a mere sign of " hard " g in the infinitive, and is not needed before a
following 0 or a.
Distinguir, to distinguish
Pres. Indie. J ist Sing, distingo Pres. Stibj. distinga, etc.
216. In the second and third conjugations the diphthongs
-ie- and -io occur in certain endings (present participle, third
person singular, and third person plural of the preterite indica-
tive, and throughout the two imperfects and the hypothetical of
[
THE VERB 193
the subjunctive). If the verb stem end in a vowel (e.g. le-er,
' to read '), the i of these diphthongal endings must be changed
to y, for it is a general rule (and therefore applicable to all
verbs, whether regular or not) that unaccented i cannot stand
between two vowels.
Le-er, to read
Fres. Part. le-yendo (^for le-iendo)
Pret. Indie. ^ -^d Sing. le-yo {for le-io)
2,d PI. le-yeron (^for le-ieron)
Imperf. SubJ.j ist Form le-yera, etc. {for le-iera, etc.)
2d Form le-yese, etc. {for le-iese, etc.')
Hypothetical le-yere, etc. {for le-iexe, etc.)
This change is particularly common in -uir verbs (huir, ^ to flee,'
huyendo, etc.).
217. If the verb stem end in 11 or n, the i of the diphthongal
endings -ie- and -io disappears. This is true of all verbs, regular
or not. Certain irregular verbs (especially decir, ^ to say,' traer,
* to bring,' and -ducir derivatives) likewise lose the i of their -ie-
endings after the j of their preterite stem.
Bullir, to boil
Pres. Part. bull-endo {instead of bull-iendo)
Pret. Indie, 3^ Sing. bull-6 {instead of bull-id)
3<i PL bull-eron {instead of buU-ieron)
Impf. Subj., 1st Form bull-ese, etc.
2d For77i bull-era, etc.
hyp. Subj. bull-ere, etc,
Planir, to lament
plan-endo plan-6 plan-eron
plaii-ese, etc, plan-era, etc. plan-ere, etc.
Traer, to bring
Pret . In die .^-^d PL, traj -e r o n
Stibj. traj-ese, etc. traj-era, etc. traj-ere, etc.
194
SPANISH GRAMMAR
218. In the three persons singular and in the third plural of
the present tenses (indicative, subjunctive, and imperative),
certain -iar and -uar verbs take an accent on the i or the u.
Variar, to vary
Pres, Indie, vario varias varia (variamos) (varidis) varian
Pres. Subj\ varie varies varie (variemos) (varieis) varien
Imper, Sing, varia
Acentuar, to accentuate, to accent
Pres, Indie, acentiio acentuas acentua acentuan
Pres, Subj, acentue acentues acentue acentuen
Imper, Sing, acentua
219. Not all the -iar and -uar verbs take this accent; cf.
principiar, ' to begin ' ; principio, * I begin ' ; presenciar, * to
witness ' ; presencio, ' I witness ' ; diferenciar, ' to differentiated ;
diferencian, ' they differentiate.' By practice only can it be
determined whether the accent should fall on the i and the u or
not. The verbs in the following lists are among the commonest
taking the accent.
(I) -iar
:
acuantiar
calo friar
cuantiar
enfriar
guiar
telegrafiar
aliar
cariar
desafiar
enviar
hastiar
triar
ampliar
ciar
descarriar
espiar
liar
vaciar
arriar
confiar
desconfiar
estriar
piar
vanagioriar
ataviar
contrariar
descriar
expiar
porfiar
variar
averiar
correntiar
desvariar
fiar
resfriar
vigiar
aviar
criar
desviar
gloriar
rociar
zurriar
(2) -uai
acentuar
continuar
extenuar
habituar
perpetuar
situar
actuar
desvirtuar
fluctuar
individuar
puntuar
tuniultuar
arruar
efectuar
ganzuar
infatuar
redituar
usufructuar
atenuar
evaluar
graduar
insinuar
ruar
valuar
conceptuar
exceptuar
I
THE VERB 195
220. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. — There are certain
verbs of the second and third conjugations whose infinitives end
in -cer or -cir preceded by a vowel and the great majority of
which are derived from Latin inceptive (^-scere) verbs. In the
present stem (indicative and subjunctive) these insert a z
before the c, wherever the verb ending begins with 0 or a.
Only seven forms undergo this change ; namely, the first person
singular present indicative, and the six forms of the present
subjunctive. All other forms of these verbs are regular.^
Conocer, to know, conociendo, conocido
Pres. Indie,
conozc-o conoc-es conoc-e conoc-emos conoc-eis, conoc-en
Pres. Subj.
conozc-a conozc-as conozc-a conozc-amos conozc-ais conozc-an
Pres. Imperat. conoce, conoc-ed
Indie, hnperf. conocia, ete. Pret. conoci, ete.
Fut. conocere, ete. Cond. conoceria, ete.
Subj. Imperfs. conociese, ete. conociera, ete.
Hyp. conociere, ete.
Lucir, to shine, luciendo, lucido
Pres. Indie, luzc-o luc-es luc-e luc-imos luc-is luc-en
Pres. Subj. luzc-a luzc-as luzc-a luzc-amos luzc-dis luzc-an
All other forms regular as in the third conjugation.
Exceptions : — a. mecer, *to rock' (and its derivative remecer), sim-
ply changes c to z before 0 or a (mezo, meza, etc.) ; it is a regular verb
of the second conjugation. Cocer, 'to boil,' recocer, 'to boil again,' and
tiSCOCer, 'to smart,' likewise change c to z; they are radical-changing
verbs of the first class, e.g. cuezo, cueza, etc. ; cf. § 223 (4) ; but cocer
i? little used in forms taking z. Hacer, ' to do,' * to make,' decir, ' to say,'
and their derivatives, are irregular verbs and not of the inceptive class.
"*" The inceptive or " beginning " sense is not necessarily present in theSQ
verbs. It was already gone to a large degree in Latin,
196 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Irregular, too, are yacer, * to lie,' and placer, 'to please.' Pacer, *to
graze,' and balbucir, ' to stammer,' are hardly used in the forms that
would have an inserted z.
b. Certain irregular verbs conjugate their present tenses after the fashion
of the inceptive verb. Thus the -ducir derivatives (conducir, inducir,
etc.) have in the pres. indie, -duzco, and in the pres. subj. -duzca, -duzcas,
-duzca, -duzcamos, -duzcais, -duzcan. The rest of their present forms are
also like those of lucir; that is, are those of regular verbs of the third con-
jugation. Their preterite tenses are irregular. See § 256.
221 . Radical-changing Verbs. — Quite a number of verbs are
regular as to their flectional endings, but under certain conditions
modify the vocalic nature of their radical or root syllable. In
these verbs the infinitive shows the unmodified root vowel, which
must be either e or 0. As a result of accentual influences or of
apparent umlaut {e,g, the influence of the i of one of the diph-
thongs ie, io, in the following syllable) the e may become ie or
even i and the 0 may become ue or even u.
222. There are three main classes of these radical-changing
verbs. Their variations may be represented by this scheme :
I. Root vowel e becomes ie
^ , , , under the accent.
Root vowel 0 becomes ue
\- under the accent.
]
II. Root vowel e becomes ie
Root vowel 0 becomes ue
Root vowel e becomes i ) , ^ . i -r.. rn •
^ , , r when not accented, if the followmo;
Root vowel 0 becomes u )
syllable have a or one of the diphthongs ie, io.
III. Root vowel e becomes i, both (i) under the accent and (2)
when not accented, if followed by a syllable with a or
one of the diphthongs ie, io.
Note. — It is well for students to be on their guard against all verbs
shovi^ing e or 0 in vi^hat seems to be the root vowel of the infinitive. A
verb list should be consulted for the purpose of ascertaining whether they
are radical-changing or not.
THE VERB
197
223. This first class of radical-changing verbs embraces
only -ar and -er verbs. In these, e becomes ie and 0 becomes
ue when the root syllable has the accent. It can have the
accent only in the three persons singular and the third person
plural of the present indicative and present subjunctive, and
in the second person singular of the imperative. These forms
alone, then, show any change : all the other forms are per-
fectly regular. The variations may be illustrated by the verbs
pensar, to think. contar, to count, to tell.
perder, to lose. mover, to move.
(i) Pensar, pensando, pensado
pens-amos ^
pens-dis
r piens-o
Pres. Indie, J piens-as
(^ piens-a
r piens-e
Pres, Stibj. J piens-es
1^ piens-e
Imperat. piens-a
Iinperf, Indie,
Pret. Indie,
Ftit, Indie,
Cond, Indie,
Imp erf. Subj.^ ist Form
Imp erf ' Subj., id Form
Hyp, Subj,
piens-an
pens-emos
pens-eis
piens-en
pens-ad
pens-aba, pens-abas, ete,
pens-e, pens-aste, ete,
pensar-e, pensar-as, ete,
pensar-ia, pensar-ias, etc,
pens-ase, pens-ases, ete,
pens-ara, pens-aras, ete,
pens-are, pens-ares, ete.
All other forms
are regular.
(2) Perder, perdiendo, perdido
rpierd-o perd-emos
Pres. Indie, J pierd-es perd-^is
l^pierd-e pierd-en
rpierd-a perd-amos \-
Pres. Snbj. ^ pierd-as perd-dis
l^pierd-a pierd-an
Imperat, pierd-e perd-ed
All other forms
are regular.
198
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Imperf. Indie.
Pret, Indie.
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imperf. Stibj., \st Form
hnperf. Subj.^ id For7n
Hyp. Subj.
perd-ia, perd-ias, ete.
perd-i, perd-iste, ete.
perder-e, perder-ds, ete.
perder-ia, perder-Ias, ete.
perd-iese, perd-ieses, ete.
perd-iera, perd-ieras, ete.
perd-iere, perd-ieres, ete.
(3) Contar, contando, contado
rcuent-o
Pres. Indie. J cuent-as
(^ cuent-a
r cuent-e
Pres. Stcbj. J cuent-es
1^ cuent-e
Imperat. cuent-a
cont-amos ^
cont-dis
cuent-an
cont-emos
cont-eis
cuent-en
cont-ad
y
All other forms
are regular.
Cont-aba, etc. ; cont-e, ete. ; contar-e, ete. ; contar-ia, ete. ; cont-ase,
ete. ; cont-ara, ete. ; cont-are, ete.
(4) Mover, moviendo, movido
r muev-o
Pres. Indie. J muev-es
1^ muev-e
r muev-a
Pres. Subj. J muev-as
(^ muev-a
Imperat. muev-e
mov-emos ^
mov-eis
muev-en
mov-amos y
mov-dis
muev-an
mov-ed
All other forms
are regular.
Mov-ia, ete. ; mov-I, ete. ; mover-e, ete. ; mover-ia, ete. ; mov-iese,
ete. ; mov-iera, ete. ; mov-iere, ete.
Note. — The change of the root vowels e and 0 to ie and ue under
the accent started with verbs having as their root vowels in Latin e or ae
(vulgar Latin open e) and 0. In the development of Latin into Spanish
these vowels could not remain under the accent (as the long vowels did),
but when stressed they broke into the corresponding diphthongs ie, ue.
THE VERB 199
When not under the accent, they ordinarily preserved their integrity in
Spanish: cf. Latin /^/r«, Spanish piedra, 'stone'; Latin ferra, Spanish
tierra, * earth ' ; Latin certus, Spanish cierto, * certain ' ; Latin caectis,
Spanish ciego, * blind ' ; Latin foj^tis^ Spanish fuerte, * strong ' ; but with
unaccented and therefore retained root vowel, Latin "^ petrdrius^ Spanish
pedrero, 'stone-cutter '; Latin terrenus, Spanish terreno, *land,' etc., etc.
224. Certain verbs in -olver are of this first radical-changing
class, but have only an irregular past participle in -uelto.
These are chiefly
volver, to return, to come back ;
Pres. Indie, vuelvo, vuelves, etc. ; Past Part, vuelto ;
and its derivatives, devolver, ' to give back ' ; envolver, ' to wrap
up ' ; revolver, ^ to stir,^ etc.^ and solver, ' to loosen,' and its deriv-
atives, absolver, ^ to absolve ' ; disolver, ^ to dissolve ' ; resolver, ' to
resolve,' etc.
225. Orthographic changes already indicated for regular
verbs are to be observed also in radical- changing verbs ; cf.
§§ 213-217, e.g.:
r Pret., istShig. me revolque
c to qu, revolcarse, ' to wallow': < Pres. Sbj., ist Sing, me re-
L vuelque, etc.
, ,. , , f Pret. 1st Sing, ceo^u^
g to gu, cesrar, ^ to bhnd ' : ^ „ <-/:• ^ o •
^ ^ ^ \ Pres.Sbj.ist Sg.Qx^gM^^etc.
,' r Pret. 1st Sing, tropece
z to c, tropezar, ' to stumble : ^ ^ c^. . ^ >, . ^
I Pres. :^oj. 1st Cii7ig.X.r o^itce
r Pres. Ind. tuerzo, but
. , tuerces, tuerce, etc.
c to z, torcer, ^ to twist ' : < „ oz. • ^
' ' I Pres. ^ibj. tuerza, tuerzas,
L etc.
r Pres. Ind. deguello, de-
(g)o to (g)ue, degollar, ' to behead ' : < gUellas, etc.
L Pres. Sbj. deguelle, etc.
200
SPANISH GRAMMAR
226. The verbs errar, ^ to err,' and oler, ^ to have an odor/ * to
smell/ are of this first radical-changing class, but wherever they
stress their root syllables, the resulting ie of errar is changed to
ye, and the resulting ue of oler to hue, because of the rule that
no word should begin with the diphthongs ie or ue.
(i) Errar, errando, errado
Pres. Ind, yerr-o y err-as yerr-a err-amos err-dis yerr-an
Pres. Subj, yerr-e yerr-es yerr-e err-emos err-eis yerr-en
Imperat. yerr-a err-ad
etc. etc.
hud-en
huel-an
(2) Oler, oliendo, olido
Pres. Ind. huel-o huel-es huel-e ol-emos ol-ds
Pres. Subj. huel-a huel-as huel-a ol-amos ol-dis
Imperat. huel-e ol-ed
etc. etc.
a. An h is also inserted before the ue of the stressed root syllables of
desosar, *to bone,' *to unbone,' and desovar, *to spawn.' Here the h is
due to the analogy of the related nouns hueso. * bone,' and huevo, * egg.^
Desosar, desosando, desosado
Pres. Indie.
deshueso deshuesas deshuesa desosamos desosdis deshuesan
Pres. Subj.
deshuese deshueses deshuese desosemos desoseis deshuesen
hnperat.
deshuesa
etc.
desosad
etc.
In similar fashion desovar has
deshuevo deshuevas deshueva desovamos etc.
THE VERB 20 1
227. Instead of 0 in the unaccented syllables, to correspond
to ue of the accented syllables, jugar, ^ to play,' now shows u.
But the u has simply taken the place of older 0. The ue
-remains wherever originally developed. Before flectional e of
the ending, u is inserted after the g.
Jugar, jugando, jugado
Pres. Ind. juego juegas juega jugamos jugdis juegan
Pres. Subj. juegue juegues juegue juguemos jugueis jueguen
Imperat. juega jugad
Pret. hid, jugue, etc.
All other forms have u.
228. Three verbs in -ir seem to belong to this class, which
regularly comprises only -ar and -er verbs. These are discemir,
^to discern,' concernir, ^ to concern' (cf. § 264), adquirir, * to
acquire,' and inquirir, ^ to inquire.' But they are derivatives
and are related to simple verbs in -er, viz. cerner and querer.^
Adquirir and inquirir show the further peculiarity of an i in the
unstressed root forms, to correspond to the ie of the stressed
root syllables ; but it is to be observed that querer shows the
original e.
(i) Discernir, discerniendo, discernido
Pj-es. Indie.
discierno disciernes discierne discernimos discernis disciernen
Pres. Subj.
discierna disciernas discierna discernamos discerndis disciernan
hnperat,
discierne discernid
All other forms are regular as of the -ir conjugation.
1 Querer is irregular, adquirir and inquirir are regular, in the preterite and
allied forms.
202 SPANISH GRAMMAR *
(2) Adquirir, adquiriendO; adquirido
Pres, Indie.
adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquiris adquieren
Pres. Subj,
adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquirais adquieran
hfiperat.
adquiere adquirid
All other forms are regular as of the -ir conjugation.
229. The second radical-changing class embraces only verbs
of the third conjugation with the root vowel e or 0.
As in the first class, e becomes ie and 0 becomes ue under
the accent. When not accented the e is changed to i and the
0 to u, if the strong vowel a or one of the diphthongs ie, io
occur in the next syllable. In all other cases the original e
and 0 remain. This class may be illustrated by the conjugation
of the verbs sentir, ' to feel,' and dormir, ' to sleep.'
(i) Sentir, sintiendo, sentido
Pres, Indie,
sient-o sient-es sient-e sent-imos sent-i's sient-en
Pres, Subj,
sient-a sient-as sient-a sint-amos sint-dis sient-an
Imperat,
sient-e sent-id
Fut, Indie, sentir-e, ete, {Regular^
Cond, Indie, sentir-ia, ete, {Regular)
Imperf, Indie, sent-ia, ete. {Regular)
Pret. Indie,
sent-i sent-iste sint-io sent-imos sent-isteis sint-ierou
l7nperf, Subj,^ \st For?n
sint-iese sint-ieses sint-iese sint-iesemos sint-ieseis sint-iesen
THE VERB
203
Imperf, Siibj, , 2d Form
sint-iera sint-ieras sint-iera sint-ieramos sint-ierais sint-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
sint-iere sint-ieres sint-iere sint-ieremos sint-iereis sint-ieren
(2) Dormir, durmiendo, dormido
Pres. Indie,
Pres. Subj,
l7nperat.
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imperf. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
Imperf. Subj.,
Imperf. Subj.,
Hyp. Subj.
j duerm-o
t dorm-imos
r duerm-a
t *durm-amos
l-
ist Form-
id For77i
duerm-es
dorm-is
duerm-as
durm-ais
duerm-e
donn-id
{Regular^
{Regular)
{Regular)
dorm-iste
dorm-isteis
durm-ieses
durm-ieseis
durm-ieras
duerm-e
duerm-en .
duerm-a
duerm-an
dormir-e, ete,
dormir-ia, ete.
dorm-ia, ete.
dorm-i
donn-imos
r durm-iese
durm-iesemos
r durm-iera
[ durm-ieramos durm-ierais
r durm-iere durm-ieres
1 durm-ieremos durm-iereis
durm-io
durm-ieron
durm-iese
durm-iesen
durm-iera
durm-ieran
durm-iere
durm-ieren
It is a useful fact to remember that in this class the subjunctive imper-
fects and hypothetical always show the same stem as the preterite, third
person singular.
a. The number of 0 verbs in this second radical-changing class is
small : dormir, * to sleep,' and morir, * to die,' are the only simple verbs in
it. Morir is conjugated exactly like dormir except in its past participle,
which has only the irregular form muerto. The past participle muerto
is not only intransitive, meaning ' died,' ' dead ' (el hombre ha muertO,
*the man has died,' 'the man is dead'); but with 2. personal object it may
be transitive, meaning * killed ' (hemos muerto al soldado, * we have killed
the soldier ').
204
SPANISH GRAMMAR
230. The third radical- changing class consists only of third-
conjugation verbs with the root vowel e. A change occurs
only in the same cases as in Class II, viz. under the accent,
and where the root syllable is not accented if it be followed by
a or one of the diphthongs ie, io. In both these cases the e
becomes i (so that there is no diphthong in the root syllable of
these verbs). In all other forms the e remains and those forms
are regular as of the third conjugation. The class may be
illustrated by the conjugation of vestir, ' to clothe.'
Vestir, vistiendo, vestido
Pres. Indie.
vest-imos vest-is
Pres. Subj.
vist-amos vist-dis
Imperat.
vist-o
vist-a
vist-es
vist-as
vist-e
vist-a
vist-en
vist-an
vist-e
vest-id
(^Regular)
{Regular)
{Regular)
vest-isteis vist-ieron
Fut. Indie. vestir-e, etc.
Cond. Indie. vestir-ia, ete.
Imperf. Indie, vest-la, ete.
Pret. Indie.
vest-i vest-iste vist-io vest-imos
Imperf. Stibj.^ \st Form
vist-iese vist-ieses vist-iese vist-iesemos vist-ieseis vist-iesen
Imperf. Subj.^ 2d For7n
vist-iera vist-ieras vist-iera vist-ieramos vist-ierais vist-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
vist-iere vist-ieres vist-iere vist-ieremos vist-iereis vist-ieren
As in the second class, it is to be noted that the steni of the
preterite, third person singular, prevails throughout the sub-
junctive imperfects and hypothetical.
THE VERB 205
231. The orthographical changes stated for regular verbs
are to be observed here : cf. §§ 213-217.
. , , r n -, \ Pres, Indie. \st Sin^. sisfo
gu to g, seguir, * to follow ':H„ ^7.. .
° L Pres. Subj. siga, sigas, etc,
. . , . , r Pres. Indie. \st Sins', elijo
g to 1, elegir, ^ to elect ' : \ ^ o /:• r- t-
** •" ^ ' L Pres. Subj, elija, elijas, etc.
Pres. Part, ciiiendo {for cifiiendo)
_. ^ ^ ^ Pret. "xd Sins^. cifio, '\d PL cineron
nie to ne, ^ j <5 ? j
ni6 to
' V cenir, ^ to gird '1 -^ Imp erf. Subj.^ \st Form., cinese, etc.
' Imp erf . Subj.^ id Form^ cinera, etc.
L Hyp. Subj. cinere, etc.
232. The verb erguir, 'to erect/ may in the stressed root
syllables of its present tenses have either the diphthong ie
(written ye because it is at the beginning of the word) or the
vowel i. It may be conjugated throughout as of either the
second or the third radical-changing class. Of course its u
disappears before 0 or a.
Erguir, irguiendo, erguido
( yerg-o yergu-es yergu-e ) . ( yergu-en
Pres. Ind. i . • . Ver2:ui-mos ero^u-isi •
(irg-o irgu-es irgu-e \ ^ * (irgu-en
( yerg-a yerg-as yerg-a ) . . i yerg-an
Pres. Subi.\ . . . hr2:-amos irg-ais \ •
-^ (irg-a irg-as irg-a \ ^ => |irg-an
Imperat. \
yergu-e
iro^u-e
ergu-id j
Fi^t. Ind. erguir-e, etc. {Regtdar)
Cond. Indie, erguir-ia, etc. {Regular)
Imp. Ind. ergu-ia, etc. {Regular)
Pret. Ind. ergu-i ergu-iste irgu-io ergu-imos ergu-isteis irgu-ieron
Imp. Subj. \
1st Form, [irgu-iese, etc.
Imp. Subj. \
2d Form, ^irgu-iera, ./..
Hyp. Subj. irgu-iere, etc.
206 SPANISH GRAMMAR
233. There are certain verbs in -eir that belong to this
class. They change their e to i in the same cases as vestir,
but whenever that i comes into conjunction with i of a follow-
ing diphthong ie or 16, one of the two i's disappears, as in reir,
^ to laugh.'
Reir, riendo \for ri-iendo), re-ido
Pres. Indie, ri-o ri-es ri-e re-imos re-is ri-en
Pres, Subj, ri-a ri-as ri-a ri-amos ri-dis ri-an
Imperat, ri-e re-id
Fut. Indie, reir-e, ete. {Regtdar)
Cond. Indie, reir-ia, ete, {Regular)
Imperf, Ind, re-ia, ete, {Regular)
Pret. Indie, re-i re-iste \ "°. (^f [ re-imos re-isteis| "^^^C/f
( ri-ioj \ { ri-ieron)
Imperf. Subj.^ \st For7n riese {for ri-iese) rieses, etc,
Imperf. Subj.^ 2d Form riera {for ri-iera) rieras, ete.
Hyp. Subj, riere {for ri-iere) rieres, etc,
a. This is now the customary conjugation of reir and other -eir verbs
of this class. Formerly — at least in the case of reir itself — the i was
not lost necessarily, and there resulted such forms as riyendo (unaccented
i changed to y between vowels), riy6, riyeron, riyese, etc., riyera, etc.,
riyere, etc. Note the many forms of reir requiring a written accent.
234. The verb podrir, ^to putrefy,' was once included in this
class as an example of a change of 0 to u in conjugation. But
in practice it has become a regular verb of the third conjuga-
tion, with u everywhere in the root syllable. The 0 is retained
only in by-forms of the infinitive and past participle, podrir
and podrido. Pudrir is preferred to podrir, but as the passive
participle podrido seems to be still the commoner form.
235. -TJir Verbs. — These include only verbs with a pro-
nounced u (written with a diaeresis when g precedes, as in
argiiir, * to argue ').
THE VERB
207
Their peculiarity consists in adding y to their stem vowel u,
except where the flectional ending begins with i (whether
stressed i or i of the diphthongs ie, io). Of course, the future
and conditional indicative do not take the y, being based on
the infinitive. Besides this y added to the stem, the conjuga-
tion of these verbs shows a y (in the present participle, the
preterite, third singular, and third plural, and the subjunctive
imperfects and hypothetical) which is not an addition, but
merely represents the unaccented i of the diphthongal ending,
which has chanced to come between vowels : cf. § 216.
The class may be illustrated by the conjugation of huir, ^to
flee/
Huir, huyendo {for hu-iendo), huido
Pres. Indie.
huy-o
huy-es
huy-e
hu-imos
Pres. Snbj.
hu-is
huy-en
huy-a
huy-as
huy-a
huy-amos
huy-ais
huy-an
huy-e
Imperat.
Ftd. Indie.
hu-id
huir-e,
etc. {Reg?dar)
Cond. Indie,
huir-Ia,
etc. {Regular)
Imp erf . Indie.
hu-ia
hu-Ias
hu-ia
hu-iamos
Pret. Indie.
hu-iais
hu-ian
hu-i
hu-iste
hu-yo
hu-imos
hu-isteis
hu-yeron
Imperf. Siibj.^ \st Form
hu-yese
hu-yeses
hu-yese
hu-yesemos
hu-yeseis
hu-yesen
Imperf. Stibj.^ 2d Forin
hu-yera
hu-yeras
hu-yera
hu-yeramos
Hyp. Stibj.
hu-yerais
hu-yeran
hu-yere
hu-yeres
hu-yere
hu-yeremos
hu-yereis
hu-yeren
208
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Verbs in -giiir require their diaeresis only before a written i : it dis-
appears before y : e,g,
argiiir, ' to argue,' but arguyendo, arguyo, arguye, arguyen, arguya, etc.
argiiia, argiii, but arguy6, arguyese, etc.
The Irregular
Verb
236.
Ser, to be
Ser,
siendo, sido
Pres, Indie,
soy
eres
es
somos
sois
son
Pres. Sicbj.
se-a
se-as
se-a
se-amos
se-ais
se-an
Imperat.
se
sed
Fut. Indie.
ser-e
ser-^s
ser-a
ser-emos
ser-eis
ser-an
Cojid. Iridic .
ser-ia
ser-ias
ser-ia
ser-iamos
ser-iais
ser-ian
Imp erf. Indie.
era
eras
era
eramos
erais
eran
Pret. Indie.
fu-i
fu-iste
fu-e
fu-imos
fu-isteis
fu-eron
Iini)erf. Sub?., ] r r r
^ -^ -^ ^ \ lu-ese lu-eses lu-ese
\si Form )
I mi) erf. Snbi.. ] c r r
r J y 7 L tu-era fu-eras fu-era
2.d Form )
Hyp. Sicbj\ fu-ere fu-eres fu-ere
fu-esemos fu-eseis fu-esen
fii-eramos fu-erais fu-eran
fu-eremos fu-ereis fu-eren
237. Haber, to have
Haber^ habiendo, habidc
)
Pres. Indie.
he
has
ha hemos
Pres. Stibj.
hab-eis
han
hay- a
hay-as
hay-a hay-amos
hay-ais
hay-an
(he)
Irnperat.
Fut. Indie.
hab-ed
habr-d
habr-^s
habr-d habr-emos
Cond. Indie.
habr-eis
habr-dn
habr-ia
habr-ias
habr-ia habr-iamos
habr-iais
habr-ian
THE VERB
209
I
Imp erf. Indie.
hab-ia hab-ias hab-Ia hab-iamos hab-iais hab-ian
Pret. Indie.
hub-e hub-iste hub-o hub-imos hub-isteis hub-ieron
I?nperf. Stibj.^ ist Form.
hub-iese hub-ieses hub-iese hub-iesemos hub-ieseis hub-iesen
I?nperf. Subj.j id Form.
hub-iera hub-ieras hub-iera hub-ieramos hub-ierais hub-ieran
Hyp. Stibj.
hub-iere hub-ieres hub-iere hub-ieremos hub-iereis hub-ieren
a. Note that the future and the conditional of the indicative are based
on a contract form of the infinitive. The form he is, in accordance with
the example set by the Spanish Academy, usually classed as imperative
singular of haber; it may, however, represent a peculiar phonetic devel-
opment of the imperative singular of the verb ver, ' to see,' as the gramma-
rian Cuervo suggests. It is most common in combination with the adverb
aqui, *here,' he aqui, * behold.' As the impersonal verb ' to be,' haber
takes the suffix y (an old adverb meaning * there ') in the present indica-
tive, whence hay, * there is ' or * there are.' For the other moods and
tenses it simply has the third person singular forms without the appended
y: habia, 'there was (were),' habra, 'there will be,' etc.
It is characteristic of many irregular verbs that in the first and
third singular of the preterite indicative they stress the stem vowel
and not the ending : compare hube, hubo with temi, temi6.
est-oy est-as
est-e est-^s
est4
238. Estar, to be
Estar, estando, estado
Pres. Indie.
est-a est-amos est-dis
Pres. Siibj.
est-e est-emos est-eis
Imperat.
est-ad
est- an
est-en
2IO
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Fut. Indie.
estar-e estar-as estar-d estar-emos estar-eis estar-an
Cond, Indie.
estar-Ia estar-ias estar-ia estar-iamos estar-iais estar-ian
Imperf. Indie.
est-aba est-abas est-aba est-abamos est-abais est-aban
Pret. Indie.
estuv-e estuv-iste estuv-o estuv-imos estuv-isteis estuv-ieron
Imperf. Subj., ist Forjn
estuv-iese estuv-ieses estuv-iese estuv-iesemos estuv-ieseis estuv-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2d Form
estuv-iera estuv-ieras estuv-iera estuv-ieramos estuv-ierais estuv-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
estuv-iere estuv-ieres estuv-iere estuv-ieremos estuv-iereis estuv-ieren
a. The present tenses of estar are perfectly regular as of the first con-
jugation, except for the y appended to the first person singular, present
indicative form (cf. the y of soy, ' I am,' from ser ; of doy, * I give,' from
dar; and of voy, *I go,' from ir). Estar is the Latin verb stare, *to
stand,' which has had its sense weakened to ' to be,' and has received an
initial (prosthetic) e, because in Spanish no word properly begins with
s plus a consonant. All Latin words beginning with such a combination
and surviving in Spanish take this e prefix (cf. also French etat from Latin
statM7n, etc.).
239. Tener, to have
Tener, teniendo, tenido
Pres. Indie.
teng-o tien-es tien-e ten-emos ten-eis tien-en
Pres. Subj.
teng-a teng-as teng-a teng-amos teng-dis teng-an
Imperat.
ten ten-ed
THE VERB
211
Fut. Indie.
tendr-e tendr-as tendr-a tendr-emos tendr-eis tendr-an
Cond. Indie.
tendr-Ia tendr-ias tendr-ia tendr-iamos tendr-iais tendr-ian
l7Jiperf. Indie.
ten-ia ten-ias ten-ia ten-iamos ten-iais ten-ian
Pret. Indie.
tuv-e tuv-iste tuv-o tuv-imos tuv-isteis tuv-ieron
Imp erf . StibJ., ist Form
tuv-iese tuv-ieses tuv-iese tuv-iesemos tuv-ieseis tuv-iesen
Fnperf. Subj.^ id Form
tuv-iera tuv-ieras tuv-iera tuv-ieramos tuv-ierais tuv-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
tuv-iere tuv-ieres tuv-iere tuv-ieremos tuv-iereis tuv-ieren
a. The infinitive basis of the future and the conditional of the indica-
tive is contract, but with inserted d. The second and third person singu-
lar and the third person plural, present indicative, have the peculiarity
of a radical-changing verb. The imperative singular has no inflectional
ending.
240. Andar, to go, walk
Andar, andando, andado
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imp erf . Indie.
j and-o
( and-amos
j and-e
{ and-emos
' andar-e
. andar-emos
' andar-Ia
, andar-iamos
and-aba
. and-dbamos
and-as
and-dis
and-es
and-eis
and-a
and-ad
andar-ds
and-eis
andar-ias
andar-iais
and-abas
and-abais
and-a
and-an
and-e
and-en
andar-d
andar-dn
andar-ia
andar-ian
and-aba
and-aban
212
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Pret, Indie,
Imp erf . Subj.^
1st Form
Imperf. Subj.^
id Form
Hyp. Subj.
( anduv-e
( anduv-imos
f anduv-iese
( anduv-iesemos
j anduv-iera
( anduv-ieramos
5 anduv-iere
( anduv-ieremos
anduv-iste
anduv-isteis
anduv-ieses
anduv-ieseis
anduv-ieras
anduv-ierais
anduv-ieres
anduv-iereis
anduv-o
anduv-ieron
anduv-iese
anduv-iesen
anduv-iera
anduv-ieran
anduv-iere
anduv-ieren
a. This verb is perfectly regular as of the first conjugation in all its
forms except the preterite indicative and the three subjunctive tenses
based on it. Note the resemblance of the preterite stems of estar, tener,
and andar, i,e. estuv-, tuv-, and anduv-, to that of haber, i,e, hub- (spelled
with V instead of b in earlier Spanish),
Pres. Indie,
Pres, Subj.
Imperat,
Fut, Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imp. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
Imp. Subj..,
\st Form
Imp. Subj. J
id Forin
Hyp, Subj.
d-oy
d-e
dar-e
dar-ia
d-aba
d-i
iese d-ieses d-iese d-iesemos d-ieseis d-iesen
[• d-iera
d-i ere
241. Dar, to give
Dar, dando, dado
d-as
d-es
d-a
dar-ds
dar-ias
d-abas
d-iste
d-a
d-6
dar-a
dar-ia
d-aba
d-id
d-amos
d-emos
dar-emos
dar-iamos
d-dbamos
d-imos
d-ais
d-eis
d-ad
dar-^is
dar-iais
d-abais
d-isteis
d-an
d-en
dar-dn
dar-ian
d-aban
d-ieron
d-ieras d-iera d-ieramos d-ierais d-ieran
d-ieres d-iere d-ieremos d-iereis d-ieren
a. The stem of this verb is d-. Thereon are based the present tenses
and the imperfect indicative with the regular endings of the first conjuga-
tion. The first person singular, present indicative, has also a y suffix (cf.
ser, estar, and ir with soy, estoy, and voy). The preterite and the sub-
junctive imperfect and hypothetical tenses simply add to d- the regular
endings of the second and third conjugation.
THE VERB 213
242. Querer, to wish, want
Querer, queriendo, querido
Pres, Indie.
quier-o quier-es quier-e quer-emos quer-eis quier-en
Pres, Siibj.
quier-a quier-as quier-a quer-amos quer-ais quier-an
I 7n per at.
I
quier-e quer-ed
Fut. I 71 die,
querr-e querr-as querr-a querr-emos querr-eis querr-an
Co lid. Ifidic.
querr-ia querr-ias querr-ia querr-iamos querr-iais querr-ian
Imperf, Indie.
quer-ia quer-ias quer-ia quer-iamos quer-iais quer-ian
Pret. Indie.
quis-e quis-iste quis-o quis-imos quis-isteis quis-ieron
Imperf. Subj.., \st Form
quis-iese quis-ieses quis-iese quis-iesemos quis-ieseis quis-iesen
I)nperf. Snbj.^ 2d Fon7i
quis-iera quis-ieras quis-iera quis-ieramos quis-ierais quis-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
quis-iere quis-ieres quis-iere quis-ieremos quis-iereis quis-ieren
a. In the present tenses the verb is conjugated exactly like a radical-
changing verb of the first class. The future and conditional indicative are
based on a contract infinitive querr-, whose rr must be carefully pronounced,
especially to distinguish the conditional from the imperfect indicative.
243. Poder, to be able
Poder. pudiendOj podido
Pres. Indie.
pued-o pued*es pued-e pod-emos pod-eis pued-en
Pres. Snbj.
pued-a pued-as pued-a pod-amos pod-dis pued-an
214 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hnperat.
Flit. Iridic.
podr-^ podr-ds podr-d podr-emos podr-^is podr-dn
Cond. Indie.
podr-ia podr-Ias podr-ia podr-iamos podr-iais podr-ian
hnper'f. Indie.
pod-ia pod-ias pod-ia pod-iamos pod-iais pod-ian
Pret. Ill die.
pud-e pud-iste pud-o pud-imos pud-isteis pud-ieron
l77iperf. Subj., \st For 771
pud-iese pud-ieses pud-iese pud-iesemos pud-ieseis pud-iesen
l77iperf. Stibj.^ id For 771
pud-iera pud-ieras pud-iera pud-ieramos pud-ierais pud-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
pud-iere pud-ieres pud-iere pud-ieremos pud-iereis pud-ieren
a. The present indicative and subjunctive follow the model of a radical-
changing verb of the first class, but the present participle has the same stem
as the preterite. The future and conditional indicatives are based on a
contract infinitive. The verb has no imperative.
244. Caber, to be contained, find room
Caber, cabiendo, cabido
Pres. Indie.
quep-o cab-es cab-e cab-emos cab-eis cab-en
Pres. Subj.
quep-a quep-as quep-a quep-amos quep-dis quep-an
l77iperat.
cab-e cab-ed
Fut. Indie.
cabr-^ cabr-ds cabr-d cabr-emos cabr-dis cabr-dn
THE VERB 215
Cond. Indie.
cabr-la cabr-ias - cabr-ia cabr-iamos cabr-Iais cabr-ian
Imp erf. Indie,
cab-ia cab-ias cab-ia cab-iamos cab-iais cab-ian
Pret. Indie,
cup-e cup-iste cup-o cup-imos cup-isteis cup-ieron
Imp erf , Subj,^ \st For?n
cup-iese cup-ieses cup-iese cup-iesemos cup-ieseis cup-iesen
hnperf, Subj, , 2.d Form
cup-iera cup-ieras cup-iera cup-ieramos cup-ierais cup-ieran
Hyp. Sicbj.
cup-iere cup-ieres cup-iere cup-ieremos cup-iereis cup-ieren
a. Note the two stems, one regular and the other irregular, in the
present tenses. As is frequently the case, the present subjunctive uses
throughout the irregular stem as found in the first person singular, present
indicative. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive.
The preterite cupe represents the Latin capui become cope and then cupe.
245. Saber, to know, be aware
Sabei
', sabiendo, sabido
Pres. Indie.
S^
sab-es
sab-e
sab-emos
Pres. Subj.
sab-eis
sab-en
sep-a
sep-as
sep-a
sep-amos
sep-dis
sep-an
sab-e
Iinperat.
sab-ed
Fut. Indie.
sabr-e sabr-ds sabr-d sabr-emos sabr-eis sabr-dn
Cond. Indie.
sabr-ia sabr-ias sabr-ia sabr-iamos sabr-lais sabr-ian
Iniperf. Indie.
sab-ia sab-ias sab-ia sab-iamos sab-iais sab-ian
2l6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Pret. Indie,
sup-e sup-iste sup-o sup-imos sup-isteis sup-ieron
l7nperf. Subj.. ist Forjn
sup-iese sup-ieses sup-iese sup-iesemos sup-ieseis sup-iesen
I?nperf. Subj.^ 2d Form
sup-iera sup-ieras sup-iera sup-ieramos sup-ierais sup-ieran
Hyp. S7ibj.
sup-iere sup-ieres sup-iere sup-ieremos sup-iereis sup-ieren
a. The conjugation of saber is quite like that of caber. In the first
person singular, present indicative, however, saber has a contract form se
instead of a form sepo, vi^hich might have been expected : but the irregular
stem sep- has remained in the present subjunctive.
246. Hacer, to do, make
Hacer, haciendo, hecho
Pres. Indie.
hag-o hac-es hac-e hac-emos hac-eis hac-en
Pres. Subj.
hag-a hag-as hag-a hag-amos hag-dis hag-an
Bnperat.
haz hac-ed
Fut. Indie.
har-e har-ds har-a har-emos har-eis har-an
Cond. Indie.
har-ia har-ias har-ia har-iamos har-iais bar-fan
Imperf. Indie.
hac-ia hac-ias hac-ia hac-iamos hac-iais hac-ian
Pret. Indie.
hic-e hic-iste hiz-o hic-imos hic-isteis hic-ieron
THE VERB
217
Iinperf. SubJ., ist For?n
hic-iese hic-ieses hic-iese hic-iesemos hic-ieseis hic-iesen
Imp erf, Subj., id For in
hic-iera hic-ieras hic-iera hic-ieramos hic-ierais hicieran
Hyp, Subj,
hic-iere hic-ieres hic-iere hic-ieremos hic-iereis hic-ieren
a. The past participle is irregular (from Latin factU77i). The impera-
tive singular has no flectional ending, but consists only of the regular pres-
ent stem as found in hac-es, etc., with, of course, z, and not C, in the final
position. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive
har. The preterite hice represents the Latin y<?<ri". Like hacer are conju-
gated its derivatives. Some of these, like satisfacer, *to satisfy,' have
instead of h the original \jdX\r\ f oi facer e. Besides an imperative singular
satisfaz there is found also a regular form satisface.
247. Ir, to go
Ir, yendo, ido
Fres. Indie.
voy
vas
va
vamos
Fres, Subj.
vais
van
vaya
vayas
vaya
vayamos
vaydis
vayan
ve
Imperat.
vamos
Fut, Indie.
id
ir-e
ir-as
ir-a
ir-emos
Co7id. Indie.
ir-eis
ir-dn
ir-ia
ir-ias
ir-ia
ir-iamos
Fnperf. Fidie.
ir-iais
ir-ian
iba
ibas
iba
ibamos
Fret. Indie.
ibais
iban
fu-i
fu-iste
fu-^
fu-imos
fu-isteis
fu-eron
2l8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
l7nperf. Subj.^ ist Form
fu-ese fu-eses fu-ese fu-esemos fu-eseis fu-esen
hnperf, Subj., id For 771
fu-era fu-eras fu-era fu-eramos fu-erais fu-eran
Hyp. Subj,
fu-ere fu-eres fu-ere fu-eremos fu-ereis fu-eren
a. There are three different Latin verbs discernible in the make-up of
this verb. The infinitive, present participle, past participle, imperative plu-
ral, future and conditional indicative, and imperfect indicative are asso-
ciated with ire, 'to go.' The present indicative and subjunctive and the
imperative singular forms come from vadere, ' to go.' The preterite and the
subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical represent the Latin fui, fuissem,
etc. ; that is, they are simply borrowed from the corresponding tenses
of the Spanish ser, * to be.' Cf. in colloquial English * I ivas to Boston
yesterday' =: ' I went (and returned).'
b. Ir is apparently the only Spanish verb having an imperative first
plural form, viz. vamos. But authorities regard this as another form of
the first plural, present subjunctive {i.e. while vayamos may represent a
Latin vadeamuSy vamos may represent a Latin vadamus which passed
through the stage vaamos). In Cervantes and other classic writers there is
found also a second form of the second plural, present subjunctive, viz. vais
{i.e. while Latin vadeatis gave vayais, vadatis gave vais through vaais).
In optative constructions vamos, 'let us go,' etc., alone can be used:
vayamos is restricted in use to subordinate clauses. Vamos and vaya
are frequently used as interjections (cf. French allofts), meaning * come
now ! ' etc.
248. Venir, to come
Venir, viniendo, venido
Pres. Indie.
veng-o vien-es vien-e ven-imos ven-is vien-en
Pres. Subj.
veng-a veng-as veng-a veng-amos veng-dis veng-an
THE VERB 219
I?nperat.
ven-id
Fut. Indie.
vendr-e vendr-as vendr-a vendr-emos vendr-eis vendr-an
Co7id. Indie.
vendr-ia vendr-ias vendr-ia vendr-iamos vendr-iais vendr-ian
l7nperf. Indie.
ven-ia ven-ias venia ven-iamos ven-iais ven-ian
Pret. Iiidie.
vin-e vin-iste vin-o vin-imos vin-isteis vin-ieron
Imperf. Snbj.^ \st For?n
vin-iese vin-ieses vin-iese vin-iesemos vin-ieseis vin-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2d Forin
vin-iera vin-ieras vin-iera vin-ieramos vin-ierais vin-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
vin-iere vin-ieres vin-iere vin-ieremos vin-iereis vin-ieren
a. Certain forms have characteristics of a radical-changing verb (cf.
present participle, second and third singular and third plural of present
indicative, etc.). The imperative singular is without a flectional ending.
The future and conditional of the indicative are based on a contract infini-
tive with inserted d. The preterite vine represents Latin ve7ii.
249. Poner, to put
Poner, poniendOj puesto
Pres. Indie.
pong-o pon-es pon-e pon-emos pon-eis pon-en
Pres. Subj.
pong-a pong-as pong-a pong-amos pong-ais pong-an
Imperat.
pon pon-ed
220 SPANISH GRAMMAR
FtU. Indie.
pondr-e pondr-as pondr-a pondr-emos pondr-eis pondr-dn
Cond. Indie.
pondr-ia pondr-ias pondr-ia pondr-iamos pondr-iais pondr-ian
hnperf. Indie.
pon-ia pon-ias pon-ia pon-iamos pon-iais pon-ian
Pret. Indie.
pus-e pus-iste pus-o pus-imos pus-isteis pus-ieron
hnperf Subj. , i st Form
pus-iese pus-ieses pus-iese pus-iesemos pus-ieseis pus-iesen
l7nperf. SubJ.j 2d For in
pus-iera pus-ieras pus-iera pus-ieramos pus-ierais pus-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
pus-iere pus-ieres pus-iere pus-ieremos pus-iereis pus-ieren
a. The present stem shows both a regular and an irregular (pong-)
form. The imperative singular is without flectional ending. The future
and conditional indicative are based on a contract infinitive with inserted
d. The preterite puse came through an intervening pose fram Latin
posui. The past participle puesto is irregular; cf. Latin positum.
250.
Asir, to grasp
Asir, asiendOj asido
Pres. Indie.
asg-0
as-es
as-e
as-imos
Pres. Subj.
asg-a
asg-as
asg-a
asg-amos
Imperat.
as-is as-en
asg-ais asg-an
as-e as-id
Fut. Indie.
asir-e asir-ds asir-a asir-emos asir-eis asir-dn
Cond. Indie.
asir-ia asir-ias asir-ia asir-iamos asir-iais asir-ian
THE VERB 221
Imperf. I 71 die.
as-ia as-ias as-Ia as-iamos as-iais as-ian
Pret, l7idic.
as-i as-iste as-io as-imos as-isteis as-ieron
I7npe7'f. Subj.. \st For77i
as-iese as-ieses as-iese as-iesemos as-ieseis as-iesen
l77iperf. Sicbj., 2d For 771
as-iera as-ieras as-iera as-ieramos as-ierais as-ieran
Hyp. S2cbj.
as-iere as-ieres as-iere as-ieremos as-iereis as-ieren
a. This verb is irregular in only seven forms, viz. the first singular,
present indicative, and all the present subjunctive, which show a stem asg-.
All other forms are as of the third regular conjugation.
251. Valer, to be worth
Valer, valiendo, valido
Pres. I 71 die.
valg-o val-es val-e val-emos val-eis val-en
P7'es. Siibj.
valg-a valg-as valg-a valg-amos valg-dis valg-an
I77ipe7'at.
val^'rvale val-ed
Fut. I 71 die.
^'aldr-e valdr-as valdr-a valdr-emos valdr-eis valdr-an
Co7id. I 71 die.
valdr-ia valdr-Ias valdr-ia valdr-iamos valdr-iais valdr-Ian
l77iperf. I 71 die.
Vctl-ia val-ias val-Ia val-iamos val-iais val-ian
P7'et. hi die.
val-i val-iste val-i6 val-imos val-isteis val-ieron
222
SPANISH GRAMMAR
val-iese val-ieses
val-iera val-ieras
Imperf. Subj., \st Form
val-iese val-iesemos
Imperf. Subj., 2d Forjn
val-iera val-ieramos
Hyp. Subj.
val-ieseis val-iesen
val-ierais val-ieran
val-iere val-ieres val-iere val-ieremos val-iereis val-ieren
a. The present tenses have both a regular and an irregular (valg-)
stem. The imperative singular may have a flectional vowel or not; it
usually does nowadays. The future and conditional indicative are based
on a contract stem with inserted d. All other forms are perfectly regular.
252. Salir, to go out, come out
Salir, saliendo, salido
Pres. Indie, salg-o sal-es sal-e sal-imos sal-is sal-en
Pres. Subj. salg-a salg-as salg-a salg-amos salg-ais salg-an
Imperat. sal sal-id
a. All other forms follow the model of valer, from which, moreover,
salir differs only in the four flectional forms characteristic of the third
conjugation and in having only the imperative singular without a flec-
tional vowel.
253. Caer, to fall
Caer, cayendo, caido
Pres. Iridic.
( caig-o ca-es
ca-e
( ca-emos ca-eis
ca-en
Pres. Subj.
5 caig-a caig-as
1 caig-amos caig-dis
( ca-e
( ca-ecl
caig-a
caig-an
Imperat,
Put. Indie
1 caer-e caer-ds
caer-1
( caer-emos caer-eis
caer-dn
Cond, Indie.
5 caer-ia caer-ias
caer-ia
( caer-iamos caer-iais
caer-ian
THE
VERB
2
Imperf, Indie
5 ca-ia
( ca-iamos
ca-ias
ca-iais
ca-ia
ca-ian
Pret, Indie,
5 ca-i
( ca-imos
ca-iste
ca-isteis
ca-yo
ca-yeron
Imperf, Subf.
1st Form
, ( ca-yese
\ ca-yesemos
ca-yeses
ca-yeseis
ca-yese
ca-yesen
Imperf. Subj.
id Form
, C ca-yera
\ ca-ydramos
ca-yeras
ca-yerais
ca-yera
ca-yeran
Hyp, Subj.
( ca-yere
( ca-yeremos
ca-yeres
ca-yereis
ca-yere
ca-yeren
223
a. The present tenses have a regular and an irregular (caig-) stem.
The rest of the verb is perfectly regular. Note, however, that a written
accent is required on the i of the past participle and of the second singular
and the first and second plural of the preterite, and that unaccented i
between vowels has been changed to y in the preterite third singular and
third plural, in the subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical, and in the
present participle.
254. Oir, to hear
Oir, oyendo, oido
Pres. Indie.
oig-o
oy-es
oy-e
o-imos
o-is
oy-en
Pres. Subj.
oig-a
oig-as
oig-a
oig-amos
oig-dis
oig-an
Iinperat.
oy-e
o-id
Fut. Indie.
oir-e
oir-as
oir-d
oir-emos
oir-eis
oir-dn
Cond. Indie.
oir-ia
oir-ias
oir-ia
oir-iamos
oir-iais
oir-ian
Iinperf. Indie.
o-ia
o-ias
o-ia
o-iamos
o-iais
o-ian
Pret. Indie.
o-i
o-iste
o-yd
o-imos
o-isteis
o-yeron
Imperf. Subj., }
^ fp C O'Y^se o-yeses o-yese o-yesemos o-yeseis o-yesen
^^^^dF ^^'^*' f o-yera o-yeras o-yera o-yeramos o-yerais o-yeran
Hyp. Siibj. o-yere o-yeres o-yere o-yeremos o-yereis o-yeren
a. Three stems are visible in the present, viz. oig- (first singular, present
indicative, and all of present subjunctive), oy- (second and third singular
and third plural of present indicative and imperative singular), and the
224
SPANISH GRAMMAR
regular stem 0- (first and second plural, present indicative, and imperative
plural). The rest of the verb is regular, but unaccented i between vowels
is changed to y (third singular and plural of preterite, and all of sub-
junctive imperfects and hypothetical, as well as present participle). Note
that stressed i after o requires a written accent.
255. Traer, to bring
Traer, trayendo, traido
Pres, Indie.
Pres. Siibj.
Iniperat,
Fut. Indie,
Cond. Indie.
Imp 67' f. Indie.
P7'et. Indie.
( traig-o
( tra-emos
\ traig-a
( traior-amos
j traer-e
( traer-emos
f traer-ia
{ traer-iamos
( tra-ia
{ tra-iamos
C traj-e
\ traj-imos
Imperf. SiibJ., \ traj-ese
\st For7n \ traj-esemos
hnperf. Subj.^ < traj-era
2d Por/n i traj-eramos
Hyp. Subj.
( traj-ere
( traj-eremos
tra-es
tra-eis
traig-as
traig-ais
tra-e
tra-ed
traer-as
traer-eis
traer-ias
traer-iais
tra-Ias
tra-iais
traj-iste
traj-isteis
traj-eses
traj-eseis
traj-eras
traj-erais
traj-eres
traj-ereis
tra-e
tra-en
traig-a
traig-an
traer-a
traer-an
traer-ia
traer-ian
tra-ia
tra-ian
traj-o
traj-eron
traj-ese
traj-esen
traj-era
traj-eran
traj-ere
traj-eren
a. The present tenses show a regular and an irregular (traig-) stem;
the present participle exhibits the change of unaccented i between vowels
to y (tra-iendo — tra-yendo). Note the written accent of the past par-
THE VERB
225
ticiple. The preterite traje represents the Latin traxi (a Latin x between
vowels has usually become j in Spanish). The i of the diphthong ie has
disappeared after the j; cf. § 217.
256. -ducir, to lead
This verb (from Latin ducere) is found in modern Spanish
only in certain derivatives (conducir, deducir, inducir, reducir,
etc.). Its conjugation may be illustrated by one of these.
Conducir, to conduct
conduc-es
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj\
Imperat,
Fut, Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imp erf. Indie
Pret. Indie.
j conduzc-o
( conduc-imo
( conduzc-a
( conduzc-amos
conduc-e
conduc-is conduc-en
conduzc-as conduzc-a
conduzc-ais conduzc-an
conduc-e
conduc-id ,
conducir-as conducir-a
conducir-^is conducir-an
conducir-Ias conducir-ia
conducir-iais conducir-ian
conduc-ias conduc-ia
conduc-iais conduc-ian
conduj-iste conduj-o
conduj-isteis conduj-eron
conduj-eses conduj-ese
conduj-eseis conduj-esen
conduj-eras conduj-era
conduj-erais conduj-eran
conduj-eres conduj-ere
conduj-ereis conduj-eren
a. The present tenses show the pecuharities of the inceptive verbs,
to which, because there is a vowel before the -cir, this verb has been
attracted. The preterite -duje represents the Latin duxi^ and as usual the
j absorbs the i of a following diphthong -ie-.
( conducir-e
( conducir-emos
( conducir-ia
( conducir-iamos
( conduc-ia
( conduc-iamos
j conduj-e
\ conduj-imos
Imp erf . Siibj.., j conduj-ese
\st Form { conduj-esemos
Imperf. Subj., ( conduj-era
2d Form ( conduj-eramos
( conduj-ere
< conduj-eremos
Hyp. Subj.
226
SPANISH GRAMMAR
257. Decir, to say
Decir, diciendo, dicho
Pres, Indie,
dig-o
dic-es
dic-e
dec-imos
dec-is
dic-en
Fres, Subj.
dig-a
dig-as
dig-a
dig-amos
dig-dis
dig-an
Fnperat,
di
decid
Fut. Indie.
dir-d
dir-as
dir-d
dir-emos
dir-eis
dir-an
Cond. Indie.
dir-ia
dir-Ias
dir-ia
dir-iamos
dir-iais
dir-ian
Imp. Indie.
dec-ia
dec-ias
dec-la
dec-iamos
dec-iais
dec-ian
Pret. Indie.
dij-e
dij-iste
dij-o
dij-imos
dij-isteis
dij-eron
Imp. Subj., )
1st Form )
dij-ese
dij-eses
dij-ese
dij-esemos
dij-eseis
dij-esen
Imp. Subj.y )
2d Form f
dij-era
dij-eras
dij-era
dij-eramos
dij-erais
dij-eran
Hyp. Subj.
dij-ere
dij-eres
dij-ere
dij-eremos
dij-ereis
dij-eren
a. The present tenses and the present participle show vocalic condi-
tions like those of the third class of radical-changing verbs. The past
participle is irregular (from Latin dictutti) ; the imperative singular lacks
a flectional ending (cf. Latin die). The future and conditional indicative
are based on a contract infinitive, dir. Dije represents the Latin dixi^ and
after the j the i of the diphthong ie has disappeared (in preterite third
plural and subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical). There is an indefinite
form diz, * it is said,' * people say,' etc., which may represent a contraction
of dice H- se.
b. Derivatives of decir are bendecir, * to bless,' and maldecir, * to
curse.' These imitate decir in their conjugation, except that they base
their future and conditional indicative upon the uncontracted infinitive
decir, whence the forms bendecir^, etc., maldecire, etc., and have a flec-
tional vowel in their imperative singular, bendice and maldice. Further-
more, they have regular past participles, bendecido and maldecido. The
participles bendicho and maldicho are now antiquated, and the forms
bendito and maldito occur only as adjectives. The derivatives contrade-
cir, * to contradict,' desdecir, * to gainsay,' and predecir, * to predict,' differ
from decir only in having the full form of the imperative singular, contra-
dice, desdice, predice.
THE VERB
227
258. Ver, to see
Ver, viendo, visto
Pres. Indie.
ve-o
v-es
v-e
Pres, Subj,
ve-a
ve-as
ve-a
l7nperat.
v-e
Fut. Iridic,
ver-e
ver-as
ver-a
Cond. Indie.
ver-ia
ver-ias
ver-ia
Iinperf. Indie
:. ve-ia
ve-ias
ve-ia
Pret, Indie.
v-i
v-iste
v-io
Imp erf. Siibj..
\st Fo7'?n
' >- v-iese
v-ieses
v-iese
I?nperf. Subj.,
id For 711
' V v-ieia
v-ieras
v-i era
Hyp. Subj.
v-iere
v-ieres
v-iere
v-emos v-eis v-en
ve-amos ve-ais ve-an
v-ed
ver-e m OS ver-eis ver-dn
ver-iamos ver-iais ver-ian
ve-iamos ve-iais ve-ian
v-imos v-isteis v-ieron
v-iesemos v-ieseis v-iesen
v-ieramos v-ierais v-ieran
v-ieremos v-iereis v-ieren
a. The true present stem of this verb is ve-, which is seen in the first
singular, present indicative (ve-o), and throughout in the present sub-
junctive (ve-a, etc.) and the imperfect indicative (ve-ia, etc.). Before a
flectional e the stem loses its e, as in the remaining forms of the present
indicative, the infinitive, and the imperative. It also loses the e in the
present participle. The past participle is irregular. The preterite vi
represents the Latin vidl?^ In poetry an imperfect indicative via, vias
(with reduced stem v-) is sometimes found even now.
b. Compounds of ver which show the reduced present stem (v-), such
as antever, * to foresee,' prever, * to foresee,' rever, ' to see again,' * to
review,' are conjugated exactly like it. On the other hand, the derivative
proveer, * to provide,' which shows the full present stem (ve-), is conju-
gated throughout as a perfectly regular verb. It has, however, both a
regular past participle, proveido, and an irregular one, provisto ; and in
the present participle, the preterite, third singular and third plural, and the
subjunctive imperfect and hypothetical, it changes the i of the diphthongs
-ie-, -16, to y.
1 Vide, for vi, still survives in some dialects, for instance, in New Mexico.
228 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Proveer, proveyendo, proveido or provisto
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Fut, Indie.
prove-o
prove-a
proveer-e, etc.
prove-es, etc.
prove-as, etc.
prove-e, etc.
Cond. Indie.
proveer-ia, etc.
Imperf. Indie, prove-ia, etc.
Pret. Indie.
hnperf. Subj.,
1st Form
f prove-i
I prove-imos
' I prove-yese, etc.
prove-iste
prove-isteis
prove-y6
prove-yeron
Imp erf. Subj.,
id Form
' > prove-yera, etc.
Hyp. Subj.
prove-yere, etc.
Note the accent required in the regular past participle and the second
singular, and the first and second plural of the preterite.
Anomalous Past Participles
259. Four regular verbs of the third conjugation have only
irregular past participles.
abrir, to open, abierto. ;t«r.ri«,ir S to pi*int > ;^^^^o«
' ^ imprimir -, ^ Y , impreso
cubrir, to cover, cubierto. ( to impress >
escribir, to write, escrito.
This peculiarity is shared by their compounds.
a. The participle escribido is found in what is perhaps punning use in
such an expression as un hombre (bien) leido y escribido, * a man who
can read and write ' (cf. the influence of the participle leido ; its attrac-
tive force may explain escribido).
260. Two regular verbs of the second conjugation have both
a regular and an irregular past participle.
prender, to catch, prendido and preso.
romper, to break, rompido and roto.
THE VERB
229
Preso and roto are preferred for the compound tenses ; rompido,
however, is far more common than roto in the intransitive use.
261. Two regular verbs of the third conjugation hav^e both a
regular and an irregular past participle.
oprimir, to oppress, oprimido and opreso.
suprimir, to suppress, suprimido and supreso.
The regular participle alone seems now to be used in the com-
pound tenses ; the other forms are practically adjectives.
Defective Verbs
262. Placer, ^ to please.' Used now chiefly as an impersonal
verb, i.e, only in the third person singular forms of its tenses.
Traces of other forms are occasionally found in the present
tenses ; e,g. placen. Its impersonal conjugation is this :
Pres. Ind. place Pres. Siibj. plega, plague or plazca
Iiwbf. Ind. -^ , . . ^ - plu^iiese 0?' placiese
^^ ( (rare) ist Form > *
. , ( plu^o or Impf. Siibj.^ ) 1 • 1 •
Pret. hid. -^ , • , j r^ I pluguiera or placiera
{ placio 2.d Porm \
Flit. Ind. placera Hyp. Siibj. pluguiere or placiera
Cond. ind. placeria Pres. Pa?'! placiendo
a. The commonest form is pluguiera, which is used in optative ex-
pressions : i pluguiera a Dios ! ' would to God 1 '
b. The derivative complacer is of the class of verbs with inceptive
endings; another derivative, aplacer, is found in the third person singular
and plural forms, such as aplace, aplacen, aplacia, and aplacian.
263. Yacer, ^to He.' This verb has many pecuharities of
the inceptive class. It is nearly obsolete, and is chiefly used
in the third person forms.
230
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Yacer, yaciendo, yacido
r yazco "^
Pres. Indie, J yazgo y yaces yace yacemos yaceis yacen
Lyago J
r yazca yazcas, etc.
Pres. Subj. \ yazga yazgas, etc,
L yaga yagas, etc,
Imperat. yace or yaz
The other forms are regular.
yaci, etc. ; yaciese, etc. ; yaciera, etc. ; yaciere, etc. ; yacere, etc. ;
yaceria, etc.
264. Concernir, ^ to concern/ occurs only in the third person
singular and plural forms.
Pres. Indie. concierne conciernen
Pres. Subj. concierna conciernan
Fut. Indie. concernird concerniran
Cond. Indie. concerniria concernirian
Imperf. Indie. concernia concernian
Pret. Indie. concernid concernieron
Imperf . Subj. ^ \st Form concerniese concerniesen
Imperf. Subj. , id For?n concerniera concernieran
Hyp. Subj. concerniera concernieren
265. Soler, ' to be accustomed/ is used now in hardly any
forms except those of the present and imperfect indicative.
Pres. Indie. suelo sueles suele solemos soleis suelen
Imperf. Indie, solia solias solia soliamos soliais solian
The present participle soliendo, the past participle solido, and
the preterite soli, etc., are exceedingly rare. All other forms
do not occur. .
266. Ataner, ' to appertain/ is only found in the third person
forms, especially of the present indicative.
atafie atanen
THE VERB 231
267. Raer, ^to erase/ is but little used. Its conjugation
is like that of caer, with the additional forms raya, rayas, etc.,
in the present subjunctive.
268. Roer, ' to gnaw.' This may have any one of three
present stems before its endings -0 and -a ; otherwise it is a
regular verb of the second conjugation.
fro-o ^
Pres. Indic, -{ roig-o ^ roes roe roemos roeis roen
l^ roy-o J
C ro-a ro-as, etc.
Pres. Subj. < roig-a roig-as, etc.
L roy-a roy-as, etc.
But the first person singular, present indicative, and all the
present subjunctive are rather shunned in actual use.
a. The derivative corroer, * to corrode,' avoids the stems ending in -ig
and -y.
269. It is generally stated that the preterite forms repuse, ' I
repHed,' repusiste, 'thou didst reply,' etc., are from the verb
reponer, which does not in its other tenses and forms connect
itself with the sense of " reply." But repuse, etc., may rather
connect themselves with the Vulgar Latin irregular preterite of
respondere, viz. * resposi, etc.
270. Some ten verbs of the third regular conjugation occur
only in the forms whose flectional ending begins with i.
These are
abolir, to abohsh. despavorir, to become frightened,
aguerrir, to make warlike. embair, to impose upon,
arrecirse, to become numb. empedernir, to harden.
aterirse, to become numb. garantir, to guarantee,
desmarrirse, to become sad. manir, to become tender.
232
SPANISH GRAMMAR
For these there can occur in the present indicative and
imperative only the forms in -imos, -is, and -id {e.g, abolimos,
abolis, abolid). They have no subjunctive present forms.
They may have all the rest of the conjugation, since the
endings begin with i.
271. List of Verbs.
The following list embraces radical-changing, -uir, irregular, and
anomalous verbs. The verbs with inceptive endings (-cer or -cir preceded
by a vowel) are not included: they simply follow the models given in
§ 220. In the case of derivatives reference is made to the conjugation
of the simple verbs, which they follow. The numbers refer to paragraphs.
abnegar, renounce: Rad.-ch, I, 223
(i) ; of. 214 (2) and 225.
abolir, abolish : 270.
abrir, open: /./. irr., 259.
absolver, absolve : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ;
p. p. irr., 224.
abstenerse, abstain: irr., 239.
abstraer, abstract: irr., 255.
abunolar, make fritter-shaped : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. abunuelar, reg.
acertar, hit the mark: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aclocarse, stretch out, brood : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
acordar, resolve, remind, tune ; — se,
to remember: Rad.-ch. I., 223 (3).
acostar, lay down : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
acrecentar, increase: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
adestrar, guide : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
also adiestrar, reg.
adherir, adhere: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
adormir, make drowsy: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (2).
adquirir, acquire : Rad.-ch. I, 228.
aducir, adduce: irr., 256.
advertir, observe, advise: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
afoUar, blow with bellows : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
aforar, give a charter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3). Aforar, gauge, reg.
agorar, divine, prognosticate: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
aguerrir, inure to warfare : 270.
alebrarse, squat, cower: Rad,-ch. I,
223 (i).
alentar, breathe, encourage : Rad,-<h,
I, 223 (i).
aliquebrar, break the wings: Rad.',
ch. I, 223 (i).
almorzar, breakfast: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225.
alongar, lengthen : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
amoblar, furnish : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
Also amueblar, reg.
amolar, whet: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
amover, remove, dismiss : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
andar, go, walk : irr., 240.
antedecir, foretell: irr.^ 257.
anteponer, put before, prefer : irr., 249.
antever, foresee : irr., 258.
apacentar, graze : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i).
apercoUar, collar, snatch : Rad.-ch. I,
223(3)-
THE VERB
233
apernar, seize by the legs : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aplacer, please : irr„ 2.6'2.
apostar, bet, post : Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ;
post troops, reg,
apretar, squeeze, press : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aprobar, approve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
argiiir, argue : 235.
arrecirse, become benumbed : 270.
arrendar, rent, hire: Rad.-ch.\,2.2.'^{'L).
arrepentirse, repent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
ascender, ascend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
asentar, seat, set down: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
asentir, assent, acquiesce : Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
aserrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
asir, seize, grasp : irr., 250.
asolar, level to ground, raze : Rad.-ch,
I. 223 (3).
asoldar, hire: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
asonar, assonate, be in assonance:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
asosegar, v. sosegar.
ataner, belong, appertain : 266.
atender, attend, mind: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
atenerse, abide, hold: irr., 239.
atentar, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
Atentar, to attempt a crime, reg.
aterirse, become rigid with cold :
270.
aterrar, fell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; ter-
rify, reg.
atestar, cram, stuff: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i). Atestar, attest, r^^.
atraer, attract : ^Vr., 255.
atravesar, cross: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i)-
atribuir, attribute : 235.
atronar, make a thundering din, stun :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
avenir, reconcile: irr., 248.
aventar, fan, winnow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
avergonzar, shame: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225.
azolar, shape with the adze : Rad.-ch. .
I. 223 (3).
balbucir, stammer : 220 a.
bendecir, bless : irr., 257.
bienquerer, esteem, wish well: ?>r., 242.
brunir, burnish : 217.
buUir, boil : 217.
caber, be contained, find room : irr.,
244.
caer, fall: irr., 253.
calentar, warm : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
cegar, blind: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
cenir, gird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 217
and 231.
cerner, sift: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
cerrar, close: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
cimentar, found, establish: Rad.-ch.
^ 1,223 (i).
circuir, encircle : 235.
clocar, cluck : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf.
214 (i) and 225.
COCer, boil, bake: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ;
cf. 220, Exceptions {a) .
coextenderse, be coextensive: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (2).
colar, strain, filter : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) .
COlegir, collect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf.
215 (2) and 231.
COlgar, hang up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
comedirse, behave: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
comenzar, commence : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i); cf. 214 (4).
competir, compete: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
complacer, please, content: irr., 262.
componer, compose : zVr., 249.
comprobar, verify, confirm : Rad.-ch.
I. 223 (3).
concebir, conceive: Rad.-ch. 111,230.
concernir, concern: Rad.-ch. I, 223;
but cf. 264.
234
SPANISH GRAMMAR
concertar, concert, regulate : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
concluir, conclude : 235.
concordar, accord, agree : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
condescender, condescend : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (2).
condolerse, condole: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4) .
conducir, conduct: irr., cf. 256 and
220 b.
conferir, confer : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i) .
confesar, confess : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i) .
confluir, join : 235.
conmover, move, affect: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
COnseguir, obtain, attain : Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
consentir, consent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
consolar, console ; Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3).
COnsonar, be in consonance, rhyme:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
constituir, constitute : 235.
constrenir , compel, constrain : Rad.-ch.
Ill, 230; cf. 231.
construir, construct : 235.
COntar, count, tell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) .
contender, contend : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
contener, contain : irr.^ 239.
contorcerse, be distorted, writhe:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i).
contradecir, contradict : irr., 257.
contraer, contract: irr., 255.
contrahacer, counterfeit : irr., 246.
contraponer, oppose, compare: irr.,
249.
contravenir, contravene : irr., 248.
contribuir, contribute : 235.
controvertir, controvert : Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
convenir, agree, fit: irr., 248.
convertir, convert : Rad.-ch. ll,^^^ (i).
corregir, correct: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 215 (2) and 231.
corroer, corrode: irr.^ 268,
costar, cost: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
creer, believe : cf. 216.
cubrir, cover : /./. irr., 259.
dar, give: irr., 241.
decaer, decay: irr., 253.
decentar, begin to use: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (I).
decir, say: irr., 257.
deducir, deduce: irr., cf. 256 and
220 {b).
defender, defend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
deferir, defer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
degollar, behead, cut the throat:
Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
demoler, demolish : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4).
demostrar, demonstrate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
denegar, deny: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
denostar, insult: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
dentar, tooth, indent; teeth: Rad.-ch,
I, 223 (i).
deponer, depose, depone : irr., 249.
derrengar, sprain the hip, cripple :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and
225.
derretir, melt: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
derrocar, pull down, demolish : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
derruir, cast down, destroy: 235.
desacertar, blunder, err: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desacordar, make discordant; — se,
forget: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
desaferrar, loosen, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desalentar, put out of breath, discour-
age: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desamoblar, unfumish, remove furni-
ture : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). Also
desamueblar, reg.
desandar, retrace steps, undo: irr.,
240.
desapretar, slacken, loosen : Rad.-ch,
I, 223 (i).
THE VERB
235
desaprobar, disapprove: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desarrendarse, shake off the bridle :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desasentar, disagree, displease ; — se,
get up: Rad.-ck. I, 223 (i).
desasir, let go, release hold : irr., 250.
desasosegar, disturb, disquiet : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i) ; of. 214 (2) and 225.
desatender, disregard, neglect : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (2).
desatentar, perturb, perplex : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
desavenir, discompose, disconcert :
irr., 248.
descender, descend : Rad.-ch . 1 , 223 (2) .
descenir, ungird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 217 and 231.
descolgar, unhang, take down : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
descollar, stand forth, excel : Rad.-ch.
I. 223 (3).
descomedirse, be disrespectful, be-
have ill: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
descomponer, disconcert, decompose :
irr., 249.
desconcertar, disconcert, confound :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desconsentir, dissent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
desconsolar, make disconsolate : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
descontar, discount: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3).
descouvenir, disagree, be unlike : irr.,
248.
descordar, remove cords : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
descornar, remove horns : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
descubrir, uncover, discover ; /./. irr.,
259.
desdar, untwist: irr. 241.
desdecir, gainsay : irr., 257.
desdentar, remove teeth: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (I).
desempedrar, unpave: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desencerrar, release from confine-
ment: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desencordar, remove strings, loosen :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
desengrosar, make lean: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desentenderse, disregard, feign not to
notice: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desenterrar, disinter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desenvolver, unfold, unravel: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr., cf. 224.
deservir, neglect duty, do a disser-
vice: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
desflocar, remove flocks (of wool) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
desgobernar. derange the government,
misgovern: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i).
deshacer, undo, destroy: irr., 246.
deshelar, thaw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desherbar, pluck out herbs : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
desherrar, uniron, remove horse-
shoes : 223 (i).
desleir, dilute: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 and
233-
deslendrar, remove nits (from hair) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desmajolar, uproot vines: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) .
desmarrirse, become sad : 270.
desmedirse, go beyond bounds, be
unreasonable: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
desmembrar, dismember: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desmentir, belie: Rad.-ch. II, 229
(I).
desnegar, retract denial: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
desnevar, melt away (of snow) : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
desobstruir, remove obstruction : 235.
desoir, not to heed, feign not to hear:
irr., 254.
236
SPANISH GRAMMAR
desolar, make desolate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) •
desoldar, unsolder: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3).
desollar, flay: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
desosar, remove bones: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (3) ; cf. 226 a.
desovar, spawn: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 226 a.
despavorir, be terrified, stand aghast :
270.
despedir, dismiss ; — se, take leave :
Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
despernar, remove legs, cripple : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
despertar, awaken : Rad.-ch. 1,223(1).
despezar, arrange (stones) at inter-
vals, taper at the end: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 225.
desplacer, displease : 262.
desplegar, unfold, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
despoblar, depopulate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
desproveer, leave unprovided, deprive
of supplies : 216 ; cf. 258 b.
destenir, discolor, fade: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
desterrar, exile: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
destituir, deprive, remove from office :
235.
destorcer, untwist : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ;
cf. 215 (i) and 225.
destrocar, return a bartered object:
Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and
225.
destruir, destroy: 235.
desventar, vent, let out air : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (i).
desvergonzarse, be shameless or im-
pudent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); cf.
214 (4) and 225.
detener, detain : irr.^ 239.
detraer, detract : irr., 255.
devolver, give back: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(4) I P'P' ^^^M 224.
diferir, defer, delay, differ: Rad.-ch,
II, 229 (i).
digerir, digest: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
diluir, dilute : 235.
discernir, discern: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2)
and 228 (i).
disconvenir, v. desconvenir.
discordar, disagree, be discordant:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
disentir, dissent : Rad.-ch, II, 229 (i).
disminuir, diminish, 235.
disolver, dissolve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) :
p.p. irr., 2.2,/^.
disonar, be in dissonance : Rad.-ch, I,
223 (3)-
dispertar, v. despertar.
displacer, displease : irr., 262.
disponer, dispose: irr., 249.
distender, distend : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
distraer, distract : irr., 255.
distribuir, distribute : 235.
divertir, divert: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
dolar, plane, smooth (wood, etc.) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
doler, pain, grieve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) .
dormir, sleep: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2).
educir, educe, bring out : irr., 256 ; cf.
220 b,
elegir, elect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf.
215 (2) and 231.
embair, impose, deceive : 270.
embestir, invest, attack: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230.
emparentar, be related by marriage :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
empedernir, harden, make inveterate :
270.
empedrar, pave: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
empeller, urge, push : 217.
empezar, begin : Rad,-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (4) and 225.
emporcar, sully, befoul: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
encender, light, kindle: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (2).
THE VERB
237
encentax, begin to use for first time :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
encerrar, shut up, confine : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
enclocar, cluck : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 225.
encomendar, commend: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (i).
encontrar, meet, find: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
encorar, cover with leather, renew the
skin: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
encordar, string (musical instru-
ments), lash: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3).
encovar, put into a cave or cellar, lock
up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
encubertar, cover over: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
endentar, mortise in : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
engorar, lay addled eggs: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf. 225.
engreir, elate, puff up: Rad.-ch. Ill,
233-
engrosar, fatten, strengthen : Rad.-ch.
1.223 (3).
enhestar, erect, set upright: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
emnelar, honey, sweeten: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
enmendar, amend, correct: Rad.-ch.
1,223 (i)-
enrodar, break on the wheel : Rad.-ch.
1.223 (3).
ensangrentar, cover with blood:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
entender, hear, understand : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (2).
enterrar, inter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
entortar, make crooked; deprive of
one eye: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
entredecir, interdict : irr., 257.
entremorir, pine away: Rad-ch. II,
229 (2) ; /./. irr., 229 a.
entreolr, hear indistinctly : irr., 254.
entrepernar, put the legs in between
(something else) : Rad.-ch. I,
223(1).
entreponer, interpose : irr., 249.
entretener, delay, entertain : irr.^
239-
entrever, see imperfectly, catch a
glimpse of: irr., 258.
envolver, involve, wTap up, compli-
cate : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr.,
224.
equivaler, equal, be equivalent: irr.,
251.
erguir, erect: Rad.-ch. II or III, 232,
229, and 230 ; cf. 215 (4) and 226.
errar, err, wander : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 226.
escarmentar, give warning example,
learn by experience: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (1).
escocer, smart: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4);
cf. 220 {a) and 225.
escribir, write: p.p. irr., 259.
esforzar, strengthen- — se, attempt:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (4) and
225.
estar, be : irr., 238.
estatuir, establish, 235.
estregar, rub, scour, grind: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
estrenir, bind, restrain: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230 ; cf. 217.
excluir, exclude : 235.
expedir, expedite, despatch : Rad.-ch.
Ill, 230.
exponer, expose : irr. , 249.
extender, extend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
extraer, extract : irr., 255.
ferrar, put on iron points, etc. : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
fluir, flow : 235.
foliar, blow with bellows : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
forzar, force: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3);
cf. 214 (4) and 225.
238
SPANISH GRAMMAR
fregar, rub, cleanse: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
freir, fry: Rad.-ch. Ill, 233.
garantir, guarantee : 270.
gemir, groan, moan : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
gobernar, govern : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
gruir, cry like cranes : 235.
grunir, grunt : 217.
haber, have : irr., 237.
hacendar, transfer property : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
hacer, do, make : irr., 246.
heder, have a stench, stink : Rad.-ch, I,
223 (2).
helar, freeze: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
hencbir, stuff, cram : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
bender, cleave, split : Rad.-ch, 1, 223 (2).
herbar, dress skms : Rad.-ch. 1, 223(1).
herir, wound: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
bervir, boil, bubble: Rad.-ch. II, 229
(I).
herrar, shoe (horses), brand (cattle) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
holgar, rest, cease working: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
bollar, trample on, tread on : Rad.-ch.
I. 223 (3).
buir, flee : 235.
imbuir, imbue : 235.
impedir, impede: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
imponer, impose : 2>r., 249.
imprimir, print: /./. irr., 259.
improbar, disapprove, censure : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
incensar, perfume, incense; Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
incluir, include : 235.
indisponer, indispose, disincline : irr.,
249.
inducir, induce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
inferir, infer: Rad.-ch., 11,229 (i).
infernar, damn, vex: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
influir, influence : 235.
ingerir, graft, insert: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
inquirir, inquire: Rad.-ch. I, 228 (2).
instituir, institute : 235.
instruir, instruct : 235.
interdecir, indict : irr., 257.
interponer, interpose : irr., 249.
intervenir, intervene: irr., 248.
introducir, introduce: irr., 256; cf.
220 b.
invernar, winter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
invertir, invert, spend, invest: Rad.-
ch. II, 229 (i).
investir, invest, gird: Rad.-ch.lll, 230.
ir, go : irr., 247.
jugar, play: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); cf.
227.
leer, read : 216.
Hover, rain: Rad.-ch. I, impers., 2.2.2,
(4).
maldecir, curse: irr., 257.
malberir, wound seriously: Rad.-ch.
II, 229 (i).
malquerer, dislike, abhor : irr., 242.
malsonar, make cacophony : Rad.-ch,
I, 223 (3).
maltraer, maltreat : irr., 2^^.
manifestar, manifest: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
manir, mellow, mature meat : 270.
mantener, maintain : 239.
mecer, rock, lull, mix: 220 a.
medir, measure: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
melar, boil to honey, deposit honey
(of bees) : Rad.-ch. I., 223 (i).
mentar, mention : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
mentir, lie: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
merendar, lunch: Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i).
moblar, furnish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
Also mueblar, re^.
moler, grind: Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4).
morder, bite : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) .
THE VERB
239
morir, die: Rad.-ck. II, 229 (2) ; p.p.
irr., 229 a.
mostrar, show: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
mover, move: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4).
negar, deny: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
nevar, snow: Rad.-ch. I, impers.^
223 (i).
obstruir, obstruct : 235.
obtener, obtain : irr.,2.y^.
oir, hear: irr.^ 254.
oler, smell, have an odor: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (4) ; cf. 226 (2) .
oponer, oppose : irr.^ 249.
oprimir, oppress : 261.
pedir, ask: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
pensar, think, mean, believe : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
perder, to lose, spoil, destroy: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (2).
perniquebrar, break the legs : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
perse guir, pursue, persecute : Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 231.
pervertir, pervert : Rad.-ch. II, 229.
placer, please : irr., 262.
planir, lament, bewail : 217.
plegar, fold: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
poblar, found, people, fill : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
poder, be able, can : irr., 243.
podrir, rot : 234.
poner, put : irr., 249.
poseer, possess : 216.
posponer, place after, postpone : irr.,
249.
predecir, predict: irr., 257.
predisponer, predispose: irr., 249.
preferir, prefer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
premorir, die first or prematurely:
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2) and a.
prender, arrest, catch : 260.
preponer, put before, prefer : irr.^ 249.
presentir, forebode, foresee : Rad.-ch.
II, 229 (i).
presuponer, presuppose : irr., 249.
prevalerse, prevail : irr.,2^1.
prevenir, forestall, prevent: irr., 248.
prever, foresee : irr., 258.
probar, prove, try, taste : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
producir, produce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
proferir, utter, pronounce : Rad.-ch.
II, 229 (i).
promover, promote: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(4).
proponer, propose: irr., 249.
proseguir, pursue, prosecute: Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
prostituir, prostitute : 235.
proveer, provide : 216 ; cf. 258 b.
provenir, proceed : irr., 248.
pudrir, rot : 234.
quebrar, break: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
querer, wish, like : irr., 242.
raer, scrape, grate, erase: irr., 267.
rarefacer, rarify: irr., 246.
reapretar, squeeze again : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
rebendecir, bless again: irr., 257.
recaer, fall back, relapse: irr., 253.
recalentar, treat again : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
recentar, leaven: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
recluir, shut up, seclude: 235.
recocer, boil again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(4) ; cf. 220 a, 215 (i), and 225.
recolar, strain again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3)-
recomendar, recommend: Rad.-ch.
1.223 (i).
recomponer, recompose, mend : irr.,
249.
reconducir, renew lease or contract;
irr., 256; cf. 220 b.
reconstruir, reconstruct : 235.
240
SPANISH GRAMMAR
recontar, recount : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3).
reconvenir, accuse, rebuke : irr., 248.
recordar, remind : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
recostar, lean against, recline : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
redargiiir, reargue : 235.
reducir, reduce: irr., 256; cf. 220 b.
reelegir, reelect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 215 (2) and 231.
referir,relate,refer:i?^a'.-^/^. 11,229(1).
refluir, flow back : 235.
reforzar, strengthen, fortify : Rad.-ch,
1,2.2.0, (3); cf. 214 (4).
refregar, rub over again : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
refreir, fry again : 233.
regar, water: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
regimentar, raise a regiment: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
regir, rule, direct: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
215 (2) and 231.
regoldar, belch, eruct: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf. 225.
rehacer, make again, mend : irr., 246.
rehenchir, fill again, restuff : Rad.-ch,
III, 230.
reherir, wound again : Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
reherrar, shoe (horses) again : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
rehervir, reboil: Rad.-ch. 11,229 (i).
rehollar, trample under foot: Rad.-
ch.^ 1,223 (3).
rehuir, withdraw, deny : 235.
reir, laugh, 233.
remendar, repair, patch: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
rementir, lie again: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
remoler, grind again: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4) .
remorder, bite repeatedly, cause re-
morse: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4).
remover, remove, alter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
rendir, subdue, render ; — se, surren-
der: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
renegar, deny, disown : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
renovar, renovate, renew : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
renir, quarrel, scold: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
repensar, think over again : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
repetir, repeat, recite: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230.
replegar, refold, double again : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
repoblar, repopulate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
repodrir, decay, rot inwardly : 234.
reponer, put back, replace : irr. , 249.
reprobar, reject, condemn: Rad.-ch.
I. 223 (3).
reproducir, reproduce: irr., 2^6; cf.
220 d.
repudrir, decay, rot inwardly : cf. 234.
requebrar, court, make love: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
requerer, wish much, like well: irr.,
242.
requerir, investigate, require, request :
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
resaber, know well: irr., 245.
resalir.project, be prominent: irr., 2^2.
resegar, reap again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
resembrar, sow again: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
resentirse, begin to give way, resent :
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
resolver, resolve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ;
p.p. irr., 224.
resoUar, respire: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
resonar, resound : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) .
resquebrar, crack, split, burst : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
restituir, restore, reestablish: 235.
restregar, scrub : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
THE VERB
241
retemblar, shake, tremble much,
brandish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
retener, retain: irr., 239.
retentar, threaten with a relapse :
Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i).
retenir, dye over again: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
retorcer, twist, contort: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i) and 225.
retostar, toast again, scorch well:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
retraer, retract: irr., 255.
retribuir, make retribution, recom-
pense: 235.
retronar, thunder again : Rad.-ch. I ,
223 (3) •
retrotraer, make retroactive, retroact :
irr., 255.
revenirse, be consumed gradually,
sour, ferment: irr., 248.
reventar, burst : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) .
rever, see again, review, revise : irr.,
258.
reverter, revert : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) .
revestir, put on vestments : Rad.-ch.
Ill, 230.
revolar, fly again: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
revolcarse, wallow: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
revolver, stir, revolve: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4); p.p. irr., 224.
rodar, roll: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
roer, gnaw : irr., 268.
rogar, entreat, ask : Rad.-ch. \,'22.'^ (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225 ; derivatives
reg.
saber, know : irr., 245.
salir, go out, come out : irr., 252.
salpimentar, season with pepper and
salt: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sarmentar, gather prunings of vine :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
satisfacer, satisfy : irr., 246.
segar, reap: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
I seguir, follow: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf.
215 (4) and 231.
sembrar, sow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sementar, sow: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i).
sentar, seat, set, suit: Rad.-ch. 1,223
(I).
sentir, feel, regret : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i) .
ser, to be : irr., 236.
serrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
servir, serve: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
sobre(e)nteiider, be understood:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
sobreponer, put above, add : irr., 249.
sobresalir, rise above, surpass : ij-r.,
252.
sobresembrar, sow over again : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
sobresolar, pave again, put on new
sole: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
sobrevenir, happen, supervene : z>r.,
248.
sobreventar, get the weather gauge :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sobreverterse, overflow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
sobrevestir, put on an outer coat :
Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
sofreir, fry slightly : Rad.-ch. Ill, 233.
solar, floor, pave, sole: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (3) .
soldar, solder, mend: Rad.-ch, I,
223 (3)-
soler, be wont or accustomed : Rad.-
ch. I a7id defective ; cf. 265.
SOltar, untie, loosen : Rad.-ch, I,
223 (3)-
solver, loosen: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4);
/./. irr., '2'2j\.
sonar, sound: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3).
sonreir, smile : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 and
233.
sonrodarse, stick in the mud: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
sonar, dream: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
sorregar, change channels : Rad.-ch,
I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
242
SPANISH GRAMMAR
SOSegar, appease, rest: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; ct. 214 (2) and 225.
sostener, sustain : irr., 239.
soterrar, put underground, bury :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
subarrendar, take a sublease, sub-
rent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
subentender, subintend : Rad.-ch, I ,
223 (2).
subseguir, be next in sequence : Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
substituir, v. sustituir.
substraer, v. sustraer.
subtender,subtend: /?a^.-r/I.I,223 (2).
subvenir, aid, give a subvention : irr.,
248.
subvertir, subvert: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
SUgerir, suggest : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
SUperponer, superimpose : irr., 249.
supervenir, supervene : irr., 248.
suponer, suppose : irr., 249.
suprimir, suppress : 261.
sustituir, substitute : 235.
sustraer, subtract: irr., 255.
.taner, ring, peal, touch : 217.
temblar, tremble : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
tender, stretch: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
tener, have, hold : irr., 239.
teutar, feel, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
tenir, tinge, dye, stain: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
torcer, trust, lend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ;
cf. 215 (i) and 225.
tostar, toast: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
traducir, translate : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
traer, bring: z>r., 255.
transcender, v. trascender.
transferir, transfer: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
transfregar, v. trasfregar.
transponer, v. trasponer.
trascender, transcend : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
trascolar, filter through : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
trascordarse, forget: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
trasegar, upset, decant: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
trasfregar, rub: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
trasoir, misunderstand, hear imper-
fectly : irr., 254.
trasonar, dream : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
trasponer, transpose ; — se, set (of
sun) : irr., 249.
trastrocar, change about, invert or-
der : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i)
and 225.
trasverter, overflow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
trasvolar, fly across or beyond : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
travesar, cross: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
trocar, exchange, barter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
tronar, thunder : Rad.-ch. 1,223 (s)-
tropezar, stumble : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (4) and 225.
valer, be worth : irr., 251.
venir, come: irr., 248.
ventar, blow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
ver, see : irr., 258.
verter, pour, shed : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
vestir, dress, clothe: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230.
volar, fly, rise, blow up: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
VOlcar, overturn : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (i) and 225.
volver, return, come back: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (2) ; p.p. irr., 224.
yacer, lie : irr., 263.
yuxtaponer, put in juxtaposition : irr.,
249.
za(m)bullirse, dive: 217.
zaherir, reproach, censure: Rad.-c^
II, 229 (i).
VOCABULARY
VOCABULARY
SPANISH-ENGLISH
d, to, at, on, from, sign of the personal acometer, to attack.
accusative,
abandonar, to abandon, leave.
abandono, m., neglect, slovenliness.
abierto, //. of abrir.
abogadillo {fr, abogado), m., little
lavi^yer.
aborrecer, to abhor.
abrazar, to embrace.
abrigo, m.^ shelter, wrap, overcoat.
abril, in., April.
abrir, to open.
abuelo, -a, m. and /, grandfather,
grandmother ; w. //., grandpar-
ents.
aburrir, to weary, bore; refi,, to be
bored.
aca, hither, here.
acabar, to end, finish; — de, to have
just.
acci6n,/, deed, action.
aceite, w., oil.
aceptar, to accept.
acera,/, sidewalk.
acerca de, about.
acercarse a, to approach, go near.
acero, w., steel.
aclarar, to light up, brighten.
acompanar, to accompany, go with,
sympathize with.
aconsejar, to advise.
acontecer, to happen.
acontecimiento, w., happening,
event, occurrence.
acostar, to lay down, put to bed;
refl,, to lie down, go to bed.
active, -a, active,
acusar, to accuse, acknowledge.
adelantar, to advance, go forward,
be fast {as a watch).
advertir, to observe, warn,
aficionado, -a (a), fond (of).
af mo = af ectisimo, most affectionate.
agosto, w., August.
agradar, to please.
agradecer, to thank, be grateful for.
agua,/, water.
aguardar, to wait for, await.
aguardiente, w., distilled liquor
{such as brandy, whiskey, ru77i),
ahi, there.
ahora, now.
ahorita {Jr. ahora), very soon, in a
minute.
ahorrar, to spare, save.
245
246
SPANISH GRAMMAR
al, to the.
alabar, to praise.
aldea,/, village.
alegar, to allege.
alegre, happy, joyous, merry.
Alejandro, m., Alexander.
Alemdn, -ana, m. and f., German.
alemdn, -ana, German.
Alemania,/, Germany.
alfiler, m., pin.
Alfredo, m,, Alfred.
algo, something, anything; some-
what.
alguien, some one, somebody.
algiin ; cf, alguno.
alguno, -a, some, any; //., some,
certain, a few; no . . . — , not . . .
any, no . . . whatsoever; ni . . . — ,
nor . . . any ; sin . . . — , without
any . . . whatsoever.
alma,/, soul.
almorzar, to breakfast.
alquilar, to rent, hire.
alto, -a, high, tall, loud.
altura,/, height.
alia, there, thither.
alll, there.
amable, kind, lovable.
amar, to love, like.
amarillo, -a, yellow.
ambos, -as, both.
America,/, America.
Americano, -a, m. and f.^ American.
americano, -a, American.
amigo, -a, m. and f,^ friend.
amiguito, -a, m, and f., little friend.
amistad,/, friendship.
anciano, -a, aged.
ancho, -a, broad, wide ; noun^
breadth, width.
anchura,/, breadth, width.
andar, to go, walk, run {as a watch),
animal, w., animal.
anoche, last night.
anochecer, to become night; arrive
(at) ^rbe (in) at night; anochece,
night is coming on.
anteayer, the day before yesterday,
two days ago.
antes, before, beforehand; — de, be-
fore; — (de) que, before; cuanto
— , as soon as possible ; — de ayer,
the day before yesterday.
anticipaci6n, /, anticipation; con
— , in advance.
antiguo, -a, old, early, ancient.
Antonio, w., Anthony.
ano, m.^ year; — bisiesto, leap year;
tener . . . anos, to be . . . years old.
apagar, to put out {afire or light),
aparecer, to appear.
apariencia, /, appearance.
aposento, w., room, apartment.
apreciable, estimable, kind.
apreciar, to appreciate, esteem.
aprender (a), to learn to.
aprisa, fast, quickly.
apuntar, to note down.
aquel, -ella, adj.^ that, the former.
aquel, aquella, aquello, that one,
that, the one, the former.
aqui, here.
arancelario, -a, relating to the tariff.
drbol, w., tree.
arguir, to argue ; arguyamos, pres.
subj,, ist pi.
VOCABULARY
247
argumento, w., argument.
aritmetica, /, arithmetic.
armaduras, / //., armor.
armeria,/, armory.
arque61ogo, m.^ archaeologist.
arquitecto, m,, architect.
arte,/ {andm,'), art.
artista, m., artist.
arreglar, to arrange, regulate, see to.
arrepentirse, to repent.
asesinar, to assassinate.
asi, as, so, thus; — como, as well as.
Asiria,/, Assyria.
asistir, to be present.
asno, -a, m, and f.^ ass, donkey.
asunto, w., matter, affair, business.
atenci6n,/, attention.
atrasar, to retard, be slow {as a
watch),
atrevimiento, w., daring.
atribuir, to attribute, ascribe.
aunque, although, even if.
ausente, absent.
autor, -ora, m, and f.^ author.
avanzar, to advance.
avariento, -a, m. and f.^ miser.
averiguar, to ascertain; averigiie,
pret. indic.f ist. sing.
avisar, to inform, advise, give notice.
ayer, yesterday; antes de — , day
before yesterday.
ajruda,/, aid.
azul, blue.
bajar, to go down, take down,
bajo, -a, low.
bala,/, ball, bullet.
barato, -a, cheap.
bastante, enough, sufficient; suffi-
ciently, quite, rather.
bautismo, m,, baptism.
beber, to drink.
bello, -a, beautiful.
besar, to kiss.
biblioteca, /, library.
bibliotecario, w., librarian.
bicicleta, /, bicycle.
bien, well, comfortable.
billete, w., bill, bank-note, ticket.
bianco, -a, white; lo — , white.
bobo, -a, in. and f.^ fool.
bola,/, marble.
bolita, /. ( fr. bola) , marble.
bondad,/, goodness, kindness.
bonito, -a, pretty.
botar, to throw away.
brasas,/ //., glowing coals; quien
huye del fuego, da en las — , out
of the frying-pan into the fire.
brazo, w., arm.
brillante, briUiant.
brindar, to drink a toast to, offer.
Bruto, w., Brutus.
buen, cf. bueno.
bueno, -a, good, well.
bullir, to boil, seethe.
burlarse (de), to make fun, make
sport (of).
buscar, to seek, look for.
buz6n, m., letter-box.
caballerito {fr. caballero), m., young
gentleman.
caballero, w., gentleman, sir.
caballo, w., horse.
caber, to be contained.
248
SPANISH GRAMMAR
cabeza,/, head.
cabo, m,, end ; Uevar a — , to carry
out.
cada, adj., each, every ; — uno
(-a), prn,, each, each one.
caer, to fall ; refl,, to fall down.
caf§, m.y coffee.
caja,/, box.
caliente, hot, warm.
calificaci6n, /, qualification, grade.
calor, m., heat, warmth; tener — ,
to be warm {as a person) ; hacer
— , to be warm {as the weather),
calumniar, to calumniate.
callarse, to hush, be silent.
calle,/, street.
cama,/, bed.
camale6n, m., chameleon.
cambiar, to change, exchange.
cambio, m,, change.
caminar, take one's way, journey
along, walk.
camino, w., road, way.
campesino, -a, m. andf,, peasant.
campo, m., field, country ; casa de
— , country house.
cansado, -a, tired, {zvith ser) tire-
some.
cansar, to tire, fatigue.
cantar, to sing.
capital, 7n., capital; /, capital (city).
capitan, m., captain.
carb6n, m., coal.
cardinal, cardinal.
carecer de, to be without, lack.
carga,/, burden.
cargadito, -a {fr, cargado), slightly
seasoned.
cargar, to load, charge, season.
Carlos, ;/?., Charles.
carta, /, letter.
cartero, ?;?., postman, letter-carrier.
carrera, /, course of (professional)
study.
carro, m., wagon, car.
casa, /, house ; en — , at home ;
a — , home.
casar, to marry ; casarse con, to
marry, be married to.
casi, almost.
caso, m,, case ; en — que, in case,
castellano, -a, Castilian ; el — ,
Spanish.
castigo, ni., punishment.
catedral,/, cathedral.
catedratico, ?/?., university professor,
catorce, fourteen.
causa, /, cause, lawsuit; a — de, on
account of.
cautiverio, m., captivity.
cegar, to blind.
celebre, celebrated.
cenar, to have supper, sup.
centavito (/r. centavo), m., only a
cent, mite.
centavo, -a, hundredth.
centavo, m., centavo, cent,
centesimo, -a, hundredth.
centimo, m., centime.
central, central.
ceremonia, /, ceremony.
certificar, to certify, register.
Cervantes, Cervantes.
cerveza,/, beer.
cerrar, to shut, close.
Cesar, ;;?., Caesar.
VOCABULARY
249
cesta,/, basket.
ciego, -a, blind.
Cielo, ?/?., heaven, sky.
ciencia,/, science.
ciento, cien, one hundred.
cinco, five.
cincuenta, fifty.
ciudad,/, city.
ciudadano, ;;?., citizen.
clase, /, class, kind, sort.
Cliente, m. and f., patient.
Clima, w., climate.
coalici6n,/, coalition.
cobarde, m, and f.^ coward.
COCina,/, kitchen, cooking.
cofre, /;/., box, trunk; hacer un —
a, to pack a trunk for.
COger, to catch ; COJamos, pres, subj,,
I St pi.
colecci6n,/, collection.
c61era,/, anger.
colmado, -a, filled {^to overflowing),
Col6n, m., Columbus.
color, ;;/., color.
comedor, ;;/., dining-room.
comer, to eat, dine.
cdmeter, to commit.
como, as, like; while.
c6mo, how.
c6modo, -a, comfortable.
COmpanero, -a, m. and /, com-
panion.
compania,/, company.
compatriota, m. and f.^ compatriot.
completamente, completely, entirely,
wholly.
completo, -a, complete.
c6mplice, m, a7td f.^ accomplice.
comportamiento, m., deportment,
conduct.
comprar, to buy.
comun, common; por lo — , com-
monly.
con, with, toward; para — , toward;
— tal que, provided that.
concebir, to conceive.
COncepto, w., conception, sense; en
mi — , to my mind.
conciudadano, -a, m, and f.^ fellow-
citizen.
conde, w., count.
condici6n, /, condition.
conducir, to conduct, lead, guide.
conducta,/, behavior, conduct.
conjugaci6n, /, conjugation.
conmigo, with me.
COnocer, to know, be acquainted with.
COnocimientos, in. pL, attainments.
COnozco, pres, indie, ist sing, of
conocer.
conquistador, w., conqueror.
conquistar, to conquer.
COnseguir, to obtain, succeed in.
consentir (en), to consent (to).
conservar, to preserve, keep.
considerar, to consider.
consigo, with himself, herself, etc.
consiguiente, w., consequence; por
— , consequently.
constante, constant.
constar (de), to consist (of).
constituir, to constitute.
contar, to count, tell, relate.
contendiente, w., contestant, oppo-
nent.
contener, to contain.
250
SPANISH GRAMMAR
contestaci6n, /., answer.
contestar, to answer.
COntigO, with you, with thee.
continuar, to continue.
contrario, -a, contrary.
contribuci6n, /, tax.
conveniencia, /, convenience.
convert ir, to convert.
convidar, to invite.
copiar, to copy.
COpO, m., flake.
cortar, to cut.
COrte,/, court, capital, Madrid.
cortes, polite, courteous.
corto, -a, short.
corregir, to correct ; corrijan, pres.
subj., 3d pL
correo, w., mail, post-office.
correr, to run.
corrida, yC, coursing match; — de
toros, bull-fight.
COrriente, present (month), current.
COsa,yC, thing, affair; matter.
COsita (/r. cosa), /, little thing,
trifle.
costar, to cost.
COstoso, -a, costly, expensive,
costumbre, /., custom, manner.
creer, beUeve, think; creyendo,
pres. p.
criada,/, servant, maid.
criado, m.^ servant,
cristal, w., pane.
cristiano, -a, m. and f.^ Christian.
Cristo, m,^ Christ.
Crist6bal, m.^ Christopher.
cuadra, /, city block.
cuadro, w., picture.
cual, which; el (la) cual, who, which,
whom.
cual, interrog. adj. and pron., which,
what.
cuando, when; cuando, when, in-
terrog. ; de — en — , from time
to time.
cuanto, -a, how much, as much, all
the, all that; todo — , all that; —
antes, as soon as possible; — ...
tanto, the . . . the; -os, -as, //.,
how many, as many, all the.
cuanto, -a, inter rog. and ex clam. ^
how much; //., how many; —
tiempo, how long; i — s anos
tienes? how old are you?
cuarenta, forty.
cuarto, m., room.
cuarto, -a, fourth.
cuatro, four.
cuatrocientos, -as, four hundred.
Cuba,/, Cuba.
Cubano, -a, m. andf.^ Cuban.
cubano, -a, Cuban.
cuenta,/, account, bill.
cuidado, m., care ; ten — , look out 1
no tengas — , don't worry.
cumpleanos, m., anniversary of birth-
day.
cumplir, to fulfil, complete.
cunado, -a, m. and f., brother-in-law,
sister-in-law.
cuyo, -a, whose, of which.
Ciiyo, -a, interrog., whose.
chino, -a, Chinese. [tot.
chiquillo, -a {fr. chicd), little fellow,
chismes, m. pi., tittle-tattle, gossip.
VOCABULARY
251
chiste, w., witty saying, jest.
chocolate, w., chocolate.
D. ( = don), Mr.
dar, to give, face, hit, strike {of a
clock) ; — en, to strike against, fall
upon.
de, of, from, since, with, in.
debajo de, under, beneath.
deber, to be (morally) obliged to,
ought, owe.
deber, ;;?., duty.
decidido, -a, decided, resolved,
determined.
dlcimo, -a, tenth.
decir, to say, tell.
decisi6n,y;, decision.
declarar, to make a declaration, de-
pose upon oath.
defecto, w., fault.
defender, to defend.
dejar, to leave ; — de, to cease to ;
no — de, not to fail to, not to
omit.
del, of the, from the; — cual, of
whoni.
deleitar, to delight.
delincamos, pres, sbj. ist pi. of de-
linquir,
delinquir, to be delinquent, to trans-
gress.
demas, other, rest.
demasiado, -a, adj., too much
(many) ; adv,, too, too much.
denominador, 7n., denominator.
dentro de, inside of, within.
derecho, -a, right, straight.
derrotar, to rout.
desafiar, to challenge.
desagradable, disagreeable.
desaparecer, to disappear.
descansar, to rest.
descanso, w., rest.
descender, to descend, to be de-
scended.
descomunal, extraordinary, unusual.
descubrir, to discover.
descuidillo {fr. descuido), w., slight
neglect.
desde, from, since ; — ... hasta,
from ... to ; — que, since.
desear, to desire, wish.
desgracia,/, misfortune.
desgraciado, -a, unfortunate,
wretched.
designio, w., design, purpose.
despacho, w., office; — de billetes,
ticket office.
despedirse, refl., to take leave.
despertar, to awake, w., wake up ;
refl., to awake.
despues, afterward ; — de, after ;
— que, after.
detalle, w., detail.
deuda,/, debt.
devolver, to return, give back.
dia, m., day ; de — , by day ; ocho
dias, a week ; quince dias, a fort-
night; dias, saint's day.
diamante, m., diamond.
dibujo, 771., drawing.
diccionario, w., dictionary.
dice, pres. indie, ^d siftg. of decir, to
say.
diciembre, w., December.
dicho, -a, said, the said.
252
SPANISH GRAMMAR
diente, m.^ tooth.
diez, ten.
diferir, to defer, differ.
dificil, difficult.
difunto, -a, deceased.
digno, -a, worth, worthy.
digO, /r^^. indie, ist. sing, ofdecir,
dijeron, pret. indie ^d pi. of decir.
dinero, w., money.
Dios, m., God.
directo, -a, direct, through.
dirigir, to direct ; refl., to make one's
way, address, turn, direct one's self.
discipulo, -a, m. and f., pupil,
scholar.
discolo, -a, peevish.
discurso, ?;/., discourse, speech.
disminuir, to diminish.
dispensar, to excuse.
disputar, to dispute.
distancia, /, distance.
distingamos, /r^^. sbj. ist pi. of dis-
tingui7\
distinguir, to distinguish.
distribuir, to distribute.
diversi6n, /., diversion, amusement,
sport.
divino, -a, divine.
doble, doubje.
doce, twelve.
docena,/, dozen.
doler, to ache.
dolor, m., pain, ache, grief ; — de
cabeza, headache,
domesticar, to tame.
domingo, m., Sunday.
dominio, w., dominion, domain,
power.
don, dona, m. and /, Mr., Mrs. and
Miss ; — Quijote, Don Quixote.
donde, where, in which ; en — ,
where, in which.
d6nde, interrog.^ where.
dondequiera, wherever.
Dn = don.
Dna = dona.
dormir, to sleep ; refi., to fall asleep.
dos, two ; los (las) — , both.
doscientos, -as, two hundred.
duda,/, doubt.
dudar, to doubt.
dueno, m., master.
duque, w., duke.
durar, to endure, last.
duro, m.^ dollar.
duro, -a, hard, severe.
e, and.
echar, to throw, cast, pour {as
waie?') ; ^'efi., to throw one's self
down, lie down.
Edad, /, Age; — Media, Middle
Ages.
edificio, ?;?., building.
educaci6n, /., education.
educar, to educate.
Eiffel, Eiffel; la torre ■— , the Eiffel
tower.
ejercicio, m., exercise.
ejercito, w., army.
el (la, lo, los, las), the, that, the
one, those ; — que, who, whom,
he who, etc.
61, he, him, it.
electrico, -a, electric.
elefante, -a, m. and f, elephant.
VOCABULARY
253
elegantemente, elegantly.
ella, she, her, it.
ello, it.
ellos, ellas, they, them.
emperador, m., emperor.
empezar, to begin.
emplear, to employ, use.
emprender, to undertake.
empresa,/, enterprise, undertaking.
en, in, into, on.
enamorado, -a, in love.
encantar, to delight.
encarnado,-a, flesh-colored, (bright)
red.
encender, to light, kindle.
encontrar, to meet, find.
enemigo, -a, m, and /, enemy;
adj,, hostile.
enero, w., January.
enfadar, to vex, anger; rejl.^ to be-
come angry.
enfermedad,/, illness, sickness.
enfermo, -a, ill, sick.
enojarse, to become (get) angry.
Enrique, /;/., Henry.
ensalada,/, salad.
ensenar, to teach, show.
entender, to understand; — de, to
understand, be skilled in.
entero, -a, entire, whole, firm.
entonces, then, at that time.
entrada,/, entrance.
entrar, to enter, go into; hacer — ,
to show in, admit.
entre, between, among.
entregar, to deliver, hand over.
entristecer, to sadden.
enviar, to send.
eran, v. ser.
errar, to err.
error, m,, error, mistake.
es, pres. ind. ^d sing, of ser,
escapar, to escape.
esclavo, -a, m, and f.^ slave.
Escorial, //?., Escurial (town and
palace).
escribir, to write.
escrito, /. /. of escribir,
escuchar, to listen.
escuela,/, school.
escultor, sculptor.
Esdras, Esdras.
ese (esa, eso, esos, esas), that
(those); ese, etc., that one, etc.;
eso, that which you say.
esencialmente, essentially.
Espana,/, Spain.
Espanol, -ola, m, a^id f, Spaniard,
Spanish woman.
espanol, -ola, Spanish.
esperar, to hope, wait for, expect.
espllndido, -a, splendid, fine.
esposo, -a, i?i. and f, husband,
wife.
esquina,/, corner,
establecerse, refl., to establish one's
self, settle.
estaci6n, /, station, season.
estado, /;/., state.
Estados Unidos, w. pL, United
States.
estar, to be.
estatua,/, statue.
^ste (6sta, estos, §stas), this, this
one (these), the latter; 6sta, yC,
this place (city, town).
254
SPANISH GRAMMAR
este (esta, esto, estos, estas),^^'.,
this (these), the latter.
estiniaci6n, /, esteem.
esto, this (that I say).
estrecho, -a, narrow.
estudiar, to study.
evitar, to avoid.
exacto, -a, exact.
excepto, except.
exclamar, to exclaim.
6xitO, w., outcome, result, issue,
success.
extranjero, -a, foreign.
extranjero, -a, m, and /, stranger,
foreigner.
fabricar, to make, manufacture.
facil, easy.
facilidad,/, ease, facility.
facilitar, to oblige with.
falso, -a, false.
falta, /, fault, mistake; defect,
want, lack; hacer — , to be
needed; nos hacia — , we needed.
familia,/, family.
famoso, -a, famous.
fatigado, -a, fatigued, tired.
favor, m., favor; hacer el — , to do
the favor.
favorable, favorable.
favorecer, to favor.
febrero, m., February.
fecha,/, date.
fechar, to date.
f elicidad, yC, happiness.
felicitar, congratulate.
Felipe, m., Philip.
feliz, happy.
feo, -a, ugly, homely.
ferrocarril, w., railway.
festin, w., banquet, feast.
fiebre,/, fever.
fiel, faithful.
fiesta,/, feast, festival, festivity.
figurar, to figure; reji., to fancy,
imagine.
filosofia,/, philosophy.
finalmente, finally.
fino, -a, courteous, refined,
flor,/, flower.
fonda,/, inn, restaurant.
fondo, m,^ bottom, depth; k — ,
thoroughly, perfectly.
formar, to form.
fortuna,/, fortune.
Frances, -esa, m. and f,. French-
man, Frenchwoman.
f ranees, -esa, French.
franco, -a, frank.
franqueza,/, frankness.
f rente, /., front, forehead; — a — ,
face to face.
fresco, -a, fresh, cool.
frio, m., cold; tengo — , I am cold;
hace — , it is cold.
frio, -a, adj,^ cold.
fuego, m., fire; quien huye del — ,
da en las brasas, out of the
frying-pan into the fire.
fuente,/, fountain, spring.
f uera, impf. subj. ^d sing, of i?-, to go.
fuera de, apart from, outside of.
fuerte, strong, mighty, powerful;
— resfriado, bad cold.
fumar, to smoke {as tobacco),
funci6n,/, performance.
VOCABULARY
255
gana, /, inclination, desire ; tener
ganas de, to have a desire to.
ganado, m., live stock.
ganar, to earn, make {money), gain,
win; — a, to surpass.
gastar, to spend, waste.
gatito, -a, m, and f,, kitten.
gato, -a, m. and /, cat.
gemelos, m. pL, (opera or field)
glasses.
gemir, to groan, moan.
general, w., general.
generalmente, generally.
Gentil, m,, Gentile.
geografia,/, geography.
giro, in,, turn, revolution; draft,
order.
Godo, -a, m, and f., Goth.
Goya, m., Goya (modern Spanish
painter).
gracia,yC, name, grace; //., thanks,
I thank you.
gramatica, /, grammar.
gran, cf. grande.
grande, great, big, large, grand.
grandecito, -a (/r. graiide), rather
large, biggish.
grave, important, serious.
guante, m., glove.
guardar, to keep, protect ; — cama,
to stay in bed.
guardia, /, guard; ;;/., guardsman,
guard, policeman.
guarismo, w., numeral, cipher, fig-
ure.
guerra, /, war.
guerrero, w., warrior.
Guillermo, m., William.
gustar, to taste, please; me gusta,
I like.
gusto, m,, taste, pleasure.
ha, pres. indie, jd sing, of haber.
haber, to have, be ; hay, there is
(are) ; — de, to have to ; ha de
suceder, is to happen.
hablador, -ora, talkative.
hablar, to speak, talk.
hacendoso, -a, active, industrious.
hacer, to make, do ; — un cofre a,
to pack a trunk for ; — falta, to
be needed ; — hacer, to have
made ; hace frio, it is cold ; hace
una hora y media, an hour and
a half ago ; hace cuatrocientos
doceanos, it is4i2years; ^^cuanto
tiempo hace? how long is it?
refl.,io become; hacerse el tonto,
to play the fool.
hacia, toward (s).
hallar, to find.
hambre,/, hunger ; tener — , to be
hungry.
hambriento, -a, hungry.
haragan, -ana, lazy.
hasta, to, up to, until, as far as,
even.
hay, cf. haber.
hecho, m., deed.
helar {also reji.), to freeze.
hembra,/, female.
herido, //^., wounded man.
herido, -a, wounded, with a wound.
herir, to strike, wound.
hermano, -a, 7?i. and f, brother,
sister.
256
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hermoso, -a, beautiful, handsome,
fine.
heroico, -a, heroic,
hervir, to boil, bubble.
hidalgo, w., Mexican coin = 10 dol-
lars ; doble hidalgo = 20 dollars.
hierro, m., iron.
hija,/, daughter.
hijito, -a, m, and f, {fr. hijo), little
son, daughter.
hijo, -a, m. and f., son, daughter;
m. pL, sons, children.
hirviente, boiling, bubbling.
historia,/, history.
historiador, m.^ historian.
hogar, 7n., hearth, home.
hola, hello.
hombre, m., man.
hpmbrecillo (/r. hombre), ;//., Uttle
man.
hombr6n {fr, hombre)^ m., large
(big) man.
honra, /, honor.
hora, /, hour ; i que — es ? what
time is it ?
hoy, today.
hubo, there was, there were ; cf. haber,
huele, pres, indie, ^d sing, of ole7\
huelga,/, strike (of workmen).
huerfano, -a, m. attd f., orphan.
huevo, m., Qgg.
huir, to flee.
humano, -a, human,
ideal, ideal.
idioma, m., language.
imaginar, to imagine ; rejl., to ima-
gine.
impaciente, impatient.
impedir, to prevent, impede.
imperativo, m., imperative.
importante, important.
importar, to be of importance, con-
cern ; i no importa ! no matter !
imposible, impossible.
imprimir, to print, impress.
indicativo, w., indicative,
indio, -a, Indian.
industrioso, -a, industrious,
inexplicable, inexplicable.
influir (en), to influence.
informes, m. pi., information.
ingeniatura,/, engineering.
ingeniero, w., engineer.
Inglaterra, /, England.
ingles, -esa, English.
Ingles, -esa, m, and f., English-
man, Englishwoman.
inmediatamente, immediately.
inmortal, immortal.
insigne, illustrious.
instante, ^., instant; al — , instantly.
instruir, to instruct.
insultar, to insult.
inteligente, inteUigent.
intenci6n, /, intention.
interes, m., interest.
interesante, interesting.
interesar, to interest.
interior, m., interior.
intervenir, to interfere.
intimo, -a, intimate.
invalido, -a, incapacitated, crip-
pled.
invencible, invincible.
invierno, m., winter.
VOCABULARY
257
ir, to go, go on, continue ; reji.^ to
go off, go away,
ira,/], anger.
irritar, to provoke, anger.
Israel, Israel.
Israelita, m. and f.^ Israelite.
Italiano, -a, m. and f.^ Italian.
italiano, -a, Italian.
izquierdo, -a, left.
jamas, ever, never; no . . . jamas,
never.
Jicara, Jicara; as a com7non noun,
coffee cup.
Jorge, m., George.
Jose, m., Joseph.
joven, m. and f., (young) man,
woman, youth.
joven, young.
jovencito, -a, (/r. joven), VI. and
f.^ young fellow, youth, young
girl.
Juan, ?//., John.
Juana,/, Jane,
jueves, in., Thursday.
juez, m., judge.
jugar, to play.
Julian, m., Julian.
Julio, m., Julius.
junio, m., June.
junto, -a, united, joined together;
— d, near,
justicia,/, justice.
juzgado, m.y tribunal, court of jus-
tice.
juzgar, to judge.
kil6metro, w., kilometre.
la, /, the, that, the one, she, her,
it; //., the, those, they.
\di, pers. prn., her, it; //., them.
lado, m., side.
Iadr6n, -ona, m. and f., thief.
lagrima,/, tear.
lampara, /, lamp.
lapiz, m., pencil.
largo, -a, long; largo, n.y length.
lastima,/, pity.
lastimar, to hurt, injure.
lavandera, /, laundress.
lavar, to wash.
le, him, it, you; to him, her, it, you.
Iecci6n, /, lesson.
leche,/, milk.
leer, to read.
lejano, -a, distant.
lejos, far.
lengua,/, tongue, language,
lena,/, wood.
Le6n, m., Leo.
les, to them, to you.
levantar, to raise; refl., to rise,
get up.
ley,/, law.
libertad,/, liberty,
libra, /, pound.
libre, free.
librero, in., bookseller,
libro, in., book.
Iim6n, m., lemon,
limosna, /., alms,
limosnita (/r. limosna), f., little
alms, trifle for charity's sake.
Undo, -a, pretty.
linea,/, line.
lingiiistico, -a, linguistic.
258
SPANISH GRAMMAR
lirio, m.^ lily.
lo, the, it, him, you, so; lo que,
that, which, what ; lo cual, which.
lodo, ni.^ mud.
longitud, /., length.
los, the, them, you; — que, those
who (whom) ; — suyos, his own.
Louvre, ;//., I.ouvre (palace and
museum at Paris).
lucir, show off, display.
lucha,/, struggle.
luego, directly, soon; — que, as
soon as.
lugar, w., place.
Luis, m.y Lewis, Louis.
luna,/, moon.
lunes, m,, Monday.
luz,/, light.
llamar, to call, knock, ring; refl.^ to
be named.
llegar, to arrive.
llevar, to bear, carry, take, lead;
— a cabo, to carry out.
llorar, to weep, cry.
Hover, to rain.
macho, ;;/., male.
madre,/, mother.
maduro, -a, ripe.
maestro, -a, m. and /, (school)
master, mistress, teacher.
magnifico, -a, magnificent, splen-
did.
mal, badly, poorly; noun^ evil,
harm ; adj.^ cf. malo.
maldad, /, misdeed, wicked act.
malisimo, -a (/r. malo), very bad.
malo, -a, bad, ill, sick.
mama,/., mamma, mother,
mandar, to command, order, send,
mando, w., command,
manera,/, manner, way.
mano, /, hand.
mantequilla, /, butter.
manzana, /, apple, city block.
manana, /, morning, tomorrow;
— por la • — , tomorrow morning;
pasado — , day after tomorrow.
mar, m. or /, sea.
marchar, to march, go; refl., to go
away.
margen,/, margin, bank.
Maria, /, Mary.
martes, w., Tuesday.
marzo, w., March,
mas, but.
mas, more, most, plus; no — que,
only.
matar, to kill.
mayo, m., May.
mayor, greater, greatest; elder,
older, oldest.
me, me, to me.
Media,/, Media.
mediados, m,pl, : a — de, about the
middle of.
medicamento, w., medicine.
medicina, /, medicine.
medico, ?«., physician, doctor (of
medicine).
medio, -a, half, a half, middle;
Edad Media, Middle Ages.
Mejicano, -a, 7n. and f,, Mexican,
mejicano, -a, Mexican.
M6jico, w., Mexico.
VOCABULARY
259
mejor, better, best.
mendigo, -a, w. a^id f.^ beggar.
menester, w., necessity, need; ser
— , to be necessary.
menor, smaller, smallest; younger,
youngest.
menos, less, least; a — que, unless.
mentir, to lie.
mentira,/, lie, lying.
menudo: a — , often.
merecer, to merit, deserve.
mes, fn.i month.
metro, w., metre.
mezclar, to mix; mezclarse con, to
mingle with.
mi, my.
mi, me.
miedo, m.^ fear; tener — de, to be
afraid of.
miercoles, w., Wednesday.
Miguel, m., Michael.
mil, (one) thousand; nourt w.,
thousand.
militar, /«., soldier, officer.
milla,/, mile.
mill6n, m., million.
minuto, w., minute.
mio, -a, my, mine; el (la, los, las,
lo) mlo (-a, -OS, -as, -o),mine.
misericordia, /, mercy,
mismo, -a, self, himself, etc.;
same, very ; — que, same as.
modo, w., way, mode, manner.
molestar, to annoy, trouble, dis-
turb.
molestia,/, trouble.
momento, w., moment,
moneda, /, coin.
mono, -a, ;;/. and f., monkey.
montanes, -esa, w. and yC, moun-
taineer.
montar, to mount, ride; — a ca-
ballo,to ride on horseback; mon-
tado en, riding on.
morar, to dwell, live.
morir, to die; 7'efl,, to die, be dying.
mosca, /., fly.
mostaza, /, mustard.
mover, to move, actuate.
mozo, -a, youth, lad, lass; waiter,
waitress.
muchacho, -a, m. and f.^ boy, girl.
muchisimo, -a (/r. mucho), very
much.
muchisimos, -as, very many.
mucho, -a, much, a great deal; //.,
many; adv.^ much, a great deal,
very.
mueble, w., article (piece) of furni-
ture; //., furniture.
muerte,/., death.
mujer,y^, woman, wife.
mujeraza, /, large, coarse woman.
mula,/, mule.
multitud,/, multitude.
mundo, w., world; todo el — ,
everybody.
Murillo, w., Murillo (Spanish
painter).
muro, w., wall.
museo, w., museum.
musica, /, music.
muy, very.
nacer, to be born.
nacionalidad, /, nationality.
26o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
nada, nothing, anything, any respect;
no . . . nada, nothing.
nadador, m., swimmer.
nadie, no one, nobody, any one, any-
body; no . . . — , nobody, not any-
body.
naranja,/, orange.
nariz,/, nose.
neblina,/, fog, mist.
necesario, -a, necessary.
necesitar, to need, want.
negar, to deny.
negocio, w., business, affair.
negro, -a, black.
nevar, to snow.
ni, nor, or ; ni . . . ni, neither . . .
nor ; ni . . . tampoco, not . . .
either, nor . . . either.
nieto, -a, 7ri. and /., grandson,
granddaughter.
nieve,/, snow.
ninguno, -a, no, none ; no . . . nin-
guno, -a, not any.
nino, -a, m, and f., child, (small)
boy, girl.
no, not, no ; no poder menos de,
not to be able to help.
noble, noble.
noche,/, night ; esta — , tonight.
nombre, w., name.
nono, -a, ninth.
norte, m., north.
Norte-Americano, -a, m, and /,
North American.
norte-americano, -a. North Ameri-
can.
nos, us, ourselves, each other, one
another ; to us, to ourselves.
nosotros, -as, we, us.
noticias, /. //., news.
novecientos, -as, nine hundred.
novela,/, novel.
noveno, -a, ninth.
noventa, ninety.
noviembre, m.^ November.
nuestro, -a, our, ours ; el (la, lo,
los, las) nuestro (-a, -o, -os,
-as), ours.
nueve, nine,
nuevo, -a, new.
numerador, m,, numerator.
numero, m., number; gran — , a
large number.
nunca, never, ever ; no . . . nunca,
never, not ever.
6, or.
obedecer, to obey.
objeto, m,^ object.
Obligar, to oblige, compel.
obra, /, work ; — maestra, master-
piece.
octavo, -a, eighth.
OCtubre, w., October.
0CUpaci6n, y;, occupation.
ocupado, -a, busy, occupied.
ochenta, eighty.
ocho, eight ; las — , eight o'clock.
ochocientos, -as, eight hundred.
odiar, to hate.
oido, m.^ hearing, (inner) ear.
oir, to hear.
Ojo, m., eye.
oler, to smell ; — d, to smell of.
once, eleven ; las — y media, half-
past eleven o'clock.
VOCABULARY
261
onza,/, ounce.
6pera,/, opera.
opinar, to opine, be of the opinion.
opinion,/, opinion.
6ptimo, -a, best, excellent.
Opuesto, -a, opposite, opposed.
orador, m., orator.
orar, to pray.
orden,/, order.
ordinal, ordinal.
oriental, oriental.
origen, m.^ origin.
original, original.
oro, m., gold.
OS, you.
osar, to dare.
oscurecer, to grow dark.
Otro, -a, other, another.
Pablo, m., Paul.
padre, m., father, priest; //., fathers,
parents.
pagar, to pay.
pdgina,/, page.
pagu6, pret, indie, ist sing, of
pagar.
pague, pres. subj. ^d sing, of pagar.
pais, m., country, region, land.
palabra,/, word.
palabrota (/r. palabra), f.y coarse
expression, harsh word.
palacio, 7n., palace.
pan, m.f bread.
panuelo, m.y handkerchief.
papa, m., papa, father.
papel, m., paper; — secante, blot-
ting paper.
paquete, ;;/., package.
para, for, to, in order to; — que, in
order that, that.
parado, -a, stopped, erect, standing.
parecer, seem, appear; parecerse a,
to be like to, resemble.
pariente, -a, m. and f, relative, re-
lation.
parte, /, part; por todas partes,
everywhere ; la mayor — , most.
partir, to depart, leave; to split,
crack; — de, to leave.
pasado, -a, past^ last; lo — , the
past; — manana, day after to-
morrow.
pasar, to pass, pass through, pass
over, spend (time).
pasearse, to take a walk or a ride,
go about.
paseo, w., public promenade.
pasi6n, /, passion.
patria,/, (native) country.
paz,/, peace; paces,/ //., peace.
pecado, 7n., sin.
pedir, to ask for; — d, to ask of.
pelear, to fight.
peligro, m., peril, danger.
pelota, /, ball.
pelot6n, w., platoon.
pensar, to think, intend, mean
(^followed directly by an infini-
tive) \ — en, to think of, recall;
— de, to think of, form an opinion
of.
peor, worse, worst.
pequenito, -a (/r. pequeno), very
small, wee, little, tiny.
pequeno, -a, little, small, slight.
perder, to lose; — a, to ruin.
262
SPANISH GRAMMAR
perd6n, m., pardon.
perdonar, to pardon.
perecer, to perish.
perezoso, -a, lazy, idle.
peri6dico, m., newspaper, periodi-
cal.
permitir, to permit.
pero, but.
persona,/, person.
personaje, ?;/., personage.
pertenecer, to belong.
perro, w., dog.
pesar, to weigh.
peseta, /, peseta, franc (nearly
twenty cents).
peso, ;;/., weight, dollar.
piano, ni., piano.
pie, w., foot.
piedad,/, pity, piety.
pierna,/, leg.
pillete (/r. pilld)^ 7n.j low rascal,
base rogue.
pintar, to paint.
pintor, ;;/., painter.
pintura,/, painting.
Pio, Pius.
piso, ?n., story, floor.
pizarra,/, slate.
plan, m.j plan.
planchar, to iron.
plata,/, silver.
plato, m., plate.
plazuela {fr. plaza) ^ f., little square.
pluma, /, pen, feather; — tintero,
fountain pen.
pobre, poor.
pobrecito, -a {fr. pobre), poor little
(fellow).
pOCO, -a, little; un poco, a little;
pocos, -as, few; — ha, a short
while ago.
poder, to be able, can, may; —
mas, to have the more power, be
the stronger; no — mas, to be
played out, be able to do no more;
no — menos de, not to be able to
help; puede que, it is possible
that.
poder, w., power.
poderoso, -a, powerful.
poeta, m., poet.
politico, -a, political; noun m.,
politician.
politiquejo (/r. politico), m., low
politician.
poner, to put, place, set (a table),
lay (eggs) ; refl,, to put on (cloth-
ing), become, begin.
por, for, through, by, along, on ac-
count of, per; — alii, over there;
— la manana, in the morning.
pormenor, w., detail.
porque, because; por que, why
(ijiterrog.).
porque, why.
portero, w., porter.
poseer, to possess, own.
posible, possible.
postal, postal.
ppdo. = pr6ximo pasado.
Prado, m., meadow; name of a
promenade and park at Madj'id,
preferir, to prefer.
preguntar (a), to ask (of).
pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive.
premio, w., prize.
VOCABULARY
263
prensa,/, press.
presentar, to present.
presente, present; lo — , the present
{time) ; al — , at present.
presente, w., present.
prestar, to lend.
prinier(o), -a, first.
primo, -a, m. and f., cousin.
principal, principal, leading, of
importance.
principio, w., beginning; a prin-
cipios de, near the beginning of.
prisa, /, hurry; tener — , to be in
a hurry; de — , quickly, fast.
pr6, 771., advantage; en — de, in
favor of.
probable, probable.
probablemente, probably.
probar, to prove, test.
profesor, w., professor.
prof eta, /;/., prophet.
progenitor, w., progenitor.
prohibir, to forbid, prohibit.
prometer, to promise.
pronto, soon, quickly.
proposici6n, /, proposition, pro-
posal.
prop6sitO, 771., purpose, plan, propo-
sition.
prosperidad,/, prosperity.
proteger, to protect.
proverbio, w., proverb.
pr6ximo, -a, next; — pasado, last
month, iilti77io.
proyecto, ?//., plan.
prueba,/, proof.
publico, -a, public.
pueblo, 771., people, town.
puente, 771., bridge.
puerta, /, door, gate; Puerta del
Sol,/, Gate of the Sun {na77ie of
the chief squa7'e iTt Madrid).
pues, well, why.
puesto, 771., situation, position.
punto, 771., point, element; a — de,
on the point of.
puro, -a, pure.
que, el (la, las, los, las) — , w^ho,
which, that; lo — , that which,
what.
que, i7tte7'7'og. a7id excla77i., what.
que, C071J., that, for, than, as; tener
— , to have to, must ; de — , of
the fact that.
que, excla77i., w^hat a !
quebrado, 771., fraction.
quebrar, to break.
quedar, to remain ; reji., to remain,
stay.
quejarse (de), to complain (of).
querer, to wnsh, want, like, try ; —
a, to love, like; — decir, to mean,
signify.
querido, -a, dear.
queso, 771., cheese.
quien, who, whom, he who, him who;
quien . . . quien, some . . . some,
(the) one . . . (the) other.
quien, inte7'rog., who, whom.
Quijote, Quixote,
quince, fifteen.
quince-avo, fifteenth.
quinientos, -as, five hundred.
quinto, -a, fifth.
quinzavo, fifteenth.
264
SPANISH GRAMMAR
quitar (d),to take (fvom or off of).
quizas, perhaps.
raro, -a, strange, odd, queer.
raudal, m., stream, torrent, lot.
rayo, w., ray, beam.
raza,/, race.
raz6n, /, reason, right ; tener — ,
to be right.
real, royal, real.
real, m.y silver coin worth about five
cents.
xece, pres. sbj. 3 d sing, ofrezar,
recepci6n, /, reception.
recibir, to receive.
recibo, m., receipt.
recomendar, to recommend.
recordar, to recall, remind.
recuerdo, m,^ recollection ; //., com-
pliments, regards.
redondo, -a, round.
referir, to relate, utter.
reforma,/, reform.
refrdn, in.^ refrain, proverb.
regalar, to give, present.
regalo, m,^ present, gift.
regreso, m.^ return.
reina,/, queen.
reir, to laugh ; reirse (de), to laugh
(at).
relaci6n,/, account.
relacionarse (con), to be related (to).
religiose, -a, religious.
reloj, m., v^^atch, clock.
relojeria,/, vi^atch-making.
relucir, to shine, glisten, gleam.
remangado, -a, turned up, snub.
remendar, to mend, repair.
renir, to quarrel.
repasar, to recite, repeat.
resfriado, m,, cold.
resistir, to resist.
respetar, to respect.
responder, to respond, answer ; — de,
to answer for, be responsible for.
resto, ni., remnant.
resultado, m., result, outcome.
resultar, to result.
retirarse, to retire, retreat.
retrato, w., portrait, picture.
reunido, -a, united, gathered, as-
sembled.
rey, w., king.
reyezuelo (/r. rey)y /?/., petty king.
rezar, to pray.
rico, -a, rich.
rio, m., river.
rodilla, /, knee.
rogar, to ask, entreat.
rojo, -a, red.
Roma,/, Rome.
Romano, -a, m, and f.^ Roman.
romano, -a, Roman, Romanic, Ro-
mance.
ropa,/, clothing, clothes.
roto, -a, broken.
ruido, w., noise.
Ruso, -a, m, andf.y Russian.
S. S. Q. B. S. M. (P.) = seguro (-a)
servidor (-ora) que besa sus
manos (pies).
sabado, m., Saturday.
saber, to know, know how, learn,
be able; — a, to taste of.
sacar, to take out.
VOCABULARY
265
sacerdote, m., priest.
sacrificio, w., sacrifice.
sacudir, to shake off.
sala,/, room.
salida, /, going out, departure ;
— del sol, sunrise.
salir, come out, go out, issue, leave.
salud, /, health ; bien de — , in
good health.
saludar, to salute.
sanar, to cure, heal.
santo, -a, holy, saint.
saque, /r^j. sbj. jd sing, of sacar,
sastre, ;;?., tailor.
se, himself, herself, itself, one's self,
yourself, themselves, yourselves ;
(=le, les), to him, to her, to it,
to them, to you.
secante, drying, blotting,
sed,/, thirst ; tener — , to be thirsty.
seda,/, silk.
seguir, to follow, succeed.
segun, prep., according to ; cottj.,
according as, as.
segundo, m., second.
seguridad,/, security, safety,
seguro, -a, secure, sure, firm,
seis, six.
seiscientos, -as, six hundred.
semana, /, week ; la — que viene,
next week.
semejante, such a.
semejanza,/, resemblance.
senador, m., senator.
sencillo, -a, simple, unmixed, un-
qualified.
sentar, to set, seat; to fit, suit; rejl,,
to sit down, be seated.
sentimiento, m., feeling, grief, sor-
row.
sentir, to feel, regret ; reJl., be sorry,
feel.
Senor, w., Lord.
senor, w., sir, gentleman, Mr.
senora, /, madam, lady, wife, Mrs.
senorita,/, young lady, miss.
se(p)tiembre, m., September.
s6(p)timo, -a, seventh.
ser, to be.
servidor, -ora, w. and f., servant.
servir, to serve ; servirse de, to
make use of; sirvase Vd., please,
be kind enough.
sesenta, sixty.
setecientos, -as, seven hundred.
setenta, seventy.
severo, -a, strict, severe.
Sevilla,/, Seville.
sexto, -a, sixth.
si, if; whether {in indirect ques-
tio7t)\ indeed {in exclamations).
si, yes.
si, himself, herself, itself, yourself,
one's self, themselves, yourselves.
siempre, always, ever, still.
siete, seven.
siglo, m.y century.
significar, to signify, mean.
siguiente, following.
silencio, w., silence.
Silvestre, m., Silvester.
silla,/, chair, saddle.
sin, without.
singular, ;«., singular.
sino, but ; no . . . — , only.
sistema, w., system.
266
SPANISH GRAMMAR
sobre, above ; — todo, above all,
especially.
sobre, m., envelope.
sobresaliente, excellent, surpassing.
SObrinitO, -a (/r. sobrino)^ m, and
f., little nephew, niece.
sobrino, -a, m, and f.^ nephew, niece.
sol, m., sun.
soldado, w., soldier.
soldadote (/r. soldado)^ m., big,
rough soldier.
solo, -a, alone, solitary.
s61o, adv., only, merely,
sombrero, w., hat.
son, see ser.
sonreirse, to smile.
sopa,/^, soup.
sordo, -a, deaf.
sorprender, to surprise.
sortija,/, ring.
Sr., Sor.=:senor.
Sra., Sora. = seiiora.
Srta. = senorita.
su, his, her, its, their, your, one's ;
— . . . de Vd., your.
suavidad, /, suavity, gentleness;
//., soft words or acts.
subir, to go up, take up.
su(b)scribir, to subscribe ; refl., to
sign one's self.
subjuntivo, w., subjunctive.
subrayar, to underscore, underline.
suceder, to happen, follow (in order).
sueno, w., sleep ; tener — , to be
sleepy.
sufrir, to suffer.
suplicar, to beg, entreat,
suponer, to suppose.
suyo, -a, your, yours ; el (la, lo, los,
las) suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as), yours;
los suyos, his men.
tabaco, w., tobacco.
tal, such, such a ; un — , a certain ;
con — que, provided that ; —
vez, perhaps ; que — , how.
talentazd, m, (/r. talento)^ great
talent.
talento, w., talent.
tambien, also, too.
tampoco, as little, neither, nor . . .
either ; ni . . . — , not . . . either,
nor . . . either.
tan, so, as; idiomatic in exclamations.
tantico, -a (/r. tanto); un — , a
little bit, somewhat.
tanto, -a, as much, so much; tantos,
-as, as many, so many ; — ...
como, as (so) much ... as ; por
lo — , therefore.
tanto, adv.^ so much, so.
tardar, to delay; no tardara en
venir, it will not be long before
he comes.
tarde,/, evening, afternoon.
tarde, late.
tarea, /, task.
tarjeta, /, card; — de visita,
visiting card.
te, ;?/., tea.
te, you, thee.
teatro, w., theatre,
tejado, m., roof.
tela,/, cloth, fabric.
tema, w., theme, exercise.
temer, to fear,
VOCABULARY
267
templar, to temper, soften.
temprano, early.
tener, to have, hold ; — que, to
have to.
teoria, /, theory.
tercer(o), -a, third.
tercio, -a, third.
terminar, to finish, end.
terquedad, /, stubbornness, obsti-
nacy.
tertuliano, -a, m. and f., guest, per-
son present at a party.
ti, you, thee.
tia,/, aunt.
tiempo, w., time, weather ; i cuanto
— hace ? how long is it ?
tienda, /, shop, store.
tienen, pi-es. iiidic. jd pi. of tener.
tierra, /, earth, land.
tinta, /, ink.
tio, -a, m. and f.^ uncle, aunt.
tirano, w., tyrant.
tocar, to touch, play {a musical
instru7nent) ; knock {j)n a door^ ;
be one's turn.
todavia, still, yet.
todito, -a (/;-. todo) ; toditos los
dias, almost every day.
todo, -a, all, every ; w., all, every-
thing ; — el dia, all day ; todas
las noches, every night.
tomar, to take.
tonelada,/, ton.
tonto, -a, 7n. ajid /, fool ; hacerse
el — , to play the fool.
torno, w., turn ; en — de, around.
toro, m., bull ; corrida de toros,
bull-fight.
tortuoso, -a, crooked.
torre, /, tower.
trabajar, to work.
trabajo, m., work.
traer, to bring.
traidor, -ora, w. and f., traitor ;
adj.^ treacherous.
traje, w., suit, costume.
trajeron, prel. indie, jd pi. of
traer.
tranvia, w., tramway, street car.
tratar, to treat, have dealings (with),
trece, thirteen.
treinta, thirty.
tren, ;;/., train,
tres, three.
trescientos, -as, three hundred.
tribu,/, tribe.
triste, sad, gloomy, dismal.
tronar, to thunder ; por lo que
pudiere tronar, for a rainy day,
against contingencies.
tropa, /, troop.
tii, thou, you.
tu, thy, your.
turista, m. and f, tourist.
tuyo, -a, thine, yours ; el tuyo, etc.,
thine, yours.
u, or.
ultimo, -a, last.
uniforme, w., uniform.
uniformemente, uniformly.
universidad, /, university.
uno, -a, one ; unos, -as, some, any,
about ; a la una, at one o'clock,
usted (//. ustedes)^ you.
util, useful.
268
SPANISH GRAMMAR
V. (=usted), you; VV., //. ( =
ustedes), you.
vaca,/, cow. [better.
valer, to be worth; mas vale, it is
valor, m.^ valor, courage ; con — ,
courageously. [ceited.
vanaglorioso, -a, boastful, con-
vanidad,/, vanity.
vara,/, yard.
variar, to vary, change. [several.
vario, -a, various, different ; //.,
var6n, ?/?., male.
Vd. (= usted), you; Vds. ( =
ustedes), you.
vecino, -a, m. andf., neighbor.
veinte, twenty.
vela,/., candle. \^ painter).
Velazquez, Velazquez {Spanish
velocidad,/, speed.
veneer, to conquer, win.
vencido, -a, conqueror.
vender, to sell.
veneno, m.y poison, venom,
venerable, venerable.
venir, to come, happen.
ventana,/, window.
Venzan, pres. sbj, jd pi. of veneer.
ver, to see. [it so?
verdad, /, truth ; ^ no es — ? isn't
verdadero, -a, true, real.
verde, green,
verter, to pour forth, shed.
vestido, m., garment, clothes, suit.
vestir, to dress, clothe; rejl., to
dress (one's self).
vez, /, time ; otra — , again ; una
— , once ; dos veces, twice ; en
— de, instead of.
viajar, to travel.
viaje, w., journey, travel.
vicioso, -a, vicious.
vida,/, life, living.
viejo, -a, old.
viento, m.^ wind.
viernes, m., Friday,
vino, m.y wine.
visita,/, visit.
visitar, to visit.
vista,/, sight, view.
visto, -B.,p.p. of ver, to see.
viudo, -a, m. and f, widower, widow.
vivir, to live.
volar, to fly.
volumen, m., volume.
voluntad,/, will.
volver, to turn, return, come back ;
— a, again ; refl.., to turn around..
VOS, you.
vosotros, -as, you, ye.
VOy, ist pers. sing. pres. indie, of ir,
to go.
vuelta, /, turn, return; a — de
correo, by return mail ; estar de
— , to be back, have returned,
vuestro, -a, your, yours.
y, and.
ya, already, now ; — no, no longer,
no more.
yerro, pres. indie, ist sing, of e^^rar.
yo, I.
yugo, w., yoke.
zapato, w., shoe.
Zurbaran, Zurbaran (^Spanish
painter).
VOCABULARY
ENGLISH-SPANISH
Note. — Not all the words used in the Exercises will be found in the English-
Spanish part of the General Vocabulary. If an English-Spanish exercise involves
the use of Spanish words already employed in the preceding Spanish- English
exercise of the same lesson, as occurs especially in the second half of the
Grammar, those words are often not included in the English-Spanish part of
the Vocabulary. In such cases the student needs no help, provided he trans-
late properly the Spanish-English sentences of the particular lesson.
a, an, un, una.
about, (= approximately') cerca de,
aproximadamente, ( = of) de, ( ==
with regard to) respecto de.
absent, ausente.
accompany, acompanar.
according to, segdn.
acknowledge, reconocer; — the re-
ceipt (of), acusar recibo (de).
act, hecho, 7n.
admire, admirar.
advise, aconsejar (a).
affectionate, carinoso, -a; very
(most) — , afectisimo, -a, afmo, -a.
afoot, a pie.
afraid: be — (of),tener miedo (de).
aAtQXf prep., despues de; cofzj., des-
pues que.
again, otra vez, de nuevo, volver a.
age, edad, // Middle — s, Edad
Media.
ago: a long time — , hace mucho
tiempo, mucho tiempo ha.
agreeable, agradable.
agree (to), convenir (en), (^ = get
along together) entenderse.
Alfred, Alfredo, w.
all, todo, -a; — day, todo el dia.
almost, casi.
aloud, alto, en voz alta.
Alphonsus, Alfonso, m,
already, ya.
also, tambien.
although, aunque.
always, siempre.
a. m., de la manana.
America, America,/
American, Americano, -a, m, andf, ;
Norte-Americano, -a, w. and f,
American, adj., americano, -a, norte-
americano, -a.
and, y, e {bef. i- or hi-),
angry, enojado, -a, irritado, -a, en-
fadado, -a; be — , enojarse, irri-
tarse, enfadarse,
animal, animal, m»
269
2/0
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Anna, Ana,/
another, otro, -a; one — , los unos
(a) los otros.
answer, responder, (Jo a letter) con-
testar.
Anthony, Antonio, m,
any (one), alguno, -a; not any
(one), no . . . ninguno, -a, no
. . . alguno, -a (<2/?. noun) ;
not ... in any way, no . . .
en nada.
anything, algo, alguna cosa; not — ,
no . . . nada.
appear, aparecer, ( — seem) parecer.
apple, manzana, f.; — tree, man-
zano, m.; — orchard, manza-
nar, m.
approach, acercarse a.
April, abril, m.
argue, argiiir.
arise, levantarse.
arithmetic, aritmetica, /
arm, brazo, m,
army, ejercito, m,
arrive (at, in), llegar (a).
as, como ; as ... as, tan . . .
como; — soon — , luego que, tan
pronto como.
ascertain, averiguar.
Asia, Asia,/
ask, (^ = question) preguntar; (== beg,
request) pedir, rogar; — of,
pedir a; — for, pedir.
at, a, (= in) en.
attack, acometer.
August, agosto, m.
aunt, tia,/
Australia, Australia, /
autumn, otono, m,
avoid, evitar.
awake, despertarse, {lit, * to arouse
one's self^),
back, {of person) espalda, // {of
animal) lomo, m, ; {of chair)
respaldo, m.
bad, nialo, -a; — cold, fuerte res-
friado; it's tOO — ! es lastima !
badly, mal.
ball, pelota, // play — , jugar a la
pelota.
barber, barbero, m.
bark, ladrar.
be, ( per7nanently or inherently) ser ;
{temporarily ; position) estar;
— cold, tener fri'o {cf a person, or
animal) ; estar frio {of 'an inani-
mate object) ; hacer frio {of the
weather).
beard, barba,/
beautiful, bello, -a, (= handsome)
hermoso, -a.
because, porque.
bed, cama, / / go to — , acostarse.
beer, cerveza,/
before, {position) ante, delantede;
{time) antes de; (= formerly,
beforehand) antes; conj, antes
que.
beg, mendigar; {— request) pedir,
rogar.
behavior, conducta,/
believe, creer.
beloved, amado, -a; querido, -a.
best, mejor.
better, mejor.
VOCABULARY
271
between, entre.
bible, biblia,/
bicycle, bicicleta, /
bill, (= account) cuenta, // ( =
poster) cartel, ni.; (= bird^s — )
pico, m.; { = bank-note) billete,
m.
bird, pajaro, m.; 2iWQ,f.
birthday, dia de cumpleafios, cum-
pleanos, m.
black, negro, -a.
blind, ciego, -a.
blotting-paper, papel secante, m.
blow, soplar; the wind — s, hace
(hay) viento.
blue, azul.
book, libro, m,
borrow, pedir (tomar) prestado, -a.
boy, muchacho, w. / (= young boy)
nino, m.
brandy, aguardiente, 771. ; conac, m.
bread, pan, m.
bride, novia, /
bring, traer; — down, bajar.
broken, roto, -a.
brother, hermano, ?;/. / — in-law,
cufiado, 171,
brush, cepillo, ?n. ; vb., acepillar.
build, construir.
building, edificio, ;;/.
burn, quemar ; i7itr., arder; —7 up
{or down), quemarse.
burnish, brunir.
busy, ocupado, -a.
but, pero, mas, sino {aft. nega-
tive) .
butter, mantequilla, f,
buy, comprar.
by, {with passive verbs) por, de;
(= near) junto a, cerca de, al la-
do de; — day, de dia; — my
watch, en mi reloj.
call, llamar.
can, poder ; {= know how) saber.
candle, vela.,/
cap, gorra, /
captain, capitan, 7n,
care, cuidado, ;??.
carriage, coche, ;«. ; carruage, 771.
carry off, llevar, llevarse.
case, caso, 771. ; in — , en caso que.
Catalan, Catalan, -ana, w. and f.
Catalonia, Cataluna,/
catch, coger ; ( = take) tomar, ( = tie^
fasten) amarrar ; — cold, coger
un resfriado (resfrio), tomar ca-
tarro, resfriarse.
cause, causa,// motivo, 771,
cent, centavo, 771.
centime, centimo, ;;/.
certain, a certain, cierto, -a.
chair, silla, /
change, cambiar.
Charles, Carlos, ;;/.
child, nifio, -a, 7n. a7id f ; children,
ninos, 771. pi. ; {= sons a7td daugh-
ters) hijOS, 771. pi.
chin, barba,/
city, ciudad,/
clean, limpiar.
clock, reloj {de pared, de 77iesa) ; at
six o^clock, a las seis ; what
o'clock is it? iqu^ bora es?
clothes, ropa,/
Co. {co>7tpa72y),C\di.
2/2
SPANISH GRAMMAR
coalition, coalicion,/
coat, levita, // {=.boys — ) cha-
queta, / / ( = " sack " — ) " saco,"
m. \ ( = evening or " dress " — )
frac, w. / {of uniform') casaca,/
coffee, cafe, m.
cold, noun, frio, 7?t. ; ( = illness)
resfriado, m., resfrio, w., catarro,
m. ; catch — , coger un resfriado
(resfrio), resfriarse.
cold, adj., frio, -a ; be — , see be.
collar, cuello, m.
collection, coleccion, /
color, color, m.
comb, peine, m. ; vb., peinar.
come, venir ; — out, salir.
comfortable, comodo, -a.
command, mandar.
company, compania,/,- Co., Cia.
conquer, veneer.
consequently, por consiguiente.
content, contented, contento, -a,
satisfecho, -a.
contentedly, tranquilamente, con-
tentamente.
continent, continente, m,
continue, continuar.
copy, copia, f ; {of a work) ejem-
plar, m.
cordially, cordialmente.
correct, corregir.
correctly, correctamente.
costly, costoso, -a.
country, pais, m, ; { — native land)
patria, f ; {as distinguished from
the city) campo, m. ; — house,
casa de campo.
cousin, primo, -a, w. and f.
COW, vaca, /
crack, parti r.
cravat, corbata,/
cry, gritar, dar voces; {—weep)
llorar.
Cuba, Cuba,/
Cuban, Cubano, -a, m. and f
Cuban, adj., cubano, -a.
cuff, puno, m.
cup, taza,// { = wine cup) copa,/
cure, sanar.
cut, cortar.
daily, diariamente, todos los dias,
cada dia.
danger, peligro, m.
date, fecha,/ / vb., fechar.
daughter, hija,/
day, dia, m, ; good — , buenos
dias.
deal ; a great — of, mucho, -a.
dear, {^beloved) querido, -a, caro,
-a ; ( = expensive) caro, -a, cos-
toso, -a ; — Sir, muy Sefior mio ;
— Madam, muy Sefiora mia.
dearly, { — expensively) caramente,
costosamente ; ( = affectionately)
tiernamente, carinosamente.
death, muerte,/
December, diciembre, m,
decide, resolver (a.)
deed, hecho, m.
defend, defender.
desire, desear.
destroy, destruir.
die, morir.
difficult, dificil.
discharge, despedir.
VOCABULARY
273
distinguish, distinguir.
do, hacer.
dog, perro, m.
dollar, {in Spain) duro, m. ; (in
America) peso, m.
door, puerta,/
doubt, duda,// vb., dudar.
dozen, docena,/
draft, giro, m.
draw, sacar.
drawing, dibujo, m.
dress, vestir ; intr., vestirse.
drink, beber.
drop, ( = let go of) soltar, ( = let fall)
dejar caer.
dry, secar, ( = wipe) enjugar.
each, cada ; — other, el uno (al)
otro.
ear, oreja, f ; (= inner ear, or hear-
ing) oido, m.
early, temprano.
earn, ganar.
easy, facil.
eat, comer.
^%%,i buevo, 7n,
eight, ocho.
eighteen, diez y ocho.
eighth, octavo, -a.
eighty, ochenta.
elevated, elevado, -a.
else, something — , otra cosa.
embrace, abrazar.
employ, emplear.
employee, empleado, -a, m. and f
end, extremidad, f ; extremo, in.
enemy, enemigo, -a, in. and f
England, Inglaterra, /
English, Ingles, -esa, m, and f;
adj., ingles, -esa.
enough, bastante, suficiente.
enter, entrar (en).
envelope, sobre, m.
err, errar.
Europe, Europa, /
even, adv., aun ; — if, aunque.
evening, tarde,/; good — , buenas
noches.
ever, ( = always) siempre ; {in a
question) jamas, alguna vez ; not
— , no . . . nunca,no . . . jamas.
every (one), todo, -a; cada
(uno, -a); — body, todos {pi.),
todo el mundo, m. ; — night,
todas las noches ; — time, cada
vez.
exercise, ejercicio, w.
expensive, costoso, -a, caro, -a.
eye, ojo, ?n.
face, cara, /
faithful, fiel.
fall, caer ; — down, caerse.
false, falso, -a.
family, familia, /
far, lejos ; as — as, hasta.
fast, {=firm) firme, seguro, -a;
( = swift) veloz, ligero, -a ; be —
{as a watch), adelantar, estar
adelantado.
fast, adv., {= firmly) fuertemente,
firmemente ; ( = rapidly) aprisa,
de prisa.
fatal, fatal.
father, padre, m., papa, m.
fault, culpa,/.
274
SPANISH GRAMMAR
favor, favor, ;;/.
fear, temer.
February, febrero, m.
feel, sentir ; i7itr., sentirse.
feeling, sentimiento, m.
few, a few, pocos, -as ; unos (-as)
cuantos (-as).
fifteen, quince.
fifth, quinto, -a.
fifty, cincuenta.
find, hallar, ( = meei) encontrar.
fine, bueno, -a.
finger, dedo, in. ; — nail, una (de
dedo),/
fire, {in the abstract) fuego, m,;
(^ burning wood or coal)
lumbre, /, candela {e.g. in
Cuba),/.; {= conflagration) in-
cendio, ;//.
firm, casa,y^, {z^Jirm name) firma,y.
first, primer (o) -a ; {in compound
ordinals) primo, -a.
fist, puno, m.
fit, sentar, caer, estar.
five, cinco ; — hundred, quinientos,
-as.
floor, suelo, w., ( = story) piso, m.
flower, flor,/
fog, neblina, f. ; niebla, f.
foggy; it is — , hay neblina.
food, aliment o, m,
foolish, bobo, -a.
foot, pie, m.
for, { — for the sake of, in ex-
change for) por; (= destination)
para.
forbid, prohibir.
forehead, frente,/
forest, monte, m. ; bosque, m.
fork, tenedor, 7n.
forty, cuarenta.
four, cuatro.
fourteen, catorce.
fourth, cuarto, -a.
fragrant, oloroso, -a, fragante.
Frances, Francisca,/
French, frances, -esa.
Frenchman, Frances, m. ; French-
woman, Francesa,/
Friday, viernes, ?n.
friend, amigo, -a, m. and f.
frighten, espantar, asustar ; be
frightened, asustarse.
from, de, desde ; — ... to, de . . .
a, desde . . . hasta.
furniture, muebles, m. pi.
garlic, a jo, m,
gentleman, sefior, m. ; caballero, m,
geography, geografia,/
George, Jorge, m.
German, Aleman, -ana, 7n. and f;
adj., aleman, -ana.
get, (= obtain) conseguir, obtener;
{ — go after) ir a buscar; go and
— , ir a buscar; (= become)
ponerse.
gift, regalo, w.
girl, muchacha, f ; nina, f.
give, dar.
glad, alegre, contento, -a; I am —
(to), me alegro de, me da gusto
(placer) de, tengo mucho gusto
(placer) en.
glass, vaso, m.
glove, guante, m.
VOCABULARY
275
go, ir; — out, salir; — up, subir;
— into, entrar (en) ; (^of a watch)
andar.
god, dios, m.
gold, oro, m.
good, bueno, -a; be — for nothing,
no vaier nada, no servir para nada.
good-bye, adios; — for a while,
hasta luego : — until we see each
other again, hasta la vista.
goodness, bondad,// (lo) bueno, «.
grammar, gramatica,/
granddaughter, nieta,/
grandfather, abuelo, m.
grandparents, abuelos, w., pL
grandson, nieto, m.
grant, otorgar, conceder.
great, gran(de) ; a — deal, mucho,
-a.
Greek, griego, -a.
guide, guia; vb.^ guiar.
hair, cabello, ;;/., pelo, in. ; — of the
head, cabellos, m. pi.
half, mitad, // adj,, medio, -a;
a — i or — a, medio, -a.
hand, mano, f, ; come to — , venir
a (mis) manos.
handkerchief, paiiuelo, w.
handsome, hermoso, -a.
happen, acontecer, suceder.
happily, felizmente.
happy, feliz.
hard, duro, -a; (= difficult) dificil;
adv., diligentemente, mucho.
harm, mal, ;;/./ (= damage) dano,
m.
hat, sombrero, m.
hate, odiar, aborrecer.
have, aux. vb.y haber; (— possess,
hold) tener ; — tO, tener que,
haber de.
he, el ; — who, el que, quien.
head, cabeza, /
health, salud, / ; be in good (bet-
ter)— , estar bien (mejor) de salud.
healthful, saludable.
healthy, sano, -a.
heaven, cielo, w.
help, ayudar.
Henry, Enrique, w.
here, aqui, aca.
heroic, heroico, -a.
high, alto, -a, elevado, -a.
him, el, le, lo.
himself, se.
his, su, sus ; el (la, lo, los, las)
suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as) ; el (la, lo,
los, las) . . . de el.
historian, historiador, m.
holy, santo, -a.
home, {= to one's — ) a casa ; at — ,
en casa.
hope, esperar.
horse, caballo, ni.
horseback; on — , a caballo.
hot, caliente.
hour, hora, /.
house, casa, f.
how, como; interrog.y como ; —
much (many), cuanto, -a (-os,
^-as).
hundred, one — , cien(to).
hunger, hambre, /
hungry, hambriento, -a ; be — ,
tener hambre.
276
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hurry, prisa, /. ; be in a — , tener
prisa.
if, si.
ill, enfermo, -a, malo, -a.
illness, enfermedad,/
in, en; (= within) dentro de ;
{after a coniparative) de.
independent, independiente.
Indian, indio, -a.
indispensable, indispensable.
influence, influencia, /
ink, tinta,/
instant, instante, m.; ( = present
month) del corriente, del presente.
instead of, en lugar (vez) de.
intend, pensar, tener la intencion de.
interesting, interesante.
iron, hierro, m.
is, see ser, tO be, or estar, tO be.
island, isla, /
it, el, ella, ello, lo.
Italian, italiano, -a.
January, enero, m,
John, Juan, m.
judge, juez, m.
July, Julio, m,
June, junio, m,
just, adv.y justamente,exactamente;
to have — , acabar de.
keep, guardar.
kind, clase,/., especie,// adj., bon-
dadoso, -a ; apreciable or atenta
(carta); be — enough, tener la
bondad (de), servirse.
kindness, bondad, /.
kiss, besar.
kitchen, cocina,/
knife, cuchillo, w./ (= claspknife),
navaja,yi/ { = penknife) cortaplu-
mas, m.
know, {= be acquainted with) cono-
cer, {= be aware of knozv how, be
able) saber ; I — , conozco or se ;
let them — , conozcan or sepan.
lady, sefiora,/
lamp, lampara,yi
language, lengua, f, idioma, m.;
(= style of language) lenguaje, m,
large, gran(de).
last, durar.
last, tiltimo, -a, postrer(o), -a; —
week, la semana pasada.
late, tarde.
Latin, latin,;??, {the language)-, latino,
-a, adj,
laugh, reir; — at, reirse (^e.
laundress, lavandera, /
lawyer, abogado, m,
lazy, perezoso, -a, haragan, -ana.
leap year, ano bisiesto, ;;^.
learn, aprender (a).
least, menos ; at — , a (por) lo menos.
leave, dejar, abandonar; (= depart)
partir, { = go out) salir.
leg, pierna,/
lend, prestar.
less, menos.
lesson, leccion, /
let, {= leave) dejar; { = permit)
permitir; (= rent) alquilar, arren-
dar ; {sometimes que with the pres.
subj, of the tnain verb).
VOCABULARY
277
letter, carta,/
library, biblioteca, /
lie, mentir.
lie (down), acostarse.
life, vida, /
light, alumbrar, iluminar; (= kin-
dle) encender.
lighten, relampaguear.
like, querer (a), gustar (de) ; I — ,
me gusta {lit., it pleases me).
lily, lirio, m.
line, linea, /
listen, escuchar.
little, poco, -a; (= small) pequeno,
-a, chico, -a.
live, vivir.
living, vida,/.
London, Londres, m.
long, largo, -a; a — time, mucho
tiempo; {see tardar)\ as — as,
mientras, mientras que.
look (at), mirar; — for, buscar;
{— appeaj') parecer; — like,
parecerse a.
lose, perder.
lot, porcion,/; a — of, mucho, -a,
gran numero; a — of tears, un
raudal de lagrimas.
Louise, Luisa,/
love, amar, querer (a).
low, bajo, -a.
madam, sefiora,/
make, hacer; (= eani) ganar.
man, hombre, m.; his men,los suyos.
many, muchos, -as.
marble, marmol, ?n. ; {in game of)
bola,/; bolita,/
March, marzo, m.
march, marchar.
Mary, Maria,/
match, fosforo, 7n.; vb,y caer bien
con.
mathematics, matematicas,///.
matter, vb.j importar.
may, poder, tener permiso (de).
May, mayo, m.
me, to — , me.
mean, {= to inte^td) pensar; {—to
sig7iify) significar or querer decir.
meat, came,/
medicine, {— science of) medicina,
f,;{z=L drug) medicamento, m.
meet, encontrar.
melancholy, melancolfa, /
mend, remendar, componer, reparar.
merchant, comerciante, 771.
metal, metal, m.
Mexican, Mejicano, -a, w. and f. ;
adj., mejicano, -a.
Mexico, Mejico, w.
middle, medio^ -a.
milk, leche,/
million, millon, 7n.
mine, mio, -a, -os, -as; el (la, lo,
los, las), mio (-a, -o, -os, -as).
minute, minuto, ni.
miser, avariento, -a, 7n. and f
Miss, (la) senorita; {bef. give7i
7iames), dona.
mistake, error, w., falta,/
moment, momento, ;;/.
Monday, lunes, 7n.
money, dinero, ni.
month, mes, 7n.
more, mas.
278
SPANISH GRAMMAR
moreover, ademas.
morning, manana, // tomorrow
— , manana por la manana.
most, mas ; ( = very) muy.
mother, madre,/
mouth, boca,/
Mr., (el) senor, m. ; {bef. given
names') don.
Mrs., (la) senora; {bef. given names)
dona.
much, mucho, -a; very — , muchi-
simo -a; SO (as) — as, tanto, -a,
como.
mud, lodo, m. ; {— mh-e^ slime)
fan go, m.
mule, mulo, -a, m. and f. (the fern.
form is generally used),
music, mdsica,/.
must, tener que, haber de ; ( = moral
obligation) debar.
mustache(s), bigotes, m, pL
my, mi, mis ; mio (-a, -os, -as) .
nail, clavo, w. / finger — , una (de
dedo),/
name, nombre, m,.; (= surname)
apellido, m. ; my — is, me llamo.
napkin, servilleta, /
native, natural, m, and f
near, cerca de, junto a.
nearly, casi.
necessary, necesario, -a; be — , ser
necesario, preeiso, menester.
neck, cuello, w., pescuezo, m,
necktie, corbata,/
need, necesidad,/!
need, necesitar.
negro, negro, -a, m, and f
neighbor, vecino, -a, m. and f.
never, nunca, jamas.
new, nuevo, -a
news, noticia,/, noticias, / //.
next, proximo, -a, siguiente; —
month, el proximo mes, el mes
que viene (entra); the — page,
la pagina siguiente.
niece, sobrina,/!
night, noche,/ / last — , anoche.
nine, nueve.
nineteen, diez y nueve.
ninety, noventa.
ninth, noveno, -a; {in co7npound
ordinals) nono, -a.
no, no.
no, no one, none, ningun(o), -a.
nobody, nadie.
nor, ni.
north, norte, m. ; adj., norte.
North-American, Norte-Amerigano,
-a, m, a7id f; adj., norte-ameri-
cano, -a.
nose, nariz,yC
not, no; — ... either, ni . . . tam-
poco.
note, notar; be noted, notarse.
nothing, nada.
November, noviembre, m»
now, ahora.
nut, nuez,/
oblige, obligar.
observe {= to keep) guardar.
o'clock; at six — , a las seis.
October, octubre, w.
of, de; {with pensar) en; {with
verb of separation) a.
VOCABULARY
279
offer, ofrir.
often, muchas veces, a menudo.
old, viejo, -a, anciano, -a; (— an-
cient) antiguo, -a; older (^of per-
sons), mayor; be ten years — ,
tener diez anos,
on, en; (= on top of) sobre, encima
de; — time, a tiempo.
once, una vez; at — , en seguida.
one, un(o), -a; — or another, uno
(-a) d otro (-a), alguno (-a) que
otro (-a) ; that one, aquel, etc.
only, solo, solamente, no . . . mas
que, no . . . sino.
Open, abrir.
or, 6, d {bef. 0- or ho-) ; not ... — ,
no . . . ni.
orange, naranja, /
order, (= command) orden, f,;
( = orderliness) orden, 771. ; in —
to, para; in — that, para que.
original, original.
other, another, otro, -a; (= the
rest) demas.
ought, deber.
our, nuestro, -a.
ours, nuestro (-a, -os, -as); el (la,
los, las, lo), nuestro (-a, -os, -as,
-o).
out, fuera; (= outside) afuera; go
— , salir.
outdoors, afuera.
over, (= upon) sobre; (= above),
encima de; {—to the other side
of) al otro lado de ; — there, por
alli.
overcoat, sobretodo, ;;?., abrigo, m, ;
(= cloak) capote, w.
own, propio, -a, mismo, -a.
owner, duefio, -a, m, and f
package, paquete, m,
page, pagina,/
pale, palido, -a.
paper, papel, m,; {— newspaper)
periodico, 771.
pardon, perdon, 771. ; vb., perdonar.
parents, padres, m, pi.
Paris, Paris,
parrot, loro, w.,'cotorra {species of
S77iall )if'
part, parte,/.
pass, pasar.
past (lo) pasado, n.
past, adj., pasado, -a; at half —
one o'clock, a la una y media,
pastry, pasteles, fu. pL
Paul, Pablo, w.
pay, pagar.
peace, paz,/
peach, melocoton, 771., durazno, t7i.
{= a co77i77ion variety of S77iall
peach).
pen, pluma,/
pencil, lapiz, 7n.
penknife, cortaplumas, m.
people, pueblo, 7n. ; (= persons)
gente, /.
pepper, pimienta,/
perhaps, tal vez, quizas.
permit, permitir.
person, persona,/
personage, personaje, m,
Peter, Pedro, ;«.
Philippines, Filipinas, / //./ in
the — , en Filipinas.
28o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
philosophy, filosoffa,/
physician, medico, m,
piano, piano, m,
picture, cuadro, ;;/. / (= portrait)
retrato, m. ; (= engraving) gra-
bado, w., lamina, yC
piece, pedazo, m. ; {of music, etc.)
pieza, // ( — of furniture) mue-
ble, m,
pity, piedad, /, misericordia, /,
lastima, / / it is a — , es las-
tima.
plan, plan, m,
plate, plato, m,
play, jugar, {on a musical instru-
7nent) tocar.
please, gustar, agradar ; (= be
kind enough), ; hagame Vd. el
favor (de), tenga Vd. la bondad
(de)!
pleasure, gusto, 7n., placer, m,
p. m., {till dark) de la tarde ; {aft.
dark) de la noche.
pocket, bolsillo, m., faltriquera, f
poem, poesia,/
porter, portero, w.
possess, poseer.
possible, posible.
post-office, correo, w., casa (admi-
nistracion) de correos,y!
potato, patata, f, {in most parts of
Spanish America) papa,y^
pour, echar.
praise, alabar.
pray, rezar.
prefer, preferir.
present, regalo, m., presente, m,;
vb,y presentar.
prettily, lindamente, bonitamente.
pretty, bonito, -a, lindo, -a.
print, imprimir.
probably, probablemente.
promise, prometer.
prove, probar.
publish, publicar; be publishf^d,
publicarse, salir a luz.
punish, castigar.
pupil, discipulo, -a., m, and f
pure, puro, -a.
purse, bolsa, /, bolsillo, m,
put, poner; — out {a fire or li^
apagar.
quarter, cuarto, m., at a — pa^t
one o'clock, a la una y cuarto.
rain. Hover.
raise, levantar.
rare, raro, -a.
rarely, raramente.
reach, alcanzar ; {—touch) tocar;
{—extend) tender, extender; ( =
arrive at) llegar a.
read, leer.
ready, listo, -a.
reason, razon,/
recall, recordar.
receipt, recibo, m,
receive, recibir,
red, rojo, -a ; (= bright red) encar-
nado, -a ; ( = dark red, " brick-
color ") Colorado, -a.
regards, recuerdos, w. //.
regret, sentir.
regular, regular ; he is a — fool, es
un bobo.
VOCABULARY
281
relate, relaciDnarse con ; all relating
to, cuanto se relaciona con.
remain, queaar, quedarse, restar.
remember, acordarse (de),recordar.
respect, estimacion,/
rest, descansar.
re' urn, volver, regresar.
: uk, rico, -a.
•/^ft.e, rifle, m. ; fusil, m.
■ Ij^ht, justo, -a; (^as compared to left)
ierecho, -a ; be — , tener razon.
' *J, sortija,/ / anillo, m,
hse, levantarse ; {of sun, moon, etc)
salir.
acggue, picaro, -a, m, and f ; pillo,
-a, m. and f
roof, tejado, m.
room, cuarto, m, ; bed — , alcoba,
/ / bath — , cuarto de bafio, m. ;
class — , aula, f, sala de clase,
f ; dining — , comedor, m, ;
state — , camarote, m. / ( = space)
lugar, w., espacio, m,
run, correr.
Russian, Ruso, -a, m and f,
sacrifice, sacrificio, m.
sad, triste.
saint, san(to), -a, w. and f; — 's
day, dia del santo, m,; di'as, m.
pi.
sale, venta ; for — , de venta.
salt, sal,/
Saturday, sabado, m,
save, salvar.
say, decir ; they will say, diran.
scholar, {= pupil) discipulo, -a, m.
and f.
school, escuela,/
second, segundo, -a.
second, segundo, m,
see, ver.
seek, buscar.
seem, parecer, figurarse.
self, mismo, -a.
sell, vender.
send, enviar, mandar ; — for, man-
dar a buscar.
September, se(p)tiembre, m.
serious, serio, -a ; {— dangerous)
grave, peligroso, -a.
servant, criado, -a, m, and f
serve (as), servir (de).
set, sentar; {of the sun, moon, etc)
ponerse; ( — the table, etc) poner.
seven, siete.
seventeen, diez y siete.
seventh, se(p)timo, -a.
seventy, setenta.
several, varios, -as.
severe, severo, -a.
Seville, Sevilla,/.
shave, afeitar, rasurar; intr., afei-
tarse, rasurarse.
shed, verter.
shine, lucir, brillar; the sun — s,
hace (hay) sol.
shirt, camisa,/
shoe, zapato, m,
short, corto, -a; a — while (time)
ago, poco tiempo ha.
should, ( = ought to) deber.
show, ensenar, mostrar.
shut, cerrar.
side, lado, m,
silver, plata,/
282
SPANISH GRAMMAR
since, desde ; conj.^ desde que.
sincere, sincere, -a.
sincerely, sinceramente.
sir, senor, m. ; caballero, m,
sister, hermana,/!
sit (down), sentarse.
six, seis.
sixteen, diez y seis.
sixth, sexto, -a.
sixty, sesenta.
skilful, experto, -a, habil.
slate, pizarra,/
sleep, sueiio, m, ; vb., dormir ; go
to — , fall a — , dormirse.
sleepy : be — , tener sueiio.
slow, lento, -a, detenido, -a, atra-
sado, -a ; be — (^as a waUhy traiii,
etc.'), atrasar, estar atrasado, -a.
slowly, despacio.
small, pequefio, -a, chico, -a.
smell, oler ; — of, oler a ; it smells,
etc., huele, etc.
smoke, humear, echar humo ; — to-
bacco, fumar tabaco.
snow, nieve,/
so, tan ; — much (many), tanto, -a,
tantos, -as; — ... as, tan . . .
como ; he said — , lo dijo.
soap, jabon, m.
soiled, sucio, -a.
soldier, soldado, 7n.
some, alguno, -a ; //., algunos, -as,
unos, -as, unos (-as) cuantos (-as).
somebody, some one, alguien, al-
guno, -a.
something, algo, alguna cosa ; —
else, otra cosa.
son, hijo, m.
soon, pronto, presto, temprano ; as
— as, luego que, tan pronto como.
Sophia, Sofia,/
sorry, afligido, -a, triste ; be — , sen-
tir(lo).
soul, alma,/
soup, sopa,/
Spain, Espaiia,/
Spaniard, Espanol, -ola, m. and f.
Spanish, espanol, -ola ; {=the
Spanish language) el castellano,
el espanol, m.
speak, hablar.
spend, gastar.
splendid, magnifico, -a, esplendido,
-a.
split, partir.
spoon, cuchara, / / tea — , cucha-
rita,/
spring, ( = season) primavera, /
squirrel, ardilla, /
station {of railway), estacion, /,
paradero, m.
statue, estatua,/
stay, quedar, quedarse ; — in bed,
guardar cama.
steal, robar.
still, todavia, aun {or adn).
story, cuento, m., relacion,/
stove, ( = cooking — ) fogon, m. ;
( = heating — ) estufa, /
strange, extrafio, -a, particular.
stranger, extranjero, -a, m. and f. ;
'{ = unknown) desconocido, -a,
m. and f.
street, calle,/
strong, fuerte.
study, estudio, m. ; vb., estudiar.
VOCABULARY
283
such, such a, tal.
suffer, sufrir.
summer, verano, m,
sun, sol, m.
Sunday, domingo, m,
supper, cena,// have — , cenar.
support, mantener.
sweet, dulce ; sweets, dulces,
m. pi.
system, sistema, m,
table, mesa, /
tablecloth, mantel, m,
tailor, sastre, m.
take, tomar, (= carry) llevar.
talk, hablar.
tall, alto, -a.
taste, gusto, 711. ; vb.f gustar ; intr.,
saber a.
tea, te, m. ; — spoon, cucharita, f.
teach, enseiiar.
teacher, maestro, -a, m. and f.
tear, lagrima, /
tell, decir, contar.
ten, diez.
tenderly, tiernamente.
tenth, decimo, -a.
Tetuan, Tetuan.
than, que, de {bef. numerals)^ del
que, de la que, etc. {bef. dependent
clauses) .
thank, dar (las) gracias (a), agra-
decer ; I — you ! ; gracias !
that {rel.), que.
that {de7?t.), ese, -a, -o ; aquel,
aquella, aquello.
that (^conj.), que; (^— in order
that) para que.
that one, aquel, aquella.
the, el, la, los, las, lo.
their, su, sus ; el (la, los, las) . . .
de ellos (ellas).
them, los, les, las ; ellos, ellas.
theme, tema, 711.
then, entonces.
there, alli, alia ; (near person ad-
dressed) ahi ; over — , por alli ;
— is (are), hay.
therefore, por consiguiente, por
esto (eso).
they, ellos, ellas.
thief, ladron, -ona, m. and f,
thing, cosa, /.
think, pensar ; — of, pensar en ;
— about, pensar de ; ( = believe) ,
creer, opinar.
third, tercer(o), -a ; {in compound
ordinals) tercio, -a.
thirst, sed, /
thirsty : be — , tener sed.
thirteen, trece.
thirty, treinta.
this, {dem.) este, -a, -os, -as, -o ;
— one, {prn.) este, esta, etc.
those who, los que, etc.
thousand, one — , mil.
three, tres.
throat, garganta, /
through, por ; — ticket, billete
(boleto) directo, ;«.
throw, echar, arrojar ; ( — a ball^
stone, etc.) tirar ; — away, botar,
arrojar.
Thursday, jueves, in.
ticket, billete, 7?i. ; boleto, ;«.
{A7nerican)»
284
SPANISH GRAMMAR
time, tiempo, ;;?., hora, / / what
— is it ? i que hora es ? the
first — , la primera vez ; on — , a
tiempo.
tired, cansado, -a.
to, a, hasta ; ( = in order to) para.
tobacco, tabaco, m.
today, hoy.
tomorrow, mafiana ; day after — ,
pasado maiiana ; — morning,
manana por la mafiana.
too, tambien ; — much, demasiado,
-a ; it's — bad ! ; es lastima !
toothache: he has a — , le duelen
los dientes {lit. ' the teeth ache to
him').
toward(s),hacia.
towel, toalla,/
town, pueblo, m, ; ciudad, f,
train, tren, m,
traitor, traidor, -ora, m, and f,
travel, viajar.
travelling-bag, maleta, /
tree, arbol, 171,
tremble (with), temblar (de).
Trinity, Trinidad,/
trousers, pantalones, in. pi.
true, verdadero, -a; { — faithful)
fiel ; it is true, es verdad (cierto).
trunk, bad], m.
truth, verdad, /
try, ( = test) probar ; ( = tempi)
tentar; { — endeavor) tratar (de),
procurar, esforzarse (a).
Tuesday, martes, m.
turn, (= — around) volverse ;
(= become) ponerse, hacerse.
twelve, doce.
twenty, veinte.
twice, dos veces.
two, dos; — hundred, doscientos, -as.
typewriter, maquina de escribir,/
ugly, feo, -a.
umbrella, paraguas, m,
uncle, tio, m.; uncle(s) and
aunt(s), tios, m. pi.
underscore, subrayar.
understand, entender.
unfortunate, desdichado, -a, des-
graciado, -a.
unhappy, infeliz.
United States, Estados Unidos, m.pL
unless, a menos que.
until, hasta; conj.^ hasta que.
us, nos, nosotros, -as, to — , nos.
use, usar, emplear, servirse de; he
used to do so, solia hacerlo, lo
hacia.
useful, dtil.
usually, por lo comdn, por lo gen-
eral, comdnmente.
various, vario, -a.
vary, variar.
very, muy, mucho.
vest, waistcoat, chaleco, m.
village, aldea,/, pueblecito, w.
visit, visitar; noun, visita,/
volume, tomo, m., volumen, m.
waistcoat, chaleco, m.
wait (for), esperar, aguardar.
wall, muro, m.; (= inner — of
house) pared,// {of fortification^
muralla, /
VOCABULARY
285
want, {= lack) carecer de ; ( =
wish) querer, desear.
war, guerra,/
warm, caluroso, -a, calido, -a; lam
— , tengo calor; it is — , hace
calor; — water, agua caliente.
wash, lavar.
wash-basin, jofaina,/, palangana,/
watch, reloj. w.
water, agua,/
way, camino, m., direccion, f.;
(= manner) manera, /, modo,
m, ; not ... in any — , no ... en
nada.
we, nosotros, -as.
wealthy, rico, -a, opulento, -a.
weapon, arma,/
weather, tiempo, w. / be good — ,
hacer buen tiempo.
Wednesday, miercoles, m.
week, semana, / / in a — , en ocho
di'as; in two — S, en quince dias.
weep, llorar.
well, bueno, -a, bien de salud; adv.,
bien.
wet, mojado, -a.
what, prn, rel., lo que; — is mine,
lo mio : interrog.j que, ( = which)
cual.
when, cuando; i^iterrog.y cuando.
whenever, cuando, cuandoquiera
'que, siempre que.
where, donde; i7tterrog.^ donde;
(== whither) a donde; ( =
wherein) en donde.
whether, si; {aft, dudar, etc.) que.
which, que, el (la) cual, el (la)
que; interrog., cual.
while, (= tiine) tiempo; conj.,
mientras, mientras que.
white, bianco, -a.
who, que, el (la) cual, el (la) que,
quien; inter rog., quien.
whom, r<?/., que, quien, el que, etc.,
el cual, etc.
whom, interrog., quien.
whose, cuyo, -a; interrog., de quien,
cdyo, -a.
wicked, malo, -a.
wickedness, iniquidad, /, (lo)
malo, n.
wide, ancho, -a.
wife, mujer, /, seiiora,/, esposa, /
wild, silvestre.
will, (= be willing) querer:
otherwise '' iviW denotes future
time.
willing, dispuesto, -a, inclinado, -a ;
be — , querer.
wind, viento, ;;/.
window, vent ana,/
windy: it is — , hace (hay)
viento.
wine, vino, in.
winter, invierno, m.
wish, querer, desear.
with, con.
without, sin.
woman, mujer, /; young — , jo-
ven, /
wood, lena, /
word, palabra,/
work, trabajo, m. ; {= literary or
artistic production) obra,// vb.^
trabajar.
workshop, taller, w.
286
SPANISH GRAMMAR
world, mundo, m,
worry, molestar ; (^— be zvorried)
tener cuidado, atormentarse.
worth : be — , valer.
write, escribir.
wrong : be — , no tenet razon.
year, aiio, m. ; leap — , aflo bisiesto.
yellow, amarillo, -a.
yes, SI.
yesterday, ayer.
yet, todavia, aun {or adn),
young, joven.
your, tu, vuestro, -a, su, el (la, los,
las) . . . de Vd.
yours, tuyo, -a, vuestro, -a, suyo, -a,
el (la, los, las) de Vd., el tuyo, etc.,
el vuestro, etc., el suyo, etc.
INDEX
a: bef. direct obj., 50; with names of coun-
tries, 55 (5); al {d ia, etc.)=Eng. * a,'
57, c; bef. infins., 120; with verbs meaning
* take from,' etc., 49, a, 182; idioms, 123,
206.
Abstract Nouns: used with def. art., 55
(i); plur. of, 81 (3).
acabar (de), 184.
accentuation, 15; of diphthongs and triph-
thongs, 16; of monosyllables, 17; of
compound words, 18; of -z'ar and -uar
verbs, 218-219.
Accnsative Case: see Direct Object and
Personal d.
acordarse, 109, 6.
acostarse, 109, d.
Adjectiyes: fem., 33; neuter gender, 54;
plur., 34; use of plur., 81; position, 60,
61; position of pred. adj., 195 (2); of su-
perlative, 7i, £", agreement, 62 ; compari-
son, 74, 75; t/ian, 78; repetition, 61, d;
62, d; used substantively, 80; of nation-
ality, 33, a, 55 (4) ; adj. for adv., 62, e; dif-
ferent meaning with ser and estar, 46, c.
Adverbs: position, 196; comparison, 76,
77; lo used, 54, «, 76, a; aqui, acd, ahi^
alii, alld^ 176; mticho^ 177; comparison
oimuchOyTj', muyyiTj', yUyij^; -ntentei
179; tatiy 79, 143, a', idioms, 184.
Agreement: of subj. and verb, 193; of
adj., 62.
ahi, alii, alia: see Adverbs.
al = ^ el, 30, a,
alegrarse, 109, 3.
alguien, algo, alguno: see Indefinite Ad-
jective Pronouns.
alguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
•■all,' 157, a.
^ 9\jxi0%ty'* Poco /alto para qtie, 184.
Alphabetical List of Verbs, 271.
ambos: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
andar: inflection, 240; meaning, 198; in
periphrastic progressive tenses, 121, a.
Anomalous Past Participles, 259-261.
'any,' 151.
Apocopation of Adjectives, 66-69.
Apposition: noun in, 55 (2), b\ art. omit-
ted, 56 (i), 57, a ; art. aft. noun, 74, g,
aquel : see Demonstratives.
aqui, aca: see Adverbs.
Articles: see Indefinite Article and Defi-
nite Article.
' ask of ': verbs denoting, 49, a, 182.
atreverse, 109, b,
Augmentatiyes: see Qualifying Suffixes.
-azo, -acho, -ajo, -ada: see Qualifying
Suffixes.
' be ' = ser or esiar, 46.
bien: comparison, 77; mds bieUy 77, a.
bonito: position, 61, a.
bueno: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\
comparison, 75 (i); buenos dias, etc., 59.
' but,' 190.
cada: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
caer: inflection, 253; idioms, 199.
' can ' : see poder and saber.
Capitalization, 23.
-car verbs : orthographic variations of, 214,
214 (i).
Cardinals : see Numerals.
caro: position and meaning, 61, c%
casa : idioms, 48, a, 206.
Cases: see Possessive Case, Indirect Ob-
ject, and Personal d.
castellano, 55 (4), and footnote.
-cer and -cir verbs : orthographic variations
of, 215, 220.
ciento: see Numerals.
cierto: indef. art. omitted, 57,3; position
and meaning, 61, c*
287
288
SPANISH GRAMMAR
CollectiTes : see Numerals.
color: adj. of, 54.
como: tan . . . como, 79; used with saber y
186, footnote.
Comparison: see Adjectives and Adverbs,
and * Than.'
Compound words: accent of, 18.
con: conniigo, etc., 98, a^ and footnote.
Conditional Sentences: see Sentences.
Conjunctions, 188-192; j)/,^', 188; o^u, 189;
pero, jnas, sinOy 190; cuajido^ 191 ; donde,
192 ; porque, 192. See also qiccy como, etc.
COnocer : inflection, 220; meaning, 54, a,
footnote, 186.
Consonants, 5 ; labials and labio-dentals, 6 ;
dentals or lingua-dentals, 7 ; gutturals and
palatals, 8; sibilants, 9; aspirates, 10;
tongue-trilled, 11; spirant jj/, 12; double,
14.
cosa: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
countries, cities, etc.: names of, 55 (5).
cual, el cual, cual: see Relatives and In-
terrogatives.
cuando: see Conjunctions.
cuanto : as relative, 138; cuanto . . . tanto
= * the . . . the,' 74, d.
d: lost in imperatives, 86, a,
dar: inflection, 241 ; idioms, 187.
Dative Case: see Indirect Object; ethical
dative, in.
de: denotes possession, 48, 125; with names
of countries, 55 (5); aft. superlatives =
*in,'74, ^; = * than,' 78, «-, c; bef. infins.,
120; = * by,* 180, a, footnote; denotes
material, etc., 181 ; idioms, 206.
deber =* should,' 71, b\ with dependent
infin., 120, Yj;.
Defective Verbs, 262-270.
Definite Article: forms, 30, 54; el for la,
30, b\ use, 54, 55; used in place of pos-
sessive, 119; with superlatives, 74, b,f,g\
with poss. pron., 124; with rel. pron., 135,
137, b; with prepositional phrases and
relative clauses, 125, 131; with infin.,
120 (3), 55 (7) ; omission, 56; omitted bef.
poss. pron., 125, b\ lo, 54; lo, with super-
lative adv., 76, a ; = Eng. * a,' ' an,' 57, c.
del= de ely 30, a.
Demonstratives:
Adjectives, 128; meaning, 44, 129; posi-
tion, 128, a\ repetition, 44, a.
Pronouns, 130; 'the former,' 'the latter,'
130, a', 'that,' 130, b; aquel bef. phrase
and clause, 131, a; en {de, a) esta {esa),
130, c.
dia, 24 (2), a.
diferente: position and meaning, 61, c.
Diminutives: see Qualifying Suffixes.
Diphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation
of, 16.
Direct Object (of verbs): with a, 50; posi-
tion of, 195.
' do ' : aux. * do ' not translated into Spanish,
32.
don, dona: use, 55 (2), footnote; art. not
used, 55 (2), a.
donde: see Conjunctions; = relative, 140.
dormirse, 109, c.
dos: los dos, 159.
e: see Conjunctions.
el, ella, ello, etc.: see Personal Pro-
nouns.
el: see Definite Article,
Elision of Vowels, 3.
en: with adjectives of nationality, 55 (4);
with names of countries, 55 (5) ; idioms,
206.
estar: inflection, 238; meaning, 46; to
express position, 46, a; in periphrastic
progressive tenses, 121, a; estar para
iPor), 184; idioms, 199.
este, ese: see Demonstratives.
-ete, -ejo: see Qualifying Suffixes.
'for,' 180.
' former ' (' the former,' * the latter '),
130, a.
Fractionals: see Ordinals,
Future Indicative: see Tenses.
Future Subjunctive: see Hypothetical Sub-
junctive.
-gar verbs: orthographic variations of,
214 (2).
Gender: of nouns, 24, 25; of adj., 33; of
adj. modifying several nouns, 62; neuter
genderof adj., 54; of def. art., 54; of poss.
pron., 124, b; of demon, pron., 130; of
relatives, 135, c.
Genitive Case: see Possessive Case.
-ger and -gir verbs '-. orthographic variations
of, 215.
JNDEX
289
grande: apocopation, 67; position and
meaning, 61, <r, 67, b; comparison, 75 (2).
-guar verbs: orthographic variations of, 214.
-guir verbs: orthographic variations of, 215.
haber: inflection, 237; meaning and use,
38; hay, 38, «, 65 (2); ha in temporal
clauses, 38, <^, 73, a; hi^ 92, footnote,
237, a\ idioms, 38, <2, 40, 65, 199.
hacer: inflection, 246; to express state of
weather, 65; time, 72, 73, a\ idioms, 175;
hacersCy 109, b.
' have ' = tener or haber, 38.
hay: see haber,
hermoso, 61, a.
Hypothetical Subjunctives: see Tenses.
i changed to y in verbs, 216; omitted, 217.
-iar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219.
Imperative Mood: see Moods.
Imperfect Tenses: see Tenses.
Inceptive Verbs, 220.
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns: alguien,
algo, X50; alguno^ 151; apocopation of,
66; unosy 152; nadie^ nada^ 153; nin-
gunOf 154; apocopation of, 66; tnucho,
15s; comparison of, 75 (3); muchisimOy
i55» ^"-'^ pocOy 156; comparison of, 75 (3) ;
todo, 157; mismOy 158; in refl. construc-
tions, 109, a; atnboSy 159; cada^ 160;
<7/r<?, 161 ; uno y otroy ^\.Q,.y\(ii\ elunOyel
otro in reciprocal constructions, no; taly
163; cosay 164; lay laSy in, b.
Indefinite Article: forms, 26; repetition,
26, a; un for tinay 26, b', omitted, 57;
in expressions of measure, 57, c.
Indicative Mood: see Moods.
Indirect Object, 49; with verbs meaning to
* take from,' * ask of,' etc., 49, rt, 182; ethi-
cal dative, in.
Infinitive Mood: see Moods.
Interrogative Sentences, 51.
Inter rogatives, 142-147; quiy 143; quien,
144; qtiien in optative expressions, 107;
cudly 145; cuyOy 146; cudntoy 147; que
cosay 164, footnote.
ir: inflection, 247; meaning, 198; in periphras-
tic progress, tenses, 121, a', irsey 109, c\
* go and ' = ir a, 148, a ; idioms, 149, 206.
Irregular Verbs, 236-258.
-isimo, 74, h,
* it,' 91.
-ito, -illo, -ico, -in, -ino: see Qualifying
Suffixes.
jamas, 165.
* know ' = conocer or saber y 54, «, footnote.
la, las: with force of indef. pron., in, b.
* last ' = ultimo y postrerOy or pasadoy 66,
footnote.
' latter ' (* the former,' * the latter '), 130, «,
' let ' and inf. = Span, subj., 87.
levantarse, 109, b,
lindo, 61, a.
lo (neuter art.), 54; with superlative adv.,
76, a', idioms, 54, a,
mal : comparison, 77.
malo: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\
comparison, 75 (i).
mano, 24 (2), a.
mapa, 24 (2), a.
mas: see Conjunctions.
mas: comparative of /<?c^, 75 (3), 77: used
to form comparatives, 74-77; mas bieuy
77, a ; no mds . . . que, 78, b, 190, a ; in
exclamations, 143, a; idioms, 167.
mayor, 75 (2) ; la mayor parte de= ' most,*
170, a.
medio and mitad, 170, b.
mejor, 75 (1), 77.
menor, 75 (2).
menos, 75, (3), 77; idioms, 167.
-mente : see Adverbs.
mientras . . . = * the . . . the,' 74, d.
mil: see Numerals.
mismo : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns ;
idioms, 184.
Moods:
Infin.: * to,' bef. infin., 120; with def.
art., 120 (3); aft. prepositions, 120 (2);
after expressions of * willing,' * fearing,'
etc., 96, footnotes; after ^ir and very 187,
footnote; idioms, 123 (2).
Participles: use of pres. part., 121; of
past part., 122.
Imperative, 86, 87, a.
Subjunctive: difference between ind.
and subjunc. moods, 94; subjunc. to ex-
press command, 87 ; in dependent clauses,
94> 95) 96, 100; pres. subjunc. to denote fut.
290
SPANISH GRAMMAR
time, 96, a ; imp. subjunc. in -ra — pret. or
pluperf. ind., 99, footnote; choice between
imp. subj. in -se and -ra^ 99; imp. and
hyp. subjunc. built on pret. 3d pers. stem,
99, Uy 112 (3); hyp. subjunc, 114; condi-
tion " contrary to fact," 106; subjunc. in
indirect discourse, 116; idioms, 97, 107.
morirse, 109, c.
'most,' 74, h', 75 (3), a,
mucho: pron., see Indicative Adjective
Pronouns; adv-^ 177; comparison, 75
(3% IT' =' very,' 177, a.
Multiplicatives: see Numerals.
muy : see Adverbs; = ' most,' 74, h.
nadie, nada, ninguno: see Indefinite
Adjective Pronouns.
Negation: neg. sentence, 31 ; neg. prons.
and advs., 165.
Neuter Gender; see A?, 54.
' never,' 165, footnote.
ni . . . ni, 165.
ninguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
no: see Negation; no mds . . . que, 78, b\
que ?to, 184.
nosotros, nos: see Personal Pronouns.
Nouns: gender, 24, 25; plur., 29; use of
plur., 81 ; plur. of abstract nouns, 81 (3) ;
sing, noun to denote something that be-
longs to every member of group, 81 (2) ;
poss. case, 48, 125, a; dative case, 49,
182; accusative case, 50; position of subj.
and obj. noun, 194, 195; in predicate,
46, b', in apposition, 55 (2), h\ requiring
def. art., 55 (i); used as adj., 61, e, 181.
nuevo: 61, c.
Number: of noun, 29; of adj., 34; of adj.
modifying several nouns, 62.
Numerals:
Cardinals, 168; apocopation of uno^
66; oi ctento,6g', used instead of ordinals,
169, c, d, e.
Ordinals, 169; apocopation of /r/w^?'^
and tercero^ 66.
Fractionals, 170.
Collectives, 171.
Multiplicatives, 172.
Phrases, 173.
Def. art. omitted, 56 (2); denoting
hours, 72; denoting days, 72, 169, e; after
comparatives, 78, a,
nunca, 165.
6: see Conjunctions.
oir: inflection, 254; followed by dependent
infin., 187, footnote; idioms, 187.
ojala, 107.
olvidarse, 109, b.
-on, -ote: see Qualifying Suffixes.
'only': 78, b.
Ordinals : see Numerals.
Orthographic Variations, 213-219.
Orthography: non-phonetic, 13.
Otro : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
para, 180, 181; = * to,' 120, 3, 180, b\ with
names of countries, 55 (5) ; idioms, 184.
parte : in fractional expressions, 170, a*
Participles, 39, 121, 122; anomalous past
participles, 259-261.
pasado, 66, footnote.
peor, 75 (i), 77.^
pequeno: position, 61, a', comparison,
75 (2).
Perfect Tenses : see Tenses.
Periphrastic Progressive Tenses: see
Tenses.
pero : see Conjunctions.
Personal a, 50; omitted, 50, a,b\ to dis-
tinguish object from subject, 50, c.
Personal Pronouns: as subj. and obj. of
verb, 89; tu and usted, 90; ello and lo,
91 ; se and si, 108, 109 ; subj. pron. omitted,
89, a; position of obj. pron., 89, 3, c, d, e; .
of two obj. prons., 102, 103^ of refl. se,
108, a; se for le, les, 102, a\ la, las for
le, les, fem., 89, h; le and lo as masc.
obj. pron., 89//; refl. prons. of ist and
2d pers., 109; prepositional forms, 98;
poss. case, 125; explicit obj. of verb, 103;
conntigo, etc., 98, a, and footnote.
Pluperfect Tense : see Tenses.
Plural: of nouns, 29; of adjs., 34; use
of, 81.
pobre, 61, c.
poco: pron., see Indefinite Adjective Pro-
nouns; adv., comparison, 75 (3), 77.
poder: inflection, 243; idioms, 167.
poner: inflection, 249; ponerse, 109, b;
idioms, 199.
por, 180; = Eng. 'a' or *per,' 57, ^r; bef.
el cual {que), 135 (2) ; idioms, 97, 184.
porque: see Conjunctions.
Position: of nouns, 194, 195; of adjs., 60,
61; of advs., 196.
INDEX
291
Possessiyes :
Adjectives, 117; position, 118; def. art.
forposs ,119; repetition, 44, «; idioms, 123.
Pronouns, 124, 125; explicit forms, 125.
Possessive Case, 48, 125, a\ elliptical for
' at (to, from) the house, etc., of,' 48, a,
postrero, 66.
Prefixes in Syllabification, 21.
Prepositions: see a, de, en, para^ por,
etc. ; preposition retained bef substantive
clause, 183; idioms, 184.
Present Tense; see Tenses.
Preterite Perfect: see Tenses.
Preterite Tense: see Tenses.
primero: see Numerals.
Pronouns : see Personal Pronouns, Posses-
sives, etc.
Pronunciation, i ; table of English equiv-
alents for vowel and consonant sounds, 2,
Punctuation, 22.
Qualifying suffixes, 200-205; diminutives,
201; their meaning, 202; augmentatives,
203 ; combinations of diminutive and aug-
mentative endings, 204; -azo and -ada to
denote result of action, 205.
Quantity of vowels, 3.
que and que: see Relatives and Interroga-
tives.
que {coHj.) : rarely omitted, 96, 3 ; = ' than,'
78; que for c^iando, 191, a; idioms, 97.
querer : inflection, 242; = * will,' 71, a;
with dependent infin,, 120, a\ idioms, 107,
167.
quien and quien : see Relatives and Inter-
rogatives.
-quir verbs: orthographic variations of, 215.
Radical-changing Verbs, 221-234.
Reciprocal Construction, no.
Reflexive Construction, 108 in.
Regular Verbs, 210-219.
reir: inflection, 233; reirse, 109, b.
Relatives, 133-140; que, 134; el cnal, el
qtie^i^S'' ^z^zV;^, 137; cua7ito,\i^\ cuyo,
139; donde, 140; relative not omitted,
133, b', del que, etc., after comparatives,
78, c\ followed by subjunc. mood, 96 (6) ;
cada cual, 160.
s: lost in imperatives, 87, b,
saber: inflection, 245 ; meaning, 54, a, foot-
note, 186; idioms, 187.
salir: inflection, 252; idioms, 199.
santo, 68.
seandsi: see Personal Pronouns.
' self,' 158; in refl. constructions, 109, a,
sentarse, 109, b.
Sentences: negative, 31; interrogative, 51;
conditions "contrary to fact," 106; com-
mon forms, 115; when the verb of the
apodosis is subjunc, 116.
senor, seiTora, and senorita, prefixed to
title, 55 i2).
Sequence of Tenses: see Tenses.
ser: inflection, 236; meaning, 46; with
predicate nouns, 46, b\ periphrastic pro-
gressive tenses, 121, a\ idioms, 47, 199.
* should ' = cond. ind. or deber, 71, b.
si: followed by cond. ind., = ' whether,'
106, b,
si C yes '), que si, 184.
sin : followed by el cual {que)y 135 (2).
sino: see Conjunctions.
'some,' 151, 152.
Subject (of verb): position, 51, 194.
Subjunctive mood: see Moods.
Syllabification, 19-21.
' take from,' verbs of, 49, a, 182.
tal: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
tampoco, 165.
tan: tan . . . covto, 79; in exclamations,
143, a.
tanto: tanio . . . como, 79; cuanto . . .
tanto = ' the . . . the,' 74, d.
tener: inflection, 239; meaning and use,
38 ; d omitted after it, 50, a ; with nouns
denoting bodily characteristics, 55 (6);
idioms, 40, 199.
Tenses:
Imperf. and pret. ind., use of, 53; perf.
ind. for pret., 53, b.
Fut. and cond. ind., formation of, 71,
footnote; use of, 71; fut. and cond. of
probability, 84; cond. ind. with sz, 106, b;
Span, pres., imp. and fut. ind.= Eng. perf.,
pluperf., and fut. perf., 73.
Pluperf. and pret. perf., 64.
Pres. subj. to express fut. time, 96, a,
Imperf. and hyp. subj., on pret., 3d
pers., stem, 99, a, 112 (3) ; choice bet.
forms in -se and -ra, 99; imp. in -ra —
pluperf. or pret. ind., 99, footnote.
Hyp. subj., use of, 114.
292
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Perf. tenses, 211.
Periphrastic progress, tenses, 212, 121, <?.
Sequence of, loi, 116.
In conditions, 106, 115, 116.
tercero : see Numerals,
•than,' 78.
' the . . . the ' {correlative) , 74, d.
'there,' expletive, 176, c.
Time: expressions of, — with art., 55 (3);
hours, days, etc., 72, 169, e; with haber
and hacer^ 73, a', with fut. and cond. of
probability, 84; ' for,' 180, c\ idioms, 184,
206.
Titles: def. art. bef. title, 55 (2).
' to ' bef. infin., 120; —por ox para , 180, b,
todo: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
Triphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation of,
16.
tii : see Personal Pronouns.
u: see Conjunctions.
-uar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219.
-uelo, -ucho : see Qualifying Suffixes.
-uir verbs, 235.
ultimo, 66, footnote.
un, una: 26; see Indefinite Article.
uno: see Numerals.
unos, uno y otro : see Indefinite Adjective
Pronouns.
' used to ' : expressed by imperf. ind., 53, a.
usted : see Personal Pronouns.
Taler: inflection, 251; idioms, 199.
vario, 61, c.
venir: inflection, 248; in periphrastic pro-
gressive tenses, 121, a\ * come and' =
venir a, 148, a\ idioms, 149,
ver: inflection, 258; followed by dependent
infin., 187, footnote.
Verbs, 207-271.
Principal parts, 209.
Regular verbs, inflection, 210; perf.
ten.ses, 211 ; periphrastic progress, tenses,
212; orthographic variations, 213-219.
Inceptive verbs, 220.
Radical-changing verbs, 221-234.
ist class, 223-228.
2d class, 229.
3d class, 230-234.
-uir verbs, 235.
Irregular verbs, 236-258.
Anomalous past participles, 259-261.
Defective verbs, 262-270.
Alphabetical list, 271.
Refl. construction, 108, 109, iii.
Recip. construction, no.
Followed by infin. with or without a or
de^ 120.
Position of subj., 194; ofobj., 195 (i);
of pred. adj., 195 (2); of adv., 196.
Agreement with subj., 193.
' very,' 177, a.
viejo, 61, a.
Voices : refl. for passive voice, 109, d^ e,
volver (A), 184.
VOSOtros : see Personal Pronouns.
Vowels: pronunciation of, 3; elision of, 3;
quantity of, 3.
weather: idioms, 65.
'will': as independent verb or auxiliary,
71, a.
Word Order, 194.
'would': expressed by imperf. indie,
53, a.
Y : see Conjunctions.
ya: see Adverbs.
yo : see Personal Pronouns.
'you,' 90.
-zar verbs, orthographic variations of, 214.
LB S 20
.-^
i!i
SIsis
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11